Professional Documents
Culture Documents
AT THE
UNIVERSITY OF
TORONTO PRESS
MANUSCRIPT REMAINS OF
BUDDHIST LITERATURE
FOUND
IN
EASTERN TURKESTAN
FACSIMILES
WITH TRANSCRIPTS TRANSLATIONS AND NOTES
EDITED IN CONJUNCTION WITH OTHER SCHOLARS
,
A>
F.
C.I.E.
BY
RUDOLF HOERNLE
M.A..OXON. PH.D. TUBINGEN
VOLUME
PABTS
AND
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1916
BL
SSI
a o
l\l
=951
HUMPHREY MILFORD
PRINTED IN ENGLAND
AT THE OXFORD UNIVERSITY
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
BARNETT, Lionel D., M.A., Litt.D. (Cambridge), Keeper of Department
of Oriental Printed Books and
Manuscripts, British Museum,
Professor of Sanskrit at
University College,
fx>ndou:
Tibetan
Document.
Inetitut, Professeur
au
Chinese Fragment.
KONOW,
LE>I,
Kuchean Fragments.
in the
University of Berlin,
Academy
Member
Sanskrit
Fragments.
THOMAS,
London
Sanskrit Fragments.
a3
CONTENTS
PART
I
PAOl
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
LIST OF
i*
METHOD OF TRANSCRIPTION
ABBREVIATIONS
xvi
SANSKRIT TEXTS
196
II
KHOTANESE TEXTS
214
330
KUCHEAN TEXTS
357
.377
.387
...
400
405
ADDENDA
410
ERRATA
412
VI
PART
SANSJCflJT
TEXTS
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
BY
A. F.
RUDOLF HOERNLE
first volume of this Series was to have been issued some years
Changes in the staff of Contributors, and other caus-ja over which
the Editor had no control have occasioned the delay. On the other hand,
the delay has enabled him to offer now what is practically a double
THE
ago.
volume.
Konow and
Ldvi,
texts, or fragments of texts, which are written in what till quite recently
were known only as the unknown languages of Eastern Turkestan.
prevailed, in
Tokharl
by Dr.
F W.
Northaryan by
unknown lan
succinct account of the discovery and identification of the two
guages is given in Professor Geiger s Inaugural Lecture (1912) as Prorector of the University
of Erlangen on Die archaeologischen und literarischen Funde in Chinesisch Turkestan und
1
ihre
P>edeutung
fur dieorientalische Wissenschaft, pp. 11, 12. where all needful references
will be found.
a
1907,
1
Le
p.
names are
5).
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Professor E.
Leumann,
and
putable
In the
acceptance.
guggestion,
first
circumstances
seems
it
preferable to adopt a
6
and to denominate
J. Kirste,
them
language in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1914 (pp. 339 ff.).
Professor Kirste had originally suggested the names Turfanisch and
Khotanisch but Turfan appears to be not so much the centre of the
,
as of a subordinate dialect of
territory of the northern language,
Professor Ldvi
uses the
it.
and following
his
It
example, that
is
0.
1912,
29
p.
in Schriften der
Wisseu-
Heft.
alw>
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
old Kuche, as the current language of modern
Kuchar/
xi
For similar
affinity, curiously enough, being rather closer with the European than
the Indo-Iranian group.
In the present volume it is represented by
three detached folios from two manuscripts of the Buddhist Canon of the
Sarvastivadins, which are edited by Professor Sylvain l^evi (pp. 357 ff.).
The territory of Kuchar, 10 as Professor S. Ldvi has shown in (he
the
first
century
White
the
A. D.
It
(Po).
of the eighth century A.D., when both utterly disappeared from history
in the course of the political and racial convulsions caused
by the inroads
have
century.
8
final
The
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xii
library
in the present
JConow
Bidzaya.
official
He
also
documents,
name
of Wei-chih,
or, in its
within
the
Khotan
Tibetan form,
dated
in certain
territory,
in
the
and who reigned in the second half of the eighth century (JRAS., 1915,
p. 487). It is evident that the Khotanese language was still flourishing,
as a spoken language, in the territory of Khotan as late as that century.
There is yet much to be discovered about the structure of this
century.
where
In
its earlier
stage
it is
tions of its
principal canonical texts from the original Sanskrit, or the
Indian vernacular of those days, into the language of the native people
jf Khotan must have fosi- ^ed soon
upon its introduction, and continued
f
tiic?
11
See pp. 220-1 and pp. 396-7 of this volume
chen Sprache and Lite ratur , pp. 57 ff.
,
also Prof.
literature.
Leumann s Zur
nordaris-
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xiii
A somewhat
{he case of
tl e
due to
difference in age,
owing
to the
is
manuscript material.
Either of the two languages, Kuchean and Khotnnese, possessed its
own peculiar style of writing. Both styles, however, were varieties of the
Indian Gupta script. That script with its upright ditctua,a& it prevailed in
In that area, in
of Kuchar, in the northern area of Eastern Turkestan.
the hands probably of the natives of the country, the. upright type of
Indian Gupta developed a more or less slanting ductus, which may be seen
fragments shown in Plates I and III, Plate II, Nos. 1-3, Plate IV,
$o. 2,Plate XI, No. 2, and Plate XIX. This northern, or Kuchean, slanting
13
must hnve originated at a very early period, for
type of Gupta script
in the
some of the fragments exhibiting it, when dug out of the ruins of ancient
atupas, were mixed up with other fragments which exhibit the true
Indian upright Gupta of the fourth or fifth century A.D. 14 The easiest
test to distinguish the slanting from the upright
type is furnished by
the form of the letter y, which in the Indian script is written with three
open prongs (as in yadi, Plate JV, No. 1, line 7), but in the Kuchean
pcript with three closetl slanting prongs (as in yada, Plate IV, No. 2,
linel).
Sitzungsberichte der Kgl. Preuse. Akademje der Wissenschaften, 1908, pp. 916 ff.
See also Prof. Meillet s Le Tokharien in Ipdogermanisches Jahrbuch, 1913, pp. 1-3.
13
It was deciphered by myself in 1893, in my article on the Weber MSS. in the
Journal ASB., vol. Ixii, Pt. I, p. 4, Plate IV, in which it was called by me Central Asian
In my article on the Macartney MSS. Jn the Journal ASB., vol. bcvi, Pt. I, 1897,
Nagarl
it was called by me
Central Asian IjtahmJ . Both name* are rather too vague.
p. 242,
See also Pischel in Sitzungsberichte, 1904, p. 809, footnote 3.
14
e.g. the Weber and Macartney MSS. fragments, recovered from the great stupa
of Qutluq Urda. See my edition of the Bower Manuscript, Introd., pp. xiii if.
"
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xiv
which
is
a large medical
treatise.
But
it
was employed
specially,
and
in that case as it
in
There
Buddha.
is
11
M88.
my
article
on the Godfrey
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xv
present.
possesses
which
also probably in
by
rr.
It
may
II,
No.
4,
fols.
by them to
"
pp. 6
Le Tokharien
i,
1913,
ff.
18
This
is
und Literatur
"
Biihler,
See
my
article in the
p.
11.
4,
5; also
xvi
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
is
used in
languages
it
languages of India.
Kuchean
is
also in
exists
What
scripts, it enjoys
is
the
new
is
a mark of
its
in the
What
Khotanese
21
reappears in the U-chan script of Tibet.
M On
^jjt
o in the
modem
Nagarl
note 26.
See,
practice
e.g., i in
*Aa,
and a inorta,
PI.
PI. V.
56 Ui ,
in PI.
V.
1
2&"
in
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
With regard to the introduction of the alphabet into
Tibet, the
traditional Tibetan account, as
usually understood, says that it was
Thon-mi
imported from Magadha in Eastern India
by
Pig.
Sambhota, during
1.
KHOTANESE SYLLABARY,
ka ka
ocalic!*-
ki
**
** V
a
ki
ku
ku
ke
kai
ko
kau
**-***
I
ai
au
ko
kau
Khotanese
San 8 krit
TIBETAN SYLLABARY,
ka ki
ka
the reign of
ku
ku
ke
kai
century A.D.
Epigraphia Indica,
the alphabet
ki
is
22
<^
mainly
grounds
pp.
ff.,
which
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xviii
to Tibet
was
contact
with
calls
really
his
own
This, in effect,
country.
saved
who
The
new
taken over from the Khotanese alphabet were those denoting the con
sonants k, A7i, g, n
t, tli, d, n
c, ch,j n
p, ph, b,m; w,y,r,l; & 8 li, a.
:
new
The
six
radicals,
of their alphabet. In the first place, the sign for w is classed among those
consonants which are said to have been taken over from the Khotanese
by him.
s article in
the
Memoirs
Asiatic Society of Bengal, vol. i, pp. 43 ff., and his article on The kingdom of
See also the Note on p. xzxi.
btiaupo in JASH. (N.S.), vol. vi, pp. 97-9.
Sec Bock hill s Life of the Buddha, p. 211.
of the
gNya
khri
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
six
2.
kkhg
ts
tsh
da
oh
&
i-
z
among those constructed by
and they are so classified simply because the latter sign (z),
unmodified Khotanese form, occurs also in the Tibetan alphabet
Sambhota
in its
(viz.
new
fact,
is really
new, that
is,
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
XX
of an existing Khotanese
and
(i.
e.
most properly
which
it is
desired to indicate
inherent in
it,
i,
by attaching
diacritical
marks
to
it.
If
x<>,
24
and h, iu Epigraph ia
Dr. Francke s explanation ot the origin of the signs for
Indies, vol. xi, p. 270, is different, and, in my opinion, very fanciful.
16
In confirmation, I may refer to a Tibetan tradition (which however I am just now
in Journal
(or
ASB.,
o
series of
ou.
But the practice
It appears, e.g., in
indeed it dates no further back than the early eighteenth century.
the medical M8S. of the India Office, Nos. 2644 and 2638, dated respectively A.D. 1720
and 1733 ; bat not in No. 2637, which is of about the same date. The practice arose
^fit
GENEKAL INTRODUCTION
xxi
We
Khotan area
Gupta
fails,
reference will be
made
When
such
(2)
myajn^edik(V*X^>^
The Aparirmtayuh Sutra (Ap.),
20
(3)
fols.
work, 65
(4)
ii.
fols.
from the gradual blending of the characters for the vowels a and au, from the tenth
century onwards, aa may be seen by referring to Table V of Bilhler s Indian Balneography,
and comparing Nt s. ix, xii, xvii in traverses 1 and 9. That this is fo is eviilent from
the fact that the v wels
and a have always been, and are to the present day, written
with the
radical H which could not blend with the radical ^f
.
special
tit
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxii
(5)
(Fr.) in the
Frngments
cal literature;
II.
(1)
The two
(2)
The Khotanese
XVII
(Tib., Chin.),
and XXII.
Documents
Pt.
(4)
folios 7
ments
(3)
I,
Text Rolls (T.R.) of the Stein Collection, Ch. 0041, Mahapratin the Journal RAS., 1911,
yan<iira, Dlianmi, partly published
Plate V.
Also, Ch. 0044, Kaus akl Prajiiaparamita, 70 lines of
writing; and Ch. 002GG with 382 lines of writing; neither
published.
Stein MS., Ch.
ii. 003, an
anonymous medical work (Med.), in
not yet published.
(6) Syllabary Rolls (S.R.) of the Stein Collection, published in the
Journal RAS., 1911, Plates I-IV.
(5)
71
fols.
The evidence of
these witnesses
is
as follows
example of short
written
a".
As
(as
an
initial) is
a vowel of rather
With
The
v)
"
It occurs iu the
7&W.
word
i".
t/Au,
In Siddh.
it
which ordinarily
is
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
^
1-
A-
A"
7 V*
xxiii
(Aw) 102
10*"
a"
v, No. VT^
it occurs
Q
No.
fols. 1
|T
140
1.
3,
147 a*
!
No.
A"
4,
V/>
2.
A p. and
The
Fr.
"
1 -
A"
"
A"
11 -
"
A".
"
7 A
122 a 111
A1
155
fols. 1
it
(Aw)*
123 a
tv
A"
In Fr.
9a
A 11
11
11
126
14
"
128
"
fl
9*
"
o 1 A1
"-
<*
18
18
2
No.
1. No -VV.
8 -.
No. ftf 11. 3, 4, No. 1 |
No. V/. n ! 2 No.
No. V/. 1- 4 No. i$t 1.
]
No
1.
-,
6
]-
->,V-.
-|.
The vowels
it
4,
No. ^J,
"
).
1.
Nf>
Yi
A>*
Yg
4
V*
136
1-
A"
37
138
121 a*
A>
144a"-
/""
No. 1,4/,
1-
NO-
>
6,
v.
"
2,
104 a* 107
1
A"
1.
2 5
"
No.
2,
XO
it
No.
No.
(*
M34A"
27 a 32
a"
Vfl*.
(his),
a"
A"-
In Buddh.
15
19
131 a* 133
"
VV.
2 No.
VV
] -
5 No.
I-
2,
4
,
>
radical
v,
l
No. V/, 1- 2, No. V/.
With the
3, No. /B, H- 3, 4.
No. |*|, 1.
1. 4
(see footnote 21).
the special radical TJ, they are still more exceptional, though the excep
tions again are more frequent in canonical literature, especially in Ap.
and Buddh.
The
Neither
nor ai
is
In Ap. e
ever found in Vaj.
In
XIV 1
ai never.
2
1
A"
a";
foK 16 a 128
1
"-
lT
152
!r
(Aw) 155 A
but only once with radical TJ, fol. 11 aT while ai occurs only once, and then
111
with radical V, fol. 100 a ir In Buddh., e occurs six times with radical Tl
1 A
7b* 9 A 18 6 31 A 38 A , and only three times with radical TJ, fole. 6
9
17 a ;
156 a
f>ls.
a"
A"
T[,
fols.
10
tr
35
A1 .
In Fr.,
b2
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxiv
2, peculiar to the
The
radical
PI.
IX 32 a
2a
2. is
PI.
(bit),
XVI
and
13 a 14
16
a"
iv
)
V><>),
ngain an
3 o ui
XIV
five
XV
five
iy
a"
"
# T 30 V 32 a 33
35
12a iT 15rt 26 u 24 a 25
29
lil
rt
36 a u 37
In
4".
6"
all
Fr.,
U with radical
,
38
i"
^JJ is
with either o
2,
with radical
ten times,
fols.
2.
six
28 a u
iy
six times, fols. 7 a
iil
38 b (trit)
times in Vaj., PI.
XVI 13 a In Buddh., also a
9a
XIV
2. is
always
Yr
>
>
>
W>
>
-,
>
YA
*>
>
No. Yi-.
U- 3,
Yr,
4 No.
,
Y/
On
4.
the other
hund, in the non-canonical, medical Siddh., both vowels o and an are always written
with radical ^f, never with the special radical 2
thus o twice, fol. 3 b ili iy and an 21
v
iil
104 6 iv 107 a1 123 a 11 4 U ul
7 i 9 i 10 T 19 a lT 100
times, fols. 2 b 3
-
a"
4"
(/>/*)
128
1
a"
In the Cursive
(2)
151
Gupta
155
a".
script, all
vowels
(a, a,
i,
e, ai, o,
i,
aw),
with the exception of u and u, are invariably written with the radical
^1 a.
The vowels u and u are equally invariably written with the special
radical ^3.
The three special radicals for i, e, o never occur at all. In
so far
the whole extensive mass of
cursively written manuscript remains,
examine it, two of those three special radicals,
namely those for i and o, occur only in the concluding passage of the
Kausakl Prajnaparamita Roll, Ch. 0044 once i in 1. 67, and twice au in
lines 64 and 65.
And with regard to this singular exception it is to be
;
M Sec
fourth or
3 aiil
XX
below, p. xxviii.
fifth
3"),
Kuchean
slanting
Gupta
XI
2 a
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxv
noted that the passage consists of a short charm (mantra} in the Sanskrit,
not in the Khotanese language.
The vowel
The
XVII
/,
2 a 1*
a"
b"
96
iv
97
1
a"
101
102
a"
103 a iv
(bit)
4 HI
104 a
"-
iv
115
A"
twice in
with radical ^, occurs twice in Tib., Plate XVII a
xvii
five times in Doc., JASB., 1897, Plates V, 1. 5, VI,
Chin., Plate
No. 9, 1. 4, No. 10, 11. 6 and 7 Report, Plate VI, 1. 4 and 25 times in Med., foil.
m * 69 a iil 73 fl v 76
iv
v
99 a v
47 a v i 52 a 56 a 57 a 61 V 63 V 67 b
46
(bit)
The vowel
vi
"
/;
il
a"
4"
a"
(bit)
100 a 103
1
i!
jii
104 a
with
The vowel
fols. 46 a
iv
109
radical
<,
11
in Med.,
65 a
vil
I,
XXII
47a<
In Doc.
The vowel
it
at,
50a
i!
Hi
(W).
XVII
iv
</7
a"
/,>
/>
iv
and 16 times
60 i
fil
ii!
62 a-
with radical
TI,
48
and four times in Med., fols. 47
1. 15
^ira Dha., JRAS., 1911, Plato V,
58 m 62 b\ In Tib., Chin., Doc. it docs not occur.
The vowel o, with radical ^!, does not occur in any of the cursively written
b"
b"
XV7a
(see
in
Med.,
fols.
44
(bis)
4"
(3)
As
to the Cursive
Gupta
script,
by me
the schoolmaster.
Now
on Roll Ch.
xl,
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxvi
003,
radicals
and
are prescribed for the whole of the ten vowels of the alphabet.
That
shows that all vowels, except u and u, were to be written with the
The
radical ^,
fH
and
^,
is
Plate III,
two other
1.
Rolls, Cli.
much
1,
fuller detail.
The complete
radicals
is
1.
On
1.
and
other nine vowels, including the short u, are written with the radical ir.
Secondly, tho diacritical mark indicating the sound of short u is not
attached to the bottom of the radical ^, in the form of a wedge, or
a curve, or an angle, as it is usual with other consonantal radicals (e. g.
the wedge in khu and k$u, Plate I, 11. 10 and 42 the curve in ku, ibid.,
;
the angle in kyu, khyu, ibid., 11. 43 and 44), but is mounted on the
in the form of a curve or angle (the former in
the radical
of
top
The reason for this position
Plate I, 1. 1, the latter in Plate IV, 1. 17).
1.
are suggested by the abbreviated form of the alphabet in Roll Ch. xl,
Here the characters are given for only the
002, ibid., Plate II, 1. 42.
three vowels a, u,u\ but while the long u is written with the radical ^5,
the vowels a and short u are written with the radical sjj.
Moreover,
Plate
I,
1.
sound
shows
its
diacritical
mark,
indicative of the
u, in
"
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxvii
The conclusion
evidence
is
scholar
Thon-mi
scribes
is
and further
it
may
facilitated
his object by the removal of the wedge which marks the foot of the
radicals in the Khotanese script, but which is absent from the Tibetan
On
script.
all
of Khotan
religious
by Thon-mi.
or
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxviii
u, e, and o.
Indeed, in the case of the radical z o, the con
of the Knotanese Upright Gupta is particularly
striking ;
for it conserves that radical in a form in which it had
disappeared at
an early date from India itself. Originally the inferior curve of the
radicals of
i,
servatism
may
be seen in Biihler
13. 31
Gupta may
The
mark
diacritical
i,
script.
It
is
shown
"
Weber
difference,
its
it
31
XX
to"
(sec
so that possibly it may really signify au. Whether any, and what, relation between the
scripts is indicated by this graphic coincidence remains to be discovered.
M A mere
scribal
whim seems
28),
two
GENEKAL INTRODUCTION
of that country, primarily in the Khotanese language
xxix
;
for it occurs
is
the occurrence in
it
Sanskrit, to
make an
3").
debased dialect of Sanskrit. Very possibly the text is the scribe s own
Of course, if in
composition, and the manuscript may be his autograph.
addition to a characteristically Khotanese script, a manuscript is written in
the Khotanese language, the presumption of its being the production of a
native of Khotan is overwhelming. Similarly, the appearance of the slant
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxx
it
will
be
Upright
texts,
V-XVII
also in the manuscripts of the Mahapratyangira Dharani and Saddharmapundarika texts, both in the Sanskrit language, in Plate II, No. 4, and
XX
The
may
styles.
XX
3
garlhA, PI.
gamlhira, PI. XXI 3").
Besides the linguistic and graphic conditions prevailing in Eastern
Turkestan at the time when the manuscripts discovered in that country
were written, these manuscripts throw light on the original language of
e.g.,
",
obvious from the fact of other texts found along with them which are
written in Sanskrit.
Tliat by the side of the Pali Canon, existing
among the southern Buddhists of Ceylon, there once existed a corre
sponding Sanskrit Canon among the northern Buddhists was well known
from certain surviving portions, e. g. the Vajracchedika and Suvarnaprabhasa Sutra long published (see pp. 109, 176), though the exact
relation as a whole between the two Canons was a matter of uncertainty
and dispute. 34
It was also well known that the existence of the
See,
e. g., Pi-of.
s Buddhistiache Studien
(1898), pp. 613-94.
Oldenberg
lii
German
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxxi
but most of
it,
indeed the most important parts of it, were believed to have entirely
35
As a result of the modern archaeological explorations,
perished.
fragments of the lost Sanskrit Canon are coming to light. The present
volume contains fragments of not less than twenty-six religious texts
(see pp. xxxiii-xxxiv), of which twenty -one belong to the C^anon of the
Vinaya Pitaka, on Discipline, and the Sutra Pitaka, on Doctrine,
while two others are non-canonical religious poems, and the identity
of three more
is
still
uncertain.
Among them
texts (viz. Nos. 12, 18, 19) which were previously known, 30 all the
others are new discoveries, among which the fragments of the Stotras,
or hymns, of the celebrated ancient poet Matricheta are
interesting.
Among
the
numerous
fragments,
which
particularly
are not vet
much
assistance towards
disposed
Jt seems
the views of Pischel and Professors Oldenberg and Liiders. 37
to me that the fragments favour the view of an essential identity of the
tfiis
original identical
Canon having
been
tlie
NOTE.
To
p.
xviii.
The
on the construction
of the thirty radicals of its alphabet is a sentence in its Annul*, the rgyl rabs gsal
bahi me . Ion, or Bright mirror of the lift- of Kings which runs as follows:
.
**
See, e.g., Pischel s Bruchstilcke de| Sanskritkanpnfc der Buddhisten tins IdykutSare,
ChineBiBch-Turkestan , in Sitzungs-berichte der Kgl. Frcupp. Akademie der Wissensthaften,
1904, vol. xxv, pp. 807-9 ; and Suzuki, Afvaghosha s The Awakening of Faith , p. xi.
That is, wholly known, and now published. Of two others (No*. 13 and 21) detached
passages were known from quotations in the pubjjshed text of the Siksa-samuccaya.
See Pischel, I. c., p. 807; and Oldenberg, I.e., pp. 673 ff.
"
"
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
xxxii
bod
ska//
fotun
clan
nas
^sal
byed
su
ni
rtsa
Izi
drug
rins
Icos
rias
type
is
The
riiut
as the
Comparing [the
suggest the following as a more exact rendering of the sentence
Sanskrit] with the Tibetan language, [and] quickly remedying [the deficiency
:
in] the
To bring out
thirty [consonants].
thus paraphrased
and
On
six [others],
clearly the
meaning of the
sonants, while the Tibetan required 30 consonants to express all its sounds ; but
way quickly (rins) occurred to them to remedy the deficiency of 6 consonants,
and thus
as
may
(z
and
h).
The point to be noted, however, is that the Tibetan alphabet really possesses
seven supplementary consonants (fs, tsh, dz, w, z, z, A), shown in Fig. 2, while the
sentence in question speaks of only six (Is, Ith, dz, z, z, h). An explanation of this
apparent inconsistency
To
p. xxvi.
The
any
radical.
script,
p.
487.
is
In fact
is
mark
See
my
Note
in the Journal
in the case of
in Khotanese
HAS.
for 1915,
OF MANUSCRIPT REMAINS
LIST
LIST OF
xxxiii
SANSKRIT TEXTS
I.
A.
VlNAYA.
PAGE
2.
Monastic Regulations
do.
do
3.
Technical Terms
4.
Not
1.
8.
.166
identified text
Dlrgh&gama.
(9), col.
(c)
col.
131)
col.
132)
Samyuktagama.
do.
C.
col.
135)
do.
do.
do.
do.
do.
do.
....27
...
46
36
40
-44
Prajnaparamita Class.
No. 10,
Ratnakuta
col.
176
5)
Class.
col.
19)
16
24
9.
136)
Madhyamagama.
4
8
(6)
7.
12
(a)
6.
B.
5.
.116
...
...
...
100
103
88
MANUSCRIPT REMAINS
LIST OF
XXXIV
Nirvana
(iJ)
17. Mahfiparinirvana
Sotra (Nanjio
(e)
PAGE
Class.
col.
39)
139
19fl.
same text
93
of the
162
132
108
112
same text
23.
24.
Another
col. 90)
Catalogue, No. 399, coU98)
s Cat.,
No. 1016,
86
125
col.
text,
D.
STOTRAS.
58
75
KIIOTANESE TEXTS
II.
214
29.
col.
III.
21)
.289
395
400
KUCHEAN TEXTS
.357
31. Pratimoksa
Two
fragments
V.
365
CHINESE TEXT
IV.
Document
52
121
not identified
Five fragments
25. Satapaficilsatika Stotra.
Three fragments
26. CatuhSataka Stotra.
84. Official
223)
97
390
TIBETAN TEXT
402
METHOD OF TRANSCRIPTION
xxxv
METHOD OF TRANSCRIPTION
Restorations are
made
A. In the case of
letter?, or passages,
in a
damaged
state, or
B. In the case of
Both
(2)
and
(5)
Use of hyphen
(1)
A
e.
(2)
single
hyphen
insertion,
e.
When
e.
two words
in a
compound,
cieyam
(1)
g. (lera-dafta, mdrg-opadesa.
two vowels
is
indicated thus
coalesce, the
g. ctejam (for ca
1.
dharmdu
Suiiydit);
or an euphonic
2).
compound vowel
is
marked by a circumflex,
words in a sentence, they are placed upart without any sign, unless they
have suffered some change, in which case their separation i* indicated by
a double hyphen, e. g. tat *arvc, but dharmdnicliunydn (for dhartndn Stnydn).
(3)
When
19, reverse,
1.
8,
METHOD OF TRANSCRIPTION
xxxvi
V\rana
consonant;
e.g., p. 5, obverse,
1.
1,
bhokfavyam^ but
p.
358, obverse,
1.
2, wa\t.
may
ABBREVIATIONS
Anc. Khot.
Report of Archaeo
Chinese Turkestan.
logical Exploration in
Cv.
i,
JRAS.
L.V.
M.N.
M.W.
Mst.
Mv.
Lefmann.
Lalita-Vistara, ed.
^=
Mvy.
P.Dy.
PTS.
SBE.
=B
Muhiivyntpntti, ed,
xvii in Sacred
Minmow,
ss Pali
S.P.
x.
i.
"W.GIL.
ZDMG. =
Prof. Winternitz
Zeitschrift der
Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellttchaft.
a = obverse, 6
In references raised numerals always refer to lines
=t Plate XI, No. 2, obverse, line 2.
as, e. g., PL XI 2
;
a"
reverse
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
EDITED BY A.
F.
RUDOLF HOERNLE
MOST of the fragments of manuscripts dealt with in this section belong to two
consignments, marked by me as Nos. 149 and 150. They were transmitted by
Sir G. Macartney, K.C.I.E., British Consul-General in Kashgar, to the Government
of India in Simla, who forwarded them to me in 1907.
1
The consignment No. 149 comprised seventeen separate packets, of which those
marked V-XIII contained a very large number of paper manuscript fragments.
The fragments, now edited, belong to packet X. There was also a packet XIV,
which contained two pieces of wood inscribed with, letters.
From Mr. Macartney s
letter accompanying the consignment to the Government of India (No. 903/15 of
October 10, 1906), it appears that packets V-XIV were given to him by Sahib
With reference to the provenance of those
Ali, the Indian Aksakal at Kuchar.
packets, the letter gave the following information, which was communicated to me
in their
Nos. V-XIV have been found in Jigdalik and Kaya, near Kuchar. In a letter
left Kuchar on the
dated 15. R;yab 1324 H. (September 4, 1906) Sahib Ali says:
26th Jamtidiulsnni for Bai with a letter of recommendation from the Amban of
Knchar to the Amban of Bni. I reached Jigdalik in one day from Bat, and proceeded
On the llth day, \\ lot of
to tho lulls the next dny and worked, there for ton days.
old mumwcrtptsi wore round from a houso,
Tho npxt day I returned t* Bai with
"I
these
things."
It should be noticed that the manuscripts are said to have been recovered from
The Bower MS., the Weber MSS., and others, as is now well known (see the Intro
duction to my edition of the Bower MS., chap, i), were similarly recovered from the
In India, e. g. in Benares, it is the prac
interior relic chamber of an ancient stupa.
tice, when manuscripts have become old and damaged, to prepare a fresh copy, and
consign the old one to the waters of the sacred river Ganges. In Eastern Turkestan
an analogous practice seems to have obtained, of giving to old and damaged manu
scripts an honoured burial in the relic chamber of a stupa.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
inquiry,
on January 4, 1912
knowledge of the
oasis of
Kuchar, wrote to
me
L oasis
de Bai est assez loin dc Koutchar, et ni mes notes, ni les cartes chinoises
Le nom est assez repandu
connaitre un Djigdalyq snr son territoire.
Le
en Turkestan Chinois puisqu il signifie seulement 1 endroit des oleasters
stupa en question doit faire partie d une ligne de stupa qui se poursuit d ouest en
est au sud de Ba i et an nord de la chaine du Tchb 1-Tagh.
ne
m ont
fait
"
".
The consignment, No. 150, comprised eight sets, of which Set VII consisted
The single specimen (DharanI
of rather better preserved manuscript fragments.
The whole consign
set.
fol.
p. 52) edited in the present section belongs to that
ment was transmitted to me from Simla on April 17, 1907, and in the accompanying
,
letter I
Nos. 7 and 8 [the latter set consisted of wooden tablets with letters] were
trader in Khotan, and forwarded to us by
purchased from Badar-ud-din, an Afghan
Mr. Macartney with his No. 790/15 of the 25th August, 1900. No information is
forthcoming about the findplaces of Nos. 7 and 8. Mr. Macartney is of opinion that
they have been picked up in the Khotan Bazar, and that they have been found in
the neighbourhood of Khotan.
Sir G. Macartney s surmise is fully corroborated by the character of the script of
It exhibits the peculiar marks of the Indian Upright Gupta script
Most probably it came
as developed in the literary usage of Southern Turkestan.
that fragment.
from the ruins of the ancient Buddhist settlement at Khadalik, near Domoko, about
seventy miles due east of Khotan. These ruins, as Sir Aurel Stein tells us in his
Ruins of Desert Cathay, vol. i, pp. 236-7, used to be visited by an old village official,
Mullah Khwajah, for the purpose of searching for manuscript fragments, by the sale
of which he hoped to make good the arrears of revenue due by him to the Ya-men.
The marketable value of such buried things had been realized in the country as
a result of Sir Aurel Stein
fact, it
In
excavations during his first expedition in 1901.
Dandan Uilik that had put up Mullah
to the ruins of
of Tun-huang, as described
in his
vol.
ii,
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
159
179
and
ff.,
(2)
1908-9.
It is solely due to his thorough
familiarity with the Buddhist
Canonical Scriptures that the identity of the fragments has been
In
recognized.
June 1909 he submitted to me a Preliminary Report on Studies of Khotan
Frag
in
ments , containing his identifications, and collations with the Chinese Canon.
In the following pages these Studies have been, as far as
The
possible, utilized.
paragraphs based on them have been indicated by being placed within square
brackets.
For the remaining paragraphs, especially the Roman
and
transcripts
English translations,
I.
1.
3.
solely responsible,
of the fragments
list
Monastic Regulations.
do.
2.
II.
am
The following is a
Vinaya Fragments.
Hoernle
do.
No. 149
.do.
No. 149
do.
Technical Terms.
PAGE
(PI.
IV, No. 1)
No.
(PI. I,
No.
(PI. Ill,
5)
12
1)
Sarhglti Sutra.
Hoernle
Nos. 1 and 2)
2.
B.
C.
Nos. 149
MSS,
and 149
a9
(PI. Ill,
16
Hoernle
Atanatiya Sutra.
(PI. I,
No.
2)
.24
Madhyama Nikaya.
3.
Upali Sutra.
Hoernle
4.
Suka Sutra.
Hoernle
3)
.27
(PI. IJ,
No. 3)
46
Samyukta
Nikfiya.
5. Pravurana Sutra.
6.
Candropama
7.
Sakti Sutra.
Hoernle
Sutra.
(PI. II,
do.
No.
do.
No. 149 T\
149^
No.
(PI. II,
.
I)
No.
2)
.
.36
.
40
.44
III. Sutra
Fragment. (Mahiiyana).
Sitatapatra Mahapratyangira Dharanl.
No. 4)
IV. Stotra Fragments.
1.
Hoernle
.
&
(P|.
2.
B2
JV, No.
.
/p], JJJ,
})
(PI. II,
.
2),
.
.52
and
.
58
Nog. 3
.
.75
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
VINAYA TEXTS
149
and 149 JL.
To this class belong the three Hoernle MSS., Nos. 149
Judging from their contents, Dr. Watanabe considers that they must belong- to some
Vinaya text, though he is unable, either from the Chinese or the Pali, to determine
the particular text to which they may belong.
,
1.
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
is
149^
It
x 3|
(11
inches),
damage on
its
lower
lines
of
writing in the Indian Upright Gupta characters, some letters of which, however,
have become more or less illegible owing to the ink being rubbed off. For the
number is lost.
Gupta characters of our fragment much resembles that of the
astronomical treatise of the Weber Manuscripts, published by me in Journal ASB.,
It belongs to the western division of the
vol. Ixii, 1893, p. 9, and Plate I, fig. 1.
Northern Gupta script, as shown by the form of its cerebral sibilant #, and to that
variety of it which used the flat-topped form of the palatal sibilant 6; see the
The early Gupta
Introduction to my edition of the Bower Manuscript, chapter iii.
form of the letter ni with its serpentine left limb, shows that our fragment must be
game reason
all
The type
of the
Attention may
in the late fourth or early fifth century A. D.
be drawn to the peculiar way in which the numeral 12 is written on rev. line 3,
with the two strokes, which indicate 2, placed one above, the other below the sign for
It occurs also in
10, the usual practice being to place both strokes below that sign.
referred to
the
some date
Sknting Gupta
No.
2,
1.
6.
[The text treats of some monastic rules concerning begging of food and meals.
In general these rules agree with the tenth chapter of the Dharmagupta Vinaya,
fasc,
56 (Tokyo,
9-14, see Nanjio, Nos. 1128 and 1131); but there are
below
xvi, 7, 1*,
differences in details, as
Chinese.
Sanskrit.
10.
Bhakta-vrtta
18.
11. Bbakta-visarjana-vrtta
14. SjtL
12. Pindapata-vrtta
15.
13. Pindacarika-vrtta
16.
/J
Rule
for eating.
Rule
Rule
^ fe
Rule
^^XH
}
for
for
begging
food.
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
With
vagga,
viii, 4,
may be compared
clauses 3-5, in
Obverse.
1
sawii.slditavyam
vynrn
samprajanena
samprajanena
\ipasthita-8Wirtina
gantavyam samprajanena
sthata-
samprajanena
nislditavyam
blioktavyamx
avi-
2 ksipia-cittc
prasiidikena
3 (sa-prat}lsena (?) a-&/mya-vau-vartinrt nica-manasa rajoharana-samacittena sthaviresu madhyesu navakesu maitra-cittena hita-ciVtena
anukampaftsana-kus alena
upasthapya
Bluikta-wsaidam
bhakta-vrttam\
10))
ucyate
nisadyii-ku&ilena
4 [nena]
5
piif-blbr&r-putra-swnyfiam
[r/cma]-vrtta(>)
katara# x
(^/t/)ksuna
agr/tltba
pindapato
visarjayi-
na ca ynsya va tasya va visarjayitavyah ka6 sya piydapato ddt&vyah matur datavyah pitur bhratur bhagin^a
tavya/i
rfatavyah
jnatikasya
f7rttavyah
adliyarama-<7a^asya
gr/nno
dci(ta)vy&h
it occurs at all, is indicated either by a single dot, or a double
double dot twice in rev. 1. 6.
single dot in rev. 11. 2 and 7, and the
The double dot, however, occurs also very frequently in its more usual way as visarga.
Aa the first of a conjunct consonant, r is written always upon the line, never above it ;
1
Interpunction,
when
dot.
1.
1. 3, vartina;
5, visarjayitavyah; 1. 6, bhraturWuiginyd (PI. IV, No. 1).
the second of a conjunct, v is always spelled b; as in obv. 1. %,krtba; rev. 1. 6, urdhbam;
The quantity of vowels is not carefully observed ; see below notes 2, 5.
1. 8, dbdre, &c.
The virama, when it occurs with the letters and t as the final of a word, is indicated by two
marks ; viz. by a sort of prone comma placed above the slightly lowered letter, and also by
AB
head of the letter sweeping in a curving line outward end downward (see PI. IV,
and 5). In the Slanting Gupta script this downward carving line is replaced
by a straight line sloping upwards from the head of the lowered letter to the side, or head,
of the preceding one (see, e.g. PL II, No. 3, 1. 2, XI, No. 2 a, 1. 2).
the
No.
left
1, 11. 1
s
1
4
Read tannisiditavyam.
Head here, and elsewhere, tamprnjiianena.
See footnote
8.
8.
,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
6
7
\}[pakti](r)ino
kasya
datavyah a/rakarino datavyah vyasana-p? apasya glanadatavyah yadi sin kuksi?nati agacchatt
l>anc//mna-6addhasya
8 \ta\(sya ap\
Reverse.
1
fba
(idam
ucyate)
Pindapata-vrttam
danain
a[?a]-
3
2 tikt\(kam)
fama-sQpikaih 8a?prajanena upasthita-smrtina avik^iptacittena av^kirata* tavaWakafi
ca pratigrhi^avi/afm] yava^ake
(srt)w?/a[k-pu-
3 rti\r
11i avati
idam
vrttaiii katarat\
_pra[*. ]i[]tV
ucyate
pindapata-vrttara\
pindaaTr^ena bhiksuna,
12))
Pindacarika3
sariiprajd?2e?m
gr[amam ]
vyam
3
4 [tam^prajdnena
yantavya(m sam)prajanena sth^avyam x upasthitasmrtina aviksipta-ciUena prasadike;m
irya,p&tha-8am(pa)nn[ena su-]
5
[8amvr](tc)na w-j;? aticchannena alpa-^abdena w^ksipta-caksusa yugan-
8
gini -8amjmuh upasthapayitavya duhitri -matriA-;/i drstbd duhitr-samu
jiia
?6pasthapayitavya
8 (tvara-)
&rm[gata]1iexu dbare dbara-6alayaw
mandam argadam
rfanair (mandarii
a-)
TRANSLATION.
(Clause 10.) .... he (the monk) should sit down, he should walk with circum
8
he should stand with circumspection ; he should sit down with cir;
spection
Head tamjnam, as
same
line,
and
see samjiiam in
1.
6.
It is
Head upcuthdpayitavya,
fragment
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
cumspection
(to
the
(with
making little noise, with downcast eyes, looking in front of him to a distance
of (no more than) a yuga (about six feet), with gravity, with reverence,
being under
the influence of fear (lest he should commit a fault), with lowly
thoughts, with
robes),
ately as to a father, brother, or son, behaving with propriety in (choosing) his own
seat as well as towards the assembly of the (other) seated (monks). 10
Thus runs the
rule about eating food.
indiscriminately.
not declined) ?
Whose
alms-food (then)
s may be given
mother
may
;
a father
s may be given
a householder who has gone to the monastery,
be given
one who has done a service, his may be given
one who
has done a disservice, his may be given
one who has met with a misfortune,
who is invalid, who is bound with bonds, his may be given if a pregnant
given
his
a relative
may
woman
comes, her s also, fixedly attending (the while to the four subjects of medi
one who has intercourse with an animal
tation ), may be given
his may
9
n his
not be given
may be given moreover (what is given) should consist
of broken foodstuff or of the leavings (of the food of the giver).
Thus runs the rule
about declining food.
;
on a vernacular original. The spelling ulksipta is probably a scribal error for otkfipta,
for o and u are written very nearly alike, and otksipta is a barbarous sanskritizing of the
The writer of utkfipta in our
vernacular okkhitta, for Sanskrit avaksipta, downcast.
fragment perhaps meant to correct the mongrel form otksipta for utkfipta is a correct
it is out of
Sanskrit word but as it means upraised
place in the context which requires
ft word
meaning downcast
9
On the four subjects of meditation (smrty-upastJidna), sec Siksasamuccaya (ed.
Bendall), chap. 13, p. xxxvi; Mahavyutpatti (ed. Mironow), No. 38, p. 16; Dharmasamgraha (in Anec. Oxon.), No. 44, pp. 9, 44, wher* other references are giveu. Only
but four in
three are mentioned in Divyavadana (ed. Cowell), p. 126, 1. 13 p. 182, 1. 20
1. 7.
The Pali term ia ati-patthdna, Cullavagga (ed. Oldenberg), ix, 1,4 (vol. ii,
p. 208,
;
p. 240), transl. in
p.
466
6,
SBE.,
Dhammapada
18
in
vol. xx, p.
SBE.,
305.
On
smjrti, see P.
Dy.,
See Cullavagga, in Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 287, clause 3, where it is
said that the monk is to take his seat without encroaching on (the space intended for) the
senior monks, or ejecting the junior monks from the seats, or spreading his upper robe out
(M a11mat)
Translation uncertain, the text being mutilated and illegible.
.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
What
(Clause 12.)
With duo
bowl)?
is
care the
item (without rejecting any), with the proper amount of condiments, and the
12
with circumspection, with fixed attention (to
proper amount of cooked split pulse,
9
the four subject* of meditation ), with nnbewildered mind, not dropping about (the
So much only should bo received (by the monk) as will satisfy his need.
alms-food).
What
monk s
bowl).
(Clause
is
the
rule
principles of conduct),
ment, well guarded (against soiling his
robes),
with
little
a yuga, with
noise,
his senses
2.
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
Iloernle
This
is
a complete
I,
No.
1,
Reverse).
folio,
Regarding the meaning of the words sama-tiktikam, with the proper amount of
condiments, and sdvadanam, item by item, not rejecting any, see Journal HAS. for
1912, p. 736, also for 1913, p. 681.
11
Regarding the mode of address to women, there is au example in Sacred Books
of the East. vol. xx, p. 345.
14
Regarding the exact meaning of dvara, doorway, see ibidem, p. 1 60, footnote 3.
Meaning uncertain ; perhaps doorpost ; not a walking-stick, which is usually called
kattara-<landa, stick of a weak or old man, Mahavagga, v, 6, 2 (p. 188, 1. 18), Cullavagga,
iv, 4, 4 (p. 76, 1. 30), viii, 1, 2 (p. 208, 1. 25); 2, 2 (p. 210, 1. 36); 6, 3 (p. 217,1. 32).
See the following fragment.
"
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
damaged
line of writing,
within
circle
This, so far as
it
goes, tends
IX.
448,
[The text refers to two monastic practices (karma) one relating to the monks bed
the other to the permission given to a feeble old monk to carry a stick and string.
The latter practice has many parallel passages in the Pali and Chinese Vinaya ; see
,
Pali Vinaya,
The
The former
occasion of the regulation to a particular monk, named Ary a80ma
version also speaks of three distinct permissions, (1) to nse a staff, (2) to use a string,
and
(3) to use
may
be an indication of the same threefold permission in the fact that in 1. 6 only the staff
(dawla) is spoken of, while 11. 2 and 4 mention both staff and string (danria-xikya),
The text
reads as follows
1.
6 may be a
clerical error.
Obverse.
1
fica6arh
ca tn pafica8am
pafic[rt]sa[m]
trayopaiica6arh
var[a]narh
dvapanca&im ekapaficilwam
^aiyyd-"]
varanam atacatvarim-
6ad yavatarh
3 catvariiiSad
varanm
pauca ek6na-
catvari1
Complement [paiicapa \ncatam ; also read catitfpaiicdsam, and tee footnote 2. As
a cariosity it may be noted that throughout this first line (but not in 1. 2, paiicatad) ium is
placed slightly lower than the preceding nca, and attached to it by a slanting Hoe, exactly
fifies
in the way in which virama is indicated in Kuchean texts; see e.g. wa/ x
lyik % in
,
PI.
10
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
iifiad
sana[w] grahay&fttt
yavataiii trinsati-var^anam
tatah
pa^cac
chrama^nde^anam
6aiyyasanam
grahayami sarvea?/t
6
yathavrdc///ika[wV]
astu
ii
te(a)
Reverse.
2 ha[?]
samatva
(tfr)[nof]u
me
a-]
Aryasomo&ya
bhik^ur glano
ma/iallakaA
gamghan marge
danda-6ikya-sanwirt-
3 tim
acami soihgho
me Aryasomasya
bhik^o
glanasya mahal[r|aka-
(aya)
4 marge danda-Hikya-sa[wi]raatim
sanmanyatu anukampam upadaya
8
5 evaiii dvir
api trir api u te-sa ?pikiye yaska?salya n Srnotu bhadantah
sarii-
TRANSLATION.
Obtene.
(Monks
fifty
in
1.
1.
The
first
similarly below,
4
is
5.
The
The
in
clause in the middle of the line, between the double bars, is not in Sanskrit but
See note to Translation.
Kuchean.
MONASTIC REGULATIONS
to thirty years
in this order
have a bedstead
11
(I.
5) I allow to
(1.
6),
according
9
to say :]
Graciously let the venerable (Samgha) hear me. (1. 2) I, Aryasoma,
a feeble and aged monk, beg from the Samgha in the regular way the permission (to
make use) of a staff and string (to carry my bowl). (1. 3) May the Sariigha agree to
is
make
Thus
able
is
(he
and
(1.
4) in the regular
way permission
use) of a staff
to say)
discreet
the reverend
monk
Samgha
now
is
listen.
(1.
6) This
Aryasoma, a
(to
(1.
8
5)
An
feoblo
make
use) of a staff.
La
=
=
splkii/e
baton
(?)
mendier, demander
Je pense que nous avons ici un morceau de karmavuca. J ai retrouve dans les
documents de Pelliot plusieurs fragments analogues ou les formules sanscrites sont
introduites par des indications en koutche en. Le kontcbeen 6tait sans aucun doute la
langue pratique des moines, tout au moins dans la region du Koutcha.
yatkasxalya
vol. xiii,
p. 48, n. 4.
8
Asiatique,
XI
Serie,
Tome
II, pp.
311
if.
0913).
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
12
TECHNICAL TERMS
3.
5, Reverse).
is
characters,
line 1
an incomplete
on
on the
The
sections.
of which,
reverse), has
however
become
(line
by fraying.
of technical terms of the Buddhist Vinaya, divided into
section ends on the fourth line of the reverse, and is followed by
text contains a
One
folio,
illegible
list
Obverse. 1
1
8MHY1M i
2
<i(pika)ya
clrstya \iikse\w(nl)yam
karma
Q?arf]i?asaxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
2 !|kn/ikaranam\ 3 miiwrtpyam kimanudaiii8am\ dvra(ha)nam* puna(/i kirn-)
karanam x 3
3
tat-svablulv-ai.sn/aw
danaw x
|f[2tff]ttih
anovada-visthapana
*>
auov&da-prasthapana,
(a-)
5 g^[r]avaranri-stliapanam x anto-vustam x 6
7
an(/i)-pakvam v 8vo-pakvam\
guruka(/ ^ri^karah
7 lost
la-
1
Interpunction is marked throughout this fragment by means of a prone comma.
*
With n (not n) as in Pali.
See Note, infra, p. 62.
1
The original apparently lias kiinkivranam^ ka being written as in kani obv. 1. 6, and
in kanam rev. 1. 5 ; but the apparent a is a mere scribal flourish as in the apparent pa
and sdi n of upasampadd, rev. 11. 4, 5.
4
For dvarhanam; Mahavyutpatti, No. 265, 18, has abarhana.
1
Skr. anavai-adah, Pali anuvado.
*
sanakritization of Pali anto-vuttham, see Mv. vi, 17, 3, p. 211, 1. 10.
7
Head udyrldlam.
Probably read ajratigrhltam ; and Uyhukah parifkarah.
Bar>>arou8
TECHNICAL TERMS
18
Reverse.
1 lost
consonants.
2 ((srt^)
pamca-iSata-vinaya-fiarngitih
sapta-Sata-vinaya-sariigltih
vi-
naya-8amuddanam v
9
3 ||lpa
kalpah civara-ka4 (a tu
Famaptam x
sarhpada
5
ii
*
Upasarhpada katama
\\
na upasaihpada
malia-(A-o-)
.la
pa-
jiian-r#>/t/rtmayt
10
ayusmato
6 Uyinah
^ ax-
trai-vaci(<ve)[fa]
n ^ sam
vi[a?/rt](lhara-i)amcamena
^[f7]e,^?/
xxxxxxxxx
xrxe
TRANSLATION.
(Obverse,
1.
1)
false doctrine
probation
(1.
2)
atonement
act of issuing a
command
censure
5)
(1.
fid of taklll
(?)
4)
(1.
.... the
preventing
(food) kept indoors, cooked
(fruits) picked up
without stones (or seed) (plants) growing in ponds
spreading out (and) not spreading out (of robes) taking up (and) nqt taking up (of
....
(1.
6)
robes)
Vinaya
(1.
3)
chapter on regions
(I 4)
....
he
initiated (into
is
is
What
finished
\\
\\
is
Read
10
11
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
14
npasampada
(or initiation)
(1.
5) initiation of
of the
comprehension
(their)
(true)
knowledge
of
initiation
the
through
venerable
Mahnkiifsyapa] (1. 6) .... through the explanation of his queries initiation with the
formula
Come, O monk
[initiation] upon the threefold declaration (of taking
;
(1.
7) initiation by the Sarhgha .... consisting [in outlying localities]
refuge)
of five members, one versed in the Law and four others,
;
NOTE.
On
On
a sort of social boycott, or degradation, for one or more days, see SEE., xvii,
The etymology of the word is obscure. It may be
fF., and Mvy., No. 265, 14.
iiidnatta},
pp. 397
suggested, however, that it is a compound of mdna, respect, and apya, irregularly
The Pali mdnaf/a (wrongly identified with mdtiafva
short for apyaya, disappearance.
in P. Py.) is probably Skr. intina-ufta, withdrawn, or mana-tirta, injured.
On
duft&laj/atti, see SEE., xvii, p. 316, n. 2. The word is spelled with ?t, while Pali has
paid with
(hiitji it! (d
tfh.
its
real
derivation (not as
in P. ])y.)
(httta,
corrupt
32, 1. 2 seo also Prof, de la Vallee Poussin in Ind. Ant., xxxvii (1908), pp. 5,6,
On Uttdra (Pali allJidra) and nddhdra, the spreading out and taking up of
28.
robes (kathina), see SEE., xiii, pp. 18 fF., xvii, p. 148, n. 1, p. 157, n. 2. ThcyurnhM
parifkardti apparently refer to the eight requisites of a monk, see P. Dy., p. 342 b also
vi,
n.
Mvy., No. 233, 1. On the two iamylti, or rehearsals, before the two synods of the
500 and 700 monks, see the llth and 12th divisions of the Cv. in SEE., xx,
pp. 370 fi:, 386 fF.
Regarding the terms of the initiation ceremony, it would seem that our
fragment enumerates them in two sets, and in either of them in chronological
order, those of the first set, in rev. 11. 4-6, referring to Buddha himself and his
earliest converts, while those of the second set (rev. 11. 6, 7) refer to the successive
modes of initiation.
both points the first Book of the Mahftvagga gives
As to Buddha
information ; see also note 1, on pp. 73-4 in SBE., vol. xiii.
On
saiiilodhi, as
of causation
(Mv.
ment
first
6, 6.
47)
His
:
TECHNICAL TERMS
15
!
the three brothers Kasyapa, the heads of three Jalila ascetic communities in Uruvilvu
(Uwdt, Mv. i, 15, 1 cf. i, 23,;4). The oldest of them was the so-called Urnvilvfi
Kasyapa, who was converted after a series of wonderful tests and questions put to
;
Buddha (Mv.
to,
in rev.
11.
who after Buddha s death succeeded to the headship of the Orcjer. There is no record
of the circumstances of his conversion in the Buddhist records
and this otherwise
inexplicable fact is explained if he is identical with the Kusyapa of Uruvilva.
By
reason of his being- the eldest of the three brothers he would naturally come to
be called Mahakfisyapa, or the Greut Kasyapa.
Regarding the modes of initiation, it was originally conferred by Buddha
himself with the formula cfii hhikklnt, Come, O monk (Mv. i, 6, 32). Afterwards,
when the number of applicants grew unwieldy, the power of initiation was delegated
by him to his Bhikshus individually, who might confer initiation on any applicant on
his simple declaration of the three xarana-ffamana, i.e. the declaration of his desire to
take refuge with the Buddha, the Doctrine, and the Congregation (Hadd/ia, D/iarma,
Saiiir/fia] (Mv. i, 12, 4)- Still later, to provide against abuses, the power of initiation
was withdrawn from the individual Bhikshu, and restricted to the Sarhgha, i.e. the
Bhikshus assembled in Session, to be carried out by a regular prescribed process
(Mv.. i, 28, 3 ff.). It may be noted that the second form of initiation, upon the
simple declaration of taking refuge, was originally employed by the Buddha himself
in the case of the admission of an Upiisaka, or lay-adherent
and in that case it was
not called vpasawpadd. Moreover, before the rise of the Sarhgha, while Buddha was
the solitary professor of his doctrine, the lay-applicant was required only to declare
his taking refuge with two, viz. the Buddha and the Doctrine
and in this case (of
the two merchants Tapussa and Bhallika) the; admitted ones were called dvetdcika
(Mv. i, 4, 5). It was only after the rise of the Sarhgha, in consequence of the con
version of the first five (pancavtygiya) Bhikshus (Mv..i, 6, 32 H .), that the declaration
of taking refuge with three was required, and the initiated were now called tccdcika
(for the first time, in the case of the Setthi, the father of Yasa, Mv. i, 7, 10). There
were, thus, two methods, a higher for the initiation of Bhikshus, and a lower for the
admission of Upfisakas,both employed by the Buddha himself. It was the lower method
alone which Buddha delegated to his Bhikshus, and which they were now permitted
to use for the initiation of a new Bhikshu. But while thus delegating to them the lower
method, for himself he retained and continued the use of both methods for the initia
tion of Bhikshus and the admission of Upasakas respectively. Thus, at a later time,
he initiated by the ehi-bhikkhu formula the fifty friends of \asa, and the five hundred
Jatila followers of Uruvela Kassapa (Mv. i, 10, 4, and i, 20, 19 ff.), and admitted by
;
the tevdcika formula two female Upiisikas, the mother and wife of Yasa (Mv. i, 8,
3^.
At a still later time Buddha withdrew the delegation from the Bhikshus in their
individual capacity, and vested the power of initiation, by means of a regular process,
in the Sarhgha, i. e. the whole body of Bhikshus at any local centre assembled in
solemn session, though he still left the power of admission of Siimaneras, or novices, to
the individual Bhikshus (Mv. i, 54, 3). The quorum at such a Sarhgha was not to be
less than ten (Mv. i, 31 , 2 v, 13, 2 ; ix, 4, 1), except in very outlying localities, where
;
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
16
the quorum might be vinayadhara-pancama, that is, consist of only five members,
a Bhikshu vera-d in the disciplinary law, and four others (Mv. v, 13, 2 ix, 4, 1 see also
Divyavadana, p. 21 1. 17). Thus counting the two possibilities of a Sarhgha separately,
there result four varieties of initiation. These are enumerated in Mahavastu, vol. i,
;
p. 2,
15,
11.
.6.
by the formula
Come,
O monk
(3) data-
in rev.
11.
5.
4,
4.
SAttGlTI
SUTRA
(Plate III, Nos. 1
and
2).
These two pieces belong to the Saihglti Sutra of the Dlrgha Nikaya. They are
fragments of two folios, which, moreover, probably belong to two different pothis, as
shown by their difference in width.
Fol.
measures about 145 x 75 mm., or
5| x 3 inches, and
fol.
3-| inches.
In their
complete state thoy would have measured about 310-325 mm., or 12-13 inches.
The writing consists of six lines on either side, in the Slanting Gupta character.
It is, however, especially in the top and bottom lines, imperfectly legible
The
smaller fragment, 2 s which formed the left side of the folio, originally bore the folionumber on its reverse side, facing the fourth line of writing but it is now quite
illegible, being almost entirely obliterated, together with the four adjacent syllables of
"
the text.
folio, i* lost
The
(from 1 to 10) which constitute each dharma.
*
contains a portion of the third, or threefold
aB
No.
larger of
,
class, i.e.
our fragments,
the class which
-,
Society
s edition.
BuddhayasaH,
9,
41
b.
is
There
it will
exists,
xii,
SAMGlTI SUTRA
17
in No.
149f9
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
18
is
Dirgha Agama, while the Pali and Sanskrit versions of it differ very considerably.
Dr. \Vatanabe would explain these differences by the suggestion that the Chinese
version of the Dirgha probably belonged to the Dharmagupta School, because the
Buddhayasas, propagated the Vinaya of that School (see Chu-san-tsan-ci-tsi,
translator,
Nanjio, No. 1476, fasc. 4, and Tokyo, xxxviii, 1, 83 b also Nanjio, No. 1117) ; while
the Eastern Turkestani Sanskrit text may perhaps belong to the Sarvastivada School,
because in the Vinaya of that School (Nanjio, No. 1115, fasc. 24, and Tokyo, xvi,4, 53a)
;
we find the Atfmiitiya Sutra mentioned among the Scriptures, mostly belonging to
the Dlgha Nikuya, which are appointed for the consolation of sick persons ; thus we
have
No.
7,
No.
8,
|* Jg
fpf
Maktoanuyika.
In the Chinese translation of the Samanta Pasadika, which has been identified
by Dr. Takakusu with Nanjio, No. 1125, the same appointments are mentioned
(fasc. 11, and Tokyo, xvii, 8, 63a)
^HI^^^^tSM^^*,*
m A M % m & &, fa m
?e>
&&
na>
ft
w & m n& **
the king of the country, or any of the great alms-givers (mahd-ddnapali) of the
Iccality are sick, they send to the tomple and request the Bhikshus to recite incan
tations for them
the Bhikshus recite for them the Atanatika Sutra. ]
;
The Sanskrit
Text Society
s edition, vol.
iii,
224, 228-32.
(1)
No, 149,V
SANSKRIT.
1
xeka,
dharmS
prat[t](ct;a)t(e)
sa(w)khyai/a eka
dharm&pra^
Obverse.
viii
tivusayati
yaA -srnrtih
xxiiidhammapadarh,avyapado[dlia]
samma-sati samma-samadhi
SAMGITI SUTRA
19
SANSKRIT.
kartavya
pannaya
khayo]
4 xa (adfyisthdnani skandbaS c*a-
ranlyo
xxvii adhitthanani
paSrayas ca pa{|
sacchika-
xxv,
ma-]kkhanda
[dham-
viii,
apassa-
yani(?)
5 l-dhatus
xvi apo-dhatu,
tejodbatur vayu-dliatu*
dhatu
catvara||dAdrdA
vayo-
tcjo-dhatu,
vinnanarii catuttham
fiaiia-sthitayab Tup6(pa) H
7 xr bhik[.s]or va bhiA-.?wn[?/]a
xx civara-hetu va bhikkhuno
xviii, catasso
vifiiiana-tthitiyo, rup^payarii
va
tr^na utpadyamana u
tanhil
uppajjamana uppajjati
Reverse.
[8a](na)-\\eior iti-bbv[(i]tibhava-
hetos
tr^na
utpaprfycmdnd
xx [sena]sana-betu
uppa uppa]
lietu [va
utpadyate
mana
2 rc/jandad
agatirii gacchati dve^an
cchati
5 voatftni danaiti
priyavaditft artha-
cn|ryd
6 nib catvarah
larhbbah
ta
bbi]tanba uppaQjagaccbati
ga
gatiih
inoliagatirii
dosa-
ga
bbayagatirii ga
xxviii vyakarani yo tbapanlyo pa-
xxxix, Ca[tasso]
ftlio
dttnarii
peyyavajjarh
attba-ca[riya]
atmabbava-pratiasty
xxxvi
kramzti
[} o]ni
xxxviii,
attabbava - patilabba,
atraajAAdrfl-
pratilarh
bbi
uppajjati]
xix cbandagatirh
[va
iti-bbavjibbava-
CnttHro
atthi
atta[bbava-patilabho]
xxxviii para-sarhcetana kamati no
iKsatma-sariicetana alU/t
atta-sarhcetana, a[ttbi]
c2
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
20
NOTE. The text does not seem to be in good order. Thus in obv., 1. 1, one
In
expects to read ekam dharmam, but the reading ekd dharmd is distinctly legible.
obv., 1. 3, the reading tamti makes no sense ; it suggests a reminiscence of the Pali
Also
of
the apparent Sanskrit order
the
ta/iyd, and set ms to be intended for xmrtyii.
four terms, kaycna, caktusa, smrtyd, prajnayd, differs from the Pali, which has statiyd,
of
In obv., 1. 4, there appear only the key-words
three
cakkhtnia, kaywa, panndya.
classes of terms, one of which (apdsraya), moreover, should be already enumerated in
rc/ta
1.
the
akshara
is
a
1.
In
read
formed
line
2,
niv.,
eckanddd\
badly
apparent
and footnote 4 on p. 61. In rev., 1. 6, the
ccAa, gee below, footnote 5 on p. 29
nih
[
the
last
of
the
last
item of the
upapddnka-yonih,
syllable
syllable
evidently
;
36th
class.
TRANSLATION.
(The monk) provides himself with a necessary thing he bears
[Obverse, 1. 1.]
with a necessary thing 4
[1-2] the virtue [of the absence of covetousness],
the absence of malice, perfect recollection (of duties), perfect concentration (of mind); 5
the need of realization by sight, by recollection, by wisdom
[1. 3]
;
7
4] [four] resolves, bodies of doctrine,
stituted
by form
12
[1.
7]
whether
in a
monk
or in a
nun
desire tends to
arise
[Reverse, 1.1] for the sake of lodging, for the sake of continued existence desire
tends to arise, 13
from lust one passes into an evil course ; from
[1. 2]
u
hatred, from infatuation, from fear one passes into an evil course
0-3]
(there
side,
is
such a thing
as) a
question which
may
15
aside.
it is
s side
[nor on
The reference here is to the apafoayas, see P. Dy. 49a; Mvy., No. 19, 80. The two
necessaries in the text are (1) the four requisites of a monk, and (2) heat and cold.
Skr.
Pali adhivaseti.
praticdtayati
*
P. Dy., p. 1 18 a, where the first term is anabhidhyd-dliarmapada, For another set of
four dharraapada, see Dh. 8., No. 55.
T
P. Dy., p. 136; Mvy., No. 80.
Cf. Mvy., No. 70, 3.
P. Dy., p. 1176.
10
See footnote 4.
P. Dy., p. 1216
Mvy., No. 101.
11
P. Dy., p. 20a ; Mvy., No. US.
P. Dy., p. 579a.
;
13
P. Dy., p. 4,960.
The four causes of trm& are dress, food, lodging, and continued
Skr. bbav/ltibhava
Pali bhavdbhava.
The Pali texts ignore the nuns.
P. Dy., p. 17 a.
18
P. Dy., p. 3286. From Childers s explanation it follows that vyakaraniyah of our
text mast be understood to stand for avyakaranlyah, and to be preceded by jiratno ; BO
also in the Pali version.
jexiatence.
14
SAMGITI SUTRA
the receiver
18
side]
5]
[1.
"
21
19
s personality ;
there is a re-obtainment of personality
[1. 7]
of
others arises, but not consciousness of self; there is
consciousness
(by which)
ments of one
No. 149,V
(2)
Obverse.
SANSKRIT.
1
rasV/i
r#||
*s
samyaktva myatoH
a(n/)||ya/o
ratify
Tayo
rasi,
trpm]
3 U(ttia) paris uddha-kaya-samudacaratayarh Tathagatah pra?r
me
micchatta-niyato
xxx arakkheyyani,
caritarii
cchadayet kaccin
ff.
sammatta-niyato
rasi,
na wf|;af|nyufo &atam[a]n[t]
xxxxxx
rasi,
ani[yato rasi]
xxviii
Tathagatassa kaya-duc-
kheyya
yam Tathagato
ma me idarh
rak-
paro
(pa-)
j9flgriSuddha-vak-[8]anm-
dacaratilyaih Tathagatah
cchadavet ka-
pra-
parisuddha-vacl-samacaro
Ta
rakkheyya
xxx xx TaMgagata
suddha
nama
pari-
manah - samudacara
tayarii rasi^
\\
tayarh Tathagatah
xxxxxg(2;i<)dgalah
ma rne
sthavira-tri-
trao
xxxvi puggaliixxxvii,Tayothera
xxxix, Codanaxxviii, rasi
vatthuni
xxxiii,
[Apare
pi]
tayo aggi
tnni punr/a-knya-vastuni
danamayam
Sila-
Tini
xxxviii,
[mo]haggi
pmlfia kiriya vatthuni, dana
mayam [p-k-va],
[p-k.va
"
11
"
r. Dy., p.
P. Dy., p.
],
silamayarii
bhavana, &c.
noa.
Mst., vol.
i,
p. 3,
11.
11, 12.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
22
Reverse
PALI, pp. 217
SANSKRIT.
1
A [a]mp]A;-
xxxxxxgsM[i]^[a]/t
[?]svary[e]
2 xxxxxg(r^/e)
va[r]ta-
vas"[e]
tadyatha
ek[e] ny[c] ca
yantp]
vas"e
manusy[tt]
vartayanti tad
ff.
kamesu vasarh
manussa
vattenti
eey-
nirmana-ratayah
vartayanti tadyatha
deva parinirmita - vaaa - varti-
deva
yatha
idaiii
dvitiya
3 xxxxx|l(
nah
ayaiii
?)
iyaiii tr-
dutiya
deva paranimmita-vasa-vatti,
ayaiii ta[tiya]
4 xxxxxng(w)kajenapri[^"]-sukhe-
ca
abhisyandayamti
yandayamti pa-
paris-
xli [Tisso
satta
sukhupapattiyo
uppadetva
santi
uppadetva
deva Brahma-]
5
j|bliavati
spharaniyaih
yaduta
vivekajena prlti-sukliena
tena sukhena xx
6
gka
iyaiii
tti santi
yam
te
sukh-
samae//<t
7 @5j)Aaramti
[kayi]ka ay am pathama
upapatti, santi satta [sukhena
esarh
kincit
aho sukhan
ti,
seyyatha, &c.]
NOTE. The Sanskrit text, as will be seen, differs very considerably, especially
with regard to tho 4lst dharma, rev. 11. 4-7. In obv. 1. 6, there is a similar case to
that noticed in the preceding fragment, obv. 1. 4
only the key-words sthavira and
;
codana are mentioned, as well as rdSi and araksita which are already enumerated
in lines 1 and 2.
The two cases are so much alike, that, after all, the two fragments
may belong to the same pothl. The Pali version enumerates two classes of agni,
It is the former class which the surviving traces, obvTrrr4seem to indicate as mentioned in our fragment. As to the class, called arc,kfanlya or araktila in our fragment (obv. 11. 2, 6), the Sanskrit reading, with the
negative prefix a, is supported by the Pali reading arakkheyydni (see footnote 3, in
PTS. edition, p. 217), which gives a very good sense (see the translation below).
Attention may be called to the scribe s correction in 11. 3 and 4 of the obverse, wh^re
and
7,
SAMGITI SUTRA
23
the syllable fi had been inadvertently omitted ; it was afterwards inserted below the
With the help
line, and the place of insertion indicated by a cross above the line.
of collating- the extant traces and allowing for the probable number (38-40) of
syllables in a line as well as for the string-holes, it is possible practically to reconstitute
the Sanskrit text of classes xxx and xl, which do not materially differ from the
Pali
but that of class xli, which difiers considerably from the Pali, cannot be
;
satisfactorily restored,
p.
parisuddha-kaya-samudacaratayiiih Tathagatah
na vijanlyuh tasmat Tathagata nama parisuddha-vak-samudacaratayarh Tathagatah praticchadayet ka[l. 5]ccin me pare na
vijiinTyuh tasmat Tathiigata nama
parisuddha-manah-samudacaratayarh Tathagatah
ah pudgalah, &c.
(1. 6) Tray
praticchadayet kaccin me pare na vijfmlyuh.
11.
xl.
Tisrah
1-3,
Reverse,
kam-opapattayah santi sattvah kam-6pa[l. Ijsthitflh
kamik-alsvarye vase vartayanti, tadyatha manusya eke nync ca [1. 2] devil eke
santi sattvuh kum-opnsthituh kamikVinipiitika, iyam prathama kam-opapattih
aisvarve vase vartayanti, tadyatha deva nirmana-ratuyah, iyarh [orig. idarh] dvitlyu
santi sattvah kam-opasthitah kamik-alsvarye vase vartayanti,
[I. 3] kam-opapattih
praticchiidayet kaccin
me
[1.
3]
pa[l. 4]re
TRANSLATION. 20
[Obverse,
1.
1.]
xxx.
mass of absolute truth, and accumulation which is neither one nor the
2|
There are three things that
other, but a congeries of truth and falsehood
[11. 2-5]
need not be guarded by a Tathagata. 22 A Tathagata docs not hide (any wrong,
falsehood,
called Tathagatas.
[1.
how
should
80
"
i,
p.
517, note;
Mvy.,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
24
pure in thought,
bow
should a Tathfigata
let s
is
[1.
22
There are three kinds of fire 26 [1. 7] fire of passion,
things that an; not guarded.
of hatred, fire of infatuation.
There are three ways of acquiring religious merit
:
fire
that which consists in almsgiving, that which consists in virtuous living, that which
consists in spiritual meditation. 27
are not in
existence.
This
is
the
first
kind of sensuous
sensuous desire.
live
devised by others.
This is the third [1. 4] kind of sensuous existence. 28 xli. There
are three kinds of blissful existence there are beings that are merged, plunged, and
:
to say,
is
through the
[1.
bom
of reason, whose
bliss.
6] This is the
[1.
born of reason
5] thrill, that
they being
These are the devas endowed with bodies of
first
kind of
blissful
existence.
There are
beings that are merged, plunged, and thrilled in the bliss of pleasurable sensation
born of meditation, [1. 7] in whose case there is some thrill altogether unaffected by
a body, that is to say, &c. 29 [These are the Abhdevara, or Shining Devas.
second kind of blissful existence, &c.]
5.
This is the
ATANATIYA SUTRA
I,
No.
2, Reverse).
This fragment comprises nearly the whole of the right half of a folio. In its
Its lines
present condition it measures 185-210 x 80 mm., or 7f-8 x 3 inches.
8
85
"
"
- r.
P. uy.,
Dy.,
f Dy.,
P.
o.
>yua.
is); p. 390
P. Dy., p. 1076.
P. Dy., p. 393 a;
P. Dy., p. 182a.
504 a.
p. o
P. Dy., p. 18
1
a.
cf.
L.V., p. 10,1. 6
Mvy., No. 93
S.. 8.,
., p.
138, note 2.
P. Dy., p. 4
488a.
ATANATIYA SUTRA
25
comprise from 22 to 27 syllables (aksam), and from the foot of its text containing
some sloka verses, it can be calculated that about as many syllables are missing on
the left side of the fragment.
The entire folio, accordingly, must have had a length
of about 15 or 16 inches (or 385-410 mm.), the lines
comprising from 4B to 48
The folio-number has disappeared with the left side and it is, therefore,
syllables.
There are, on
impossible to say to what size of pothi the folio may have belonged.
;
Nikaya.
much
obverse,
extant text differs very materially from the Pali text of the Atiinutiya Suttanta as
it is
Of the Sanskrit
printed in the Pali Text Society s edition, vol. iii, pp. 194 ff.
text the present fragment is, as yet, the only known survival.
translation of the
is
given in Grimblot
Sept Suttas
Palis, pp.
321
if.
[In the Chinese Dirgha Agama the Atanutiya Sutra does not occur at all see
A separate translation of the Sutra was made by Punya
Nanjio, No. 545, col. 138.
;
Yardhana
in A.D.
663; but
this,
is
unfortunately,
76 a),
the Khai-yuen-lu
9 (Tokyo, xxxviii, 4,
see
lost;
fasc.
the
|Jflf
pj %$
name
to a late date for the compilation of that Sutra and this is supported by certain
points of contact between it and the Mahasamaya Sutra, which is the twentieth in
the Pali Digha Nikaya, and the nineteenth in the Chinese Dirgha Agama (Nanjio,
;
1
See Dr. Watanabe s article in the
#jf
$| f for May-June, Tokyo, 1906,
where the structure of the VaiSravana Sutra is shown as follows
:
Group
I.
Vaisr.
Atin.
sections
veries
2
3
4
5
7
14(1)
=
=
=
=
=
=
a
10-15
18-23
27-32
50-55
33-35
36-48
1-5
Group II.
VaUr. Maha&an.
sections
10
12
=
=
Group
III.
section
xii,
xii,
xji,
11
12
13
14
Group IV.
sections
(2)=Mb*may.
9
[ Newly
13
14J
added
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
26
No. 545, col. 136). Thug we have in both the refrain putld pi tataa bahavo ....
Intla-numa maJiabbatd, and the same list of names of Mahiiyakshas, from Candano to
Janeiablo (PTS. ed., vol. ii, p. 257 ; iii, pp. 198, 204).
The transfer of names
from one class of supernatural beings to another points in the same direction. Thus
Datlldnukha (rev. 1. 1), who is really a Naga (see Bower MS., vi, 6, p. 224), appears
as aYaksha in the list of the Atanatiya Suttanta (PTS., vol. iii,
p.
205).]
The
text of the
Obverse.
1
jj-(modtja
mamapddau
(dhnnii bhik$a-)
2
(nfim)
i[J]m
j|x?x<7vaya
avoca^
W^ ksavo
te
apta-manas
(Bhaga)van
lfhaga(va)
4 ||xx[wff.](A)c7rajiia Indro
ca
5 xA
)tarah (sa)
(ft
x [inrtjliayak^o
(?/)a/r(.s
>
(IIi)mavamt<i-\s.rtd1aysi
2 Jayariito vijayariitaS
ca
V(H (Yf
xxxxxr(?/)rr
na
r>
8a(c7a):
Vidya-vlra
mahayakxa
Reverse.
1
H(/W<)
efta(m)
Himavata
xxxxx(/,-ws /o)tha
yafi ca
2
^xa!>^7ff(rZ>/ia)
?/rtksa-Z)ac?//(i)mi<kha
5 Satagirir
Ax-
^ Siirii
Atanati
maliayasrt^
yaksebhyo^m
abhy-
ksasa
4
Kumbhanda
ra-
glio>*a
ATANATIYA SUTRA
5
xxxg(ga)makulah t*&pi
sada 11 Cimba- 9
27
11
kurvathtu
me
mahabalah (ma)
TRANSLATION. 12
(Obverse, 1. 1) .... to-day, having reverenced my feet with his head, he too
ye monks (1. 2) .... (this charm) and apply it always
Keep,
disappeared there.
this
(1. 3) To ....
protection) from ill-disposed, mischievous Yakshas.
(for
your
said)
13
Yaksha, (1. 6) .... Mahakarna, the ardent, may he never cause injury (?)
quering
the mighty in magic, 13 the great Yaksba, ....
(End of
(Reverse, 1. 1) .... among them .... also the Yaksha Dadhimukha.
;
Himavantn, and ... (1. 2) .... among them Atanati, the much
the Yaksha.s favoured, of the sons (1. 3) .... they arc sent all also
pledged to the truth of the Buddha. (End of verse) 8. Kumbhandas, Riikshasas,
terrible beings ; (1. 4) .... always.
(End of verse) 9. The heart (or essence) of
Atanati, furthering all acts, promoting, (1. 5) .... they arc very much agitated ;
verse) 5. Satagiri,
renowned.
By
and may they all, coming together, give me protection always. (End of verse) 11.
Bimba (1. 6) .... (beings) living in water. (End of verse) 12. Apalala, the great
Naga, Elabhadra, the very powerful ....
6.
UPALI SUTRA
149^
(Plate
I,
No.
3,
Obverse).
This fragment is only a comparatively small portion of the original folio, which
must have been about three times as large. The lines of writing on the extant
As the text is written in arya verses, and as
portion consist of 22 or 23 syllables.
8
10
Read rdktam.
Note the position of the figure
So
orig.,
for 1 above
p. 4.
11
Apparently
for
Eldpatra;
cf.
Divyavadana,
p. 61, footnote;
be given.
"
Divyavadana,
in
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
28
we have
full text
easy to calculate that, in their complete state, the lines must have had 53 or 54
And as the extant fragment measures about 192 X 78 mm. (7^ x 3 inches),
syllables.
it is
For an
the complete folio must have had a length of about 480 mm. (18 inches).
Eastern Turkestan! Pothi this is a rather unusual length in proportion to its width of
about 3 inches
(or
writing- in Slanting
There
78 mm.).
are,
characters, but
on either
is considerably
The folio-number, having
writing rather difficult to decipher.
and it is impossible, therefore, to say
stood
the missing portion, is not known
whether the Pothi to which the folio belonged contained only one Sutra or a collec
making
nbraded,
Gupta
the-
<>n
tion of Sutras.
[The text of our fragment belongs to the Upfili Sutra of the Madhyama Agama,
where, in the Chinese translation, it is the 133rd, fasc. 32, in Nnnjio, No. 542, col.
1
In the Pali Majjhima Nikaya it is the 56th
131, in Tokyo, xii, 6, 59a, l-ll.
There is a French
Sutra, in the Pali Text Society s edition, vol. i, pp. 371-87.
it, by Leon Feer, in the Journal Asiatique, vol. ix, 1887, pp. 309 ff.,
translation of
and a German
,
is
Thus
it differs
and in
1
On the authors and dates of the Chinese translation of the Madhyama Agama see
Nanjio, No. 542, col. 127. [On the comparison of the Chinese and Pali versions, there is
an article by Anesaki, entitled Corresponding Texts in the Pali Majjhima Nikaya and the
Chines*
Madhyama Agama
in
=gf
& $! f&
for June,
Tokyo, 1904.
W.]
UPALI SUTRA
29
Obverse.
1
2
jKp^-praptasya vyakaranesw ~ smrtimato vipagyasya anabhma[fo-]
~
|j(s?/a) aprameyasya garhWtlrasya mauua-przlptasya
ksemam-karasya
vedi3
JUpali
dhya6
J!(pta)sya
s>a[va-]
Reverse. 4
jUpraiymdgSilasya a^ulaaya * samg&tyigasya) padakasya Bhagavata2
~ maya-rchido 6
ama|j[n/]c? rasya niskariiksai/a prabhasakarasya
1
hy
ynsya Bha^
3
f|(pfa)sya
Tathagatasya su^atasya uttama-pudgalasya amamasya ^
yas(o-)
4 (pfi)rvam
av/tarkitam
avac/ncZ
Upalt ^ purato
nigrantha -parixaJaA
varnam varnam
5
5(v)
tasya,
c?rt/r.s[o]
malakaro va malakrZr-an^emsi vd
Bhagavatas Tathagatasy^drha#rt/j,
vici-
a??/A--sambudcM8?/^
dnandax.
The
Chinese translation
may
attempt
is
are
parallels
numbers
made
taken
their
component
verses,
by
notes.
The stanzas
The Chinese
are indicated
by
letters.
The reading vyakaranffu ie quite distinct ; and it might be correct ; but it does not
accord with the general structure of the verses, and is more
probably a clerical error for
vyakaranasya, or rather vaiyakaranasya,
*
Here there is a vacant space in the line showing traces of a wrong syllable
having
been washed out by the scribe, see p. 54, footnote 8.
4
On
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
30
la-c
PALI.
SANSKRIT.
CHINESE.
!-<!
no apanatatya
natajM. 2].yfl
Satlmato
Am jjassa
40
4$
4 b
4c
4c Bdnfasya
5 c
5a
5 a Nagassa
5c
3o-c
bhlrasya mannapraptasya
Kscmaihkarasya veainah [1. 3]
dharmasthattya xafnrrtdtmanah
nifprapancast/a Jlfiagarafax taxya Srdraka Upall 4
bhirassa monapattassa
Khcmarhkarassa vedassa dhammatthassa sarhvutattassa
Dantassa nippapancassa Bhagavato tassa savako ham nsmi
II
5 b Patimantakassa
6a
animigaldniarafya 6u<ldhaxi/a
6 b AsnifO iya alpahlnattya pravivik\
dhonassa
pnnnadhajassa vltarflgassa
Pnrindadassa Sakkassa Bhagavato tassa savoko ham asmi
I
ham asmi
Aii(ivrtta]\Q,s\
vasippattassa Bhaga-
50
2a-c
4 a Nisabhassa appameyyassa gam-
52
anabhi-
vipassissa
natassa no apanatassa
7a
7b xxxxxxxxx
(W.
8a
/i/afrrfdhapya sa-
mita-vairasya
7 c Vlrasya viprasannasya Bhacravatas tasya srava[Rev., 1. \~\ka
Upall 7 II
8 a Sdttfaya Ihuripraj na*ya mahd-
prajnasya vltalobhasya
8i
Ahararrtyatya akfatya.
ptidgalasya atulasya
Or
c Saibg-iitipasyapadakasyaBhag-a-
9a
Srdvaka Upall 8
vata[l. 2]- tasya
9 a Asandayatya kuSalatya vainayi-
9*
10
katya tdralhivarasya
Anutfaratya
dAarmarucinsy*
prabhasakaraniskamksasya
py a
I
maha-
4e
II
(?)
pannassa vltalobhassa
8c
o/>rati-
c (?)
kassa sarathivarassa
Anuttarassa ruciradhammassa
I
nikkamkhassa
s sal
pabhasakara-
UPALI SUTRA
CHINESE.
SANSKRIT.
9c
PALI.
fl.
Updll 9
10 a Trsndcchido
10*
jsrdvaka
tasya
hi
buddhcuya
10 b
10
10
10
11
a,
tamarmclgalasya amamasya
mahalo
[1. 4] graprdpiaya
Srdvaka
Htiarjavatat
tatya
10
silvako
ham
II
Missing.
avitar-
[xxxxxxxx] purvam
I
nigranthaparisadah
varnarh varnarh [1. 5] Bud-
dhasya 11
(Prose about 17 syllables missing)
mala
tadyatha bhadanta
dakso malakiiro v(l malfika;
rantevasl
vil vici-
6, truth
eva,
gavnto
as mi
lie Purato
1.
Yaso
lie
Bha-
10
Updll 10
11 b
vlrassa
ham
gavato tassa savako
asmi
10 a Tanhacchidassa
buddhassa
vltadhumassa anupalittassa
lla
lib
Mfmacchidassa
II
vltadhiimasya anupraliipta8y&
b
Tathagatasya sugatasya ut-
31
nulhu pana
to
gahapnti ime
II
Seyyatha
pi
nam
II
gatasy^arhatah samyak-sam-
baddhasy^ananda
The
follows
results of the
may
summed up
be
as
(1)
s inadvertence.
That stanza might conceivably
have occupied an earlier position, so that the two initial stanzas of the
eulogium
may have stood on the preceding folio. But in view of the position of the corre
sponding third stanza in the Chinese translation, and of the fact that the order of the
stanzas in that translation
is
throughout the same as in the Sanskrit text, that hypo
seem probable.
(2) Fourteen verses, viz. 2 a and 2 b, 4 a and 4 i, 5 a and 5 c, 6 a and 6 c, 8 b and
9 b and 9 10 b and 10 can be definitely identified with certain Pali verses from
8
<?,
<?,
<?,
But, at the same time, the order of many of these verses differs from the
Thus Sanskrit 2 a and 2 b are identical with Pali 7 a and 7 b Sanskrit 5 c is
the same as Pali
Sanskrit
and 6(? are identical respectively with Pali
8 a and 9c ; similarly Sanskrit 86 and 8c with Pali 10 b and 4c Sanskrit 9* and
(3)
Pali.
6<?;
6<r
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
32
9
c are
c,
and Sanskrit 10
b is
I.
Only
Sanskrit 4ab,5a, and 10 c stand in the same order ns in the Pali version.
For some
other differences of order see below, note (5).
(4 ) The position of some verses, of which the text has not survived, relative to
the Pali text, can bo determined from certain words in the Chinese translation
translated in
is
reading prajnddfidyatya
the Chinese words
it is
Again verse 6 b
^^
|HE
that
#p
fjJJ
of
"layer
is
is,
^jjji
Similarly verso 7 a
in verse 5
or
^^
Chinese by
that
<Jgf,
is
is,
is
as
lamp
in note (2),
is
In verse 5
a,
as Dr.
Watanabe
has
iiffi
"pj*
jjjji]
J^ 0^,
that
Similarly in verse
pfllaSaydn<uya.
is,
who
is
deserving of an
ofl ering,
8^ the Chinese
who has
highest
which obviously renders the missing Sanskrit dhavanlyasya aksaxya, and the
corresponding Pali dhuneyyaaa yakkhanta (see below, note (G)).
(5) There remain seven verses, viz. 2c 4?, 7 be, 8 a, 9 a, 10 a, the identity of
which with Piili verses remains uncertain. According to Dr. Watanabe s arrangement
eyes
shown
2c
c,
Pali
9,
similarly
4c with
is
the same in
till
three versions
a.
and
and Chinese
Pali 5c, 7
ii
this is confirmed
by the
fact
have recognized no Pali parallel. The only Pali verse, as yet unaccounted for, is 8 c.
This verse, however, commences with tinnassa tdrayantassa
(Skr. tlrnasya tdrayatah),
and
is
viprasannatya.
(vlragga),
9<?
(mdydcchido),
which
is
recognized by
UPALI SUTRA
Dr. Watanabe.
With
33
be disentangled.
(6) In the case of some verses, the Sanskrit and Pali readings differ considerably.
Thus in the constant refrain of the stanzas the Sanskrit version has Srdvaka Vpdli
c,
who never returns to existence , and this suggests some such Sanskrit original as
andvrttakaxya.
Again in verse 7 a, the Chinese translation shows (above, note (4))
that the Sanskrit original must have read some such word as pradipatya, for which the
reads padakaata.
With regard to this discrepancy it
corresponding Pali verse
should be noted that the Sanskrit version actually lias that reading
padakaiya in
verse 8c of our fragment (rev. 1. 1), where the corresponding Pali verse 40 has
6!>
and this reading mittta*a occurs also in the Pali vere 5u. It is rather
improbable that the same epithet of Buddha would be repeated within the enme
hymn and it seems probable, therefore, that the Sanskrit version i.s correct with
muttatta
= Pali
4c)
verse 4c,
its
this
original
least,
the Sanskrit version rather than the Pali has preserved the
We have a somewhat similar case, when the
aprafipii<lf/atasya
in verse 8
b,
and niiamapydijala^ya
in verse
10
1 1.
The
Sanskrit text would seem to have read fllavfddha*ya with a similar transposition
within the compound to Sanskrit dharma-rucirasya in verse 9 b for Pali rucira-dliamt
ma**a in verse 3
b.
Some
differences of reading
striking point of difference between the two versions is the absence of the
(7)
eleventh stanza in the Pali version, and its presence in the Sanskrit, where it is
That stanza
corroborated, according to Dr. Watanabe, by the Chinese translation.
would seem to represent the short prose clause (from kadd to vannd
ti,
column) which immediately follows on the tenth stanza in the Pali version.
Ml
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
34
puzzling.
Incand
obv.
is
1.
Griinwedel
understood to
(see Professor
of Buddhism,
initial
Mythology
with an
TRANSLATION.
Of him who is noble, who has trained his soul, who has attained
who delivers religious instructions, 7 who possesses a recollection (of
who perceives everything," who feels neither inclination towards,
all happenings)
nor disinclination against anything, who is untouched by any passion, who has
attained master}- (over his senses), of that Blessed One Upali is a disciple.
4. Of him who is powerful, who is unlimited, who is profound, who has attained
the state of a Muni (or holy sage), who keeps himself in (perfect) peace, who possesses
who is established in the Law, who has control over himself, who
(true) knowledge,
has subdued (his appetites), who is without any swerving (from the right path), of
that Blessed One Upali is a disciple.
10
9
5. Of him who is the (white) elephant, who has his lodgings in the outskirts,
in whom the (ten) bonds are decayed, who delivered (from transmigration), who is
facile in argumentation, who is cleansed (from evil), who bears the banner of wisdom,
Stanza
2.
vol.
i,
1
Pali vipamtsa.
of Buddha.
elephant apparently in allusion to the story of the conception
snake; but in that sense the word would be as inappropriate of
Buddha as the epithet Yaksha in the Pali verse 106 see above, note (8).
Outskirts refers to the Buddhist sangharama settlements, in which Buddha
raided, and which lay on the borders or outskirts of towns.
"White
Naga means
also a
"
UPALI SUTRA
who
is
void of
is
(all)
passions,
35
to return to
One Upali
is
who
is skilled,
of that Blessed
Of him who
7.
is tranquil, to
One
M-hom
(all)
Upflli is a disciple.
final
knowledge
is
bath,
Of him who
8.
is
at peace,
13
who
known,
who
is
is
whose wisdom
is
manifold, whose
wisdom
is
great,
who is worshipful, who is the eye (of the world), who has no
rival, who has no equal, who has outgone the (five) attachments, who is familiar with
the words (of holy writ), of that Blessed One Upali is a disciple.
9. Of him who has no uncertainties, who is meritorious, who is versed in the
rules of discipline, who is the best of (religious) guides, to whom none is
superior,
who is brilliant in the Law, who is free from doubts, who causes enlightenment, who
destroys illusion (in others), who has no illusion (himself), of that Blessed Ono
is
Upali
is
void of desire,
the disciple.
10.
is
void of
ke,
welcome-one, .vho
who
is
11
who
is
the Buddha,
who
who
is
One Upali
community the
Line 5
of a
Arhat, the perfect Buddha, joyfully (Upali spoke a long neries of praises).
11
According to Dr. Watanabe, the Chinese translation has who has no anger , which
points to a Sanskrit reading akrodhanatya.
11
The final bath was symbolic of having completed one s training in sciences
(brahmanic) or morals (buddhistic).
11
The meaning of the metaphor is not quite clear; smoke may signify something
The
unsubstantial, such as idle talk (cf. verse 40 on p. 82), or something that obscures.
meaning may be that Buddha does not indulge in idle talk, or in darkening counsel.
II. Feer s translation
qui a cart la racine (du m*l) seems to be based on a reading
vita-mulatsa, which
is
D2
p.
562.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
36
7.
PRAVARANA SUTRA
1 49 1 (Plate II,
No.
1,
Reverse).
bears
Sarhyutta Nikaya
consisting
in our fragment
It would seem, therefore, that the figure 132 may refer to the total
Samyutta, whre the figure 2 may refer to the Pravarana Sutra, that sutra being
written on two folios of which the second alone is preserved.
The Sanskrit version of the sutra which is contained in our fragment, agrees,
on the whole, closely with the Pali original, as may be seen from the transcript
below.
But there
is
concludes with a
folio,
four verses.
Gatha, p. Ill, Nos. 1234-7, of the PTS. edition by Oldenberg and Pischel. They
Sanskrit text.
correspond to the Is1;, 5th, 6th, and 7th verses of the
Pnnarana Sutra is found in both Chinese translations of the Samyukta;
[The
word
making
confession of them.
ceremony, reference
may
be
j^J,
which
is
made
PRAVAJUNA SUTRA j^ V
vol. xiii, pp. 325-55 (text in Vinaya Pj^ka, vol.
translation of I-tsing, ch. xv, pp. 8&-9Q. 1
i,
pp. 157-7&),
37
ttn d
to
Takakusu
There exist also two separate Chinese translations of the Pravarana Sutra one
by Dharmaraksha (T. xiv, 8, 26 b, 18-17), and the other by pharmabhadra (T. xiv,
s
8, 6 a ff., N. 923,
j^). Dharmaraksha translation has some introductory
;
^W
concluding verses number only four, the same as in the Pali version.
not included in Nanjio s Catalogue, because it is preserved only in the Corean
verses
It is
and
its
Agama, named
is
also quoted
in
T. xxiv,
$|J JJJ fg fgf Fan-pieh-kun-toh-tmi (N. 1290,
translated under the later Han dynasty (A. D. 25-200).
4,
594),
Thus of the five Chinese versions, three, namely the two of the Saihyukta, and
that of Dharmabhadra, agree with the Sanskrit version in having seven verses, while
the other two, those of Dbarmaraksha and of the Fan-pieh-kuh-toh-lun, have only the
four verses of the Pali version,
From
the subjoined parallel transcripts, it will be seen that there are certain
between the Sanskrit and Pali versions of the hymn. With
differences of reading
reference to this point, it may be observed that Dharmaraksha and the Fan-pieh-kuhtoh-lun in their translations follow the Pali version and so does, on the whole, the
;
older of the
The
version.
and
two Samyukta
in that of
versions,
latter version
is
Dharmabhadra.
though
it
To the first period belong the Pali version, and its translation by Dharmaraksha
and Fan-pieh-kuh-toh-lun. Then comes a transition period, marked by the incoming
of the enlarged Sanskrit version, and represented by the older Samyukta translation.
we have
and which
is
In Dbarmaraksha s
[I-tsing transcribes the word prav&rana by
^|j |2.
jjjfe
translation of another Pravarana Sutra (N. 763), the word is repeatedly transcribed by
1
$fc
3 II
(T.xiv, 8, 286, 8,
9, 10,
[Thus in the fifth verse, the older Samyukta version, As a universal emperor, followed
and surrounded by his ministers, wanders through the world up to the great ocean ,
while the later
represents the PSli reading amaeca-parivarito tamanta anvpariycti,
Samyukta version, As a universal emperor, getting the faithful heart of his followers,
rather
with a merciful mind gives instruction, which the world reverentially accepts
1
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
38
A. D.
A. D.
The
220.
S566-317 (San-pao-ki,
separate translation
6, in
dynasty (A.D. 420-479), by Gurunarman, who worked from A.D. 435-443 (Sanfasc. 14-, in T. xxxviii, 1, 68 a
see also N.,
App., Nos. 78-9, col. 415).]
The Sanskrit text of the fragment is given below, in
columns with the
tan-ki,
parallel
apparently, is
giti
tither line, wh:ch scan as follows
>.
The
first verse,
thirty instants in
The
TEXT.
Obverse.
SANSKRIT.
1
Sugata- pratibha()
PALI.
te
Bhagav in avocat x
Va^tfa
ath*dyu$-
velayam
i-iavah
ti
ti
sammukha
2 bbu^eii Ihs,
paiiicacfait visuddhika
samitai paiiicaata
Sugata
ca bhik-
sjirhyojana-ba-
ncMana
cchidah 4 sarve k^mabhava mahar^ayah 1 Buddha
i
abhitthavi
sarupahi gathahi
Ajja pannarase visud-
magata
bhava
isi
ti
1 u
initial
4
tion, is here,
it
PRAVARANA SUTRA
SANSKRIT.
4 va
*>
prahina-jati-maranah krta-
n^a-bhava-cchidah
hartaro
yasya
punarbhavah
trsna-sal-
cita-trsna-
Simho
si
nirupadaiiam prahina-
Reverse.
1
6
bhay a-bhairava upadhim saraatikrantah 9 zsravd nihatasHvaya
4Cakravarti 8 yatliaraja8acivai2
1)
gramarii
3 sarthavaham anuttaram x upasate
vidyate
* hartaram
payirupasanti tevijja
hayino n 3 n Sabbe
dhavam s 12
dam
avocad
vijjati
taram
nan
[7] I-
Bhagavan
apta-
savaka
maccu-
sarva-^al-
anuttaram
satthavaham
8ravakastva I0 traividya-mrtyu5
u te
hayina 6 Putras
4 sarva ev^aite plavl hy atra na
Evaih vijita-sahgamarii
tanha-sallassa
vande
han-
adicca-bandhu-
ti
Pravarana-sutram
II
11
rev.
I.
Read
Read
Read tamatikrdnta.
10
Bead
vijita.
if it were
Read nihaiat.
Read tvdm.
Pu
u See
footnote 2, p. 26.
"
Read abhyanandan.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
40
TRANSLATION.
[Vfiglsa,
Am I welcome,] O Sugata?
You
Then the reverend Vaglsa, at that time,
Merc
1.
is
2.
the
necessity of re-birth
no
longer arc they liable to birth and death, having attained their ideal, and being
unswayed by the action of the senses
;
longer to
its
nnascence.
terrors
5.
This spoke the Blessed One. 18 With receptive minds the monks welcomed
said by the Blessed One.
(Here ends) the Pravarana Sutra.
what was
8.
CANDR6PAMA SUTRA
II,
No.
2,
Reverse).
folio is
broken away.
2| inches). Its full length may have been about 284 mm. (or 11 inches). It bears,
on either side, six lines of writing in Slanting Gupta character^ and on the left
margin of the reveroe
side,
the
folio
numlwr
23.
It contains portions of
two
sutras,
to
men across the sea, or rivtr, of mundane existence.
;
ferry
logical sequence ii not quite clear; for the hymn which immediately procedei ii
not
the
Bleteed
by
spoken,
One, but by his disciple Vaglsa. It may refer to the preceding
main clauses of the But, which contain the Buddha s declaration of
Sariputra s and the
other 6re hundred monks innocence of all offence.
"
Figuratively
"
Tho
CANDR6PAMA SUTRA
41
fifth line of the obverse side, the other, which is named the
As
Candropama Sutra, beginning on that line and continuing on the reverse.
the Candropama is a small sutra, the high folio number shows that the folio must
Kassapa Section, in
vol.
ii,
pp.
197-200.
Agama
it
occurs in Fasc. 41, Nanjio, No. 544, and Tokyo, xiii, 4, 37 6, 24.
There is, how
ever, also an older Chinese translation in Fasc. 6, and Tokyo, xiii, 5, 37 1, 15-18.
There exists, moreover, a separate Chinese translation of the sutra by Dfinapfila, in
Tokyo,
term cahnxmdn, and the clause repeating the praise of Kiisyapa (rev., 11. 1 4), are
not found in the Pali version, but occur in the Chinese translation, which, therefore,
clearly, was made from a Sanskrit text, such as in our fragment.]
,
The
Obverse.
1
mana
sam
amanusyo
va naivasi J
4 syat\ tasmat tarhi bhiksava
stoka-stokam muhurta-muhurttarii
pfir-
IJead iramana.
vol.
1,
20, vol.
4
i,
p, 8,
bhkfava
flibilant
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
42
5
vyam s
grhe
6 ksun
Evam maya
De *ff
samaye Bhagavam
armmtrayati
iva
ekasmim
firutam
Raja-
viharati
navaka
riityam
hrn>ian/a|!
Reverse.
1
sya eittaih
tadyatha caksusmarii
kulany upasamkramata
jarodapanaiii va nadi-dur^a J
vakrsya
Kasyapo
hi bhiksu^
puruso
nityaih
candr6-
tadyatha
caksusnarii
5 maiii
Kasyapo
6 hrlmaih
The
columns
upasaihkramati
SANSKHIT.
Obv.,
1.
5.
ekasmim
Rajagrhe
shown
PALI.
labha-sutkcra-slokam
Bhagavam
8
Savatthiyaih
viharati
Dcvadattaih
arabhya
bhi-
candupama bhikkha-
[1.
is
6]k.?un
ve kulani upasamkamatha
apakasse va kayam apakasse va cittam
i
nicca
\
CANDROPAMA SUTRA
SANSKRIT.
Rev.,
1.
1,
PlLI.
cittarii
sya
kulany
cak-
seyyathapi
upasariikramata
tadyatha
evam eva
vyavalokayed
viharata
candropama
navaka iva
aprayalbha
nityarh
hriman/a/i
kule?v
kayam
avakf?ya
ava-
bhiksus
\\ltyath
viharati
candropamo
navaka
apragalbho
[1.
iva
hriman
kulesv
vakrya kayam
4]
Kassapo bhik
khave candupamo kulani u pasarhkamati apakasse va kayam apakasse
va cittarii nicca navako kulesu
appagabbho
pUTU^OJartidapdnam vd nadl-durgam
va ava-
vd parvata-vifa^l. 5]marii
kulev
apragalbhah
avakr^ya
kayam avakr^ya
cittarii
upasarhkramati
kirii
kulany
manyatha,
tarii kirii
mannatha, &c.
&c.
TRANSLATION.
Thus
has been heard by me. At one time the Blessed One was staying in
Referring to Devadatte, who boasted of his gain and honour, he said to
his disciples, Ye monks should resemble the moon, always be like the new moon,
it
Rftjagriba.
modest, unassuming
controlling
your
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
44
a look-out for old
precipices
among
]>eople.
the people, controlling his body and his mind (while he) moved among the
Just an a man with eyes keeps a look-out for old (disused) wells, or impassable
holes in a river, or dangerous precipices on a mountain, controlling his body and his
mind, even so Kasyapa lived a monk, resembling the moon, always like the new
moon, modest, unassuming among the people, controlling his body and his mind
(while he)
NOTE
moved
Piili
of Diinapfila
it is
rendered by
ty
an
What
Jar&lapdna and
Sanskrit or
is
about.
Dictionary.
rendered by
think ye
&c.
its
(Jj
^jy ~jt ,
old, disused well.
unwary wanderer
9.
still,
in the country.
&AKTI SUTRA
The conclusion
has been
des<
a transcript
the obverse,
ol
M hile the rest of the fragment is occupied with the Candropama Sutra.
[According to Dr. Watanabe, the sutra of which we have here the conclusion,
corresponds to the Satti Sutta which is the fifth of the Opamma Samyutta in the
Pali Sarhyuttii Nikiiya, in the Pali Text Society s edition, Part II, p. 265.
There is,
however, as may be seen from the subjoined comparative table, no actual textual
occurs in the later translation, Fasc. 47, Tokyo, xiii, 4, 75 a, 12-14, where, however,
it bears no name.
In the older Chinese translation it is not found.
As the com
parative table: shows, the Chinese version is a translation, supplied by Dr. Watanabe,
of a rather shorter Sanskrit version than that of our fragment.]
6AKTI SUTRA
SANSKRIT.
PALI.
[Clause
eva
Evam
5.]
bhikkhave
klio
1.
1.
Obv.,
Ye &ra-
mana va brahmana va
muhu-
stoka-Btokam
bahulikata
yanikata
vatthukata anutthita
paricita
ddha
susaraa
va-
Tassa ce ama-
rta-muhurtam sarva-
vayeyuh
9ara
sa
cet
te-[\.
2]
kacid
upasanikramati vyado
va yak^o va amanu-
syo va naivasiko va
avatara -preksi
kilamathassa
vigha-
it
3] ram na labhate
alambanam anyatra sa
[1.
If
CHINESE (W.).
oramanas or Brah-
who
are
seeking
the
vyado va
yako va
amanuyo va naivasiko va
[Clause 6.] Tasmat
iha bhikkhave evarii
sikkhitabbam
Metta
4] syat v
tarhi blii-
[1.
Tasmat
ksava
etoka-stokam
muhurta
muhurttam
tra-cittam
[1.
bhavayita-
Therefore
learn
shall
all
Bhiksus
to
have a
at
all
repeatedly always
times up to the
5]vyam\n
susama vaddha
hi kho
bhikkhave sikkhitabban ti n
ricita
ti
Evam
B$ ft ^H $l
same
1.
this sutra,
4),
W.]
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
46
TRANSLATION.
If
will,
moment
after
moment, minute
after minute,
exercise a mernful
all
4] Therefore,
3
up to the time of milking cows,
10.
moment
to
exercise a merciful
&UKA SUTRA
and
\ (Plate II,
No.
3, Reverse).
These two
folios are in
these high numbers, the two folios must have belonged to a large pothl, containing
several suti as, possibly a pothl of one of the sections of the Madhyama Agama.
Each
Gnpta
characters.
are inscribed with a small portion of the Suka Sutra, which is one of the
In the Chinese translation of that Agama it is
sutras of the Madhyama Agama.
They
the 170th
to
sponds
siitia (Nanjio,
thj
135th
sutra,
it
corre
pp.
It will be seen, however, from the subjoined parallel transcripts, that
though the general tenour of the Sanskrit and Pali versions is the same, their
correspondence, in ]K>int of wording, is of a very loose character ; neither version
iii,
202-6).
can be called exactly a translation, or transcription, of the other. The Suka Sutra
explains the doctrine of Karma, or Retribution, by way of enumerating a series of good
or bad retribu jve effects, in a future existence, of varieties of
human conduct
in the
the Sanskrit
1
On
t ?xt
is
In both
respects,
naivasika
tee footnote
3 on page 41.
clause,
Sutta, is Hupplied from the preceding TJkka Sutta (p. 264, clause 2): gadduhana-mattam
pi metta-citlam bhactyya.
SUKA SUTRA
ever, according to Dr.
Watanabe
47
sutra,
which, in extent, differ from one another but from the indications in our fragment
of the Sanskrit version regarding the order of the retributive states (see below), it is
the translation of which it must be the original.
possible to determine
;
{-The five Chinese translations are those noted in Nanjio s Catalogue as Nos.
Of
and 783.
these No.
542
is
542
an integral
part of the Madhyama Agama ; all the others are separate translations of the sutra.
In the case of No. 739, the textual extent of the sutra accords, as Dr. Watanabe
observes,
much more
Pfili
version.
The
latter, after
a general
Chinese translation*, with the exception of No, 739, insert, after the opening remark,
an introductory story of a white dog in the house of a grhapati, or householder,
named Suka in Srftvastl, a precis of which is given in No. 611. In these transla
tions, accordingly, the sutra is represented as having been spoken in reply to a query
No. 739,
ii,
p.
196)
as well as
series of retributive
included in the
No. 739
is
described /.as a
In
fche.
Madhyama Agama,
Brahman
grhapati.
On
ip
|fte
number of those
it is
With
if>"Jfehe
original, Dr.
serial order of
I
State.
Watanabe
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
48
No. 739
for in
is
No. 542, which is included in the Madhyama Agama, agrees with that
in the Pali veision, while No. 783 has a peculiar order of its own.]
The Sanskrit text of the two folios is given below in parallel columns, with
translation,
<!xtrac*;ed
Folio 56.
s edition, vol.
Obverse.
PALI.
SANSKRIT.
1
[vii]
lanaih
pp. 204-5.
ii,
daSa
dharma alpa-6akya-
Page 204.
[vii]
Idba manavaekacco
va puriso va issamanako
ittbl
&c.
boti,
so
samattena,
kammena
&c.,
evarh
appcsakkbo
hoti
appe-sakkba-samvattanika esa &c.
;
2 samvartaniyah
Das"a
[viii]
labha-satka-
:i
yukah
parasya
ra-
ryatra -pradanam x
bodhicitt-
4 Tathagata
samanako
boti para-labha-sak-
tena
ttena
otpadah
:
bimba-karanam x ma-
tapitniarh
pratyudgamanain x
jati
aryanilrii
pratyudgamanarh x
pararii
[viii]
dharma,
Page 205.
issam bandbati
Read iakya.
Read yatra, the
yadidam anissamanako
Read anirgyukah.
y being a clerical error
sign of r above
>
&c.,
na
&UKA SUTRA
Fol. 56.
Reverse.
SANSKRIT.
1
das*a
tii
PALI.
dharma nlcakatame
kula-samvartaniyah
[ix] Dafia
yah
amatrjnata
asramanyata ~
[xi]
abhivadetabbam na abhivadeti
apitrjiia-
matapitror
as us rusa
as"us*rusa
deti
mca-kula-jatiinam
[x]
DaSa
samvattanika
[xii]
esa, &c. n
maggarahassa
maggaih
pratyut//ia-
deti
sakkatabbarii
sakkaroti
matrjfiata
pitrjnata
Fol. 57.
nam
asanen^abliinimamtranam x
matapitroh ^u^rusa
aryanam
sakkatabbarh na sakka-
roti
aryanam
kula-sariivartaniya
Obverse.
so tena
karnmena ucca-
kulinohoti uccakulina-samva;
Read abrdhmanyald.
Read asandd. The vowel mark for i over d is really meant for the
superscript
curve which marks the virama ; and d should have been written below the
line, exactly as
in the case of the final
Read aiuinua,,
And
Read aamvartanlyah.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
60
PALI.
SANSKRIT.
~ adattadana
samadapa-
nam v ^dattadanasya
4 ca
varna-vadita
adattadanena
upacchedah aryanarii
vrty
10 -
">arasya
labhena n^atta-
~
yo durbl ,2&.sji-yacana ca ime da6a dbarma alpa-bhoga-earhvar-
taniyLh
[xii] Da,4a
dharma
mahabho^a-sarhvarta-
danam
da.4a
2 niyah
katame
adadattjidana-vairamanarii
[ix]
mala-
mena
evaiii
samattena
evaiii
m rayaiii
uppajjati
no ce kiiyassa bhedaparam,
&c.,
appabhogo boti
appa-
attad;ina-vairamanasya varna-
mala-gandha-vilepanam
vaditii
yavasatbapadipeyyarh so te
na kammena evaiii samattena
3 adattadiina-vairamanena attama-
nata
sey-
samadinnena kayassa
bheda param marana sugatirii
saggam lokaiii uppajjati no ce
evaiii
tamanata parasya
4 labhena attamanata parasya labh-
6dyogah
danam x
kayassa bheda
danasy^abhyanumodan - adhimuktanam
yacaiia ca
mahabhoga
samvartanlyah
jati, &c.,
bhogarsamva >tanika
vrtiy-.
marana
sugatiiii
Read
pararii
maha-
esa, &c. n
6UKA SUTRA
51
NOTES.
The
following-
a",
A"-
a"
ad(ttfdd<nta-<tn>dddj>ana)
fj
TRANSLATION.
56
a.)
[vii.]
great power.
Which
ways
They
are,
mind
ways
family.
[x.]
Which
Ten ways of conduct there are that needs lead to re-birth in a high
family.
ways of conduct ? They are, honouring one s mother, honouring
"
According to Dr. Watanabe, the Chinese translation has not honouring the
Sramanas, not honouring the Brahmanas which presupposes the textual reading atramanajftatd, abrahmanajnata.
,
E2
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
62
11
one
s father,
one
not being contemptuous towards persons born of a low family these are the ten
in a high family.
ways that needs lead to re-birth
Ten are the ways of conduct that needs lead to re-birth in a state of small
:
[xi.]
Which
means.
ways of conduct
of enterprises on one
;s
s self
means. Which arc those teu ways of conduct ? They are, giving largesse*, abstaining
from taking tning* wrongfully, speaking in favour of the abstention from taking
not
things wrongfully, rejoicing in the abstention of taking things wrongfully,
the
rejoicing in
ill
of another, pro
success
11.
folio
a complete
each
left
folio,
script
is,
II,
No.
4,
Obverse).
It
Mahapratyangira Dharanl.
7
It bears, on
measuring 245 x 46 mm. (9 T x If inches).
of calligraphic writing in Upright Gupta characters, and on the
side,
of the
the folio-number
6.
The character
of the calligraphic
manuscripts, shown on Plate XVIII,and fully discussed by Professor Liiders (pp. 140ff.).
For the present purpose, it will suffice to point out that the peculiar Khotanese rr
occurs regula
-ly
in vajrra (obv. 11. 2, 4) and bhadrra (rev. 1. 2), and optionally in the
but not
1.
1), or prra (prrabhd, obv. 1. 4, prraSattds, rev. 1. 2) ;
mundra (rev. 1. 1) and graftdndm (rev. L 4), nor ever in Irum (rev. 11. 3, 4). Also,
the occurrence of the peculiar prone \ in mdllkd (obv. 1. 3) may be noted.
To judge from the number of the folio, the pothl to which it belonged
in
it
53
not uncommon.
There
are, e. g.
Temple
in
the
peculiar
text of
No. 1016.
[With regard to these Chinese translations, Dr. Watanabe notes that both were
made under the Yuen dynasty (A.D. 1280-1368). The other translation (Tokyo, xxvii,
6, 21 i -22fl ), which is not noticed in Nanjio s Catalogue, was made by ShlMo-pa,
who died A.D. 1314 (see Nanjio, No. IfO, col. 458). The whole of the Sanskrit text
1fl
lfl
6, 60fi*- )
n ft stone tablet,
No, 155, col. 444), and incised by the court chaplain
J^
which was set up in the court monastery
$J ^jp, or Blue-dragon-temple
It may be added that the Dharanl exists also in the Japanese Tripiin Chan-fin.
fl
taka.]
The portion
main, a
or less corrupt.
It runs as follows
Obverse.
5
4
6 ca Santa vaidai6a -pujita sauma-rupa maha-Sveta arya-tara maha2 bala ~ apara vajrra-Samkala c^aiva vajrra-kauworl kularhdhari vajrra3 hasta ca vidya karhcana-mallka kusurhbha-ratana Vairaucana-kurya
The DharanT
471-3.
pp. 470,
Dh&rani
is
is
There
Tathagat^l^a-titataj^tram
into Tibetan,
(14),
fols.
possibly
if it
were rtha or
ttha.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
54
fl
4 rth-aufjnlsa vajrreiiibhamana
ndl *
vajrra-
ca vajrra-kanaka-prrabha lauvana
ina!
Reverse.
kamal-aku
ca 6veta ca
6aSi-prabha
ete
ity
mundra-gana
sarve
raksarii kurvarii-
timama Kumara-bhadrrasya n Om x ri^i-gana-prra^astas Tathagat-o^nitrfirii j ambbana hum trurh stambhana hum trurh para-vidya-
3 $a hurii
hum
sarhbhaksana-kara
grahanaiii
i
Chinese
Amoghaviijra
Dr. Watnnabe,
with
transcript,
its
Watanabe
Dr.
given below.
is
edition,
the
of
right
romanization
supplied by
hyphen which
or
two together in the
and the asterisk placed on
^,
;
an
as
indicating a long
ijj|,
The romani?;ation
vowel.
is closer
to
n* @ tt it m
n $$ & mya
ma
a#s-#e &* w* w-w &* a* ^ 8J * ff w K a
ma
mffimm m m n a -a m m m ft m st m n H-K fj* ^ m% % % ma m- JiffiMi fa ^ Ji * ft Jg
ma
M^m% m %^nm
slm
\>i
shi
bei
ra
sho
sa
ta
ta
ka
ra
eci
ta
sen
slia
riv
ri
ya
ba
ba
ka
dei
bei
flj
pu
ka ma(ba)
ra
ta
ra
ji
ko
raa
ri
ro
BO
ta
ni(ji)
ra
ku ran da
pa
ri
ba
ka
pa
ra
ffl
ba
ji
ra
ji
ka
is;
ra
ka
sha
ta
For
na
sei
bi
ni
ba bei ro
The
vijri nbhamana.
ta
ta
eha na
ku
ya
2a
th<;re
false
being txyrra-teiwft.
iij
and
it.
fol.
na
ri
to
ri
shi
ni
ka
ku
so
on
ba
na had been
syllable
ken sha na
Two
7a v
7
Read laucand (for locana).
a vacant space showing marks of the obliteration of two aksaras.
aksaras which the scribe deleted, but for which he forgot to sub
As the parallel texts show, only one is wanted, the required word
is
ba
elm
ji
ka
ra
na
K*#i$ $***
sba
shi
Fol.
6 a,
ni(ji)
bei
til
ka
siia
ma
ka
pa
ra
*
ba
i&-x
ki
sha
ra
56
* a m B-H e
t-
sha
ro
na
ba
ra
ji
ton
*-*i
sha
se
ra
pa
ba
TRANSLATION.
1
and
Videha),
1.
[large-eyed]
10
family-prop (?), (1. 3) with thunderbolt in hand, magic (personified), with a golden
12
garland, with the jewel of safllower, (1. 4) with the diadem of Vairocbana s race,
with knitted brows, 13 of the golden hue of the thunderbolt, with (observant) eyes, with
moon
These
brightness.
1S
mystic marks may they all give protection to me, Kumiira-bhadra
Hail to the lauded of all the Rishis, the crown of the Tathagalha
Hum truth,
are her
many
crusher
of
all
tn
enemy
magic, demolisher
According
to Col.
53) the Tibetan version has lha rnams kyis mcltod-ma. adored by
This points to a different original, perhaps rihadem, or vaiivadeva.
all the gods.
Note,
in this connexion, the Nepalese reading void-era.
Waddell
(see footnote
1, p.
11
On Tara, see Col. Waddell s article in the Journal of the Koyal Asiatic Society for
1894, pp. 51 ff., and his Lamaism, pp. 358 tf. also Professor Griinwedel s Mythologic dc8
63 ff.,
Buddhismus, pp. 142 ff., and especially M. Foucher s L Iconographic Bouddhiquc,
80 ff., 86 ff., 101 ff. also M. Blonay s Materiaux pour servir a 1 histoire do la deesfce Tara.
;
]>p.
12
(cf.
Vojratunda Dharani, a charm intended to protect the harvest-fields againfet the ruin-causing
Nagas, or mythic serpents. This Dharani, as Col. Waddell states, nevertheless does not
mention Garuda, but is associated with a brahman, called Vishnu, and with Vnjrapani,
who, according to Prof. Gninwedel s Mythology of Buddhism, p. 160, is in the main
a weather-god and protector of the Nagas. Hence it seems probable that vajratunda in
the title of the Dharani does not allude to Garuda, but is really a synonym of vajrannbha.
And vajratundl, meaning vajranabhika, would thus be explained in its application to the
It would seem that the Buddhists, in adopting the Vishnu
female counterpart Tara.
and hence the ambiguity.
legend, substituted tunda for ndbha
A umdra-bhadra was the name of the writer of this manuscript of the Dharani, or of
;
1(1
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
56
columns
parallel
No.
Fol. 6 a,
Amoghavajra
15(C
&
1.
It
ca 6ftnt&
Yaidai6a-pujit& sauma-rupu
Ktah&ivetl
arya-tfira
mahabala
Transcript.
makabara
bajira-kaeata
ha makabiniya tata
kenshana-manka kusoonbarataiw
eciba Beiroshana-
line 36,
[vai&lla] ca fiflnta
vaidaha-pujanta samya-rupri
mahfttaijft
arya-ntarya mahabala
aparajanta vajrra-^akala caiva
vajrra-kumarl kuladharal_____
vnjrra-hasta ca vaidyai (1. 38)
kiicanau-malika kusumarahna vavl caiva Vairficana-
kuryaniusmsa vajrrembhama-
kuiiaritoBhinieha bijyarinbama-
na ca
na sha
vajrra-kannka-prrabha
bajira-kanaka-paraba
vajrra-kanaka-prraba
lacana vajrra-ntundl ca
sniuta ca kamalaksa
lauvanil vajrra-tundl ca
ca kamalaksa
svetii
fihibeita slia
f
Ity ete
a^i-prubha
Om
Kumfira-bliadrrasya
hum
hum
truiii
etambhana-kara
II
Ama
raBa-jrana-prraSastayas
tathagataugmsa Saidhantapattai
hu dru
jabana-kara
hu dru
etabana-kara
hu dru mohana-kara
hu dru mah&vaidya-sabaksaiiakara hu dru astavl^atta-naksadrana prasadhana-karl hu dru cattui
II
jnihlihana
starbbhaiia
truiii
sase-prral
II
risi-gana-prrafiaetaa
thigat-ofnfy*
huih truth
ehase-paraba
(the remainder not supplied)
mundra-gana
sarve raksant kurvamti
mama
kamarakieha
sarva-diuitaD&m
I
satlna nakfadranft
prasadhana-ka
hum trum
narva- yakRa-riiksasa-
hu dru cattura-6antana
grah&nam
vi-
grahana vai[dhvasana-kari]
67
Turkestani texts are practically identical with the text of our fragment, while the
vaideha-pujita
Nepalese.
fol.
eaunw-rupa
4 a, I 4, [viflalAJkRl
vaidcva-pfijita
mahateja
mnhrnivcta
arya-tarii-mahabala
arya-tara mahabala
jviilii
6antft
somyn-rupa
pamsula-vilsiiil
II
vajrra-kanaka-prabha
vajra-hastfi maliavidya
Tatliagata-kul6sniKrih.il vi^ruta ca
vikrtika vajraka-suprabha
locana vajra-tundl ca
I
II
locana
vajrra-hundi ca
Sveta ca kamalaksa
foti-prabbft
Ity eta
mudra-gana
sarve raksarii
kurvamtu
II
II
6anta-citta ca
atma-guiia sasl-prabha II
Ity eta maha-mudra-ganilh sarvaca
kurvantu I
earva-raksaiii
matr-ganas
mama Barvva-satvanan ca II te ca (5 a)
|
sarvva-buddlia-bodhisatva mabarddhikfth
na ina 1st ulhiib sa pi a day ant u sarvai thaf
siddliin ca
Om
Om
tathagatanff am Sittamtapatre
hum trum
jabhana-kara
hum trum
stambhana-kara
hum trum mauhana-karam
hum trum mahavidya-sarnbhaksanakara hum trum sarva-duBtanam
I
stambhana-kara
dadantu
II
II
sarvvarsi-gana-pra^astebhyah
A
tathagat<
)8nTsa-Sitatapatro
II
hum
karl
I)
hum bram
stambhana-kari
II
hrlm
hram sarvva-vidya-cchedapa-kart
hum trum
sarva-yaksa-raksasa-
grahanaiii vi[dhvamBaua-kara]
hum
hraili
II
&c. sanra-yakf^-riktaia-
grahanam vi[dbvamsftiia-karl
ll]
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
68
SATAPANCA&ATIKA STOTRA
12.
five
hymn
contain
folios
vii.
of the
portions
of one hundred verses, which
is
001
"
3
,
Khora 005
b.
The
fact
of Matricheta
"
hymns
in
they belonged
suggestive of the popularity
Buddhist settlements in Eastern Turkestan (see
The
the
is
The
hymn, and of
its
charming com positions are equal in beauty to the heavenly flowers, and the high
Con
principles which they contain rival in dignity the lofty peaks of a mountain.
sequently in India till
father of literature.
course
is
All those
who compose
his experiences in
religious
the Indian
(A.D.
"
"
",
priests
",
and
men
by
great literary
During that stay in Nulanda, I-tsing
into Chinese, and transmitted his trans
of his age.
China (ibid.,
as
notice
we have
hymn
is
&ATAPAftCA6ATIKA STOTRA
History of
59
Buddhism
pp. 88-93.
(A.D. 1573-1608)
(transl. by Schiefner),chap. xviii,
Taranatha agrees with I-taing in the latter s high estimate of the excellence and
He says (ibid., p. 91) that Miitricheta s
popularity of Matricheta p religious poems.
hymns
lands
which
Dr.
Thomas
by
Prof. Sylvain
345
444
fl .,
vol. ix,
tradition,
it
and
ff
Prof.
translations the
proceeds to speak of the three most eminent hymn-writers in the following order
may
Chanakya
(loc.
cit,,
p.
88).
This
tradition
tury B.C. The only certain dates are supplied by the co-operation of Dignaga,
in the sixth century A.D., in \ the. production of the above-mentioned Misraka
Stotra; and by the translation of the Satapancas atika Stotra by I-tsing in
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
60
A. D.
675-685.
It
earlier
by many centuries.
For centuries aftor
(loe.
to
pp.
142
f.).
It
is
known
and
its
give us an idea of
The
in
The
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
last
fragment
illustrates
vii,
B 2
B3
1
001
b.
an interesting point.
different modei; of
MS. from
in the Hoernle
This mode
is
hymn and
;
it
No
1.
This fragment, at
It hears,
on either
its
(Plate IV,
2, Obverse).
mm. (or
11$ x 8 inches).
On the
made up
number of missing syllables can be
and the full number of syllables on the com-
No.
It is about twelve
SATAPANCA&ATIKA STOTRA
plete line
There
are,
ei
the loss of the folio-number, and along the lower edge of the
fragment. The missing portions of the text are conjecturally supplied, in smaller
italic type, almost entirely from the suggestions kindly supplied by Dr. Thomas, on
the basis of his reading of the Tibetan version in the Tanjur. Including these comple
the
ments the
text,
Obverse.
1
*dhate n^otjjva
asadharanam parai
dhrtam\ ksane
2 [fi-^]ktam [d]ur-uktarh tu
sarajnah
tdsu hi jdli-
25
asamkhyeyair evarn udyarnata tvaya vyavasaya-dvltlyena praptam pa(c/rt)f|t artuttaram^ 26 Anlrsyitvd prakjteu hman anavamatya ca agatva sadraai 2 spardliaiii tvam loke
2
^re^tbatam gata 27 Hetu.s(t/) j samabhivyaktir gundndm na phaleu te tena sarnyak-pratipada tvayi nithaih ga(^a) guna a 28 Tath*
u
Iti
tribhir
8
atmap/?raA:rawa^m
ndm
[?i]ltas
eva pd~
2
6 da-rajariisi te 29
prakdrena
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
62
Reverse.
1
do?esu
gunah
2 py
tvaya
pralirtarii
e?i|f/a 3
a]tma-samg/dne vjasan^api na
sathcita
sud\ sijam a-
esiirii
yatliii
n^anyatra drSyate 32
Upaghat-awranavam
mita-
lauki-
tarhi
kalarii [jj]ri;|arcdaara/ x
kain^ 33
yath*ai[.sa?>t
Tatha ja/nf|bhrtya
Advam-
gimarhnacn
(rt)kariipc
bhimukhlkrte 36 Ajnana-
sirva-dharmanarii tvat-sthairye
timz ra-ghnasya
jnan-alokasya
te
mujne
pratispardhitum
akdnksl
surya eva
6 na
si(!hyaJH(ti)
sam x na ca
38 [xxxx
37 Malmatvam
ev^ayanti
vag-b[w]d(fZ/i)i-dehanam
sarac-candr-ambar-ambha-
HiidcZ/nm
prdij$krtayas
tatha
.,]
NOTE.
regard to the marks of interpunction, generally used in texts written in
Slanting Gupta, it mny be noted that the place of the modern Indian bar is taken
by a dot, which may or may not have a sort of tail added to its top, though this
distinction is not al\\ays very noticeable.
The dot with a tail resembles a prone
comma, and in Dhe transcripts it is represented as such. As a rule, the single dot,
or prone comma is used to indicate the end of a half-verse (in poetry), or a half-clause
(in prose, as in the Prav&rana Sutra, obv. 1. 1, p. 38, and in the Suka Sutra, pp.
48-51), while the double dot (corresponding to the modern double bur) indicates the
end of a full verse or a full clause. In the double dot, the two dots are arranged
vertically (as in the symbol of the visarga), and cursively run together, so as to make
10
In
up a bar of doti, or even an actual bar (as in the Catuhsataka Stotra, p. 77).
the transcripts it is represented by two dots, or two prone commas, or a bar, as the
case may be.
Both signs single dot (prone comma) and double dot (bar) are
11
regularly omittod, if they would come to stand after a visarga or after a virama.
A few very raro exceptions do occur; e.g. in the Vinaya Text, No. 149^, rev. 1. 2
"
*
Read c draranavan.
Read gunanam.
The same kind of cursive double dot, or bar, is also used
which a vertical double dot is the well-known technical mark. See Pravarana Sutra, rev.
2
1. 2 (
pnrivaritah p. 38), and PI. II, I
11
The viram i itself has the shape of a prone comma, on which see footnote 1 on p. 5.
.
SATAPANCA^ATIKA STOTRA
63
(p. 39).
On
note
1, p. 5,
TRANSLATION. 12
To one like thee, oh well-conducted one, though it be
[Obverse.] Verse 23.
given, a good which is not shared by others, is not indeed harmful, (but) neither is it
helpful.
Verse 24.
the well-said
Verse 25.
From
but the
By
thee, oh
poison,
was taken
into the
mind
at once,
was avoided.
life
said, heroism was shown for the sake ofbodhi in a variety of births.
Verse 26.
So, by thee, through three incalculable periods exerting thyself,
seconded by thy resolution, the highest dignity was attained.
Verse 27. Xot envying the high, nor disdaining the low, nor going into competi
tion with equals, thou attainedst pre-eminence in the world.
Verse 28. Thy distinction was with regard to causes, not to effects
complete success the virtues reached in thee their highest point.
hence by thy
12
This is based substantially on a translation, kindly furnished by Dr. Thomas, of the
Tibetan version of the hymn in the Tanjur. Those portions of the translation, which are
not represented in the Sanskrit text, are
printed in small italic type.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
64
way was
works, that the very dust of thy feet caused religious merit to arise.
Verse 30. !3vils were pulled up and removed, virtues were increased and purified:
thereby, oh good-minded one, thou hast attained the highest success.
even a
proj>ensi1y
to
them was
left in
thy
own
race.
that
struction,
sidered, the
(natural)
laics,
Sirlsha tree.
ewn
the firmness
to
take
its
by the
place
side
all
the
of the
13
Verse 37.
ignorance and bast the light of knowledge, even the sun does not succeed.
Verse 38. And even the natural conditions of the celestial waters
surrounding
the autumnal moon fall into dirtiness, and those of the
body, intelligence, and voice
(of
men) do not
(attain) purity.
No.
2.
a
.
12 inches) respectively.
Their breadth
The
mm.
45
string-hole
mm.
is at
95
(or
3|")
is
from the
1| ).
but the traces of them, remaining on the damaged left margin, are not
From the total
distinctly legible, though they seem to suggest the numbers 6 and 7.
(or
of writing
&c.),
small buffoon
to the
(dim. of bhanda}.
Compare the similar implication, in the
as mini icing sensibility.
name mimosa,
6ATAPANCA&ATIKA STOTRA
number of
65
that the missing 47 verses would have occupied three and one-half folios
that is to
say, three fully inscribed folios, and a fourth, of which only one side was inscribed.
;
latter, of course, would be the initial folio of the pothl, which according to the
usual practice would be inscribed only on its reverse side, the obverse
being blank,
or bearing only the name of the work, and possibly other odd remarks, as,
e.g.
in the Vajracchedika MS., Ch. 00275
On this basis the
(see Plate V, fol. 1 a).
This
adorned with
two of the
initial
folios
were
figure of the sitting Buddha, which takes up a considerable portion of the inscribable
space of that side.
Similarly in the old (c. A.D. 1095) Nopalo^e palm-leaf manuscript
It
is
to be written only
pothl.
From
is
away
it is
These are
ments in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1911, pp. 764-7.
1
complements the text, which comprises verses 48-74, reads as follows
1
The text
With
these
saumya, kala for kola, &c. There are also indications of the text having been tampered
with by a later hand, as in fol. 6, obv. 1. 1, go of cetaso. In other places the text is
obscured by smudges produced by some accident (footnotes 13, 19), or apparently, as
suggested by Professor de la Vallde Poussin, by the impress of the wet writing of the
superincumbent folio, as in fol. 6, rer. It. 3, 4, left edge. On the system of interpunction
see the Note on
p. 62.
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
66
Fol. 6. Obverse.
1
(ti)yli
3
4
yasya te cetaso nyatva tasya te ka statir
na
na
sti
gunasango
api
(f?)rg^o
l)havet v 48
Gunesv
"
~
prasiddhy ante mati-smrti-vis*uddhayaf|A uttamasuvyahrta-sucestitaih 51 Upasantam ca kantam ca
diptam iiprat/gliati ca ~ nibhr J/e sva-6riyd
7
5
kam iva n^aksipet x 52 Yen^dpi ^ata^o dr^tam
(cte)\dam~\ rupaih
4
(fc/w)va-/>is"unaih
yo
tat
pi
ubhnyor
6 53
-idc
piirvam iksate
rupam
prlnati te
cak^uh samarhg/arf
.m^
dh\
/iseca(m/iY )-bl)avaf?
somya
-lJiiiv^c
w x](na)varii nava(i N ) 54 x
^>i
ca
te
vapwh
-
Y.I
dar&ine
XXX
Reverse.
1
x{f/mia stli)\tah
xxxx ^
x](s/ya)[xx
Su||Mt/o bhuyud ayam Tathagato gunah
^](r?7pa?/rt 5)[5
kvtdn](ya-
2 [r#e
tav#Jiiv^a8??iaZ laksana-vyarijan-6jvalat x 10 56
rw]pa<
10
asm^iti ti
rupam vadat^iv^asritam guna||n x gu-vinyeuta
Dhanyam
^?*)
11
pratyahur iva
tad-gunah 57 Sarvam ev^esena
kle&iir Daddliam idarh jagat v tvam ja(^a)
^t-klesa-mok^d-
3 (vayain
12
api)
4 (rMe yafahy 3
]<arunaya
ciram x 58
maha-k;irunam uta ^
n
Complcrieiit
4
s
.
]>ratigh
Read ka stntir.
Read Tupa.m.
Read nyatvarh,
Jtcad
tvath,
ra<v
api.
Head
balasya.
Read saumya.
It is short by four
would seem that the text of this verse was corrupt already
was made.
Read 0jjvaldt, and te, and "diritan, a mixed Sanskrit form [Dr. Thomas].
Read Aviiesena.
Read era.
the original is badly smirched, but there appears to be
Dr. Thomas suggests dhrta
simply says
at the time
10
11
II
produce love
when
It
that translation
"
trace of ya.
6ATAPANCA6ATIKA STOTRA
5 (jnas) tvaih
14
akirnasya te gatah kala labdha-prasaraya
6 (ya ma)tam\
x
67
60 Sandad
14
JftaAw karuna-
15
17
18
)
karuna-paravattaya karitas tvarh padarh
natha ku^ilava-kalasv api s 62 J/WrfA^ ca simha-na18
2 del ya
ca yah vant-cch-6pavicarasva
sva-^Mw-^dbh^aupana^
sa
te
63
Pararth-aika
karunya-nikaah
jw/a/o bhadra svdrthe
* 10 tvayy^e\ a kevalam natha karuna 20 bhavet
3 (
(Jfy/rt^rt)ya-ni8thura
Param-tipasama-sthoJj-Cin
m
,
baliddna-
5 vartate *
ia(th)a
badhaman
hi
api
6 [rdrtha-sphiif]^th]a[n]{
sy&d
upa[Vw]/?/a
tva
3
8ft,ti
ma jc?AMrn$
[n*^]paradhyate
66
cq ~ gambhl-
[5a](wi)a[a]-vyasavan[^]i
eva- 3 vidhani $G ~
ca
67 Kasya na
vakyany
Reverse,
pi sarvajna
iti
kiucifZ
3 ya//
te
vacah 70
naipunarh param x
yair
18
Read fantad.
18
Ahrtah
is
Dr. Thomas
s suggestion,
as
it
fyatah.
17
"
"
it
Read
tatha,
flat
it is
and
rev.
1.
1,
n Read
anyatha.
F2
The
MISCELLANEOUS FEAGMENTS
68
yudhayate wiana-ginn.
ablrivid||draya/ x
74
TRANSLATION.
48
towards conciliation of an adversary what
[Fol. 6. Cbvcrse] Verse
praise should there be on thy part of him, between whoso and thy mind there is
:
a difference
Verso 49. Neither in the qualities is there seen any community, nor in the
owners of the qualities ah the supreme purity of thy exceeding power
Verse 50. Through the calmness of (thy) senses (which is) at no time absent, thy
mind is seen to be ever calm by the veiy evidence of the eyes.
:
Verse 51.
evinced by
From
;hy)
26
(thy) infancies
pure conditions of thought and memory are
good sayings and good endeavours which betray an excellent
nature.
Verse 52. Being serene, and lovely, and bright, and non-contentious, and by
bein>
in a humble-one, whom, I wonder, should this (thy) form not put
its
glory
to
shame
Verse 53.
first
it is
time
By whomsoever
it is
it for
the
figure, as
soon as
Verso 55. Seeing that the qualities which repose in thee, and the qualities of
their receptacle, harmonize with each other, thy figure possesses the best wealth of
qualities."
Read nimnd.
Read M.uyo ja.
M The
plural infancies
"
M Read
vakyam.
"
See
The
translation
is
from the
6ATAPANCA&ATIKA STOTRA
qualities possessed (by it)
We
69
qualities.
all, is
caught in troubles
thou, for the sake of relieving the troubles of the world, wast stirred with pity
1
so long.
Verse 59.
How
should I not,
fact)
first
of
all,
knowing
its ills,
embodiment of
mundane
whom
ft
drawn, like a Naga from the lake, for the sake of being trained by Compassion, as
it were by science.
[Fol. 7. Obverse] Verse 62. Though dwelling in supreme peace, yet through
obedience to (the call of) pity thou wast made to set foot, oh Lord, indeed in the
arts of an actor.
own
roars
who
Verse 64. Solely in the interest of others favourable, in one s own interest hard
in thy case indeed alone, oh Lord, compassion might become its
of disposition
opposite.
Verse 65. For thus, making thee in many ways, as it were, an offering sotoeother, in order to secure the interest of others, she (i.e. Compassion) cast,
where or
Verse 66. But indeed to thy own desire she is distinctly (in this matter con
for thus, even though she is always harassing thee, she does not
?)
forming
offend thee.
Verse 67. Good words, of great import, truthful, and sweet, of meaning pro
found and yet clear ; (spoken) with conciseness as well as with details
Verse 68. To whom, having heard such words of thine, even if he were thy
adversary, would there not be the certainty that thou art all-knowing ?
;
sweet is other
[Reverse] Verse 69. On the whole not all is sweet but some
thy speech, on account of accomplishing its object, is, all of it indeed, well
;
wise
said.
28
M The Tibetan
all is
sweet
translation, as rendered to
some sweet
is fictitious
all
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
70
all
made
vessel is
well-pleasing to
:.he
is
Verse 73. la laying the dust of passion thy speech acts as a raincloud
it
acts
30
No.
This
Stein
is
3.
363 x 88mm.
(or 14 T o
X 3
B3
same pothl
to
belong.
pp. 767-9.
It
is
loss
In accordance with
said.
it
and translation.
is
conjecturally supplied by
this does not eeem to
give
indicated by verse 70, the idea of it seems to be,
Some words of Buddha are not sweet ; but not all that is sweet is profitable
; anyhow,
whether sweet or not, all his words are well said.
If that is the idea of the verse, the
la Vallee Poussin as
arthasiddhyapi.
But
As
complement suggested by me seems more to the point. The extant portion of the text,
though very mu^h worn, is fairly certain, except the two syllables yo no, which are broken
away; also sratlu might be madhu. Cf. W.GIL., vol. ii, pp. 50, 57-8; M.N. i, 395, sutra 58.
The reference is to the Buddha s deeds (karma) in
birth?, which made him
"
previous
a vessel of sweet, speeches [Dr.
Thomas]. See above, footnote 26.
80
Vainateya, or non of Vinata, an epithet of Garuda, the mythical bird and enemy of
the serpent race.
51
The existing
alternative
reading
original.
by Indra, or Salcra.
See footnote
1
folio.
myth
to No. 2, p. 65.
demon Vrtra
STOTRA
71
Obverse.
1
xxxx||(wa
m a)
aksepa vrta
ksunnah supt[o]
gro&rtntakesv
api
117
Pra^ ?/-)
lyatf
pra-
6
118 Prabhutvam api te natha sada n*atbhumdpi sata tvaya
mani vidyate * vaktavya iva sarvair hi svairarii svdrthe niyujyase
1003 10-9 Yens,
kenacid eva tvarii yatra tatra yatha tatha ~ coditah svaiii
8
suhrt\ dos-advesana -nitye pi gun-anvesana-tatparah 122 Yato
nimaritranam te bhut sa-visarh sa-hutasanam x tatr^dbhurf abliisam-
to/;,
Reverse.
sam13
3 [na]tih
ksamitvarii
c^Angulimalam
The apparent syllables ma ma are blurred ; and the second ma stands bolow the line.
*
Read vatsalyat.
Read krte.
Possibly read vesa.
The two or three initial syllables are partially washed out.
*
T
Read dnvesana.
Rad akrotaro, and jighamsavah.
Read dvahite.
10
Read vibhavild sauralyan.
11
The syllable v6 is a correction eecunda manu.
11
Read nandt. In the words y(o)paiam(o} na(nto) (md)nas(t)ab(dhe), all the bracketed
The original writing seems to have been yapasame.
letters are written secunda manu.
Head dngullmale.
14
Read hiranma, and 1. 4 m ktmn, without the superfluous anusvara.
9
"
"
"
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
72
4 ya[h]*
afaata"
Pr$ten*ai
5 racoff
sukharh
tvacin
15
dhiras
n^oktarhm
l6
kal-a6aya-vida
(ri)ktam
cetasy utpadya
adyabhihi
18
19
vestre
ranga
i[v*d-]
14
128
dharma-rasasya te
15
~
katha
krta
tar^ayitva
upetyoapi
trpta
Purvam dana-kath-
tvaya R 129
sauthavam v
tato
dharmo gata-male
TRANSLATION.
(over broken
22
Verse 118. Service replete with insults is done, (mode of) speech is changed to
23
oh Lord, by thee, though being the master, for the sake of
that of a servnct,
tenderness to be taught.
Verse 119. Though mastership is thine, oh Lord, it is never manifested in thy
own CBUPC for like one who may be spoken to thou art employed by every one at
:
will in bin
own
liwincn.
Vvwo
ISO,
friendly, as
16
"
n On
gokantaka
xvii, p. 34,
* The Sangki it
text has visa, servant, which yields good sense, though, of course,
it
may be
Our
a clerical
6ATAPANCA6ATIKA STOTRA
beneficence
ing
faults,
78
for merits.
Verse 123.
with
fire
blessing
Verse 126. That the hot have turned to kindliness, the miserly to liberality
that the fierce have taken to tenderness,
that
is
expedients.
Ver*e 127. Calmness of senses towards the elated, and towards the stuck-up
M to whom should it
forbearance towards an Angnlimiila
speech
is
relinquished.
li
first
by
Law
i*
g-ifte
rescue the miserable world from the fenrful hell of rnumlano existence,
No.
4.
b.
This
is
Ho
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
74
As may be
is
dimensions of which, accordingly, would have been about 233x45 mm. (or 9 X l
It mu*;t have belonged to a fine small-sized
The text consists of
inches).
pothl.
the remnants of five verses of the Satapaficasatika Stotra, numbered 10 to 14. The
identity of the vinies was first discerned by Dr. Thomas, who noticed other remains
of the same vcnes in the fragment of the Pel Hot Collection which is
republished by
Professor de la Vallee Poussin in the Journal of the
Royal Asiatic Society for 1911,
That fragment had been published originally by Professor Sylvain Le"vi,
p. 769.
with a reduced facsimile, in the Journal Asiatique (1910), vol. xvi, pp. 450-6. In it
and this apparent discrepancy is explained
due
by
Profensor
Le*vi
S,
as
hymn
is
to
the
fragment belong to its last section, which, seeing that our verse 11 is identical with
verse 147 of tho Pelliot fragment, must in our
pothl have begun with verse 137.
In combination with the portions of the Pelliot text,
printed in italics, and with
a few conjectural complements suggested by Professor de la Valle c Poussin, shown
1
as follows
Obverse.
1
xxdiiHkara-karitva xrhma
xxxxx||
O tvaya duskubayUdya
2 kayav ivi 1
3 r$itam x
l:i
tila&o
Tatha
hi
satsu
10
sarhga||/m/a
dharma-kdyam
atemtah
n qtaReverse.
2 ho
3 13
gunah
nllir
Upakarini
cak^u^e
6&ntar\a.j^k-kaya-karniani
ivayy
api prati-
hanyantt
TRANSLATION.
(Verse 10.) .... by doing acts difficult to do, he does not eliminate them.
Veree 11. For the purpose simply of advantaging others (it is that) my spiritual
(exists)
Read
iti.
6ATAPANCA6ATIKA STOTRA
75
Verse 14.
ah, the
body
None,
among the conditions of the Buddha which does not cause wonderment
PVom thee, helpful, comely, gracious in speech and action, even
(the
NOTES,
Verse 10. The text of the verse
is
incomplete and of its extant portion, tho
the others are too faint and
only syllables which are certain are dufkara-karitva
sand-worn to be identified. According to Professor S. Le*vi, the Tibetan version of
the extant portion reads dkak *pyad yal bar ma dor ro, which he renders il n e carte
pas en les diminuant les actes difficiles a faire .
Verse 11. Dutknhaka, apathetic , in the Tibetan version
yid che-dkah or qui
croit difficilement (S. Le\i), occurs in the
Divyavadilna, p. 7, 1. 29, and signifies one
whoso attention it is difficult to rouse
who is slow to believe
from Vknh,
mirationem movere (Westergaard s Radices L. S.).
Verse 12. The text of the Pelliot fragment has
ganikrnmya for the reading
iaiiigamya of our
fragment. Both words have the same meaning of communicating,
There
is
another
difference
of
bestowing.
reading with regard to our hitvd,
According to Professor Levi, the Tibetan version has bfayt, which
abandoning.
an
Sanskrit
Lhitvd
e.
original
presupposes
(i.
bhittva), breaking up, dispersing.
Verse 14. Ctihuxa, comely, corresponds to the Tibetan Ufa na
tduy, charmant a
and might be rendered by the obsolete English eyeful
voir
;
13.
CATUH&ATAKA STOTRA
(Plates III,
Nos.
whom
157),
service to the
hymn
of 400 verses.
latter
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
76
pp.
145
ff.
hymn
is
Hymn
of Praiso of the
Worthy
of Praise
Buddhism (Schiofner
ft
specifically
he ascribes to Miitrichcta
and
Hid., p. 83,
he
refers to
first
chapter, while the second piece, No. 149^, contains the final
portion, verses o2-40. of the sixth chapter, and the first two verses of the seventh
chapter, and tho third piece, No. 149^, contains the latter half, verses 6-15, of tke_
some por
twelfth chapter. Unfortunately, however the text is sadly mutilated
tions of the lost text (printed in smaller italic type) have been conjecturally restored,
:
The third
in the subjoined transcript, on the basis of the Tibetan translation.
It
piece, in rev. 11. 4 and 5 (p. 83), supplies the final colophon of the whole hymn.
is there named CatuMatakam (scl. s(ofrct> ) or the 400-versed hymn, and is described
t
syllable
mil
of the
name
Acharya
is
preserved.
to identify
it
3Id[frce(d].
Dr.
"Watanabe
numbered separately in each chapter; but in the Tibetan translation, they are
numbered consecutively through the whole hymn. There the sixth chapter com
mences with verse 183, and accordingly the verses 32-40 are there numbered
214-222. The two initial verses of the seventh chapter are there numbered 223
and 224.
The three fragmentary folios come from two different localities. The Stein MS.
was recovered from the ruins at Khora, near Karashahar (see Sir Aurel Stein s Ruins
of Desert Cathiy, vol. ii, p. 372), while the two Hoernle MSS. came from Jigdalik,
near BaY. Thuy obviously belong to two, if not three, different pothls. The two
Jigdalik fragments, which have the
same number
(five)
and show strikingly similar handwriting, might belong to a single pothl, though
their somewhat different width (about 23 mm. or I inch) makes that conclusion
rather doubtful.
CATUHATAKA STOTRA
77
The three fragments are written in the slanting type of the Gupta script. It is
worth noting in this connexion that all the fragments of the Satapaiiciisatika Stotra
Thut type of the Gupta script
likewise are written in Slanting Gupta characters.
1
(upright and cursive) of Gupta current in its southern portion. Such fragments may
yet come to light but in the meantime the available evidence points to the popularity
of the Matricheta hymns, at least in their original Sanskrit version, having boon
;
Buddhist settlements.
The
in the
three
fragments,
(1)
first
Khora 005 a.
,T
, ro
. ._
Verses 32-40 of the sixth chapter,
)
XT
L.
.
[in Hoernle MS., No. 149 3 T
(Verses 1 and 2 of the seventh chapter,
n\
v
(2)
,
"
*
Verses 6-15 of the twelfth chapter, in Hocrnle MS., No. 149, T
(4)
No.
1.
Stein MS.,
Khora 005 a
(Plate
XIX, No.
1,
Obverse).
This fragment measures 238 X 72 mm. (or 9| x 2f inches), portions being broken
off at either end of the folio.
Seeing that the fracture at the left side took place at
the string-hole, and allowing for the vacant space around that hole, it follows that, as
the text
is
written in slokas of 32 aksaras, about 8 nksaras arc missing at either end, or,
go to the inch, that between 64 and 77 mm. (or 2 and 3 inches) of
as about 3 aksaras
In
its
15 inches).
The folio-number
is
lost;
of the obverse side seems to indicate that the folio belonged to a larger pothl
containing a collection of stotras (see; Note 1, p. 78). The upper and lower margins
first line
of the folio are badly damaged, causing one of the five lines of writing, viz. the last
on the obverse and the first on the reverse side, to be almost wholly illegible.
Otherwise, the writing, which is in the Slanting Gupta character, though in some
places a little r-and-rubbed, is very fairly legible.
The
follows
Obverse.
1
xxxxxxxxjxrh prayatu
citto
jagaU"
x(dhayu)x(maiih)
100
n
!
(ffloka)
11
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
78
2 xxxxxxxx||n
Ksetr-aksetr-anabhijiiena 6mti- matr-dmi8drma,\ yad
avarn-ar la-varna wiej|| varnitd mohatah purah
it
tirtharh tva
4 mudhasya
krtai.i
arabliy^arabhyate
/n ra/na^-ra^isu
i
tasy^edarh papwano
3 A-nirodha wmg- - xxxxx
na
xxxxfl^
XXXX v - - XXXXX
-
in
rt<7/m-marsjinam x
Vdn-malenf6paltjjipas\a,
me
(nmhi)xx ^ ^ - ^4 xxxx
stu
- -
pavi[/?Yi]w
xxxxx
w -
Reverse.
-
vxpx?K,
c Evfl/H
mija (tuatfyxx
sarv-dttama dharmd
\
2 Buddhasya wuipradhdrita
i(va)
Na
sti
te
wg-
:J
adhiArag^a
i
nayaka
xxxx
yati se.su ca
||bliavanti
sadrsah kascidd
xxxxx
v - -
i astv-ai askarataw
kathtdstu ka alpa
ken*6panayaw*i tvd
6
\
nupaneyo
hrt-dp&m-iivajjtkdsdya nirupamdya
namah 9 /Virfana||-samanya-gatai s 2 tato nyair api pudga)aih tav#
te
atulair
5 sddrsydd
Buddha-dharmair
ycdi
ntddhitcyatd
pratibi^ 6ayet x
11
anUiraiii
su-mahamagAcm x
10 Sunyatd-rndtrac
lhajj^vet\
romak27p-anj<ka-cc7</c/ren
Kah samkhyasyaty
^A-6am
asarhkye(?/a?n)gxxxx
NOTES.
1. In thr first line of the obverse we have the conclusion and
colophon of
a work which preceded the text of the Catuhsataka in the pothl, from which our
folio is derived.
Its colophon gives its name as Prasdda-prafibhaRise of the Splendour of Graciousness and describes it as a Buddha
fotra ; for so, no doubt, the mutilated term must be completed.
The name is
followed by the clearly legible numeral figure 100, and two blurred aksaras
which may be read as Sloka. Anyhow the numeral 100 indicates that the etofcm
must have confuted of one hundred verses; and as its text precedes that of the
400-vereed hymn of Miitriclieta in the pothl, it seems probable that it likewise
was a composition of that poet. Among his works, however, as enumerated by
fragmentary
udbhava, or
See Note
2, p.
79.
anomalously duplicated ; perhaps by way of marking the end of the pada, which
is marked by the interpunction bar.
sa used emphatically, with the omission of a/tarn ; for so ham.
is
in other cases
4
1.
4, p. 39.
CATUHSATAKA STOTRA
79
Thomas in Indian Antiquary, vol. xxxii (1903), pp. 346-7, there occurs no hymn
with the name of Prasada-pratibhodbhava. At the same time it is also noticeable that
the list does not contain the Satapancasatika and Catuhsataka or 150-versed and
s
400- versed hymns, and that the Varnamirha-varnana (Hid., p. 346) is desc. bed
Dr.
three
hymns
view, produces an
for
tvdm
drabhya
we have
nupaneyo,
awkward
situation.
Thus
in obv.
1.
3 we have tvd
mdrabhya
1.
TRANSLATION.
1.
3, tvd
[Obverse] Verse 1. Whereas formerly, not knowing what is and what is not
a theme, following merely in the track of speech, I sinfully celebrated what should
not be celebrated ;
Verse
8
approach
2.
living beings.
Muni,
filth
of utterance I (now)
ghat of
Verse 3.
hat, blinded with darkness, I sinfully committed against the Precioiw
Ones, of that sin may this be the sanctifying effacement.
Verses 4, 5, and 6, illegible.
all
all
and
7
This is Dr. Thomas s version from Indian Antiquary, vol. xxxii, p. 348, and rol. xxxiv,
pp. 145-6, with some slight modifications to conform to the now discovered Sanskrit
See footnote 9.
original text.
"
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
80
Verse
8.
Since none
is
what need
to speak ?
Even
inferiority
Incomparable, hail!
Verse 10. Eence, though other individuals may have won the same liberation,
(yet) by reason of thy unequalled Buddha-conditions, the distance (between thee and
them)
is
altogetler great.
No.
2.
3,
Obverse).
Obverse.
1
xixxxx
putimuk
2 d dhi
tvadvdila-paravddayob 32 xxxx
- - x
xxxx
xg * vyakhyatam
antaram tena
tvadvada-paravadayoh
3
xxxx
xxxxv-wx
vadayoh 34 Aparhpradharyarn
tad*uttam-6dhamajjtvenB, tadvada-parae-
translatable.
in verse 2.
K*ad
j.HtimuJctayok.
-liSerent form of long
Note the
and
rfw t
CATUH&ATAKA STOTRA
4
vtdsti
yavad
rimukti-jlvayoh
*>
tdvad
ect
mtaram
81
vlra
tvadvada-paravadajj^
4
yoh 35 Yat pravrtti-nivrtyor yat sarhkle6a-vyavadana-
yofr
tad
evtdsti
antarain
evtdsty
vira
Tathatvam
36
tvadvdda-paravddayoh
5
mo$a-dliarmah sa kevala
etad
Reverse.
1
2 38 Elena, dosa-lipto
sli
natha
taf
sxxxx--
subhnsitam
40 u Varnarha-varne Buddha-stotre
4 xxxxxxxx nama sctsfho dhydyah n Pravrttau
sya ya
5 rtante
x<ffl^d(^)nda-paravadayoh
r
yaiii sar\ e n^ativa-
>
sa-devaknh
satlva-lokah
dharma-savitad
xxxxu-x
xxxxv--x
ad-
TRANSLATION.
[Obv.] VorrfC 32. Neither
befireen heaven
and
hell,
wide difference
and
V. 33.
Tliis
has for
its
and meaning
thus
be expressed the difference between thy teaching and the teaching of others.
V. 34. What difference there is beticeen thee,
Suyata, and thote teachers, that,
and low
respects,
there
is
such
V. 36.
is the difference,
What
between moral
teaching
and
difference there
evil
is the difference
and (mundane)
is
and purification
and
in high
others*.
between delirerance
may
that
same
difference there
it,
V. 37. That
is
is
difference could there be bettreen thy teaching and the teaching of othen
what other
*
Read nivrtlyor.
See footnote 8, p. 82.
Read kevalah.
The translation follows quite closely the Tibetan version furnished by Dr. Thoma.
Those portions, of which the Sanskrit text is wanting in the fragment, are printed in small
4
italic type.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
82
V.
That
38.
solely for religious merit ; but this is cause of impediment
what other
inequality than this could there be between thy teaching- and the teaching of others ?
V. 39. By f,i. one is smeand with defilement ; by that one attains purity
Lord,
that,
indted, is the difference Itetween thy teaching- and the
teaching- of others.
:
V. 40.
Idle talk
is
might are the marks of thy teaching- and the teaching- of others.
In the hynr n to Buddha (called) The Praise of the
Praiseworthy
chapter
named
Verse
1.
Celebration of Indisputability
th><
It
regard
V.
the
2.
to
worldly
all the
syllables
Sun of
that,
Good Law,
No.
The
case
3.
o!"
this frag-ment
left side.
149^
measures 154 x 60
on the
is
mm.
(or
line.
The
well-preserved
text being in slokas,
There
propose to
is
prefers to
forraable and not conformable
(equal and non-equal? i.e. equal in meaning, not equal
sound), (instead) of twelve words two syllables, that is
taught as the proper way
Of
the sun in regard to the sun of the
worshiping
The phrase
good religion.
dharma-steitrl would seem to refer to some formula of the
Buddhists.
See footnote 2
in the Introduce ion to the
Suttanipiita in Sacred Books of the East, vol. x, p. xiii.
The
Buddhists took their formula of the Trisarana
(Mahavagga, I, 38, 2, in Vinayapitaka, vol. i,
p. 69, buddham saranam gacchami dhammam sa
ga samgham sa ga) to be the counter
part of the Brnhmanist Savilrl (or
Gayatrl) which consists of three clauses (tri-pada) and
twenty-four sy lables (catiirvimiad-aksara) (SEE, vol. x,
Mfitricheta
p. 75, verse 456).
here seems to descnbe the Buddhist dhanna-savitrt
as consisting of twelve words
(d^ada^
two
syllables (rfry-a^ara).
The phrase two syllables might refer to
dharma,
rfl
w
but the Buddhnt
formula m question
comprises only nine words, unless a fourth clause
****** w 9* be
There
also the other well-known Buddhist
as
(say^
m Mahavaggn,
I, _23,
1
,^ded
5
(vol.
formula,
i,
given
*-
CATUH^ATAKA STOTRA
The
text
-x
reads as follows
88
Obverse.
1
xxxx
Aho
xxxx
*x*xxxxu
-j|te
yaya/j,
sa(w)8ara-dra<ra-
**
jNWnagata-bhayam n#6ktam na
7
3
Na Mahdkasyap-^nanda-^
na
kasamadi9t1,h
pramuAVirt Arfa-buddhayah guptaye
3
4 xxxw-wx9 Lok-afka-cakfur vimalo yadi syas tvath
*
nimllita^
saty aloko
a
loko
10
pi
yam tama8#ev*avaguntlnta
a
x ^ xxxxw - -x xxxx
5 xxxxw - -x xxxxw 11 Tvad-rte
sariisaras
ca
/fflgd-awrasa
tu Jagamnatha
gaiam
arth-ataraiii
Reverse.
1
satyam * yata-candra
2 x
ivtdkase
graha-tara-gan-dmkite
12 xxxx
x
/>ri||
^rir
iv#
acira-na^inlh 14
3 Khadg-dpama-samsdre
vai
kasya
anam Buddhanam
na bhaved
va&i-vartinam
iti
6atakam x
5 tfcetasya
a ka
bhayam ~ dhyayatdm
n VarnJirha-varne
parinirvjj^
15
dhyayaf/t
8
^opmaptaa ca
Catuh-
krtir acarya-bhadanta-Ma7
\\
tsi
pa-na-kti pe
me
$e(m)
\\
TRANSLATION. 8
[Obv.] Verse
7.
Ah!
it
lord, he
went there
(i.e. into
Aht
the
like thine.
See footnote
The
1, p.
80.
For
Eeadaloke.
Apparently
Bead Buddhanam.
Read eamdptan ca eatuhSatakam, transferring the interpunction to adhyayah.
The following remark is not in Sanskrit, but in Kuchean.
Se
footnote
7, p.
81.
02
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
84
Verse 8. Future fears were certainly told ; guidance was certainly promoted
mundane existence of four kinds* teas certainly made to attain fearlessness.
Verse
men
9.
of enlightened
10
mind,
there be light,
Verse 11.
(i.
e.
be closed, this
interpretation of the
is
evil of a
own
true ferry
the sky,
of the
meaning
moon.
whom
the
the
13."
wound has
Verse 14
Law)
11
Verse
world, though
is
of one in
arisen
is
beauty of a pool, from which its Niiga has departed, is not long in perishing.
Verse 15. Who is not afraid of mundane existence, which is like a sword, when the
Buddhas who
arc
In the hyinti
chapter, twined
to
Buddha, (called)
the Celebration
from
it.
Here
also ends
the Chatuhsai aka (or the 400-versed) poetic composition of the Acharya, the revered
Matricheta
a
Perhaps referring to the four sights met by the young Gautama, of an old man,
a sick man, a dead body, a monk.
10
The Tibetan version lias purified mind [Dr. Thomas]. This points to a reading
kfta-iuddhuyah
11
11
ADDITIONAL NOTE
THE
surmise, expressed
now been
on
p. 2,
150y
has
fully
proved to be true.
Kha. i. 156, Reg. No. 319), of which fol. 6 is edited on p. 52, and of which fol. 4
was excavated by Sir A. Stein on the site of Khadalik. That site is, thus, conclusively
Coll.,
fol. 6.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
EDITED BY DR.
F.
W. THOMAS
[THE manuscript fragments dealt with in this section belong- to three con
signments, marked by me Nos. 142, 143-143 a, 144 respectively, transmitted by
Lieutenant- Colonel P. J. Miles, acting temporarily as Special Assistant for Chinese
A Hairs
at
Kashgar
forwarded to
me
to
the
Government of India
in Simla,
in 1903-4.
The
letters of the
that
stated
mentioned
Cathay,
on
p.
vol.
2,
Khwajah
the
but from the remarks made by Sir Aurel Stein in his Ruins of Desert
pp. 236-7, it appears to be. probable that they, like the one mentioned
i,
Chinese Government, and for that purpose he used to sell his finds of manuscript
fragments in Khotan to Badruddin Khan. From the latter they passed on into the
hands of the British Agency in Kashgar. R. II.]
All the Sutras of which fragments are here edited belong to the Mahuyfma
division of Buddhists.
(1)
They are
Anantamukha Dharani.
(2)
Bhadrapala Sutra.
the following
1 (Inset).
XXI, No.
No.
2).
5).
Ratnadhvaja Sutra. Hoernle MS., No. 143, SA. 7 (PL XX, No. 6).
Candragarbha Satra. Hoernle MS., No. 143 a, SA. 10 (PL XX, No. 1).
Hoernle MSS., No. 143 a, SB. 9, and
(7) Suvarnaprabhasottama Sutra.
No. 143, SA. 16 (PI. XXI, No. 3).
(5)
(6)
(PI.
IV,
Jfo. 3).
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
86
(10) Saramgamft-aunfidhi
No.
The notes
XX
4).
nre not at
all
Leumann,
to
whom
am
translations,
and
present form.
notes: in the translation I have co-operated for the most part merely
which
and the
by way of
suggestion.
1.
ANANTAMUKHA DHARANl
is a
1.
(Reverse.)
folio of
complete
4 T^ X 1| inches). The
from the left ed^e. There are three
(or
mm.
mm.
size,
^^
"
-^iV
"*
"
K*
FIG. 1
The
by Professor Watanabe as part of the Anantarnukha Dhfirani, of which the Chinese Tripitaka includes eight translations
(Nanjio,
??o. 353-60), tie earliest, No. 355, being by C Chien, whose date is A.D. 222-80.
text las been identified
ANANTAMUKHA DHARANI
87
The
differences of reading.
:
Obverse.
1
ddhy-aWi/mwgA-aren^abhisarhskrtena yavad-eva-bhiksavo
janapada-
prade^e3
.s^panigsraya
yam samnipatayeyarh-ath^iyusni.an^ChJlriputras
Reverse.
r
2 yavaf?-eva-bhiksavo
TRANSLATION.
[Obv.]
.... by
many
monks
as there arc living- in th.fi parts of the country around, them all I wish to
bring together in the hall of the Mahavana pagoda. Then the venerable Sariputra
see
Divyavadana (Index)
yathdrui>end),
aihitawtkdra, and
elsewhere.
2
Yai-ad=ydvantak
compound
and Siksasamuccaya,
4
>
p. 32,
1.
4, upanisraya-vihdrino.
abhitarnxkarnd^abhitawakarod (L.).
Note the peculiar form of the initial vowel r. [Precisely the same peculiar
form occurs in the Bower MS., Part IV; eee Introduction, p. xxvi, Table of
Alphabet R. H.]
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
88
2.
BHADRAPALA SUTRA
Hoernle MS., No. 143, SA.
3.
is
folio,
1
customary hole for the string within a circle of about 27 mm. (or Ij ^ inches)
diameter, and at the distance of 103 mm. (or 3 inches) from the left edge. The
folio has practically nothing of the usual margins on the left and right
and its
;
number, 28, now rather defaced, is placed at the left edge of the reverse side. The
paper is soft, and has a brownish colour. There are ten lines of writing on the
The
In
75, 76).
13i"-14a" of the
(Nanjio, Nos. 72
III. 9,
fol.
The
text
Watanabe
as from the
Bhadrapala Sutra
it
corresponds to
[The composition of the text exhibits all the irregularities which usually mark
the early Buddhist mixed Sanskrit
Thus we have, e.g., the double sandhi in derdpi,
nagdpi, etc. (obv. 1. 1 ff ., i.e. devdh api=detd api
devdpi, etc.) ; modified spelling in
for
krtvd (rev. 11. 5, 8); kantdra, for kdnfdra (rev. 1. 7);
krtva,
caktvendriya, for
rl
also in No. 7 a , p. 110)
cahrindni/a (rev. 1. 2
sing, for plur., in manusya for
nominal for pronom. declension in (dydiii, for tasydm (obv. 1. 7) ;
manttgyd (rev. 1. 2)
masc. for neut. in sutrd, for sutrdni (rev. 1. 10), vdkyati, for vdkyam
(rev. 1. 3); neut. for
masc. in yCn-ant;. (rev. 1. 9)
omission of inflexion in prdvarlta (obv. 1. 10, rev. 1.
7),
daurrarnnika (rev. 1. 3), &c.; omission of anusvura in tdntd, tor Sdnldm
1.
.
(obv.
and parem
8),
(rev.
7), etc. ; use of Prakrit (or Pali) forms in tujnna for svapna
for tugataih ; vatlkd for rdlitkd
for kdye
4)
(rev. 1. 8)
kdyami(>ti),
(rev. 11. 3, 9); maw, for iutata (obv. 1. 8), similarly eta (claw), toretdtk (rev. 11. 3, 4);
yahetfa, for yathtya (rev. 1. 5); kaddci, for kaddcit (rev. 1. 6); rdjdna, for
riijdna
(obv.
1.
1.
nffc fe/ii
rajiidtit
new
1.
<fcc.
or
11.
2 and
4.
R. H.]
BHADRAPALA SUTRA
89
Obverse.
1 (tvasya)
]s.(inna)rtdpi
2 ddh^api bhagav&utas
tasya bodhisatvasya
raksam
&sam-
A-aronti ye te
kh(i/)eyasii loka-dhatusu
punar apararii yrhapate (tasya bodhisa
tvasya) d(e)v*api H XXXX !J ksanti I nag^api
4 sya
buddhdpi
bha(ga)vanta,
3
?<)-
mam
adhbabhasitv
jwri-
o(j>
footnote
1),
benediction
blessing
as in
MahSvastu,
vol.
ii,
p.
373,
1.
18.
The
Pali
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
90
kirttayi.?//a//>
x tena
rts?rarh
sukaro
yam |lxxx
10 (itasytaixa) pravartta lliavet
ft/tavanti mrvfei^ah
>m
p>-a,v,irf5//a
8a|fd</Aty
SgPratyartbik^asya
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xexxxxexx
lieta-llia
bhavet samd*
Reverse.
1
(lhi(h)
4 Aianynkii vyacla-mrffjM
ca
f^yfl^/. -sVfpi
AyT
isii
vakyalj
ha*
hctenti pradusta-eittal.i te
wnmsya
taya
tejena lhavanti j/hma
T
j\
[^>
a /rt^/a royo na ca a
Na
with an
tlic
ut;i*a>a*o
in Mtihilvnstu,
ii,
3^4,
1.
lonj,"
"",
*,
itaGaiigoyd
iri).
The blundered vd of
1) for
ivd is probably
VdKkd.
8
Note the form of the vowel t, which is restricted to the aksara //, and the
attachment of the superscript r (also found in Sarada and Nepalese MSS.) to the side
(not at the top) of the aksara in rthi (obv. 1. 10), which has been observed with the
letters tk (us hei, and in No. 5, obv. 1.
2), dk (No. 3, obv. 1. 6, rev. 1. 4, and No. 6, rev.
1.
7), y (No. 3, rev. 1. 1 No. 9, obv. 1. 6, and No. 1 1, obv. 1. 1), v and f (No. 6, obv. 11. 4, 9).
See Plate XX, No. V durgaiifl* marga. [See also footnotes 4, p. 168, 18, p. 183.
R. H.]
,
BHADRAPALA SUTRA
91
R.I
\rogCi]
ai.sYt
prdrartta lilia^vet samadliih 9 Dev^asya bliasanti tathiaiva
varnnam manu^ya-naga
atlia
4
yaksa-raksasah buddhas ca (iaimanii) y&\\&$ta-putram yah krtva
ka-kantara-bliayo
na
1/pafcthi^e
fasya
xxx
na
ko/>/<o
lodhi yaH
h*krtm
9 yanfasya,
imam samadhim 13
Yiivanti
rx na (pwrSna)kena
10 J-/ Prammsitii varnnita sastuta
yesilm ime
tt
lias^i
udara-suti H
cujntraslhajpitvH
)|j
xxx
ime jcstlia-]H\trah
XXX
ra
THAN8UTION,
[Obv,
aho the
1,
1,]
Pevns
many
also
men,
also
the
2] the blessed Buddhos undertake
of them as there are in the innumerable
[1.
10
Read flirayam.
Danrvbarnnifa,
bad mark
disgrace
as in Divyavaduno, p. 411,
1.
14.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
92
Buddhas, with regard to that [I. 4] Bodhisattva, even when he is gone a-dreaming,
their faces to him and announce their names, and proclaim the Buddha-Law to
show
Once again,
householder, as to that [1. 5] Bodhisattva, the
undeclared, unoltained words of the noumenal world come within the range of his
that Bodhisattv;i.
and that Bodhisattva obtains them and hears (about the things of the) noumenal
world through the efficacy of that Samadhi.
Through a Kalpa period also, [1. 6]
O householder, I might announce the excellences of that Bodhisattva who holds that
ear,
Samadhi
nor
if
me
it
possible to find
how
is
there for
to describe
One
at that
Ganges
(2)
this
the
the
[1.
(towards him),
who
exhibits
Samadhi.
(3)
terrible
[1.
is
in progress.
[Rev.] (5) Wild animals, beasts of prey, lions and tigers, and wolves, jackals,
they for his delectation (serve ?).
men of depraved mind are intent on doing injury, they
(6) (When)
destroyed
as to speech,
He
(8)
doos not
fall
he
is
eloquent
who
nor does disgrace ever attach to him who exhibits that quiet Samadhi.
(9) (Though) Devas do not protect him, neither Niigas and men yet Yakshas and
;
Rakt-hasas,
(if)
it
also
is
in progress.
Yakshas and
to their wish,
who
to others.
(II) As to his insight (into the absolute) there is never any failing; as to his
conditions (past, present, and future) there is never
any doubt ; as to his form there
is
Tattatm, short
nature of
all
existence.
13i>,
139.
it
to others.
On
BHADRAPALA SUTRA
(12)
When among
when danger
is
is
(or death) indeed living beings may be subjected, (but) for him
nor bristling of hair; [the anxieties are removed?] of him who
By Mara
(13)
is
kings there
[affected] the
there
93
no
terror,
However many
(14)
3.
MAHAPARINIRVANA SUTRA
is
practically
complete
4.
XXI, No.
(Plate
folio,
2,
Reverse.)
315x93 mm.
alxmt
measuring
(or
12x3f
inches).
In the
left
half there
is
number, rather worn, appears to be 162, and stands on the left edge of the obverse,
There are seven lines of writing on the page,
facing the fourth line of writing.
in Upright Gupta characters, originallv good, but owing to wear less black than
usual,
and
The
in places, especially
on the
reverse, faint
and
illegible.
a"
fols.
35
XT
-36 a iu (Tokyo
edition).
purposes.
anusviira.
It regularly represents the virdtna, and, as a rule, the single dot of the
It serves also as a mark of punctuation in cases where other manuscripts
11.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
94
Obverse.
1
mahasdtra(ff
tatliagata-garbha-Bamr7ipa&atvat
kipra(/n)
siitra-
va tatha-
d ^i
gata-()M\)\\e
2 aha
blii?/oga
smaevam
Bhagavan x tathagata-
rt
pauruijarh prave&ta
yiidyahaih
* aha ^
^rti/w7//?tas c^asmi
3
(ma * )dhu
alia snia
sadh?<
tavyam v
5 (pijaf)C
ir-
bki n
* maparame
ha-prtliivl-<7a^??i. v
maiii niuiittaiii
jnatan/a
7
evam
a^iWaZpatvS,t\ eva
siitra 10
:2
The
10
maha-
kale ^ sad-dharma-vinaSa-
anagate
10
*
(??7^a)ka-mutravat x ksayarh yasyati ida
saptaa&mni-u
un itidni
sad-dharm-amntardhanasy^dse^ani
A-?/la-ptra
(i/athd
ity ucyate
dhvastasu
vari}d)su
prathamo
10
Parody upavrttrtyo^
tasya
tvarita-tvaritam
syllable ild/ii (for dhi) is inserted interlinearly below the syllable /a,
reading- dJtitriiya, corresponding- to Mtlg-adhi Pr. instr. dfiKlde (Pischel, Pr.
Gr., p. 274)
3
pracarisyati
hemanta-miisa ^ sarad
meha
10
kus- ialena ][
aparam
(Ptt)nar
8
vrksa-pupp#ahara -Wn-amara-vat x dharm-aliarena bhaviPunar
][
aparam kula-putra yatha ?na^aka-mutre?ia mahd-
prth\vl ntuiva
*>
kiila-ptttra
4 gamlhtren^,
"-prabhavita
ace.
<llri
i,
p.
d/tlfd.
Krad
n curious form
is
nom.
Bharjarji,,
Yadi/ahaiii,
now
No.
10, p. 91.
Jndtaryv, and below, rev.
2. rev.
12
1.
1.
MAHAPARINIRVANA SUTRA
95
Reverse.
1
\varttaijanty
?ttegha-nirgamanavfl!
sarvle 8a(ndh)ft~vacana
2
ra]hasutrarh /varita-varHana-laran-
10
dharmal
"
r/a/.-.s/na-pathakana
(w<?<7/m)xxxxxx
bodhisatvflna
10
mahilsatvanflrh
Kadml3 (raw
pra)vi(6ya prthivyfym antardhasyate aan fca-rnahavfina-Mltra la
14
vaitulya -param4mrta-saddharm*antardliam7w \)ham$]fani*tii * tad
iddnlm ayarh
4 8titra-la(bha ~ )
Taihagat-dfa&yam agata sad-dharm^antardhanfiv 1
bodhisatvai
mahasatvai
v
bodhavyam
aha
"
iti
nara-kumjarai*
sma ~ akhydtu l *bha,awm8
Tathagatahpratyekabuddha-6ravaka-bodhisatva-db5tu-nirnna(wa)karanarii
1T
10
vifoda-vitpatf-faika
(sajrvla-
satvdndm
6 Bukha-v
ifi&n&ya
bhagava:n
18
avocat x tadyatha
kula-putra grhapatir
vba grhapati-putro va
Ihutasya vrajaaya ?2?i-varnana 10 gavafn
svami syat x 19 tatm ca nila gavah
syuh ta ga(r) eko go/w/t palayet x
bhatah 20 sa grhapati ^ kadacit 20 atmano devata-niinittam
13
1.
refers to the
of mrgamana.
16
Read
17
akhyiilu.
not distinguishing
the verb mndkarofi is known to
the absolute part,
ndndkrtya or *<lnakdram (III 4 62)
The
diffCrenCe
222 l 2 ( ) See also Mvv -. ki,n
Nirnndndkaranam,
anmi, who
^7
Vaitulya Sutras.
script r in rdfid.
rMi
"
^^
[8
The
g-ives for
L<
P>
nanakaranam,
was bkagavan a
the scribe has inserted intevlinearly
below rana the syllable ra, and indicated the
place of insertion above by two dote
in
the space between the letters va and
placed high up
ua, so that
word would
now read bfagavardna but clearly the intention was to substitute va for
pa, so that
the word shdnld be read
the
context requires) bhagavan.
(as
19
Bead *yat\ probably damaged
by rubbing.
80
Re$fefej and taddcid.
o
original reading
tht>
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
96
TRANSLATION. 21
1.
[OV>v.
(He,
1.]
i.e.
its
merits,
stimulating the
even
so,
now
speaking
Blessed
He
the
after
On<?,
(the Blesse:!
trating deeply into the Absolute as one food, even as a bee takes its food from (the
depth of) the flowers of a tree. Once again, O noble youth, just as by mosquitoes urine
the great earth is in no wise [1. 5] satiated (with moisture) by reason of its extreme
s,
world
in the
coming
period, characterized
Grand Sutra
it will go to waste, just as mosquitoes urine oozes into the great earth.
This is
[1. 6]
the seventh sign. All the numerous depressive 25 signs of the disappearance of the Good
Law should be known by a good man. [1. 7] Once again, O noble youth, just as upon
the passing away of the rainy season (comes) the first winter-month (which) is called
autumn
(farad), (and) on the arrival of that autumn (*arad) t the clouds, giving quick
20
short showers, [Rev. 1. 1] (cause warmth
disappear), even so this Mahaparinirvana
if>
21
see
25
Thetooctha*ai-JnVte
(for
M. W.
*anni,
sion
26
MAHAPARINIRVANA SUTRA
Grand Sutra,
97
earth.
Good
Law have gone into hiding. He (Kasyapa) said May the blessed Tathagata declare
the absence of distinction between the states of a Pratyekabuddha, a Sravaka, and
:
a Bodhisattva,
all
colours,
tend these
(tutelar}
31
cattle.
4.
Iloernle
all
sake of his
own
AN UNIDENTIFIED SUTRA
5.
(Plate
XX, No.
5,
Reverse.)
This
is
27
On
28
The
|"
text
The Chinese
29
The
Regarding
appears to have
for ,they translate
omitted the visarga after Tathagata
there is no difference
between the state of Buddhas, Bodhisattvas, Sravakas, Pratyekabuddhas.
Regarding
the difference of the three classes of Buddha s followers, and their respective Yfinas,
:
1.
6,
The Nilgai
Dh
S.
No.
2, p.
35
Suz.OMB.,
pp. 8, 9,
277
ff.
Brit.).
88
Chinese version.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
98
Table IX) stanls on the left edge of the reverse side. There are, on either page, ten
lines of very clear and good black writing, in Upright Gupta characters.
The text :.s a fragment of a Sutra, the identity of which it has not yet been
Siksasamuccaya
(ed.
fragment belonging
The
Bendall,
p.
to a rather
212,
11.
quoted in the
to the
extended Sutra.
text
is
12-14).
Obverse.
1
laputro
kuladuhita va:
vii
sa-sapta/iena
suviSuddha-cittena aranye
pratyutpanna-buddha-manasi6
buddha-surya-ma -manasikarena ra^mibhih
sarvba-skaiidha-dhfitv-ayatanesu
7
3 dana-dama-sariivania-9atparamita -vivrddhih yavat paripurirh gacchanti
tadyatha kulaputra grlsme pa4 Bcime mase siirya-ra^mibhih pu?pa vikasanti phala-dhany-6adha
vardanti
5
"
nam upabhoga-paribhogah 11
l2
prathama-cittotpadiko
kulapu-
[The text
is
R. H.]
Double dot, or visarga, as a mark of interpunction.
and below, rev. 1. 5, yavat.
Read
in 1. 7.
For ev tin asya, as
<ta(-saj>(<i\
Complete kulaputro.
Mow
i,
p.
373.
Neglect of inflection
II
12
read putpdni,
"osadhdni,
"vimdnam, "dndhakdram,
anvprekrt, samtdnd(h),
muldm,
nat/anair,
"Slpddiko
nutta.
AN UNIDENTIFIED SUTRA
6 tro va kuladuhita va
bodhaya
da&ibhir
7
14
cittarii
13
99
tr-saptahena suvisuddha-cittena
diksu pratyutpa-
nna-samukha15 -buddha-ma,nasannpreki
!)
viharati
manasikara-ra^mibhih samadhi-puspaReverse.
1
9
18
vivardanti 10
sya samtiina viknsantisarvba-kusalamula bodhicaryiiya
sary&a 9 aku.salamula 8 dharmasya
2 vipacyanti
uSusyanti
"
asea
IJ
avipaka
naSyanti sarvba-paramita
7-
bhavati tad
yatliil
kulaputra
12
nayauai
udlksaniya
pujanl7/o bhavati k?atriya-brahmana-vaisya^7dranaih yiiva 4 tlryagyo-
6 ni-gatanariim 1
api
va prathama-cittotpadiko 12
14
15
7
anuttarayam
sammyak -sambodhaya
vivikte prasanta
cittani
utpadayati tr-saptdhe
sayyasana-pra-
TRANSLATION.
a noble youth or a noble maiden abides, for the space of six
[Obverse]
weeks, with well-purified mind, in the forest, in mental vision of realized (pratyut-
Thus by
panna) Buddhahood.
rays, with respect to
all (four)
18
his growth in charity, temperance, selfelements, and the (two) spheres of sense
it is just as,
restraint, the six perfections (and so forth down to) reaches fullness
,
Here ittpadya
Read dasasu
its last
is
for
H2
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
100
open out, fruitf, grain, and medical herbs grow up (and so forth down to) ripen and
Even so, noble youth,
are counted fit for the use and enjoyment of living- beings.
a noble youth or a noble maiden, being one in whom the first thought (of reaching
Buddhahood) lias sprang up, turns his thought upon (attaining) enlightenment
and alides, Tor the space of three weeks, with well-purified mind, mentally
envisaging in the ten quarters (the spot where he might become) a realized, face-to-
(loilha),
Buddha. Thus by the rays of the mental vision of Buddha, [Reverse] his chain of
Samadhi thoughts 19 opens out like a flower, all the stock of merit of Bodhisattvaship
grows up, all the stock of demerit (obstructive) of the Absolute mature and dry up
face
(like
an
ulcert,
periods of paramita
noble youth the great chariot of the sun, here in Jambudvlpa rises in the forenoon
time, dispersed all darkness, and is the beloved of all, to be gazed at with the eyes, and
to be worship icd by Kshatriyas, Briihmanas, Vaisyas, Sudras, (and so forth down to)
,
Even so, O noble youth, the noble youth or noble maiden who, from
springing up of the thought (of Buddhahood), turns his thought to the final
perfect enlightenment, (and) within the space of three weeks, in solitude, calmly
abiding (j>rafyvifa) on his seat
brute animals.
the
first
6.
7.
(Plate
XX, No.
f),
Obverse.)
complete but for the loss of the upper left corner, measuring
830 x 97 mir. (or 13 x 3| inches); with the usual circle (25 mm. or l T*ff inch diameter)
and string-hole in the left half. The folio-number 94 is at the left edge of the obverse.
The paper is discoloured by age. The number of lines is seven on either side. The
This
folio is
writing, in Upright Gupta characters, is good ; less elegant, larger, and more
than that of No. 4, but nearly everywhere quite legible.
The
text
ha-i
worn
No. 84,
ZDMG.
Ixii,
p. 100).
It
a native of Central India, between 414 and 421 A.D., under the Northern Lian
and
p.
10
is
II,
No.
67).
fol.
101
4 o8
"
1
".
It reads as follows
Obverse.
xxgawmnnsi&ara
2
ft/tavanti
2 cched-ar//a
imarii
6ri
mane catumam
parisanarh sata-trmi
tena ca kfila-samayena I raja- 7
abhu^i Utpalavaktro
nama
yaniini
dharman de&iyati
catu-rfttpika-cakkravartti
smiirh
atlia
raja
1. 3
dvlpispelling are the subscript b for v, e.g., in obv. 1. 2,piirvba, 1. 6, dblpika (but
Also the
kaydm), kotuhala, obv. 1. 1 (for kaut,^, abhistavinsu, rev. 1. 3 (for a?j/ii#(a).
dots as marks of punctuation may be noticed, and the peculiar shape of the interR. H.]
double bar, obv. 1. 2, rev. 11. 3, 5 ; see footnote 1, p. 93.
punctional
2
instead of above
8
4
Apparently syn. panca-katdya ; see Dh.S., No, 91, Mvy., No. 124, L.V.,
1. 13.
But see also SBE., vol. xlix, Part ii, p. 169, footnote 2.
a
On the three ydna see
Compare the similar dve-taia, M.W.Dy., p. 507
17
8
260 13 Mat., II, p. 362", Dh.S., No. 2.
&.S., p. 328 L.V., pp. 257
7
Rajdm, ace. sing., for Skr. rdjdnam ; cf. Pali rdjam, and footnote 7, p. 105.
p.
248,
6
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
102
7 ra-parivaWi sa-bala-kayo
yena Jyotisomyagandbaobbasa-6ris
tatlia-
bbagarata/i
^adau
tfirasa
vanditva
6Aa^avanta(w) nana-pu?pe6/tya
nana-vadyeWtyo/i nflna-gandhebhya jwjam kifva sard-
oki(rt)?i.iu
dha(m)
2 aparimitcna bhik?u-sarhghena pradakini-krtvam punar api bbagavato Sirasa pidau vanditva I imebhi gatbebhi Wmga3 van tarn abhistavinsu ][ Sura-ftara-bhujaga-pujaniya pra^ama-kara kall-
4 kara
8pbuta-]^radipa-kara
5
[1] Sarvba-jagati
tama-
jara-maran-abliibitam-
10
pramoksa-kara : tr-apaya-jaga pramo(ca?/a)8C Wiam
n
2
nara mrin^-mara-pathai
If So ca ku-
10
katha mucyati
12
karunayati
s&r(vba-8atvanam f7w/i)kba-pra6aman-artba
TRANSLATION.
inattentive. The Blessed One spake, the doctrine
of Karma, verily, must be considered.
To beings taken with curiosity the Blessed
One, for the rurposo of removing their doubts, related the following old-time story.
(Obverse.)
In a long by -gone age, a man of noble family (having been such a one) in times
past, and countless Great Periods of time having passed, (was born again) in this
world of four dvlpas. 14 At that time, on that occasion, there was a Tathagata
8
Sprii . . 9jj/iitta
help , touched (of. Jaina Prakrit ph ttf/a) are from spr win ,
touch whence comes also the E. Turkestan! word p/iara obtainment used
reach
of the four stages trota-dpanna, &c. (L.).
The of the vocative corresponds to the
9
Vedic and Sanskrit pluti (L.).
Probably read dbhi/iafa-pramoksa.
10
On the three apaya, see L.V., p. 89 U et passim. The Southern Buddhists have
four apat/a ; sue P.Dy., p. 49 b.
With bhani compare lhanc in Mv.VI, 20, 2, p. 214.
11
Marti god
marut (LA Compare L.V., p. 257 17 , deva-manuydndM, with
*
p,260
14
12
14
text
is
Here
1.
13.
13
103
so forth
fivefold
defects, declared to his four classes of disciples the three equal Vehicles (and) the
At
Law.
15
all
Utpalavaktra
King"
Now King
by name,
Utpalavaktra, at another
time, accompanied by his wives and courtiers and his bodyguard, proceeded to
where the Tathagata Jyotisomyagandhavabhasasrl (was staying). Having arrived
(Reverse) and having respectfully touched the feet of the Blessed One with the
head, they besprinkled the Blessed One with various flowers; and having done
worship to him with various forms of music and various scents, and having circum
ambulated him together with his countless community of monks, and having once
more respectfully touched the feet of the Blessed One with the head, they eulogized
the following Gatha verses
thou that art worthy to be worshipped by gods, men, and Niigas, that
art the complete remover of the impurity of the Kali age, that art the supplier of those
1
that are destitute of the seven kinds of treasure
say, how does a man become
him with
(1)
":
subtle-minded
thou that in
(2)
all
with darkness, that art the deliverer of those that are afllicted with old age and death,
that deliverest the world of its three places of suffering
say, how is a man delivered
:
17
from the paths of the Maruts and Mara?
King Utpalavaktra,
compassionate towards
all
creatures
(namely,
first,
6.
folio,
a,
SA.
10.
(Plate
(or
XX, No.
15$x4f
called
otherwise
and his world would be Sugandhdvabhdta (L.).)
18
On the seven kinds of treasure, see Mvy., No. 78.
17
That
is,
Obverse.)
is
very
fairly pre
gap in the right half, and loss of the right lower corner with
In the left half there is the usual circle (25 mm., or 1 in.
1,
inches)
devils.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
104
Tie
is
The paper
is
dark with
age or
use.
writing, in Upright
Gupta
characters,
is
gnrbha, of the Mahusarhnipiita Sutra (Nanjio, No. 63). It was translated into
Chinese by Narendrayasas, a native of Udyana, A.D. 566, under the Northern Tsi
dynasty see Professor S. Levi s Notes chinoises sur 1 Inde, p. 9, also JA., 1913, II,
The passage corresponds to III, 4, foil. 7 20-8&16 of the Tokyo edition of
p. 343.
the Tripitaka.
The work is not found in the Bkah-hgyur, which has, however,
a short work entitled Camlragarbha-prajnd-pdramiid-mahdydna-sutra (6er. phyin
;
foil.
176-7).
It reads as follows
1
:
Obverse.
1
(stlta)
bhavisy.xrhti
(e)tad ih^adya
aBruta-piirvbassJCrt sa-
2 bdfih (r)noniali
pesu puspam
3
k.si-
pravararhta,h yani ca puspani catur^v dsura*^u }w&(varfiitcinitaih) pu?pai sajrr^g by asura-purah parama I *
(pamtal;)
p<.sj)a-varaarh
4 ritah
parama-papa-dbuma-rajas-driisu -dbutZibbir apurita darh^ama^aka2
sarifg^fl/tr/ -va^c/A-a-^vi^amaA-.szkabhir apurita i3ok-akula-m ancdhi5
ramya-t
[The text exhibits the same irregularities as No. 5. Thus, in obv. 1. 1, plur. for
sing., in bhavisyamh ; obv. 1. 2, irnomah for irnnmah ; anomalous sandhi in paSi/dmdIruta for pttfydNtrftritta , also rev. I. 3, rail iha for ratir iha ;
superfluous anusvkra in
;
single and double dot as punctuation
ore noticed in the following notes.
R. H.]
imdfnnf
8
Euphonic
also
and
in
11.
b for v in
yadbayam, &c.
4 and
Others
5.
The d ii
and parama-durgandhe*
[But see also the Note on pp. 62-8.
^ajat-dmSu" and
*rpdhi-*rfaka- (see footnote 6).
caturgv atvra,
5
insertion of r
Read
read
R H
2^
105
Bok-akula-
a-
sva-rat tra-niva-sibhi
xxxxx
etri-purusa-daraka-darikabhir asuraih saha sa-pari guard
8 di Vairocanas" c^asura-raja sarvbaih sva-rastra-nivasibhi sM-purusadaraka-darikabhir asurai saha sa-parivara igxxxxxx sath: drijtba ca Rahur asur-endro Vaimacitro
9 ethan dar^ayamasa
vikrtfl
sarvbe as^wra
xxxxx
asura-
sa-
Reverse.
dr^Jlh
pena spbuta hy asmakam asura-bhavanilh mak^lka-darii^ama^aka6alabham 9 bahu-vividha-krmayah etat papa-svara srnomi vi S xxx
xxxxx
ya
ih^aiva asurii
11
suska-brrfap
xxxxx
1.
Read
7, vuf-pardfana,
probably
Padmanl,
10
B/iuha, hunger, for Skr. Inbfnthd apparently a hitherto unexampled form ;
but Mahavasitu, II, p. 202 s has IkuJctita, hungry.
11
Read uttragfa ; correctly ultrattah, qualifying a*urdh. For another example
of omission of see footnote 17, p. 99.
;
l%
18
1.
6.
traces of
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
106
f
sthama balaviin^
"
vebhi vistpardhina
1:>
de-
Ea
kala-k^ayas tath^ayu-k^ayatarii
wkla-ksayah dharma-pudfo
vidba 18 -ksayah panditaih 10
H
16
s&tvebhya
17
-k?a(7/a)
kusala-carya-ksaya kalyana-kayatam
hry-a(pa)trapya
-k$ayataih
rasa-ksayah 5
ailanarh
ksa^/a ratna-ka!>
ma-gimataih
20
htirga-pramoda
k^ayataiii
ksayam
21
anna-pana-
ksaya ^ndharvb-asuranaiii
TRANSLATION.
(Obverse)
having assembled (and) congregated they to one another
thus spoke
What is this (that) here to-day is going to happen ; that we see these
forms not seen before, and hear sounds not heard before, and that no one knows,
:
(namely) that Mara, the Evil One, descending from his abode, has come forward
to pay his resects to the Blessed One, throwing flowers over the four
dvlpas,
filled
letters
apparently impressed
incumbent
14
15
filled
folio.
Apparently
Piili rctcc/td,
Skr. ratJiyd.
Read
^alavad-devebhi.
fni(h-r is either a blundered or a
"budd/ti".
But
18
phrase above,
21
5.
dtuld-m, obv.
23
1.
11.
4, 5.
Read pramoda,
n>
is
meant
as
an euphonic insertion, as in
flics,
107
23
poisonous
Agitated with grief, incapable of joy, overcome with gloom, was
every one of the Asura settlements and all the Asuras, women, men, hoys, girls
were crowding together, afflicted with (these) extreme afflictions, agitated with grief,
fleas.
tive streets, they, standing before their two Asnra kings, sec the Asura king ....
and so forth down to Vaimacitra, 24 the Asura king, with all the Asura
afflicted
inhabitants of his dominion, women, men, boys, girls, and with his courtiers ......
and Vairocana, the Asura king, with all the Asura inhabitants of his dominion, wo nen,
He (Rahu) saw them standing togt llior,
men, I )ys, girls, and his courtiers
an<f
seeing (them), Rahu, the overlord of the Asuras, questioned Vaimacitra, the
He (i.e. Vaimacitra) said, Upset arc all the Asuras
(Reverse)
-like
hot winds are come flame-like and these fruits of the trees are fallen
Asnra king.
.
to the
ground
are filled
a3
dried
variety of insects
ment: here
(all
these)
Asuras to
much
alarm
flies,
;
verily there
discomfort; they
and ponds
stinging
fleas,
in lakes
Whose
alarms.
they
is
all
and a great
no enjoy
is
arc tormented
all are
this
power
alarmed
Such
May not
23
Listen let my
Rahu, the overlord of the Asuras, replied
vying with the Asuras ?
word be heard
He (then) said (verse 4). Listen, all ye Asuras! (formerly) there
used to be happiness through pleasurable exercise of the five senses, of magic power, of
energetic strength, of prowess in wielding bow, sword, arrow, and lance prosperous
were the capitals, highroads, villages, (and) market-places, crowded with women and
!
men, vying with the powerful Devas in prowess, courage, beauty, and strength.
of time there is decay of life among (all)
(Verse 5) This (now) is the decay
creatures ; decay of fecundity
decay of order and intelligence ; decay of shame
;
and modesty
83 The
text, which is here defective, is restored and translated on the basis of
the Chinese version, supplied by Prof. Leumann.
a4
Vaimacitra is Vemacitra in Mvy. No. 172 2 Vejnacitra or Vemacitri in Dvy.
8
20
Vemacitri in Mst., Ill, pp. I38 2 254", and Vepacitti in Dlgha and
J26 , 148
and in the Jataka (see Indexes).
Nikaya,
ISamyutta
,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
108
ar>
NOTE.
[The two speeches, beginning in obv. 1. 9, are in verse. That of Vaimacitra s
inquiry (obv. 1. 9 and rev. 11. 1-4) consists of three verses, as shown by the number 4
Their metre, however, cannot
(rev. 1. 7) which marks the first verse of Rahu s reply.
be determined with certainty, owing to the mutilation of the text. The number of the
surviving aksaras in the five lines is 174, to which must be added 35 aksaras (i.e. seven
on the average, *ost in each line), making a total of 209. The three verses in question
would comprise twelve paclas, or quarter verses hence dividing 209 by 12, we obtain
;
17 as the numlxr of aksaras in each puda, leaving over four aksaras which are required
to complete the beginning of the prose sentence after the third verse.
It follows,
therefore, that the undetermined verses should be some kind of the Atyasti class, which
contains metres consisting of 17 aksaras in each piida. On the other hand, there is no
difficulty in determining the metre of the three verses of the reply of Rahu, the text
of which
is
preserved in
It is the
its entirety.
19 aksaras in each pada, with the caesura at the twelfth. The scansion of
the metre, however, is not quite correct in some of the piidas, owing partly to evident
scribal errors, but mostly to the fact that the Sanskrit text is an
imperfect translation
consists of
7.
Forms
1.
7,
would point
R. H.]
SUVARNAPRABHAS6TTAMA SUTRA
a,
SB.
9,
16.
x3
folios
inches).
is
is
7x
(or
It
is
much
The
i.
e.
Skr. tirya
Mat,
III, p.
12i"
has turiya.
SUVARNAPRABHASOTTAMA SUTRA
109
and rev. 11. 1, 2, some loss of text. Irrespective of these gaps, the text is on the
whole very well preserved. In the middle of the left half there is the nsual circle,
of about 29 mm. (or 1| inches) in diameter, with the hole for the string
Nearly
vis-a-vis on the light half of the obverse side there is a double circle, with an inner
6,
>
diameter of 30
mm.
(or
The folio number 98 is on the left margin of the obverse side. The
the two folios is fairly fresh
and there are, on either page, six lines of
was omitted.
paper of
commonly known
are
in the
a third
is
as the Suvarna-prabhas-ottama
Two
Sntra.
manuscripts of
it
Cambridge Collection
in the
Hodgson
in the
Hodgson
Two
passages from the Sntra are quoted in the Siksuthe Bibliotheca Buddhica), pp. 100 and 216, where
both elements of the name, blidsa and prabhaxa, occur. An abstract of the contents
of the Sntra is given in R. L. Mitra s Sanskrit Buddhist Literature in Nepal
samuccaya
in
(ed. Bendall,
by M.
1913), and into Uiguri, by Professor F. W. K. Muller (Uigurica, pp. 10-35, 1908).
Fragments of the former are mentioned by Professor Lcumann (Zur nordarischeu
Sprache, &c.,
p. 10,
1912).
(1)
a,
SB.
9.
This fragment comprises portions of the colophon of the fifth chapter (pariFrom the fact of the
vorfa), and of the nine initial verses of the sixth chapter.
text being written in verse (upajuti variety of tristubh) it can readily be seen that,
allowing for the vacant space of the string-hole, from 21 to 26 aksanis are lost from
the several lines of writing. In the subjoined transcript these lost syllables are
supplied from the text of the manuscript of the Royal Asiatic Society (fol. 17),
which is more correct than the printed text of the Indian Buddhist Text Society. 1
is
satisfactory,
and
For the collation of the Cambridge MSS., Add. 875, foil. 18*, 19
Add. 1342, foil. 15
16 a, the readings of which also are referred to in the footnotes
,
/>,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
110
Obverse.
1
Suvarna Msrff|ttarnatah
Iti
Hiranyavatt-dharam-
sutru[ne?]ra-rajiie
p&rivarito (nd-)
2
ma
pnncamch
4
II
*ar7/ti-MaIt x
Atha
II
]]
khafu
Anyesu
fihagavan
tasyath
safiik?epajjj^a
ca hetubhi salvana
Jcurnnya-ras-6dayad dha
prakasitam sutra-var-cndram
indriyuni
tuny eva grdme nivasamti
11
parasparena 4 Cak^y-endriyam rupa-gate^u
\
Reverse.
1
dhavati irotr-dndriyam
rl lz
sabda-vicaranena
^jikv-endmyKtin nitya
2 rba-gutcsu
ghran-cndriyam gandha-vicitra-hajj^
rasesu dhavate 5 Kay-endrriyarh spa\
diidvati
rasparev\\
pa^
Read raje.
following locative.
4
All three MSS. and the Calc. print have ftuvarna-pialhcwoUama-sutreiidra-rdje
kamalakaro ndma sarva-fathuyata-stava-parivarUah.
Read "ddfyabftaxlt, and see note 15 on p. 114. The three MSS. read abhdsata.
So all three MSS. ; but, with Calc. print, read deSitdh, m.c.
Read, whh all three MSS., buddhiravi ; sandhi as if from buddhik ravf , but a
better construction is given by reading tattvd atya-buddhl, nom. plur., niasc. or neut.
For tatvilndm, gen. plur., m.c.
For yathd, m.c. ; so also in rev. 1. 5, tathd.
The two Cambridge MSS. and the Calcutta print have a?/iffrdma, the RAS.
MS. aagrdma ; but no doubt *ad-grdma is intended, as below, rev. 1. 3, where, however,
all the MSS.
repeat tamgrama.
1
12
Read cakw-wlriyam
Read, with all three MSS., hdri, neat. they too have nilya, but read nityam,
Note the Khotanese rr here, but the ordinary r in 1. 5.
The three MSS. read
Apparently for anatikkrawtdn^ not overstepping
;
13
14
abhidhdvali.
SUVARNAPRABHASOTTAMA SUTRA
3 Cittath
hi
ca $ad-indriyam
may-6pama-cancnlam
111
[f
viftaya-vic(irajji(n)?(&
ca
*>
^
yath*&va naro dhavati Stfnya-grilme ^Htl-grawia-caurcbhi
4 samasritaS
ca7 u Citiath
yatha
ca
sad-visay-d/iilam
prajdnatc
inrfn
Hya-
ca riipas ca 18 &ibda ca tathi&va gandho rasoS caspurffodharma-gocaram 8 Cittam ca sarvatra sad-indriycfti sakwiir iva calarn
17
gaucararh
9
5 * tatha
19
igndriya-sapravi?ta,m x
23
yamtraiii ca yaiiitr
80
ai
#undriya-saiii6rtaiii
Kdya
ca
ca nisccsta
cat
3
nivyuparath*
abhuta-parikalpa-sa/nu-
TRANSLATION.
chapter, named Hiranyilvatt DharnnI, in the Suvarof foremost Sntrns.
Thereupon the Blessed One on that
kin<^
fifth
Phenomenalism 24 )
standing they cannot comprehend forsooth all the principles hence by means of
most excellent Sntra the principles of the Snnya doctrine are set forth succinctly.
2
Verse 3. By other expedients, arguments, and reasons, from an uprising of the
;
this
15
living beings
Verse
15
in
4.
might apprehend
This body
Read
Here
all
Read
gocaraf*.
(the
Snnya
is
is
doctrine).
20
;
i-icaranan.
the MSS. and Calc. print inadvertently repeat the pada prajanafe
indriyfffocaranaM ca ; its superfluity is shown by the fact that its retention would
increase the missing aksaras in line 4 to the impossible number 34, while its omission
The RAS. MS. similarly repeats verse 2.
yields the suitable number 23.
17
1!)
20
ai
22
ls
Read
rtpaii ca,
Calc. print.
24
25
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
112
they
all
with form
[Reverse.] Verso 5. The sense of sight makes for things endowed
the sense of smelling grasps the
the sense of hearing is concerned with sounds
manifold odours the sense of the tongue continually makes for the tastes.
27
makes for things amenable to touch ; the sense
Verse G. The body-sense
;
2*
of ideation
is
six senses
9. And thought is flitting everywhere like a bird over the six senses, and
on a sen^e as an instrument, and becomes a combined instrument-sense for
Verse
settles
(without such combination) a sense cannot produce a knowledge of its own (object)
Verse 10. And the body is without motor impulse or activity, and there is no
;
(2)
This
(Plate
XXI, No.
3,
Reverse.)
Tho obvono
aUo
in
one of the fro^menti of the Mnnncrheim MSB,, und in edited by Profewor Reuter
on pp. 7 ff. of the Jouitial of the Finno-Ugrian Society, xxx. In the Hodgson MS, of
the Royal Asiatic Society the text of our folio stands on folio 55, and in the Calcutta
1
It reads as transcribed below
the missing portions, in smaller
print on pp. 69, 70.
;
italics,
27
RAS. MS.
28
SUVARNAPRABHASOTTAMA SUTRA
118
Obverse.
1
me
prf
*
3
gumoc?itam ca ~ yath-abhiprayena mi bodlii
*
sa-dharma-kayam hi maya ca labdham 32 ][ Suvarna-
Srutaiii sii/r
pr&ptarii
bhas-ottamatah
2 trendru-r&jiie
su-
namna
Su-samfc/mm-prtrivartto
samsiptah 15
3 traT/amasa
jn
6riyo
pariica(f7a&i)mah
mahadevaM^dwwm-)
duhita va
4 narii
gata
pratyut^awjanfim
ipul& vistrlrna
&(tl)t-hna~
bha^rtva/?
^[M](7f//ianam
10
gs\ttibhl(ram
n -^5wo
vislarena s
Reverse.
1
pay am a-
1.
ctdbhyauumoditaw
[bw/M socm
No, 8
but i
,.p, 00,
,
we (mama),
twntrd as neuter
so also rev.
1,
6,
Grnmmar,
itlmik
cf.
the nent.
$ 4J8, n, 294,
* J- J
MwdMi
"htyaih
lalilkaw
rind
ldm,
11
12
This line
tltii,
14
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
114
2 nas
velayam
tasyjirh
[sarvla-]
imarii
sarvba-Buddhanam gocaram
3 janiturii 10 1 tain
15
adhvabha.s7/ v
gatham
Buddhanam pujam
][
(A-a)rtum ac[i]nt[i]kd[m ]
ca prra-
Ya((J!
i)ccJie
gamlhlra(m)
17
>
17
yatra desiyate
kain idnrfi
kirhcic cha-
tata-sthasyu
6 ky-6.!,makrtuiii
aiimtare 1rs *
tiiiii
21
22
tath[Z?/ia]rma-dhatu-prave6e ca pravestavyas
dharm-atmakaiii
stupam* gaihbhirarh su-pratistliiyatra
smim 7 pa-
6 Tatra ca stupa-marW/iye
15
5
connexion with gattia, see e. -. L.V., pp. 118 20 124 14 132 , 140 22 &c., Mst., I, 55 7
12
34 :!7
34 13 &c. In fact it is used as
31
56 13 &c., II 66 li; 84 8
&c., Ill, 28
The verb abhyabhdf also occurs, though rarely
frequently as the simple verb abMf.
4
78 3 97 4 ), and the aksara l/tya does not so easily account for
(e. g. L.V.. pp. 47*, 49
the misshaj^n dhra.
There is possibly a similar clerical error in No. 6, rev. 1. 7,
.
lr>
and
18
Correctly dcSam upatamkramya, which, however, would not have suited the
metre.
Tin? aksara mya is a correction by a later hand ; originally it seems to have
been myi.
The three MSS. have a different reading which avoids the grammatical
difficulty, y.i icchet
19
sa carec c*6patamkratnya.
20
final
is
m.c.
na.
rajatd culva.
21
Th( aksara pa had been missed out, and is written in the margin, below 1. 6,
and the place where it should be inserted is marked by a small cross above the line.
Prakrit ic for tiakyam upamdkartum.
22
Read pravetfavycu (scl. dharmadhdtu) and anta.ro. The RAS. MS. has
pravetfarya ladantaro\ the two Cambridge MSS. have pravesfavyam tadantaram.
Moreover all three MSS. read pravei-.n*. The Calc. print, apparently quoting the
verse
in the
three
ca.
MSS.
is
patyet Sdkyamunitk
SUVARNAPRABHAS6TTAMA SUTRA
115
TRANSLATION.
merits (punya[Obverse.] Verse 32. As being the earnest of a great store of
and, according to its
skand/ia) this Sntra has been heard by me and approved
intention, absolute knowledge (lodhi) has been obtained by me, and with it the
;
absolute body
24
(dharma-kdya) by
me
fifteenth chapter,
named Susambhava,
in the
Suvarnabhasuttama
devi,
if,
Mahii-
ceivable, great, abundant, extensive worship with every means (in his power) to the
past, future, and present blessed Buddhas, be desirous to know the profound Buddha-
sphere of the past, future, and present blessed Buddhas, he must necessarily, wherever
this Suvarnabhasottama most royal Sutra is proclaimed in full detail, whether it be
in the country, or in a monastery, or in the forest, [Reverse] listen to this Suvarna
bhasottama most royal Sutra with an undisturbed mind and an attentive ear. There
upon then the Blessed One, illuminating this whole subject in an increasing measure,
35
spoke on that occasion the following gatha verses
:
Verse
know
1.
all
Buddhas, and to
Verse
end
in
many
oceans of pain.
4.
middle nor an
(i.e., it is
heaven
24
(lit.
On
illimitable)
it is
anything be likened to
it ?
294
punyaskandha, bodhi
ff.,
256
ff.
12
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
116
Verse
6.
And by
interior be enrered,
is
let
thus
its
Verse
7.
And
there in the middle of the Stnpa one may behold the Jina (sage)
this Sutra with a pleasing voice.
Sdkynmuni proclaiming
8.
RATNARA&I SUTRA
(Plate IV,
No.
3,
Obverse.)
nearly complete folio, measuring about 290x65 mm. (or llf x2i
inches), which had
inches), but on the right side a narrow slip, about 30 mm. (or 1
been glued on, has come off, and is now missing. The blank place of junction
This
is
i,
mm.
wide) can be seen on the Plate ; beyond it the slip projected about
f inch), and, allowing for the usual blank margin, carried on the
reverse side about one to three aksaras, while, on the obverse side, on the whole
(about 8
22
mm.
(or
width of the
folio,
clip,
two
to four aksaras.
312 mm.
slip,
transcript,
along the
rig-ht
indistinct
through
(or
It
preserved.
is
characters,
and in
The Satra
Passages
from the Sdtra, outside our fragment, are cited in the Siksasamuccaya of Santideva ;
see the Indei: to the edition by the late Professor Bendall.
____
The
follows
text of our folio with the Tibetan version in parallel columns, runs as
Obverse.
Sanskrit.
1
saihmohaih
Kas*yapa
Tibetan.
nigacchati
astau
dharm-avaranas
ime
s*ramanate
pravra-
jitena parivarjayitavyah
][
N*
Ituh
ba
ste
po hdi dag
chos
byuh
Hod
srun
ni
dge
kyi sgrib
bas
de
pa
dag
brgyad
sbyoh
ste
gi
rab tu
yons
su
RATNARA&I SUTRA
117
Sanskrit.
aharh
Tibetan.
KaSyapa
tra(mana)~
llnga-Kimstl)a||/>onow
vadami
iti
Ida-
guna-dharmarti
pratipatyo&haih KaSyapa
manam
vadami
iti
Kas"yapa
s*ra-
gramanena
kiiye emirii
ksaya
na
3 na
kasmad
tat
bhavitavyarii
kas*-
cit
anyatr^asay^adhimuktya
varhs
iti
sar-
tarn
kfisaya-dagdhan
vadami
tat
kasmad dhetoh
d(mi)Jlyukta
6
ti
i-
viraga caritauamm
tatra
vastra(7i)i
etani
KaSyapa ya
sbyon
rtags
kyi
sbyoh
zee
dbyibs
mi
na
dan
kyis
dge
hchad
kyi
\\
de
bs"ad
tshig
so
de
\\
cihi
p^yir
fie
bar
zi
fan.
See P. Dy.,
v. mctta.
s.
vpasam
carltdndm.
bahi
iramana and
3
rjes
pa byams pahi
hdi
rjes
su
su
dog) between
lihga.
pa
Read Aryanam
na
ze
?;]ni
ni
mtliun
nixkaxdyena.
\\
Read
srun
4
arytlnam dhvajas tarn 6rnusva
1
Read pratipadya, and note the cnrious
position of the anusvara in dharmam.
2
was omitted, and is supplied above
the aksara dha.
dge
byaho Hod
kha dog
gi
bs"ad
ti
bar
te-
span
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
:U8
Tibetan.
Sanskrit.
(katam)e (dv)a(da-)l
tn-
zugs
Reverse.
I
paaryanarii dhvajam
aryanarh
7
x
dhvajah
pamadhir
2
prajiia
jah
dhvajah 6
bcu
gfiis
srun
tshul
gari
ze
na
6
i
Hod
khrims
hphags pa
rnams kyi rgyal mtshan dan
tin he hdzin hphags pa rnams
rab
kyi rgyal mtshan dan
hphags pa rnams
kyi
rgyal
mtshan dan rnam par grol ba
hphags pa rnams kyi rgyal
mtshan dan rnam par grol bahi
i
s"es
mthoh
ba hphags pa
rnams kyi rgyal mtshan dan
bden pa la hjug pa hphags pa
rnams kyi rgyal mtshan dan
ses
ye
2 pratitya
samutpad anubuddhy-
rten
hbrel
cih
bar
hbyun ba
5
Tib. has upaGawdnnkulo maitrdnvyukto (ne bar zi lahi rjeg su mfhun
pa byams pahi rjes su zugs). It has
ke drydndmdfivajd*, and omits tan *rnu.<tva.
6
Tib. has
what twelve? Morality,
(Slta in place of tapah), Kasyapa, is a
hbyun
cin
hbrel -bar-
la
gzvgs
(catvdro
med -pa
pa zad pa
.
(dsravaksaya).
RATNARA&I SUTRA
119
Tibetan.
Sanskrit.
anata
aryanam
dhvajah
brahma-vihara arya
catbaro
nam
dhvajah
catbari
la
pa hphags pa rnams
mtshan dan bsam
hjug
kyi
rgyal
pa rnams
rgyal mtshan dan
caiasra arupya-|j*awd-
pa bzi
hpiiags
kyi
niyam
dhvajah 10
avakkrantir aryanam
aryanam
pattaya
-
dhvajah
ime
12
Kafiyapa
dvadas*arya
yo
KfiSyapa
dhvajal? tatra
bhi&swr ebhir
dharraair a
med
sgoms par
hphags pa rnams
kyi rgyal mtshan dan skyon
med pa la hjug pa hphags
pa rnams kyi rgyal mtshan
dan zag pa zad pa hphags
pa rnams kyi rgyal mtshan
te Hod srun bcu giiis po hdi
dag ni hphags pa rnams kyi
zugs
pahi
pa bzi
hjug
aham
vitatha
pannam
iti
dharma - prati -
vadami
dharma-viharinara
uddaro,
iti
10 -
vadami
iti
vadami
nirvana-pak^a-vi^ak^a-s
thi tarn
iti
Bead
vadami
ndtk,
bar
hgal
9
zes
hdas
pa
las
bsad
do
mthun
8
pa
zes
gSegs
pahi
gnas
bzin
de
bstan
8.
la
la
bs"ad
do
5 Sasana-du-sthitam
Hod[266 a]
rgyal mtshan
gah
hdi dag dan Idan par
dur
rigs
gos
pahi
hphags
ni
de
ba
hchan
dag
smrig
nor bahi chos la zugs paho
do n chos dan
has
es
srun
no
mtshan
rgyal
pahi
rin
10
du gnas pa
mya
nan
phyogs
kyi
pahi
Tib. hzsyatra
bs"ad
phyogs
la
KdSyapaya
las
mi
gnas
ebhir dkva-
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
120
Sanskrit.
Tibetan.
bac/I6a "-grastam
iti
vadaH
ia-d
dan
do n na
P^yg s
">
bsad
bas
11
zes
pa
Read
tadifa.
zin
pa
hkhor
bahi
zes
pa
mthil
rgyal gyi
zes bsad do
Tib. replaces
varliya)
do
mthun
mara-bofllfa
by mdnakaratala
"
= mcra-
(?).
TRANSLATION.
falls into infatuation.
These, O Kasyapa, are the eight
[Obverse.]
hindrances 12 to observing the principles of a Sramana: they must be abandoned
Nor do I, O Kasyapa, speak as setting up
by one who has abaodoned the world.
mark
of a
with a steady rosolve (to keep his duties), all such, I say, are burned by those robes.
For what reason ? For the Elect, O Kasyapa, it is their banner 13
they are the
garments of those that practise renunciation (symbolizing) that they are disposed to
are devoted to
friendliness.
calmness, that the)
Now, O Kasyapa, listen
;
to
what
What
Elect.
concentration
twelve
14
is
Twelve,
(8)
12
p. 90,
1.
13
iii,
Mv.,
I,
15
"
(9)
p. 65,
14
1T
1.
On
4.
this,
36, 2
also
Mvy., No.
"
p.
4,
RATNARASl SUTRA
meditation
19
18
20
121
21
ia
upon a course of asceticism
Kasyapa, are the twelve banners of the Elect.
Now, O Kasyapa, that monk who, not observing- his principles, wears on his body
the yellow robe which is the banner of the Elect, him I declare to be devoted to false
states
These,
(12) entrance
22
principles ; him I declare to be practising heretical
principles ; him I declare
to be badly observing the commandments of the Tathugata; 23 him I declare to
be taking a stand with the partisans opposed to the party of Nirvana ; him I declare
him I declare to be seized
to be well-disposed towards the partisans of Samsara
;
9.
AN UNIDENTIFIED FRAGMENT
an incomplete
a,
SB.
2.
(Plate
XX, No.
3,
Obverse.)
7
10fx4T 5 inches),
being short, to judge by its similarity to No. 6 (ante, p. 103), by about one-third on
In the left half, about 88 mm. (3f inches) from the left edge, there is
the right side.
is
mm.
folio,
(or
or
l^g inches
SA. 10 (No.
a,
6, p. 103),
apparently by the
same hand.
543-79, especially
Orient,
is
here
18
20
rfiksasa.
28
The
far
may
removed from
be correct
which
is
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
122
this
is
metrical
Dandnka stanzas numbered 85-95. Up to the present the Dandaka metro also
has been traced only in Jain literature, and in a few
called Skandhako or Vestaka
There are many varieties
texts of the Northern Buddhists and of the Briihmans.
either the lines may be of separate and varying length, or there
be stanzas containing tetrads of lines of some particular type. The varieties of
the first kind huve been discovered in the Jaina canon by Professor Jacobi (see
of the metre
may
Weber s
(or
rlanrfa]
I
\
wv./
II
II
pracuksuras ca
both by
are,
however,
&
karma
p
c
ra citra
ilia
There
mrgnsiri
sata varj
many
sravanam
|
jayatam
irregularities.
But
||
||
87V/ verse
88th verse
its
The
fragment each
WWl/W V wWW^^
possible
Any Dandaka
stick,
its
fragment
ungrammatical language.
is
prevented
L.]
Obverse.
1
Purvba-bha lrravati
ta-caritrrautai-iis tvarh
mulmr-
5 Ma/sa-kumarh||
ra(fr.s)itva
Phalguni
A J*drfa
drdham
sariijjakara
Purvba-phalguni iha
Purvba-iada-Bharfrrawa/t
6
7 atrra
drdha-parama-mitrra Asle-sa Ji^ta
bhave kurya
so(6A)f|
cam 91
Uttara-bhadrra(varf)i
AN UNIDENTIFIED FRAGMENT
123
puna
yatha purvba-kr(7/at)p
trrlrhti
9 hitena
kry*lyarii yatba-nirdista purvba sura-maniija-rsayarii
2 trra sura-risi pr6tsabita tvarh ca eta masa, ksitrra raksa. nrna blmjaga
7/aksa 94 Bhracika ditxxr
3 gi stbapita
4 nukula 95
Atlia Kliarugtam
7/ati
][
stbapita karmi
desSi
risi
aha|
()^
etarhi
jali-prranamya
evam
iibus
tvarii
Jw
divasa-ksana-naksatrra-grraba-masarddba-masa
NOTES.
have 90.
Line
2.
Au*a1a-yoga
Line
fvdfa
3.
Rak*itva for
= autadha-yoga.
tvd
so in
punarrasu,
tvdfi.
1.
8, jndlva, rev.
citrd,
1.
krtva.
mrgahrd, Sravand
Dba
as dvau,
go also pvnarvbaii,
MISCELLANEOUS FEAGMENTS
124
vivdda ; Kirttiya
Krttikd.
Read vipat-kara.
tikxna-karmdni and tampat-kara ;
was omitted originally, and
afterwards inserted above ka, though wrongly in the. form of
mdrgam (?) ;
Maga
Line
Line
4.
5.
-dfi
rf
R<-ad
aa
aMdha.
Line 6. Murga
hanitfha
&rdrd*<l
Line
Lino
as in
7. //* /a
==
ardrra
sr
.yofo
**jye*{ld
Maarravati as in
8.
9.
K^yaiyam
1,
kurydt.
1,
Vivitfa ca vidu
vividhafca vifawj
(?)
yamafovati
1,
1.
Line
^
r/y
zyow
= trimSydth ralra(?);
rjfl^^ SB
Line
Reverse.
1.
asvinl
ilia
Cchdyd parivartiaii
rdtrim
nayati anurddhd
turyam.
Line
tradfiva
2.
compare the
Line 3.
Line 4.
Line 5.
Line 6.
Line 7.
Line 8.
clause in
haurattiya
hord-traya
Lead anukula
(?)
</m
rfe/i
rf<?e
</e*^.
k*etra-hord-rd$i, &c.
anttmodanam uidha na Hi
(?)
tdvam
tdvat.
TRANSLATION.
With
Obverse.
[Line
2,
Verse 87.]
A formula of medical
herbs
ai
do here
The
translation.
text
ia
in
AN UNIDENTIFIED FRAGMENT
125
Reverse.
[Line 1, Verse 94.] The shadow turns round, and here (the asterism) Asvinl
leads the night, but (the asterism) Anuradha the sun towards the southern
quarter
2] by Suras (and) Rishis thou art encouraged, and in this month
[1.
(and) field by Rakshasas, men, serpents (and) Yakshas,
[Verse 95.] (The asteriam)
Vri&sika (or scorpion)
[Line 4,] Now the Riehi Kharusta
stood with folded hands, and
the (astrological)
iftid
[1,
B]
fields,
likewise
content, or not
Now
then,
all
(the congregation),
[1.
all
7]
bowing
(to
him) with
all virtues,
endowed with an
equal range (of knowledge) of the three periods of time (past, present, and future),
nor has any other (person) [1. 9] such knowledge as thou, to give instruction with
6URA&GAMA-SAMADIII SUTRA
10.
(Plate
XX, No.
4, Reverse.)
This
is
and
clear
little
rubbed at the
x 4f inches), is undamaged.
Gupta characters, is fine,
left
The
bold,
The
text
is
the conclusion
of a
384-417
(Nanjio,
3
The reputed inventor of the Kharoshthi script, whose
is related in the
etpry
Sttryagarbha Satra see Professor S. Le"vi s article referred to in the introductory
remarks.
;
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
126
No. 399,
The
Obverse.
1
va kuladuhituna
fjkulaputrena
~
llklii-
g^ata-cintikatarii
kauiena, * ilia sa-
6 gapliksi])itu-karaena
sandha-vacanam
anugantu-kamena pratyaksa-
jiiana-darSa7
ho
firotavyah (t)iasmiih
nirdiSamane aprame-
gx(c?/i)ih
8 |?/a?!i/a(7;az7;art)ka-5/iMmau
puna4
Bamadhau
6uramgame
ca ye^aih
pratithitani apramanatarani
Reverse.
1
|yarii
ca sahas-
ranara
2
gx&xxtom
sadvlma<inam
c#6pdsak-6pasika-sahasranam
dharma-
8
4
For aparikxipiiu-kdmena
Saddharma-pundarika
8
p.
127,
6
7
Ai-aivartiifa-bkumi,
11.
19, &c.
Apramanatardni
Rad
see
Prof.
Kern
cifdvitkf, tadviinf.
tu
tthad
med.
6URAMGAMA-SAMADHI SUTRA
yo Mwsit x
idarn avocad
127
9
Bhagavan attaraana
kumaraka-
Manyus"rih
bhuto dr-
(m)s
te ca sarvbe
ca loko bhagavad-bha10
[i/i]iruiii
6ubham
bodbi-tray-avahani x
^urarhgama-mahasutrarh
12
llkliitam
"
mayat v
13
(ta)mah
saptanarh samyak-sambuddhanam sa-sravakanarh
u
namaskrtva imarii
bodhy-artbam
nesarii
14
vidya
(f/7j)i-gandhari-malini
dvltiyaka
trltl-
15
la-nada[m] ag/tarnya
The Tibetan
Tibetan Version.
\
bio
gros
brtari
pa
de
Ita
"
[Evaih
bas na
sati
para jatau
Drdhanmte
va
guna
iha-jatau
parigralia
kamena]
8
10
Read Wfit.
Note the curious
>
s])elling
Manyuvrlh
for
ManjuSnh.
lodAi-tray-avaAam\
lodhy-artham likhitani mayd
II
ls
Read bodhy-artham.
Read mayd.
The lines 6-8a plainly contain a mantra added,
13
in cursive letters and mixed
The characteristically dili erent tracing of the sub
Sanskrit, after the colophon.
scribed r seems to point to a different writer. In the appendix we have the ordinary
Indian r, while in the sutra it looks suspiciously like the Khotanese rr.
14
Read te*dm ; vidydin prayojaydtni.
18
16
18
is
the sense.
"
p.
132.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
128
Tibetan Version.
1.
[Obv.
ham
ham
bu
kyi
1] rigs
igs
hdzin
dan
h*ro
bar
dpah
hdi
dan
jyaho
yah
kyi
pa
gros
brtan
pa
ham
bu
mo byah
bu
bskal
pas
stoh
par
kyi
rigs
.
brtson
2] bio
[1.
yatnah
nod
bya ba
la
pa
vacayitvji
nirdifiya
luh
ton
klia
bsad
likhi[tva
udgrhya pathitva
karyah i]
ba
bri
ger
dan
]>a
dan
samadhau
tan
pas
tin
he
bahi
yi
bklag- pa
du
drug
phyiu
bas
pa
spyod
va kalpa-^ata-sa[hasre
sat-paramitas caritva imasmiii]
kuladuhita
phrag
tu
rol
plia
rigs
hdod
chub
brgya
pa
gah
gig*
[1.
tin
hdzin
tu
thag
rni
skrag
bar
dpah
3]
he
samadhau saha
[]. 3] sTiramgame
sravanena na oliyen na samtrasen
bahi
hgro
hdi
thos
ma
sems ma zum la mi
c hah dhah
bar mi
hgyur 2ih
mos
pas
byed
ua
de ni
[1.
med
pahi
4] ches
myur du
bla
na
4] prataraih
niryaty
anut>l
20
[1.
tarayam samyak-sambodhayam
kim punar 22 yah ^rutva uddiSet
a3
pa [rebhyo va nirdiaet Tatha-]
-smoside-bzin
19
21
80
22
tarvajnatdydm.
SURAMGAMA-SAMADHI SUTRA
Tibetan Version.
mi
khyab
Sanskrit conjectural
rendering.
bsam gyis
thob nas
mi
pahi
5] giSegs
[I.
pa
hjigs
hgro
ma
tlios
nas
mi
6]
[1.
mnan
hdi
mohog
hdod pa dan
bar
spoh
byaho
rnams tlios
par
clios
pahi
garaa-samadhi-ratnam Srotavyam
alruta-dharman srutva na]
11
[1.
Idem
pa
dhi
7]
dpah
byaho
par
bahi
502 a
hdi
do
la
gah dag
gyur pa
6in
tu
ba
tshad
gcig
tshad
24
M
28
28
30
bzod
ni
med
gis
par
pa
de
med
pa
bas
do
thogs
gyur to
bodhayaii) samvjstani
[1.
de
ni
tshad
tu
sin
par
ii
gnas
7]
dpahi sa
bas kyah
adhimoktavyam i] imasmifi
6uramgama-samadhau nirdis"yamane
[1.
he
tin
abhisan6] ksipitu-kamena
-vacanam
anugantu-karnena
pratyaksa-jfiana darsa[na-kamena
imasmifi surariigatna-samadhau
hgro
bsad pahi tshe sems
grans med tshad med pa
hdzin
can
mos
bar
-7
129
8] yani hodhisattva
30
-bhumau
apramanatarani
pratistbit&ni
yesam
thob
kyah
apramanam a6itinam
ekye
sahasranam
bodhisattva-
pahah
u
Skr. irutvd.
Skr. inserts pratyaha-jndnam oantv&dmena.
Skr. ika.
Skr. inserts ho punar.
Skr. avaivarttika.
ca
med
37
89
,
Skr. tandhd.
Skr. much briefer here.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
130
Tibeton Version.
[Rev.
dpah
dpah
1.
1]
bar
bahi
hgro
thob
he
tin
jiva
do
stoh
khri
samyak
utpannam asta-
ranam
alabdh
virnuktih
a^ravatas
citta
sadasltmam]
dan
sloh
iii
len
anuttara
brgyad
med pa zag
pa
las
pa
[1.
lo
ni
l>o
dge
ma
sloii
dge
sahasrair
sambodhi-cittam
vimsatinam bhiksu-bhiksum-sahas-
n
hdzin hdi
srog chags
brgyad kbri drug ston gis ni
bla na med pa yah dag par
hdzogs pahi byan chub sems
bskyed
sems rnam
dge bsnen dan
hgrol
par
2]
ma
chos
la
ctios
ni
nam
ma dan bral ba
dag go lha khrag
khrig phrag sum cu rtsa drug
mi ion par rtogs
gis ni chos
med
ciri
rnam
dri
par
[dharme]
opasika sahasdharma-caksur
[nlraja-nirmala]-vi6uddham
rhul
mig
kyi
2] c*6pasak
[1.
ranam
bsfien
dge
brgyad khri drug ston
[deva-
sattririi&xd-adhika-niyutanam
abhisama-]
par
[1.
Idan
to
3] gyi.r
hdas
kyis
509
de
bcom
skad
32
idam avocat
yo bhusit
attamana
Bhagavan
[ayusman
kumarakaAnando]
Manjusrlh
[1.
ces
3]
bhuto
Pr[dhamatir
bodhisattvo
dpah
31
From
82
thig
j>oint
SURAMGAMA-SAMADHI SUTRA
Tibetan Version.
sems
dpah chen
gzan dag dan nan thos
dan thams
po de dag
dan Idan pa hi hkhor de
lha dan mi dan lha ma
dan dri zas bcas pahi
4]
[1.
rten
yi
hdas
(51
mrion
rans
par
te
bcom
kyis gsuris
bstod do
>)
po
chen
cad
dan
131
lokoBhagavad-blia[9itamabhyanan33
dann
yin
iti]
hjig
Idan
pa
la
TRANSLATION. 34
This being so, Dridhauiati, [1. 1] a youth or maiden of good family, desiring in
this or another birth the acquisition of merit, should be
energetic in regard to thin
1
SQrnriigama meditation,writing it, reading it, receiving it, repenting it, expounding it.
[1. 2] Moreover, Dridhamati, a youth or maiden of good family who, aiming at absolute
knowledge, has during 100,000 kalpas practised the six pfiramitas [1. 3] and who,
to this Sfiramgama meditation, as soon as he has heard it, does not slacken,
nor apprehend, nor fall into apprehension, but devotes himself to it,
[1.
;
m regard
4] quickly
emerges into supreme perfect illumination. Again, whosoever, having heard it,
should teach it, or expound it to others one who desires, [1. 5] having attained to
the way of thinking of the Tathagata, to have no apprehension, should hear this
;
of a Sru-arhgama meditation
one who, having heard unheard-of dharmas, desires
not to abandon them, who desires to understand enigmatic speech, who desires to
realize manifest knowledge, should devote himself [1. 7] to this Suramgama meditation.
gem
By
those
l>een
in 86,000 living creatures the thought of supreme perfect illumination has been
engendered ; to 28,000 monks and nuns has come, in consequence of not admitting
sinfulness,
[1.
2] liberation of
For these
mind
words and the whole passage cf. the conclusion of the Karunupundarika, in the Catalogue of Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. of the Royal Asiatic
Society, p. 18, and R. Mitra s Nepalese Buddhist Literature, p. 290.
34
The translation follows the Tibetan Version.
3:1
last
K2
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
132
fold
0]
[1.
11.
(i.e.
may
be attained. 35
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA SUTRA
(Plate
XX, No.
2,
Obverse.)
is
characters, and
No.
though not elegant, it is clear; it much resembles that of No. 9 (PI. XX,
rr seems not unfrequently to replace the ordinary ;.
3).
The
is
it
comprises tho end of the 15th (obv. 11. 1, 2) and beginning of the 16th chapters
The complete text of the Sutra has been edited, from Nepalcsc Manu
(parivarta).
scripts,
by Professor
II.
Bibliothcca Buddhica X.
Kern, has been published in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xxi. There exist
On these, as well as on other points connected
The :ext and translation of this clause is conjectural. The restoration of the
is fairly certain ; and the subsequent reading
phrase nadl-* lrt, on the river s bank
and interpretation of the phrase vailasalandda is suggested by it. The mantra would
seem to havo l)een pronounced in a rocky cave on a river s bank. The two aksaras,
which have been read nada, admit also the reading fdo ; but this reading, in com
bination with railcuala, yields no sense.
,
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA SUTRA
Professor Nanjio s Preface to the Edition
Catalogue, Nos. 134, 136, 138, 139.
The
is
may
be consulted.
1.
10-p. 329,
printed in smaller italic type and within brackets.
(p.
133
1.
4).
Obverse.
Nepalese MSS.
22
dnrgatim
Hoernle MS.
1
durgati 22 Cari acari janiya
nitya-kalam vadami satbana
[nti
tatha tathl
\\
\jprapntn\i\i\
Cariih
\\
23
2 Jrike sutrre Tathagata-ayu-prra-
\\
Ity drya-Saddharma-punda-]
dharma
rike
paryaye Tatliagat
mana-nirde6a-parivartto narnah
paiicada&unajl
pancadasama[A \\Asmin
nama
khalu punas
Tathagat-ayuf-pramana-nirdesc^
gbhaslyamane apprrameyanarh
asamkhyeyanam satbanam arttharh abhu^i
khyeyanam
krto bbut\
jirameyanam asam
sattvanam artbah
nirdiSyamane
Maitreyam
bodhisattvam
mahasatt
vani\
kho puna
AjitaTatbagata-ayu-prraraananirdese (dha) |J
bodlnsatba
fvallka samamim
koti - nayuta-6atasahasrani an-
amantrayate
sma asmin
khalu
valuka-samanarh
anutpa-
nayuta-6atasahasranam
6 Hdhisatbanam
mahasatbanarh
dharam-pratilabha
1
See footnote 8 on
Read ydndm and
abhuslt v
e-
ram - pratilambho
bhutv
[anyc-
p. 90.
al/i&fit.
rr in apprra
here and
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
134
Nepalese MSS.
Hoernle MS.
lokadhal: u -parama!!
fdm ca
soA<wn
A:fl-]lokadhatu-para-
srutvtasanf/a-pratibhanata-
prati-]
lambho bhut x
-
stihasrika
rajab
anyesarii
]lokadhatu
kotl
bhfit^
nayuta
dhdranyah
hasra-parivartaya
8 ||8rthasrika-lokadhatu-paramanu-
ca
\dvi-
paramanu-
samanarh bodhisattva[ndrft
tnahtisattvandih
lamlho
anye ca
satasa*
prati-
/ri-]
imam
dliarma
tivaivartya
yamasuh
pa[rydyowi
srutvt
dhatu-paramdnu-rojah-sa-^}
4
|ma bodbisatba mahasatba vima-
la-nirbhasa-cakkrram prravartr
tayinsn anye ca cut?
ma
asuh
anye
ca
dhalu -paramdnu
eattva mahasattva
yayam
10 gti prrs,tibaddha abhii9it x anut<arayaiii
ya
ar ye
se-mmyak-saihbodhaeft catbara
ea||
kudraka-[/oA:arajal.i-sama bodhi
imam dharma-par-
srulv*a?ta-jd-]
samyak
sarhbodhau
-
\turdvlpaka
rajafy
tamd
lokadhatu
bodhisattvft
imam dharma-pary&ya^
anye
The
final
is
mahasattva
irutv& catvr-
jati-]
ca-
paramdnu
Read tamyak-gaModhdyatii.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA SUTRA
135
Reverse.
Nepalese MSS.
Hoernle MS.
pmtibaddha
taraya"
anut-
abhuslt v
samyak-sarhbodhayarh
pratibaddliii
abhuvann anuttaniyaiii
anye ca tri-
samyak-sariibodliau
Caturdvipa[A a
anye ca tri-catudbipi||
>
hkadhiitu
para
manu-rajah-samu bodhlsattva maha-
imam dharma-paryayam
sattva
^rutva
tri-jdti-pratibaddhu a-
ohuslt x anuttarayarii
sariibodhayarh
anye
samyakca
dbi-
catudbaipika-parama(?iw)j
samd bodhisattva mahdsattvd
dharma - parydyuih srutva
imaiii
dvi-jdti-
pratitxiddhd ablwvnnii]
anuttarayarii
anye
samyak eaihbodbau
c^f<a]-caturdvipaka-[/o/(:a-
rfAd/u-]paramanu-rajah-Ba[mdiorfAsattvd
mahCisattvd
imam
dhanna-
parydyain srutvtaika-jtiti-pratibaddhd
abhuvann anuttard-]
4 Hyarii
samyak sarhbodhayarh
-
ata-lokadhatu-paramanu
7
raebbis ca satbebhi (wm)l
sa-
paramanu[- nyaA-]samai6 ca
rfAi]sattvair
ms^hdsattvair
[bo-
imafa
dharma-parydyam srutvtdnuttardydrh
samyak-8ambodhau citt&ny utpddit&ni
\\
At/in
sa-"\
^raanantaro-nirdi^ta
vata
irae^a
ca
Bbaga-
bodhisatbanarh
manantara-nirdi^teBhagavat^ai^arii
mabasattva bodhisattvanarh
dbarm-d|
atha tovad evedpari vaiHSyatAd anta-
6 gwandarava-divyana
Read annttardyam.
mandarava-mahatnand&rav&Q&ih pu7
Read
bodhiatbehl,i.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
136
Hcernle MS.
Nepalese MSS.
8
^paniim
vr^tarii
-
nayuta\
Buddha -
&dfa[sahasrcfu
kotl
nayuta
tani
yani
satasahasrany
.**
- sarvbani abhyava\ni6rtam
kiranti abhipi-rakiranti Bhagavantaii ca oaka
vistani
sarvani
tani
c^avakiranti
ninrtaih siihhdsan-6pa-]
9
j(rt)na-ni!janam abhyavakiranti
abhiprakiranti
tarii
ca sarvba-
vanta
vi^tam
avakiranti
sm^abhyava-
[yanam
tas
catasra/i
par$ado
vakl-
sma
divyani
ca
candan-
ca
vai/wyflse
antarike
6paritac
c^antarik^o
vaihayasam
divyani ca dusya-yuyma-
satasahturany"]
iara-ma,nlrat natti
text in
9
niratna-[wtaAdra/nd]ni, &c.
The Nepalese
SADDHARMA-PUNDARlKA SUTRA
137
TRANSLATION. 10
Verse 23. Knowing the moving and not-moving (of living beings), I say
unceasingly in this way or thsit [ How then may I load (them) to tho knowledge of
the Absolute, how may they become recipients of the Buddha-doctrines ? ]
Saddharma-pundarlka Satru],
of the Duration of Life of the Tathfigata
while this exposition of the duration of life of the Tathagata] was being
[Now
spoken, innumerable, countless living beings profited by it. [Then the Blessed One]
Ajita, while this exposition
spoke thus [to the Bodhisattva Mahiisattva Maitreya:]
of the duration of life of the Tathagata was being given, hundred myriads of kotis of
Bodhisattvas, comparable to the sands [of sixty-eight Gahga rivers, have acquired the
11
peace of the existence] which involves no liability to rebirth.
(A thousand times more
than these] arc the Bodhisattvas Mahilsattvas who have obtained Dlmranl [and other
Bodhisattvas Mahasattvas, equal] to the [dust] atoms of a [one-thousand-]\vorld system,
;
[have by hearing this sermon of the Law] obtained [the condition of unhampered in
Bodhisattvas [Mahfisattvas], equal to the dust atoms of
telligence]. [1. 7] Again, other
a [t\vo-thousand-]world system, [have obtained the Dharani that makes hundred thou
sand myriads of kotis of revolutions. Again other] Bodhisattvas Mahasattvas, equal to
the dust atoms of a [three]-thousand-world system, [have by hearing] this sermon
Law [moved forward the wheel that never rolls back. Again other] Bodhi
sattvas Mahasattvas [equal to the dust atoms of a mean wc;-ld system have by
of the
hearing this sermon of the Law] moved forward the wheel of spotless radiance.
Again other [Bodlmattvas Mahasattvas, equal to the dust atoms of] a small [world
system, have by hearing this sermon of the Law], after being entangled [in eight
reached supreme perfect enlightenment.
Again other [Bodhisattvau
Mahasattvas, equal to the dust atoms of a four-continental world system, hove by
rebirths],
hearing this sermon of the Law,] [Reverse, 1. 1] after being entangled [in (only)
four rebirths,] reached supreme perfect enlightenment.
Again other [Bodhisattvas
Mahasattvas, equal to the dust atoms] of three four-continental [world systems, have
this sermon of the Law, after being entangled in (only) three rebirths,]
by heaving
10
With a few alterations based on the fresh Sanskrit texts, the translation follows
Kern s translation in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xxi, pp. 310 ff. Passages
Professor
and
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
138
enlightenment.
of the
[1.
[a
well-founded
Blessed
One given
to those Bodhisattvas
at
Mnhusattvas
down
from the upper sky] a great rain of Mflndavaro celestial flowers; and in those
hundred [thousand myriad kotis of] world systems [as many hundred thousand
myriad kotis of Buddhas as had come and were] seated [on thrones at the foot of
all those they covered and overwhelmed.
Also the Blessed One, the
Sakya[muni, the Tathfigata, the Arhat, the Perfectly-enlightened One, yea and the
Blessed One, the Prabhutaratna, the Tathagata, the Arhat, the Perfectly-enlightened
One, who, having entered Nirvana,] was seated on his throne, they covered and
jewel trees],
overwhelmed.
Also
l,he
and ngallochum rained down,] and also above, in the upper sky, great drums became
audible, and that without being struck, [with a pleasant, sweet, deep resonance.
Also double pieces of celestial cloth, 12 by hundreds of
thousands,]
Necklace* half-necklaces, pearl necklaces excellent jewels,
sky.
fell
13
Such pieces
Ditti/a (also dursa) is pimply a piece, or length, of (white cotton) cloth.
were used for va-. ious purposes as wrappers
(dress of laymen, opp. monks, JRAS., 1915,
xvii
of men,
xi. 122, note, as well ns of women,
of
p. Ill
;
Dvy. 614
corpse, SEE.,
xi. 92)
as spreads over chairs (8.S. 353 ), or floors, stairs, &c.
SBE., xx. 128,
(Cv.v, 21, 2
xii
note); us curtains for v/omen s apartments (S.8. 76
Yvgma refers to two length.", not
).
to two kinds of material (linen and
cotton), as apparently in Dr. Otto Franke s Pighanikaya,
note
bat
also
see
n.
n.
1
the alternation of linen and cotton
p. 247,
7,
ibid., pp. 227,
4, 228,
:
>1>E.,
applies only to t3e preparation of a corpse for cremation, ibid., pp. 233, 249.
NOTE
ADDITIONAL
(OCTOBER, 1915).
confirmation of the surmise, regarding the find-place being Kliaclalik,
expressed on p. 85, is afforded by two fragments in the Stein Collection, viz. one (Kha. i. 301 6,
Reg. No. 398) of another folio of the Suvarnaprabhasottama MS., of which folio 98 is edited
on p. 113 ; and the other (Kha. i. 304, Reg. No. 403) of another folio of the Ratnaraft MS.,
of which folio 5 is edited on p. 116.
See also the Additional Note on p. 84.
[R. H.]
ANOTHER
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
EDITED BY H. LUDERK.
with in this section belong to two con
[THK manuscript fragments dealt
Sir G.
signments, marked by me Nos. 142 and 148. Both were transmitted by
Macartney, K.C.I.E., British Consul- General in Kashgur, to the Government of
India,
in
Sir G.
1.
SADDHAIWA-PUNDAIIIKA
(Plate
XVJII, No.
1,
Each page contains seven lines. In order to make the lines quite straight and
equally distant from one another, the scribe has used an instrument like the modem
Indian ruler, the impressions still being clearly visible. On the left side a circle
measuring about 40 mm. (or 1") in diameter was drawn before the writing wan
commenced, and its centre was pierced with a large hole for the passage of the
The aksara?, (e. g.
string which was to hold the leaves of the manuscript together.
yd and 9yd, fol. 253, obv. 11. 1, 2,) measure 22-30 mm. (or 1-1|").
HO
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
The
leaves nre perfect, although small holes, apparently due to the corrosive
this account
many
less
places.
damaged
for
medial
In
a.
",
nd
civd),
2, or rtyd, ryii,
el
(xcd, svd),
No. 3
Ma
253rt
(/,
isi
),
b<l/,d,
r!<d},
and
is
is used in kd (260
and the fourth form
T
(260 a ), but in both cases the aksara stands at the end of the line, and
the regular sign would have protruded on the margin. The second form, a vertical
ia
1.
7).
I")
I vd
stroke resembling the modern Nagarl eign, occurs regularly in tncl (e.g. 253 T1 ),
nd dhd there being only one case where
shows the first form (259a Til ). The
thd sometimes shows the first form, but sometimes also a form which "might be called
<Utd
first
of
consists
It
used
is
or prd 254a T ), yd (PL XVIII, No. 3 a, 1. 8), *md, *yd (254 a ), td,
pd (254
sthd 254 a*, tyd, PL XVIII, No. 3 a, 1. 6,
XVIII, No. 3 a, 1. 7, or tfd 254
In the latter cases, there
.r), and lid bv.t never in jd (or jiid) and nd (or nyd).
I
in
A"
PI.
a",
always in use a fourth form, which is a strong exaggeration of the third form,
;ind which appears to have originated in Central Asia, though the germs of it are
:
.ilready
apparent in the Northern Indian script of the seventh century (see Biihler s
Ti *
iT xir
XT
viii xiT
nd, 27
(d, 21
nd, 26
is
made
to rise, in
two
parallel lines,
PL XVIII, No. 3
6,
1.
4),
orjnd (253 a
11
r,
ili
11
",
*"
a",
a"),
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
a fact which shows
form)
them
mere
to be
141
varieties of
Ti
in which the down-stroke
modification of the fourth form appears injiia (253
),
of the two parallels is~eo reduced as to form a mere hook at the top of the up-stroke.
Medial v is
similar variety of forms exists in the case of medial u and u.
generally expressed by a sort of wedge added at the foot of the matrka (see e. g. ju,
253 *). This form is found in cu,ju, fffl/m, nu (253 rt , or MUM), pu (253 T ), bu (PI.
1
a"),
yu
tuu),
XVIII, No. 3
But in other
(PI.
hit.
ir
yi
b,
1.
8),
(253 a
lit
cases medial u
Ti
T
),
frn, *u (t*n),
denoted by a
is
Ti
i )and ru (259
In ku (253 a ), dit (254 a
the sign exactly
)
In gu (253 a n iif ) and su (253 a ii! ) the n is ex
resembles the modern Nagari sign.
pressed by an upward curve attached to the lower part or the middle of the second
curve or a hook.
vertical of the
ii
(259//
Ti
)
matrka.
and 260 a iT
for medial
is
{ -
and mostly in
259
i ir
260
iT
in
letter in
dbhu
"
we
(1)
"),
is
111
(253 a ). Twice, however, it occurs in a modified form, in which the
be laid on one of its sides, viz. on the right side in ll (260 A )
to
angle appears
and on the left in bhi (253 Tii ). The former prone alternative seems to be restricted
e.
g. in
ti
to combination with
/,
ticular restriction.
the right
part of the ordinary sign being attached to the upper end of the vertical bar of the
la and drawn out into a long downward straight line, exactly as in the fourth form
of the medial d. 1
,
"),
p. 178.
[Most of these vowel signs occur also in the Sanskrit Vajracchedika MS., see
H.]
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
H2
XVIII, No.
ils
side-stroke, a:id
m;
1.
lib,
gra (253
iy
Tii
,
254/>
),
Sri
1).
(253
iT
),
tci
(253
//,
such cases the sign for ta does not differ from that for
ir
tra (253 a v ), tva (253 a ); also fr (253d ).
Occasionally
thus in fa Ira (253 a ),
the side-stroke is optionally retained
in
see e.g.
),
pttni
a",
),
and yatra
without
(2534")
it.
tie ka again closely resembling the na ; see e. g. ha, ksl (PI. XVIII, No. 3 a,
iil
kn (253 Ti ), ku (253 a ri ), kr (253 T). In this case, however,
),
4), Icya (253
a confusion with na cnn rarely arise, as in ligatures with ka the subscript letter
1.
\\ generally attached to the left (e.g. km 253 a\ PI. XVIII, No. 2, 1. 4), not to the
Hi
nsa PI. XVIII, No. 2,
right side of the etter as in ligatures with na (e. g. nyd 253
1
also the forms for medial u and u, used in ku and ku, are quite different from those
4)
,
253
.g. rna
(
ia,yti,
tia,
na 253
a"\
rti
254a Tii
and
ra, ?a
la,
with nu 253 a
).
ta,
and bha
254 a
and upon the line if added
rya PL XVIII, No.
e.g. rma 253
rtya
Tl
if
(see
to
Ifui,
"),
/ta
(see
a"
2,
1.
1,
lour folios.
:>54
In this
).
a Ti , cakrra
once
The
yi
253
),
it
subscript v
259
1
a"
is
260c-,
sometimes written
v - vt
;
trulba
259
It
1
A"
thus with
with A in
tllii
in satba
253
253 a T (but
satva
Ti
.
/ (253
and PI. XVIII, No. 2, 1. 3), (253 *
254a T T
is indicated by writing a half-sized letter
(253
without the serif below the line and placing a curve above it. The letters t and *
can hardly be distinguished.
259 a Ti ), and
f -
57
a",
")
for
[See Profossor
Leumann
by the punctuation.
253 a lT
line (e. g.
dissertation
The
lii
full
also PI.
stop
is
generally
XVIII, No. 3
R. H.]
also infra, p. 217.
[For an instance of superscript rr in Khotanese writing, see p. 397.
pp. 41,
1
4"
indicated
6,
Literutur,
R. H.]
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
r
11.
7,
8).
lokatUidfau in
Tl
,
6 ir
143
after abhaxala
we
in
253
after
which
5
4
In 253 T it is followed by
occurs also in inscriptions and in the Bower MS.
a double vertical stroke, which appears also alone to mark the end of a sentence in
259
Tii
,
260 a
Tii
1 -
In 253 V, 260 a
is
rather arbitrary.
in
259
Tii
?/
They
Til
are frequently
v
expect them, while once (259 a ) it is found in a place where
also the remarks on blundered dots on p. 156.
it is
superfluous.
See
Before entering into a discussion of the contents of the fragment, I give the
text of the four leaves, with the text of the Nepalese manuscripts printed opposite,
and a translation. For the Nepaleso text I beg to offer my sincerest thanks to
out for
me
It is
due
to
Ca C b
to
the
be-low,
responsible,
was copied for him by Professor Kern, but that the text which is now
published in the Bibliotheca Buddhica shows several discrepancies which he is unable
If the readings of the text in the Bibliotheca Buddhica should be
to account for.
as it
i"
it.
8
I think it highly probable that this dot occurs also in the fragments of a blockder
print from Idytkutsari, edited by Pischel (Sitzungsberichte der Kgl. Preuss. Akademie
In these fragments the virama is generally expressed
Wissenschnften, 1904, p. 807 ff.).
to
the
semicircle
dot
in
such
cases
the
the
dot
above
a
letter,
corresponding
placed
by
iv
employed in our fragment. Three times, however, after avocat in 161 a and after du^kftam
two dots appear, one above and the other after the last letter. Pischel
in 171 a v 171
1
6"
considered this to be the original designation of the virama, but as avocat stands at the eud
of a sentence and asti duskrtam apparently are the last words of a verse, I feel almost
sure that the second dot is the sign of punctuation.
4
Biihler, Indische Palaeographie, p. 84.
*
See e.g. Part V, fol. 2 a, 1. 4 ; fol. 3 6, 11. 1, 3, &c.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
144
by
p. 261,
in that print on
kdiayaly.
1.
TEXT
HOERNLK MS. No.
Fol 253
1
(arv)e ca
(ft)
TBrbhuten&>
l
sya
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
Olv.
Marhju3rit/a
vi(?i)l(#)a
Kuma-
bodhisattvas
ca
ca
otlia
/i7miu
m ara -bhu/aA
A*
Mamjusrih
-Praj nakutaih
yam
madbyiirgatena satba-vinayah
krtah ta c^ayam sarhdr6 Byatel
f-atvo
Mamju
bhutarii
ri?/am
gath-abhi^Kena pari-
prccha1
Rea<t
te
\\
\ye sravaka-purva
srdvaka-yanam eva
sarve ca te sarva-
dharmdh banyan.
4-
madhya-gatenasariivinayah krtah
sa c^ayarh sariidr-
prccha-
Read anuffaragydm.
Read gundn.
kumara-
samvarnayanti
te
4s
bo
sarve
tatra ye
dhisattva l mahayana-samprasthital.i
Manjusriya kumara-
myak-sambodhau
abhuvaihs te rnahaya-
te
samyak-saihbodhau latra
ca
sarve
anuttara-
Cb
adds mafidfaitvd.
AW
BK tarvdn dha.
AW mahd-tamv.
"ptrva-bodh?.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
HOERNLE MS. No.
7
t^
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
145
sma
ti
mahabhadra
ii
suru-rulmann
prajfiaya
asamkhyeya
ye
vimtas [tvaytddya sattvd ami kasija
ctdyam prabhdvas tad bruhi prsto
vimta
naradeva tvam
dharmam
ctat^
II
47
Kam
va
sutraih
yac
bodhi-mdrg-tipadescyaih
chrutviumi bodhayc jdla-cittdh sarvai
jnaive
labdha-ndthdh
niscite
48
Ihdsidharma-pundarikam sutraih
tavdn na ctdnyat^ Prajndku(a aha
idam sutraih gambhiraih sftksniam
\
durdriam
samam
anyat sutraih
sattvo
asti
asti kascit
ya idam siitra-ralnam
satku-
aha
srtr
asti
ndga-rdjfio
kulaputra Fagarasya
duhitidsta-varsd
mahd-prajiid
tiksn-tndriyfi
jdtyd
jnitna-
dha-
rani-pralilabd/id sarva-dharma-sattva-
tamtidhdna- samddhi
sana-pratildbhint
1
Read makdbhadra,
KW
tahasr-a\ka-lak-
C b paryaprcchata, K p&ryapfcfkat.
bodhicitt-dvinivar-
khyat/it.
*gti,
BC"K
la!jhdh t
om.
W durdaSanai
u.
BK
rat/ta-ufram.
Cb
"nabhdh,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
146
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
tin!
sarva-satt"
ristlrna-pranidhana
vesv
dane
hlyate
s<i
11
aha
sattva
dr^o
maya
bhagavaii
Sakyamnnis tathagato bodhaya ghafamdno bndhixattva-bhuto nekdni punyani krtavdn anekani ca kaJpa-sahasrdni n~\
sitavaX nraahjisra-mahasahasrayarh
lo/.-.vdhato
sritavan
n*asti sa ka-
yarii
niksiji>tam
Acad
b<xlhim
aatva-hetoh pa-
abhisam^uddha
[Ai/a-]hetoh
varh
muhurten*aTiutta(ra) samyak-
sarhbodhim abhisamboddhum,
vclayaih
Read Sakyam.
Read \utlaram.
agratah sthita[*aw]dr6yate[roa]
6/>a-
sa bhagavata-
gavafci-
Read dhdfau.
yad [anayd]
tasam
/Sagara-na^a-raja-du/ii<a
atha tasyam
sa
agratfih gthita dr^yate
e-
nraddadhyad
sambuddhah ka
A-a e-
4 ve?a7/am
tri-saliasra-maliasahasra-
antasah sarsapa-ma-
na
253 Rev.
BK
enaik,
efdth.
Srandhasyati,
traddadhdt.
4
BK yat
A\V om.
fayd,
C yadd
Sraddhadhydt,
nayd.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARlKA
HOERNLE MS. No.
5
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
abhasata
gatha
147
h piidau 6iras^abliivaridy
sthat tasyarii velayam ima gatha
iraa
abhafsata
punyarh
punyaih punyaifa
punya6
(gra&/t)Iraih
va(4a)h
dbatririis a-laksanais
samalarii-
fcil-laksanaih
krtam, anuvyam7
ca sarv-asataa-na-
^Vt7zrt)-?/t(ktam
3
wrtskr
8amalathkrtamn40 n
anuvyanjana-yuktarii ca sarva-sattva-nama-
ca
tv -abh!(j7rtm?/a)m
skr[/w
jart?a-sa]ttv-abhigamyarii
ca antarapanavad yatha
yam
antarapanavad yatlia
50
ya-
ya(u) sambodhim
me
saksl
tatra
vistlrnam deHayita//*agata
ayami sarva-dut klia^pramoca-
nam
2 tha
dharmarii
yisyiimi
inocanam v
a-
tasyarii
veZayam
ayu.s??iilii
tha
51
duhkha-pra-
n a-
mau
nagaraja-duTc/iariputras
liitaram etad avocat, kevalarh
<arh
kevalarii
3 kula-duhite
c^asi
bhagini
aprameya-prajfia c*4si
samyak-sariibuddhatvarii tu dunvivarty
avit;ar(<?/)^aprameya-
j>anwam
prajfta
sainyak-sarhtttd-
ca
vlrT/aih
rlabham
See
The visarga
Read
4
p. 156.
in
3
4
veldt/dm.
Read
duhklta
gatak.
has
asti
bhagini
stri
viryarh sariipraka^ayaty
na ca
sramsayati anekani
AW
,T
BC b K
BC b K
C
ben
line.
L2
te kulaputri.
kulaputri.
janayati,
prasayati.
[anekani
vanditvd.
BK
taihmayati,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
148
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
ca kalpa-Nihasra-
sahasra5 ni
puny &ui
karoti sat-paramitah
na c*ady*api
paripurayate
buddhatvara praptobhi l
6
dhatvarh prapnoti
kirii-karanam panca sthanani stry
[katamdni
ady^api na prapnoti
panca i] prathamarh brahma-stha-
tlyarii
nam
maharaja-sthanarimv caturthamcafrrmvarti.-tfyaiii
narh
maharaja-sthanam
trtlyam
cakravarti sthanarh
caturtliam
ka-bodliisatva-
ttva-
0f/ianam x atha,
Rev.
tasyam velayara
Sagara-nfigamja-f?uhitur ekarii
mani-ra/nani asti ya
2
bakrra-sthaf
FoL 254
1
paripurayati
kirii
arfy^api stri
ni
trahasra-masaKasram
tum
niulyarii
krtsnaiii
lokadha-
kf?ama/i ea ca
sthanam,
yam
manir
yah krtsnam
asti
trisahasram
mahasaliasram
lokai
sa ca
bha-
hitra bha-
8 gava/o
datio bhagavata
c^dnu-
yo
yam maya
bha-
Read prdpnoti.
or stMnam.
Read mahdsdhatram.
Read mulyam, and grhUah.
gavate dattah
[sa]
bhagavata c*
anukampam upadaya
pratigrhi-
avocatj yo
1
Cb
BK
"rajika".
"ka-mani-ratnam.
"Udnukampdm
updddya.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
HOERNLE MS.
5
gavata
149
NEPALESE MSS.
No. 148.
dattah sa ca bhagavata
6ighram pratigrliito n^uti tvaya
gavato
^)lghrram
n^eti Bthavira alia tvaya ca 616 ghrram datto bliagavata ca 61-
ca
ghrrarh
^aripu7 tra
7/ady aharh
6ighrrata? a
mardhini
syarii
samyak-sarhbo-
dh im abhisambuddhyeyarii na
c^dsya
maneh
61-
pratigrhitah
duhit^aha
oariputra niaharddliiki
syam 6ighratararii
samy ak sarhbodhim abhisiirhbudhyeyam na c^asya maneh pratigra-
pratigra-
\hakah sydt^
Fol 259
ca biglirarb
li]
Obv.
[Atha khalu Ifiaycvdn Yasodharaya bhik?unyas cetastfiiva
prafo vitar&am
ram
jynaya Yasodha-
bliik^unirn
etad
anupurvena
ca bodhiBatba-caryam pari-
ce/a/i-]
fijuaya
Ya^odhararii
avocat,
arocayami te Ya^odhare
nako bhavisyasi
parivitarkam
yami
aroca
te Yaaodliare
[frativedayiimi te
buddlia-koti-saliasranam
dharma - blianako
bodhisattvo
bhavisyasi
bodhisattva-caryara
dhvajo
1
8
3
purya
Rami-6ata-sahasra-paripurna-dhvajo naraa
nama
Read
Read
Read
bhagavato.
matiarddhinl.
iighrataram.
uta
*
3
K to utteti
A *la.
(a utareti
AC bW pariptrayitva.
la
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
150
NEPALESE MSS.
dho
rhaw.
Icke
samyak-sarhbud-
bliavisj/asi
vidya-
na
6ai/a
buddho
deva-manusyabha 2 -
Maavan
syanarii
buddbo
bbagavan
ca
tasya
bhagavato
Ra^mi-
6ata-saliasra -pari-
tasya
bbagavato Rasmi-sata-sa-
basra-pari-
tathagatasy*
purna-dbvajasya tatbagatasy^[drAa-
bhavisyatl n
ayua-pi amanarii
atha klialu Mahaprajapati bhi-
tah saiHyak-sambuddhrtsyifiyus-pra-
j>iirna-dlivaj^ya
2 A ^uni
./ bbiksuni-sahasrai
sa-
rar?arii
aru/
yak-6a:;iibodliau
ta
aodharl
Yasodliara ca
catur-bbikimi-sabasra-
bhikfjuni
n.
Read
Read Vfltf
"ndi
Read
(aee p. 156).
i-
parivara
ntikat svakam vyakaranam ^rutv^anuttarayam
bbagavato
samyak sambodbav
ta
velayam
1
bha".
aacarya-prap-
adbhuta-prdptas ca
ACVV
om.
tasyam
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
HOERNLE MS. No.
7
ma
vam
net^asi
si
NEPALESE MSS.
148.
gratham Masimsu
bhaga-
it
vinayako
si
kasya
2
jiti
2(50
2 khalu ta W/iksunya
paryayarh
atha
etad
dharma-
vayam ap
3 vann utsahama
bhagasi 8*ast*
ima gatha
6/taavanta,m
bha.sili-(l
avocu
lokasya sa-deva-
u 1 u
atlm
gatham abha^anta
van vinet^asi vinayako
01 v.
naya&a
marii
asi
Fol
151
imaiii
A file tatha-
pasci;/ie
3
1 i
narii
ma/tasatbana
avaivartika;a
7 kayati
satva
it
bo-
te bodhi-
sa?anamtar-ai-a/okita
Read imdi
/t,
~Rea,djjijito t
Read parinirvrte.
Read bhagavan.
Read maAdtattvandm.
Read bodhitattvah (see
Read
p. 156).
na.
na
tany ai5iti-bodhisattva-koi)l-
[dftdrani-]
uayuta-sata-sahasrarii
pratilabdhanam bodhisattva-
nam
avaivartika
dharma - cakra-
pravartikanarh
te
bodhi-
AB
tarn.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
162
NEFALESE MSS.
148.
2(10 llev.
y#asaneM?/oyenabhagavaiiis ten*
l
a bhagaa?<ama?/i#i
ariijall
j)>
2
cintayamasuh asman bbaga3
van adbyesayaty asya dliarmaparyayasya sampraka-
varii
<-
ana</a/e
pranamy^i-
dhvani
sampraka3
nnn(fr7)ya
sanatayai
te khalv
evam anuvi-
bodliisatva
<
anagate
5
6 satva bhagavata 4
gaiu aven^atmanas ca purua-cari/a-praiiidha-
7 Bthitva
sirhAa-nadarh
asya d harma-paryayasy *
dhvani samprakas ana-
^ayaty
samagiya bhagavatau
bhiwmkha
ku-
van adhye-
asmaA:aw ndhye-
nena
[vayani]
tayai
nadinsu*
bliagavato
bhimukharh
eimha-nadarii nadante
sma vayam
i
vayarii
nirvrte dala-
fydmah
sarva-sattval lekkayi-
pafhayisydmas
cintapayi
dnubhavena]
1
3
4
Head
dttyafllth.
2
llead cintayathti.
l.lead bkagavdn,
Read
bhagavato.
K pranamyiat
ABOK asmakam.
AW
BK
andyetit
tanayeti,
K adhyesaly.
B
C b *anayali.
"Sanaya.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
TRANSLATION.
153
And all these had been instructed by Mnnjusrl, the royal prince,
(Fol. 253 fl.)
so that they had reached the highest perfect enlightenment.
The Bodhisattvaa
among them, who had
that
Now
r>
Having bowed her head to the feet of the Lord, she stood aside.
that time she spoke the following Gathas
The holy, subtle body, gifted with profound virtues, adorned with the thirtytwo signs, pervades the regions in all directions
in front (of them).
At
all
beings,
According to
my
my
enlightenment
the Tathfigata
1
All passages in square brackets have been supplied from the Nepaleee text ; those
round brackets are explanatory.
*
Here the Nepalese text adds Those of the Bodhisattvas who had been formerly
Sravakas praised the Vehicle of Sravakas. [See Index, p. 210. R. H.]
8
Afahdtamudra must be n clerical error for maJiabhadra.
*
After this there is a long gap; see the remarks below, p. 156.
6
I have translated yat instead of yah
see footnote 1 on p. 1 59.
*
I have followed the Nepalese text, as the passage is corrupt in the fragment.
in
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
154
is
my
witness to
it.
I shall
all
sufferance.
Now at that time the exalted Sariputra said to the daughter of the King of Nfigas:
Noble maid, thou bast only conceived the idea of enlightenment without turning back,
and thou art of unfathomable wisdom, but perfect enlightenment is difficult to attain.
There may be, noblo maid, a woman that does not slacken in energy and performs
meritorious acts and
fulfils
Why ?
yet until now no:ie reaches Buddhaship.
a woman until now cannot attain firstly, the rank of
:
of Sakra
fifthly,
Maharaja
many
Brahman
fourthly, the
There are
;
rank of a Cakravartin
(Fol. 2546.)
Now
at that
time the daughter of Sfigara, the King of Nagas, possessed an excellent jewel that
equalled in value the whole Trisahasra-Mahasfihasra world, and this jewel was given
by the daughter of the King of Nagas to the Lord, and the Lord mercifully accepted
it.
Sfigara, the
King
Was
The
promptly accepted by the Lord or not ?
The daughter of Sfigara, the King of
by thee and promptly accepted by the Lord.
Venerable Sariputra, if I were gifted with great magic power, I should
Nagas, said
have attained perfect enlightenment sooner, and [there would have been] no one to
:
supreme, a driver of the unbroken bulls of men, a teacher of gods and men, a Buddha,
a Lord in the Blvidra world.
And boundless shall be the measure of life of that
Lord, the Tt.thiigata Rasmisataeahasraparipurnadhvaja.
(Fol. 259 i.) Then the nun
Mahaprajaputl, surrounded by six thousand nuns, having heard from the Lord the
prophecy whh regard to her attaining the highest perfect enlightenment, was struck
with wonder and amazement. The nun Yasodhara, the mother of Rahula, surrounded,
accompanied by four thousand nuns, having heard from the Lord the prophecy
referring to her attaining the highest perfect enlightenment, was struck with
wonder.
Gatha:
Struck with amazement, those nuns at that time spoke the following
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
155
Thou art the Lord, thou art a leader, thou art an instructor, thou art a teacher
of the world including the gods, (Fol. 260 a) a giver of comfort, worshipped by men
1
and gods.
thee,
leader.
Then, having spoken this Gatha, those nuns spoke thus to the Lord
We
also,
Lord, will exert ourselves to proclaim this Dharmaparyaya in the last time, when
the Tathagjita has become wholly extinct, in this Saha world and also in other worlds.
Then the Lord looked towards the eighty hundred thousands of myriads of millions
of Bodhisattvas Mahasattvas, who had obtained [magical spells], the Bodhisattvas
Mahasattvas who made roll on the wheel of the Law that never rolls back. As
soon as those Bodhisattvas had thus been looked at by the Lord, all of them rose
from
their
seats, (Fol.
260 b)
Lord, and
Lord, [want to go in the] ten [directions and make all beings write, read,
think over and proclaim] this Dharmaparyaya [by the power of the Lord].
NOTES.
The orthography of the fragment calls for few remarks. After r a consonant is
nor after rr (in durrlabham 254 T ). As the first letter in a group
never doubled
;
a consonant
CcJiariputra*
is
(2540
is
In
dyit*miiii
On
rule.
the
Yi
253
and in ma\ha\fdhin\
(e. g.
)
and upadlimanlya do not occur, and a sibilant before anothe" sibilant appears as
ri
i ).
Before * followed by a con
visarga, except in lahanai* tamalamkrtam (253
iT<
everywhere
T<
o"-
is
dropped once in bJtimukha tthilvd (260 i^). As frequently in
Clerical
manuscripts and inscriptions, r is written for ri in trsahasra (253 A 254
In 254 a* we find prdptobhi for prdpnoli, and in 260 o r yefa
errors seem to abound.
sonant, visarga
for yena.
Twice the
254
A").
b li
matdhatraih
Til
mardhinl for maharddhinl. The short vowel is
maAdsd/iasram, and in 254 i
ul
written instead of the long one in "dharitMh (253 a ), funydn (253 a
mulyam
for
"),
Tl
and the long vowel instead of the short one in bhddrdydm
).
takes the place of au in loka-d/mto (253 6 ), and an the place of o in bhayaralan
(254
(259<
4"),
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
156
(260
and
T:
Instead of o
).
in
"fiijifi
(260
Ti
find a in bJtagavata (254 4 T ), a in bhayavatd (260 6 ),
hl
is missing in amtttarasyd (253a
i ),
),*rt^ya (253
we
Anusvara
).
rii
m
Ti
zma (259 Tii ), * tta
),
tlghrratara (254i ), taanii*ydnd (259
),
mahatatldHd (260 a Tl ), aw>/T (260 4), cintayaty (260 4 11 ), and on the
T
other hand superfluously added in velaydmm (253 4 ), slhdnamm (254a rii ), bJiagavdmn
1
abhisambuddfm
a
in
is
omitted
Visarga
(253
).
tathdgata (2J40 ),
(260
(253
"dnuUard
^//a (260
a"),
m
pratigrhlta (251 4 ), "tafiasrai (259
observed that in nil those cases the word
4"),
4"),
be a blunder fcr the double dot of the visarga, 1 while in the case of 8ahasrai (259 i fr)
is misplaced after parivrtd.
Final n is missing in gnna
final t in ya (2544"), and medial superscribed r in parinirrte (260
(253
).*
a"
a"),
In 260
we have bhagavann
for bhagavdn,
Considerirg the limited extent of the fragment, this is rather a long list, but
bo:.ne in mind that it is not quite sure that in all these cases we
must be
really have
it
#"?*
/"!/
to
&->
bhddriiyuth, &c.,
assume
nili
due, not to a mistake of the scribe, but to the ignorance of the author of the text.
certain want of care on the part of the scribe, however, is
undoubtedly
3
The largest
proved by a number of omissions, especially on the first two leaves.
lacuna occurs ii 253 a Tii where the text suddenly breaks ofFafter vinild in the middle
of a (ifttha.
The Nepalese text shows that about 420 aksaras are omitted, so that
,
it
MSS. add
after samvarnayanti
ye Srdvaka-jturvd borffrisatlvdx tc xrdvaka-ydnam eva tamvarnayanti, and the context shows
that such a
supplementary sentence is absolutely necessary. It is highly probable,
therefore, that the scribe of our manuscript inadvertently omitted it by passing from
the word wthvaruayanti of the preceding sentence to the same word in the next one.
11
Similarly in 2.53 A the words pi prthivl seem to have been left out between iar*apamdfro and pradeiaii, which would account for the o of tarsapa-mdlro.
In 253 b^ four
aksaras (tain
yam ydmi
In 260
tamiiwlAiih, for
is
to2504*,
[80 also rrobithly in the cuse of the prakritie, or wmi-Siuukrit, formi avocu (800 a"),
upaaatnkrramnju (260 61 ), nadintu (260 b^) with a single dot, for avoeub, Ac. ; hut see the
The
Shown
11.
H.]
is
found in 2606Til
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
In spite of these inaccuracies the fragment
is
157
history of the Saddharma-pundarlka. Even a cursory comparison with the text of the
Nepalese MSS. reveals the fact that there are numerous passages where one or more
words have been added either in the fragment or in the Nepalese MSS. The fragment
253 b sa, 253 b M aHut/ard[ih], 254 1 ratnam (in ekain maniratnam instead of eko
adds
manir),
254
b r ni/iavira aha,
259 a 11
"niyufa-tafa
buddha-koti"
<x
i"
evam
/>
asmdkam, 260
(in parasparagytaivam),
i T sarre,
2CO
Tl
sdmagryd,
2606 Tli
alfiitrd.
iil
iT
The Nepalese MSS. add 1 253
hila, 253i
aMaya (or tayd), klialu, 253 4 *aw,
254 a khalu, Sdgara t 254 a ir anekdni ca kalpa$aldny 254 a Ti kutamdni jxiiica,
ia
H1
6
254 i klialu, 254
*a, 259 a
Sdgara", 254
pratiredtiyami te tvam
satkiiraih rjurvkaram mananam pujanam arcandm apacdyandrii krtvd, 259 i arftatali
iu
ir
Tii
?//fl//rt8awyak-sambnddJia*i/a Gautamt, 260 a pa&cime samaye, 260 a tv, iti, 260 a
iT
Tii
i
i
dhrani.
260
260
tativiit,
andgafc
rayam,
These divergences sufficiently show that we have to acknowledge two different
:
i"
11
st/ia,
11
b"
</X
259<
versions of the Saddharma-pundarlka, the one represented by the fragment, the other
by the Nepalese MSS. The number of additions being about the pnme in cither
of the two versions, it cannot be said that the one is cither an amplification or an
abridgement of the other ; both must have developed from a common source. The
tnani-raftiatu
original certainly bad one of the readings preserved in the fragment, viz.
in
254 i
the sma
which
in
original, as it is
BK
253
Nepaleso
MSS. yady
ca bodhigatva-caryam,
m the
ahaih btiadanta fariputra, in 259 a
fragment aiiu/iuivena
MSS. bodhi*attva-carydm ctdnvpiin ena, in 260 a m
the
Nepalese
MSS. tamprakatoyituw
the fragment patcime kale
8amprakd$ayitu>h,i}iQ Nepalese
M
MSS. te khalu, in 260
pa&cime kale, in 260 b the fragment khalu fc, the Nepalese
.
b"
(850 V
Bee footnote 3 on
p. 156.
11
(258 a* ) and in a proie passage in chapter
Gatha 47 is in the Triftubh metre
:
").
In the Nep&lese
MSS,
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
158
.lattvd
is sufficient
to sho
.v
x
ataihkfiyeyd vinltd
In 259
rf>
II
first
mahasawwlra
etat
hw
xxxx w
v^x
small portion of fiem can be accounted for as blunders on the part of the copyists.
Thus in the fragment, maltasammlra in 253 a Tli is certainly a mistake for mahdbhadra,
i if for
in
260
tarva-duhkha-pramocanam in
oth<?r
l>e
the subjoined
lint,
NEPALESE MSS.
FRAGMENT.
253 1
anlamatah
253 i Tli yam .... ydmi ambodhiw
254 a r parijiirayate
1
antaiah
3
t/ath-ecchayd
me tamlodhih
paripurayafi
Read nuthfibhadra.
1
Antamalah agrees with Pali antamaso, while antajahis found also iu other Buddhist
works in mixed diftlect.
1
The correctness of this reading is doubtful, as I am unable to restore the missing
syllable*.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
NEPALESE MSS.
FRAGMENT.
254 i
"
159
krtsnam
trahanra-ma\ha\mha9ram lokadhdtmh
254 m lhagavato
254i T
wa\Jid\rdJiirii
254 i*11 pratigra\klta\
259 a
prativitarkam
260a T /to/
259
259 fl rl
259 //
259 i iT
260 a
ndyaka
260 a vi "dvalokayati sma
260 a yil "dvalokita
260 i
krtsndih trisahatraih
mahdiahatram
lokadhdtum
lhagavate
maJiarddhikl
"
pratigrahakah
parivilarkam
kotf
devdnaih ca manntydnam ca
a",
svakam
"tahasra-parivdrd
11
a f ha
"dvalokayHmdna
"dvalokile
11
cinfaydmafuh
kulapulra
260 i vl
Ihimukhaiii
Uiimuktid
This list, however, is not complete. There is still another group of various
interest and, on that account, require to be treated
readings which are of peculiar
As will appear from the following list, there arc numerous passages
separately.
where the fragment exhibits either pure Prakrit or bad Sanskrit forms instead of
the correct Sanskrit forms appearing in the Nepalese
MSS.
NEPALESE MSS.
FRAGMENT.
253
flt
*amj \anti
smiijdnate (Pan.
253 a Tl jMriprcchat
imiprcchati
I. 3,
ma
46)
b
(C
paryajrccAata,
pan/aprcchat)
253
cvai tt
(BK
eudi/i,
SratldatUiydt
*rcultladha*yati
dhtulhy&t,
253 ir v
253 i Ti spharati (compare
(B
\V cHni)
traddtidtyati,
frad-
xraddadhdt)
dbh ivandytaikdiite
Piili
pharati)
*phurati
1
The fragment reads ka etath iraddadlutnynli yah iakya, mukiirtendnuit&r& gamyaksambodhim abhixamboddhum, the Nepalese MSS. ka evarh (enarii, etatn) iraddadhyad yad
the
abhisamboddhum. Etam apparently
anaya iakyam muhurtena samyak-sambodhim
Prakrit form of the accusative of the neuter (= Skt. etatl which, when no longer understood,
:
was changed intomiro (enam, etdm)in the Nepalese MSS., while in the fragment it caused
sentence became perfectly unintelligible.
yah to be substituted for yat, whereby the
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
160
FRAGMENT.
NEPALESE MSS.
254a
ii! -
lT
254 i
kxantati
ksamafc
259a
259
iil
*dn1ike
antike
ctdnupurvena
a"
259
259
kHlafakitc
parip
259
"
paripurya
rhan
rtdn
<>"
T
"tab
tanti&eul (tdntikdf)
a"
iu
AC b W paripurayitvd)
AB
atah,
gatu)
avocu
bhagavdn
ucuh
itf*a/idwa
tamulsa/idiiiaha
(BC
prandmyiaf (K
pranamytai")
"
abhdsanfa (\V
pranriniayitvd
260
kulaputri)
"tontikdf
260
260
260
sat
260 i anuvicintayifr
260
titt
iiprakawpcy
260 // T karitydma
iT
260
kulaputrdho
260i Til
utsa")
(AWK
nprakdxanatdyai
*sandyeti
and sandy a
isanuyeti,
Cb
(andyati)
ilj
anuvicinfya
fa upra ka mp itdh
//"
karitydmo
/,
kulaputrdh
nadanfe gjna
dfiarun tn.
The words
iad-lhiksunl-8ahasrai\K] xaparivdrd in
tful bJiiktunl-titJtatra-paritdrd in
the Nepalese
MSS.
259
In 260
i"
are replaced
by
4 iT
MSS.joar<i*jocrflz ucith.
avaivartika-dhirma-cakvra-pravarlakd Iodhi9a\(\tvd mahdsa\f\lvds stand quite unconnectedly in the fragment, as if added by an afterthought ; in the Nepalese MSS.
they are incorporated into the period by putting the first epithet into the genitive
and dropping boflhiwtlvd mahdtaltvdt altogether. In the same way the words ayam
iT T
are connected with the preceding sentence in
tawprakaSanataya in 260&
-
the Nepalese
1
MSS. by
cit.,
j).
6.
in the
(259 a
Nepalese MSS.,
i!
),
vivariayitva
SADDHAKMA-PUNDARIKA
161
In
rate,
why
been altered into bhdiinisu^ avocit, tamprakampayixu, and naf/intn, whereas the reverse
is easily intelligible as an attempt at sanskritizing the text.
But 1 am far from
There are
believing that the fragment exhibits the text in its original state.
which tend to show that to a certain extent the process of sanskritizaIn 253 a we find annttaraityd\jh], for
tion has taken place also in the fragment.
which the Nepalese MSS. road anuttardyaih,? arid the readings "Jura in 253 a ril
certain facts
pravartakd in 260
Ti
Buddha
(hat during
many thousands
For
o,f
ftges
gra>ittitdydn
"jjravarti&audih
In 253
Tii
in the
it is
said
the Nei)alcse
MSS.
read xainxritai-ait.
The
correct reading
this should
wrongly rendered by saiiiSrifavan. The root xrainx occurs once more in connexion
y
in 254
na ca rlrym sraiiixuyati.
Here the Nepalese MSS. offer the
with
fl
ii
viry<iM
was
Sdi usayati,
In the
Gsithas,
where naturally
it
to replace the Pnikrit forms by Sanskrit forms, the text itself appears to liave been
changed occasionally in the Nepalese MSS. to avoid the Prakrit forms. In the
Tii
ii
i
first Gfitha of chapter xii (250
vimtyako
) begins: Uniyarai
with the second person sing, of the present of aft preserved in its true Prakrit
form after Uiagavdiii.. In the Nepalese MSS. we read b hag a van rin<:/tdxi v uutyuko si.
fragment the
n<"t<d*i
si,
Here
#/
ri
aro>e
in this way.
From
these facts
we may
safely conclude
pundarlka to which both the Central-Asian and the Nepalese MSS. go back, was
written in a language that ha,d far more prfikritisms than either of the two versions.
am even inclined to believe that the original was written in a pure Prakrit dialect
which was afterwards gradually put into Sanskrit. But I admit that the materials
I
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
162
how
not see
version
it
sufficient to
prove this
in fact, I do
itself.
apart from this question, we can, with the help of the fragment, determine
the Prakrit dialect which must be at the bottom of the language of the Saddharma-
But
In
pundarlka.
2fi() i
we
find a vocative
a mixed Sanskrit
We may
was written,
Vocatives in -dho
plur. knlaputraho.
if
dialect.
2.
XVIII, No.
(Plate
2,
Reverse.)
This fragment, one of the smaller of the Hoernle Collection, is the right side
The pre
of a leaf belonging to another manuscript of the Saddharma-pundarika.
served portion of the text is found in the beginning of chapter xxii.
leaf,
6^x5^
(or
inches), is only about
as it contains on an average eleven aksaras in each
line.
There are
The
same type
difference.
first
<Unl
the
first
forms
is
is
which
MS.,
in the larger
form (obv.
11. 1,
fragment are
5).
In rJm also
The
third form
is
1.
4).
11.
5,
MSS.
SADDHARMA-PUNDARlKA
omitted, viz. in
obv.
1.
Ua
2 and rev.
The remaining
1.
in obv.
4,
"satva
1.
3,
In four cases
dattam.
in (a, rev.
1.
2, latsdd/tu
163
retained, viz. in tva,
it is
and in
1.
fra, rev.
and
rev.
1.
1.
3, talra.
6.
Below
the^a
in obv.
1.
TEXT
HOERNLE MS.
NEPALESE MSS.
Obverse.
\
[ayaih
mama
min
inayii
vlryarh
dhah
[bhilaih
*Mt]tva samadhi
dtma-bhdvam\
Isarh/i-wsumita
sa
\\
\\
At/ia
priyam
khalu Nak-
Sarvasatva-
priya-
Sarvasattvapriya[darsano
bodhisattva
bhdntvti]
tau
etad avocat v
cat.
imt nh
gdthai n
sva-mata-pitarav
\
ainba
tdta
\_<t(lijtupll
sa
bhagardihs
Can lrasuryavimalaprabhttsasris
fagato
dhah
lab-
rhan
samyak-sarhbud-
ti?tha-
/o/A-]
agato
rhan samyak-sariibuddha
[etarhi]
titha-
[/
vimalaprabhasasriyai
1
v.l. tain
Some
tathagatatya
team Htdtd-pitaram.
omit Candra -tatha-
MSS.
yatasya.
1
For the text of the Nepaleee MSS. my thanks are again due to Professor Kern. [See
also the Note on p. 143.
The corresponding text of the Bibliotheca Buddhica edition
is on
R. H.]
p. 408, 1. 14-p. 409, 1. 12.
M 2
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
164
HOERNLE MS.
5 jjpyava
NEPALESE MSS.
dharanyah prratilabho
yam
ca
Haddharma-puntfariko dharsitibhir
ma-paryayo
6 jjnayuta-teita-sahasrrebhih
gdthd-ko(i-]nar
yuta-^ata-sahasraih
Reverse.
1
Ifsrebhis tasya
2 j|cat
bhagavatah
santi-
ca vivarais ctdk$obhyais
ca]
[kaiikarais
sadhu maharaja
ga-
misya-
\kac chruto
[my
3 gtatra giitva bhuyas
tasya bha-
aham
taxya
tasmiriia ca
bhagavapujam
gava-
amba
[tah
bhagavato
ntikatii\
karisyamtti
atha
Naksatrariijasainkusumitnlihijiia
[sapta
tala
tasyaiii
mdtraih
abhyudgamya
5
gbhyudgamya
tasya
bhagava
tah saka-
velavam
wa]hasattvas
-
ta-ra-
sa
bodhisattvo
Sarvasattvapriyadafsano
khalu
vaihayasam\
sapta-ra-
tasya
6 gtoih bliagavarfatam
sapta-krtva
vpasaihkramya
upasaiitkrdnta
[sam
vandya
bhagavatah.
3
tarn
pddau
sirastabhi-
bhagavantam sapta-
krtvah pradaksi\iiikrtya
yena
pranamya
bhagavams ten*&njalim
bhagavantam namaskftvt
a
*
v.i.
upagamkrdmad.
tasya,
It]
SADDHARMA-PUNDARIKA
TRANSLATION.
166
(Obv.)
[This, O excellent king, is my walk] standing [in which] I have
I have
acquired meditation.
strenuously accomplished an act of heroism, [a great
vow, by giving up my own dear body].
this
Saddharma-pundarlka, consisting
of thousands
of]
sat
having
down
gone
there,
[Having
feet of that
Lord],
seven times, [stretched his joined hands towards the Lord, and
having thus paid his
homage, praised him with the following stanza].
NOTES.
The
between the two texts are of the same kind as those existing
between the larger fragment and the Nepalese MSS. Instead of the correct forms
rhan, ga//nsrai//, anli&dt, we find in the fragment the incorrect, but certainly more
original
(rev.
may
differences
1.
4),
1).
$ahanrrebhili (obv.
(rev.
On
1.
6) for
"krivak
1.
is
6, rev. 1. 1) and
dnli\_kd\
to be added to these, but it
has been changed into flrtlhain hy dra\bhitani\ in the fragment, as in Sanskrit the
anusvara cannot stand before a vowel, and yet a long syllable was required by
the metre.
The
11.
4 and 5 of the
text therefore
is
reverse.
Line 4
to be restored to
All words in square brackets have been supplied from the Nepalese version or from
the context
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
166
*apla-ra\inaH>aye
gawya, twenty -four nkfcaraH being missing- at the beginning of line 5, just as twentyIn the Nepalese MSS. the
five aksaras are missing at the beginning of line 6.
two gerunds together with the words dependent on them are reversed, but the
reading of the fragment is undoubtedly the correct one.
Sarvasattvapriyadars ana
first sits r own on the tower and from thence rises seven talas into the sky to meet
the Lord CandrasiiryavimalaprabhFisasrl.
is
quite
unintelligible.
Nepalese
the-
number of
Go"
as in the
Sarvasattvupriyadarsana addressed his speech not to his parents, but to his father,
King Vimaladatta,
alone.
Additions in the Nepalese MSS, are cfarhi in obv. 1. 4 and aWijna at the end
of the name of NiikHatwrnjiiwuitkiwimitii in obv, 1, 2, both of which arc quite
superfluous, although
the
name
/>f
may
corresponding to the missing aksaras of the fragment varies from ten (rev.
5) in a line in the Nepalese MSS.
This little frag-ment thus tends to confirm the conclusions
forty-nine (obv.
1.
3) to
1.
the larger fragment with regard to the existence and character of the two versions
of the Saddharma-pundarlka, and it would be interesting to know in what relation
these
to
the work.
3.
(Plate
XVIII, No.
3,
language of their holy scriptures. Until recently this Sanskrit canon seemed to
have been lost, but the archaeological exploration of Central Asia so vigorously
167
carried on during recent years has shown that fortunately this is not the case.
After Professor d Oldenbourg had first pointed out, in fragments originating from
1
Kashgar, single verses that had their parallels in the Pali Suttapitaka, Pischel,
8
Academy, was
by Professor Griinwedel at
able to
a block-print purchased
public.
is
and therefore
is
found
in all probability
The fragment, measuring about 313 x 135 mm. (or 12 x a* inches), is the left
3
The missing portion contained about sixteen aksaras in each
Unfortunately on the
line.
off,
the loss of one or two aksaras in the last three lines of the obverse and the
first
The number
either side.
of the
folio,
unfortunately,
is
obliterated on the
damaged
left-hand margin.
The characters are of the same type as those of the preceding two fragments of
the Saddharma-pun larlka, but, as may be seen from Plate XVIII, they are somewhat
more rounded and cursive. There are besides some special points of difference.
of which there is no trace in the two fragments
IJta, here shows a distinct loop
of the Saddharma-pundarlkn, compare bha and Uid in PI. XVIII, No. 3 a, 11, 4 and 6,
with bhu and bid in No. 1, 1. 6, and Iho and bhi in No. 2, 11. 5 and 6. The same loop
The
appears,
e.
g., also in
4
Idykutsari.
Of
Saddharma-pundarika.only three are found here, the second form being absent.and their
is quite regular. The first form is employed in cd (obv. 1. 5), tpd (rev. 1. 7),
distribution
1
3anncKn Bocroinaro OTsGuienia HsraepaTOpCKaro PyccKaro ApxoojionnocKaro OCmecrna
VIII, 59f.; 151 f. As this publication is not accessible to me, I quote it from Piuchel B
paper mentioned below.
S.
Sitzungsberichte der Kgl. Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1904, p. 807
Only a portion of the fragment, being rather more than the right half, is shown
in Plate XVIII, No. 3.
b
4
See, e.g., I.e. Plate VII, fol. 158 , 11. 1, 2.
1
*
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
168
1.
fyd (rev.
(obv.
t
1.
(obv.
1.
occurs in
tivd (obv.
bha (obv.
6),
vyd rev.
1,
1.
(obv.
yfirii
1.
1.
The
7).
7),
1.
1),
1.
d/iti
1),
wd
(obv.
6),
and
yd
1.
(rev.
(obv.
is
3, d/iyd, rev.
1.
7),
>ui
1.
3,
1.
(rev.
1.
nd
6),
mid obv.
d (obv.
in initial
also
fourth form
1.
1.
(rev.
1.
4),
1.
1.
(rev.
8,
5), Iffd
rid rev.
The
7).
6), sd (obv.
1.
1.
4),
third form
obv.
1.
1),
(obv.
1.
5).
7, *ya
and jnd
In addition to these forms we find here a new and quite peculiar one in fid
(obv. 1. 4).
wing of the letter turning rightward and upward in a long
Indian
The beginnings of
from the
this
form
be seen in Northern
may
fifth
Dr. Fleet
in
which
XLI).
Medial
found in the
erect form
may
Of
4), ft (obv.
2),
But
in
in
fi
fi
11.
(rev.
form
is
(rev.
].
11.
and
more usual
and
7)
erect forms
7).
so also
3)
not on any fixed principle, but on the momentary whim of the scribe. 2 The
signs
medial v and u call for no remarks with the
exception of the u in lliu (obv. 1. 1),
which is quite! different from the angular sign found in the same aksara in the
for
3
fragments of the Saddharma-pundarTka.
line,
same
in PI.
XVIII, No. 3)
The
Saddharma-pundarlka.
"manah-pralya
(rev.
1.
4).
The dot
serves as
of the
two
ci in ctttchlhard cittadJiara.
R. H.]
however, found not infrequently in the Sanskrit Vajracchediki MS., and may
be seen on Plale XXI, No. 1, 1. 2, in Subhuta.
R. H.]
4
[The same peculiar sideward position of r is found also in other manuscripts coming
from the Khotmese area, in connexion with 4 as well as other consonants: see
footnote
8 on p. 90, and footnote 18 on
R. H.]
p. 183.
3
[It is,
169
facilitate a
TEXT
HOERNLE MS.
MAHAVAOOA.
Diverse.
bhantc
seyyatbapi
1
same blmmY-bbage
pratistbitah
ath^agaccliet purvasya disah
mghra vata-vr(.s<T)pr na ct
selo
pabbato
maya
ce pi disiiya
-la-
na
c^iinara
4 j?mvepayed
na
ev^aivara vi-
peyyanasani[)akanipeyyana sam*
pavedheyya evain eva kbo bhante
A:a^/w/?aytw
samprakampayen na
evam
uttarayacepidisaya-la- dakkbina-
sain-
ya co
evam
[*/;]vimuttacittas,sa
ce pi cakkhu-
bhikkhuno bbusa
n ev assa cittam
vimuktim
amisaikatarii
(j)a)^ryaharanti
agaccbanti
pariyadiyanti
ev assa cittam hoti
i
vyayain
6 cagsaraanupa^yati
bhrfiarh
c*
aiva
^rotra-v^fieyah .sabdah
The
vififleyya
MISCELLANEOUS FRAGMENTS
170
HOERXLE MSS.
nli
bhrsai n
citiiva
MAHAVAGGA.
ghrana-vijneya
yand/ia gf .rdnasyidbhd-
abbasam
bhrsam
aga,ccbaf|tt^
8 ya!|s^abbi,sam
agaccharhti bhr2
tSaiii c ^ iiiva inano vijnaiya
manassa
n ev assa
cittarii
ceto-wmuktiih
c Asya
\ia
manovifmeyya dhamma
apatbam agacchanti
prajiid-vi, mtkl uh
Reverse.
1
bhavafo
sama?z?roa)5yatt
tag
vyayam
ca
pariyadiyanti amissikatam
cittamboti
vayan
eva
xg^rtd-vyaya-dhannain
\\hitam,
c assanupassatiti
sa-
"
m cQva
samanupaHyati
vyayanudar^l nirodh-anudarbi prar>
tinihsarg-anuf?a||rt
7
4 [tra]syatc
aparitasyamanah pratyatma:Ti
2
3
4
Read
eva
nirvati
ksma-
3
vijii<>yd.
Ifead ta
I
am
The gap
is
2.
here
filled
up con-
jecturally.
e
Read
"tratyamanah.
p.
172.
Ang.
ev assa
dnejjappattarii]
manupaayati vinlga-dharmam
eva sanuinu])aayatt ni||rorf/mw
3
anritflkalam.
\\
171
MAHAVAGGA.
swmd-bhavam
idam
prajanati
avocad ayu?man &rona idam
a
vadig^rd
nekkhaminarh
6 dhimukfasva
a\va ca
tath*
pravTvekarh
a-
avyavadhy-adhimuk-
avyapajjhadliinmttassa
upadanakkhayassa ca 11 tanhakkhayii-
8
tasya tr^na-k^ava-ra^ j*ya ca
dhimuttassa asammohan ca
7 cetasah jYiatva
tata3 cittam
vimukta- J
ayatan-6tpadarh
vimucyate
tato
vimuttassa
khurio
ya
n*iisit
Saill
karaniyain na vtdyate*
yatha
eka-ghano
santacittassa
bhik-
katassa patica- 4
va-
yuna||
tadino
See footnotes 4-6, p. 172.
Read Sailo. See footnote 2,
p.
151.
A&g.patictf.
TRANSLATION.
O Lord, a rocky
1
mountain without
holes, nrtt
on
perforated, solid,] standing
l
om the eastern quarter, [yet
v>
4
it
shake,]
[quake,
it
quarter, from the southern quarter, yet
or tremble
just so,
[the passing
away]
in square brackets.
Paisagei restored on the basis of the Pali text are enclosed
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
172
within roach of his car, [though smells perceptible by the nose should frequently]
come [within reach of his nose], though tastes perceptible by the tongue should
frequently come within reach of his tongue, [though touches perceptible by the
body should frequently] come within reach [of his body], though thoughts per
intellect should frequently [come] within reach of his intellect,
[they do not change the emancipation of his mind, the emancipation of his intellect] ;
l
;
(Rev.) linden* led is his mind, and he perceives the passing away,
ceptible by the
3
he ncognizes that his rebirth is cut off
his existence
Thus spoke tho venerable Srona. Having thus spoken, [he said further
*
4
He] who is t-et upon [renunciation] and solitude, who is set upon kindness
guished
thirst,
6
[who has attained to the absence of delusions] from the mind,
source of sensations and then his mind is set free.
free,
there
is
no
6
nothing to be done remains.
done]
not shaken] 7 by the wind, [just so shapes and tastes
[is
and sounds and smells and touches the whole of them things wished for and
[gathering up of what
As a solid reck
is
NOTES.
There can be no doubt, 1 think, that the language of the fragment is not
the so-culled mixed dialect, but Sanskrit.
There are indeed a few mistakes, but
See footnote
As regards
4, p.
70.
a (adhimtktatyv); the rest is uncertain. For the general sense compare the
passage
quoted on p. 174.
8
Hestore at the end of rev. 1. 6 trsna-keaya-ratatya ca.
The rest is quite uncertain.
The exf.ct woi-ds at the end of rev. 1. 7 cannot be restored. The ya at the beginning
last
of rev.
T
8 suggests
jwicayo or tamcayo.
These void* rest entirely on the Pali text.
1.
1.
scribe.
1)
178
(obv.
1.
8)
(rev.
undoubtedly is the rest of radif.vd, while the correct form would be mlifrd (Pfin. I, 2, 7).
In rev. 1. 4 we find twice Atmanepada forms of fras, viz. [i)aritra]ya/-e and aparitffla*
aynsman Srona
but this rule
and yafJm
is
5) the
1.
(rev.
n ought
to have been
changed into
ii
In
eka-rjliano (rev.
of the metre.
I.
1),
1.
4),
"harawti
anriSnkrtam (rev. 1. 1), [paritra]yafe apar f (rev. 1. 4), ccfa*ali jndtvd (rev. 1. 7), the
suppression of the sandhi, of course, is perfectly justified, as in all these cases
first word is either the
concluding word of a sentence or a verse, or a vocative
which, in the spoken language at any rate, cannot enter into sandhi with the
following word. From the absence of sandhi between dixdh and dakxinasyd in obv. 1. 3
we may infer that the words sighrd
prarepayet were meant to be repeated
the
after (Utah.
1.
Before
but before
4),
/;
we
in
aparifraxi/amdnati praty
(rev.
nid"
3
1.
(obv.
4).
From an examination
In this respect
it
is
instead of apdtbtm.
In the Gfithas
(rev.
11.
The Sanskrit
rubbed
off.
MISCELLANEOUS FKAGMENTS
174
k*(iya-rala\*ya
two
c(i\
seem
pdda-t
for
to
tammd and
tassa,
Bnt
for vdfeita.
vdyund
cannot be maintained
it
that the Sanskrit text of our fragment is shorter than the Pali text.
The only
Pali words omitted 1 in the fragment are samina
(obv. 1. 4) and (Aitam jungjappatfarii
a number
(obv. 1. 5, rev. 1. 1). But these omissions are more than counterbalanced
by
of additions.
The epithets of the mountain (obv. 1. 1) are here augmented by the
addition of fame (i/itimi-WtdgcpratitfJiilaJi, those of the Arhat (obv. 1.
4) by the addition
of kx\n-dtru\vwyd\, Instead of cUtain pariyddiyanfi we find here cclo-vimukfim
prajiidriimiktim pa[tjd]/iantni(i (obv.
from
to radi (rev. 11. 2-5).
5, rev.
1.
There
fa"
1.
is
The
1).
largest addition
nothing corresponding to
is
it
the passage
in the Pali
have I found its exact counterpart anywhere else in the Canon, though
contains nothing but familiar thoughts, and single portions of it are met with
text, nor
it
With ryay-dnndartl
frequently.
compare,
e.
Sarhyutta-nikiiya
g.,
vJiarati
VtydnupeuuH
gdnvjiasxi
eca
viJia<
ati\.
XXXVI,
6.
7,
riharati
virdgdnupatti
To the words:
\_>ia
7.
8.
8,
nirodtidiiupasti
pariir<t~\xy<tfe
ri/mrafi
3
I
pafinisKag-
prnfydfmam
4 and 5 corresponds,
aparit^r^asyaiiidna/t
sn/dd-l/iavamjirajdnafi in rev.
nin-iiHk#~i>,ojHi[h~\
1.
aniccdnitpassl riharati
11.
parifattuti
phrase
the Pali Canon, where it
forms the transition from the prose to the Gathas
just as in our passage
compare,
e.g., Majjhim i-nikliya 82: idam awe dyafi/id Ihifffiapdfo id am vatvd athaparam etad
:
dyitf>i/(7n
Srontt idarii
radi\tva] ....
is
well
known from
Vinaya
EkuttarAgama of the Sanskrit Canon. And even a third possibility must be
taken into consideration.
It is a well-known fact that later Buddhist Sanskrit
works have frequently taken over long passages from the older canonical
to the
scriptures.
Shown
175
agreement with the Pali text, we might rest assured, I think, that the passage
was taken literally from the Canon. Perhaps a comparison with the corresponding
passages in the Chinese and Tibetan Canons will enable us to assign a definite
close
place to this fragment, which testifies again to the original unity of the Buddhist
doctrine in spirit and letter in the North as well as in the South. 1
1
This question has been 1 rented at length and with thoroughly convincing results by
Professor Oldenberg in ZD.MG., vol. Hi, pp. G13ff.
ADDITIONAL NOTE TO
144.
P.
the Stein MSS., recovered by him from the old Buddhist site nt Farhnd Beg
also ante, p. 2), there is
(about eight miles north of Khadalik, Anc. Khot., II, 413-14
a rather extensive fragment of a pothl of the Saddharma-pundarika, consisting of thirty-
[AMONG
folios,
pp.
is
267i-2(>9i
ii
contained in
fols.
6>
before pratilabdhanam
*;rve, fol. 1 3 a*.
a"
260 av
it
13o
and
after te
260
6V
it
omits
As regards the first excerpt, in fols. 253 and 254 on pp. 144-49 of the present volume,
iv
111
its equivalent is entirely missing in the Stein
printed in the Kern ed., pp. 261* -265
MS. In fact, the whole of the text, printed in the Kern ed. on pp. 266 U-266 U , is missing
in that MS., apparently due to tome inadvertence by its scribe.
R.H.]
,
VAJRACCHEDIKA
IN THE ORIGINAL SANSKRIT
Stein MS., No. D. III. 13
6.
EDITED BY
THIS
is
published by
(Plate
XXI, No.
],
Fol.
14, Rev.)
F. E. PARGITER.
Oxoniensia (Aryan Series), vol. i, part i, in 1881. The manuscript, now published,
was discovered by Sir Aurel Stein in his first expedition to Eastern Turkestan in the
]>.
p. 295,
1903, p. 364.
This manuscript
is
written on nineteen
folios, long-
paper, and each folio is about 39 cm. (15 inches) in length and 75 mm. (2|f inches)
It is in fairly good preservation,
in width.
except that parts have perished or
The folios are numbered on the left margin of the obverse side, and
decayed.
are
all
1,
and
some have
lost
few of the
folios
7, 8,
but most have perished more or less within the page, and present
gaps
revering the paper in two, partially or completely (nos. 2, 6, 9, 10, 13-15, and 19).
In the transcript these gaps are enclosed within the mark
p. Where the paper
16),
CVIII
volume
fol.
in vol.
ii
14 b (shown in Plate
Each
side is
inch).
177
and fourth
line
the hole through which the string would pass which would hold the folios together.
space is of very great help in determining the position of the writing that
This
oj>en
remains in
folios in
The
letters
with a broad reed pen and are large and well made.
The largest such as Md
and yd may be 13 mm. (^ inch) broad, and the smallest such as ra and ra about
make out what they were with the aid of the printed text, the italics
are enclosed within round brackets; and thirdly, where the letters have disappeared
completely, if their number tallies with that in the printed text, the italics are
enclosed within square brackets but, if the two do not tally, the number of lost letters
enable one to
indicated by an equal
number of
the gap and the printed text do not tally, the number of lost letters
by an equal number of email crosses. The printed text has been an
invaluable aid throughout, and without it very little could have been done towards
reading the many passages where the MS. has suffered injury.
The MS. has been well written and contains very few errors that are merely
italics
is
but
if
indicated
clerical,
but
irregularities
its
and
language
is
the forms of words, that indicate a strong Prakrit or vernacular element and
These will be obvious on perusal, and it is unnecessary for me to
A very few of the most striking instances may be just
discuss them here.
influence.
mentioned
pratitfhihitvd
vythd
7t
(fol.
13
p.
Tl
F>
for
j>rati*{haya,
(fol.
cf.
Pali
pati\(hah\tva
1.
iv),
in
viyubhd
19 a if ). Avagraha
VAJKACCHEDIKA
178
it is
mark of punctuation
bhCty/ate in fol.
b*
The datu of
and perhaps
in ntih in
fol.
15
v[
.
MS. may
The writing
century A.D. because of the coins found with it.
much like that on the plate, though the characters here are
more squat and wider. The letters here are written with rather more flourish and
present a greater variety of form, thus the vowel-marks for a, i and u are made in
quarter of the
MS.
in this
for c
and
XXI, No.
CVHI)
1),
14
may
also the
vowel o in
be seen in ydvafd, in
two ways
ai in
Plate
PI.
very
and those
three,
Two
fifth
is
and
i,
distinguished as
14
*
,
and
fol.
in
1
fol.
boillii
14i
18
(reproduced on
(Anc. Khot.,
respectively, in
ci/ta-<l/t(trd,
citta-dlidrd,
fjl.
If.
rdfikdA,
fol.
i",
vi
those of ai differing similarly from each
rpalabhyate, fol. 14i
iT
other; while those of o will be seen in the word do/l/ii, in fol. 17i and liodlu in
just below
vi
17
fol.
it,
in
in eram in
18a ri
varieties
17 a r
fol.
in their forms;
and
bli,
is
y,
Ti
is
tho
later
In
is
y, in yclia
somewhat
its
matter the
See JF:AS.,
ff.
It is published in the
IN
179
In only one or two places docs it seem to contain additional matter. It would
have been waste of labour and space to point out all the differences or even many of
them, and only passages where there are hvrgo variations have been noticed in the
footnotes.
For convenient use each page is printed as one paragraph, numbered with the
folio and the addition of a for the obverse and b for the reverse; and
number of the
the beginning of each line in the page has been marked by a small roman numeral.
No translation is necessary here because there exists a translation of the
Vajracchedika prepared by
Part II, pp. 109 H 1
Max
vol. xlix,
TEXT
tad
(2o)
(na
bo)dhisatvd
Tathdgatena
paramrri^dnuyrahena
anupariyrhltah
fj^Yuvad
4
iogi dliisatva
parinditah
paratna//a
Qparindaj^iKiyd
eva
Tat
cittaiii
sd"
Jathagatena
rigrliltds
bodhisatvah
jjaramen *amigrahena
tas
hi
Subhute
parindi4
|3(yrt
(6of//</a)<rft-yana-
8arhprastliitena ethatavyarii
ya//<(o)
Tcna)
Yatlia
prayrahe^
||ci//fl>/t
7
<avyarh
There is also, in the present volume, pp. 1276 fl ., a translation from the
Khotanese, prepared by Professor Sten Konow.
*
2
Not
Begins at p. 20, 1. 1, of the printed text.
4
Much more condensed than the printed text, cumulative expressions being
reduced to a single one, and several words omitted. The form jjarigrahehivya is
used here compare fol. 18
6
Bhagava is marked with 4 dots above and 5 beneath. It dos not occur in
the printed text. These dots apparently indicate that it is an error here. Compare
v
in Khotanese
footnote 7, p. 182.
fol. 7a
[See p. 397 for a similar practice
R. H.]
writing.
8
The circlet indicates where, in the original folios, stood the blank space
1
Read Bhagavaw.
N2
VAJRACCHEDIKA
180
ffeyif ftavyaiii
va
3
va
rfipmo
(21)
arfipino gt d
asamjjjnino va
sanijnino vd
n^diva
prajiiapyam(rtMa/i) prajnapyante*
te
"
pari?Vi
/>ito
boclliisatvasya
T
^/Vm T te
i\
(lid)oh
satva-sarhjna
gO
budhisatvo yasy^atma-samjna e
jjpravarteta
jlva-samjna va jwcfyala-sarhjfia vaApi tu Subhute
va,
kva)^cit
prajjj^
<
ti$t\ii(tena
f?tLihitvii
danarh
datavyara x
gEra/;/ hi Subhutcjji
data(v?/a?/j)
vi
(to)dhia<i;cna
atisthi)jj^to
ddnarii daddli
danarh
prati-
(6)
^aw^/m-
praj^tisthitam
cittam
d](/ma)-l>havn
7 at kin maryase
Jietn^r
SubhuOte Ma ham
abhava
The printed
utpddaQyitavyam
10
Na
sabda-jj^
cittam
utnadayitavyam x [xxxxxxxx
sy/ x tad yatli^a[p/]||wdwa j $Mmeru-parvbata-wl raja *
irasa-sparsa-pratistliitarii
xx
bhiimtal.i
botlkuatventdi;am
text
13
sas
sa(/i
Ta///r7||#G/<?rta||
bliasi^as)
ta iy^
t/cyate
tavyai n.
2
Begins at
4
"
printed text.
The
The printed
1.
6",
msson.
IN
181
y
tava (tthaga)jjvath xx
AaAyyop Gam(ffd-na)dyo (lha) veyi .h pra(f/ c)va
tatra v&\ukdh
A[roe](//rmi te Subhiite) [pra^tivedayd^mi te\ H x *||
l
(X
te
X) ||xxxxxx7||>(7](/N&)
i
(66)
x"?nasu
va
^ (puru)^o
"Aha
Evarii Bhagavarh balm t-ah
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxj! xx
n
kula-puiro va kula-((7w/iz/(Z va) xxxxxxxxxxxx ^xxxxxxxx p[,u](JAM-)
10
t-a
iji
te tavata loka-dhaturh
[xxx
12
prthivl-pradese
ya(s?/iz)|l
I
tena sah
6Aasyate
xxx va x [xx g
it,
After
dharma-paryaya
vi
j>rtliivl-prade8al.i
xxx
1T
a email
(pd)
letter,
as if it were a mistake
ya xx
15
na
cdtVf}^iuld
coitya-bhuto
(ija)
pi
bhavi.s-7/ati
16
gdthdm
()
xxx
dharma-
out.
f>
much
longer.
11
H There
instrumental case of
18
17
In the
first
Compare
fo\.
7i T and 10 a m
era.
compare
16
du/titr.
r
pifrnd in fol. 19 i .
may
exactly.
d<l.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
182
1
dhdrayisyanti
(7a) jjjpwydyam
"iiyataro
Pajj^ramcna*
[Tasmim prthivl-pradese]
vagata Mavt^yanft
rd
||sMc7niyah
vtjiia-fjuru
te
yl</t*ayusmaiii
Subhutir Bhrgavantara
etad avoca^ x
dhdraydmifj^Q
Prajna-paramita
innam
A rtma:rri
(hhd)
Ta^/<gatewa
Jpi nu
nam*dyam
dharayata
|JV
kasci
llp
(7i)
|^/iw
iti
/r 9
vi
Bhaga ||vam
na
.j^a/iasra-maha-
Bhagavam}
"\\lJbhtisitam
a-dhatu sas
kin
"H
bhasi<a
12
jj<gavam
rliirii
Tad
u(cyate
so loka-dhatuh
iti
Ta-
n
^/?z^Onu dvatrihsar
mahapumsa-laksanais
samyak-sambuddho (dra$tavyah) A(ha No) iti Blia-
bhasitany alakfla(nd)nt
2>rs(
Tathd(gatena)
(tdni)
r/i-dlltrtnisa-rnahapu^H.s^-laksanan^iti
vd
Yo
loka-dhdtu)r
Tathtu/a#en
xxx 13
stri
iti
//r/Aipvi-raja
manyase Subhufe
Tathagato
lv
Tad ucyate
Tathagateria
va (Gamgd-nadl-vdlikd-)^**
v
jj^bhdsitdni
vi
xxxxxxxx
15
paj
(ritya)-
IN
jty\
parasya
Ya6
c *eto
Ayam
desayet\
eva
(8rt)
|po
183
udgr/tya
ta-jj^
b<(hutrarii
trrijj^ni prdimincat^
Tatliagatena
dharma-p<\,(rydyo 1)k(l?i)jj:tah
na mci}ljjya
evam-rtipo
utpannam
*
dharma-pafiOrydyak sn/ta-purvah Paramena te
utpadayisyanti
Y#aiAr
ye ( )[^ia ] (stitre)
Bha^avarh bhuta-sarhjna
i
dharma-paryayam a)vaka]payi$yanti
j;a?/tca5a(fywi
16
11
xxxxxxxxxxg nt(i) T(
visyanti) Api tu hopwa/i (SuMin)[fe na teydm djj^lma-fnm^jnd prava(rti)
Aw satva-saihjila najivaQ-samjiia, pravartisyati na 18 pudgala-a?/t/na
"JUsyati
(Si) ||
For parydi/dc,
Compare fol. 10 /A
Read probably prakilSayet-^on Ayam
cva.
is
this.
Not
The printed
text bhdsi/amdnc Snttvii is a little too long for this space. Probably
omit Srutva, compare fol. 8i v and read Ithiityamanc.
10
lldmy a is clear and also d/ii, but the letter between them is far from clear.
;
as
afi,
ami or perhaps
11
The printed
12
What
\pa\6cimdyd.
ablii.
14
18
remain of the
first
VAJRACCHEDIKA
184
satva-i athjna
fjra
||J&t
ukte
a/
te
Subhfite evam eta Subhute Param-d8ca() ya-samanvd) v
xxxxx3 jw/reQ bhasyamane 4 n^^rsisyanti na samtrasisyanti na sarh-
etat
jj<yata8
Ya
(9a) i(Ap\*
<2j>aramita
til)
(Tat
Parama- Vl ^{jdramitieyam
Subhute
kcC)sija
hetohr
amga-Jjjpra-
ticchai
lo
n^asl
^isi
a-samjnametasmim samaye
b}]avi8ya(# v )
[xxxx
bhav^
namaye
^7<fivii?yat x
saidni)r
7/oJ<rt
Abliijanamy
v haiii
tiuWiiitv
na pudgala-samjna
na jlva-samjna
bodhisa^tv&no,
Barvba-samjna
t3
tamyak
^[tat fi\(lodhait) ci(tfam utpada)yitavyam^
cittam utpculayitavyaih (Na sa)lda-(ga-)
1
Tasmd
viv&rjajj^yitvidnuttardyam
Na
rup
The
Buddha Bhagavanto
Begins at
p. 31,
10
11
1.
ii
above,
we might
18
These uy] tables would ordinarily be a little too much for this space, but might
ait it, if written closely as many letters in this line are written.
The r appears to
be euphonic between
but
cf.
"irirwar
in
fol.
7 b iil .
IN
185
xxx
(pra}[ti~\(sthitant)
3
Tathdgato bhdsa(\i
4
(ddfa)vyam^
Api
(w)f|
tu,
f| "rupa-pratistliitena
bodhisatve^na rfdna^||
pari-
pOp
a-vitatha-vadi
(<7)tah
Api
iv
gatah satya-vadl
(na ta)tra
bhisam[lu(l<]hd]
jjpjj^ndhakara-pravistah evarii vastu-patito
danarh
vastu-patito
(crt)[A-.s-(/.s7H]am
Tatha-
bodhisatvo vaktavyah
Yo
danam
yatha~\
||//rcs/a-yo yo avastn-jj^
tu
paxiiyti(jaii)
|l///>i
Suiy>h/rte
ye
te
kula(putrd
*
dhdraima(m dharma-paryd)jjlyam udyrahesyanti
vacnyisyanti (par?/av)^dpsya^(ntf) jndtiis te TaMagatena
Jtw)la-duhitaro va
ytVyc^"
drstds
ya
^(Subhute) intnixo
nana-vividhani rupani
||x ^ra||bhatayam surye bhyudgate
(lOa) psitito
vd
Tad
p a[rityajati
cvam bodhisatvo]
pasye^ x
Ta(//<a)ta-va
nti
tc
"
/||
Subhute
Tatluagatena
buddhas
Tathaga^e(a)
punya-skandham prasavisyanti
va purufjo va piarvahna
strl
saman 11 a] vtina-bhavarh
say.ahna-samaye
12
parity ajet s
1
te
^O
10
Top
@*re
te
satva apramt-
i/am ca
lio
f)unoi\\
-eamaye
parityagarii pafJOrt/yogje
Gariiga-nadi-vallka-sa?Hatt
A?ie^axxx
13
(dtma)bhdvam
>
Ara|pj?rt-Z o[^]/-^r<a-ahasram
atmubhava-pari-
Begins at
foil. 11^,134",
4
6
"
VAJRACCHEDIKA
186
tyagaw
par. tyaje^
v
tf//.sij>e[V
//"111"*
(jwnar a xxx
c^emaiii
? va
bahutaratii
>ubhute
)
a
(106)
Yas
punya-skandham
prasaveta (Ka)h
yo \\k\ntv ibd(grh?wjat^ dhdra)ye vd-
"cave
8ariiprakajjJI(sa)ye
ca)
dharma-
8(i](tvd-
A>i
ndm arthaya)
imam
dharma-paryiiyah
^r^ha-yana-sjiiiipiastliitanarh
iil
rf/ta)rmrt-2>
ryayam ud^raliesyanti
(.4v/a?Ji
dhara||of|>//.s?/fw^
/>Avisyanti
/leintyen^atulyena
aprameye(na
mtvfih
xxyei,,(t
xxx
[amd-
(Sarve
|ji>yajfn<i
Na
hi
f|
te]
xxx
"0
.(!!) x
xxxxxx
turn
va wZcayitujiivH paryavaptuw
vil
n^aulam
s?^rp^Aivf-prad[eJJe a(ya?h)
Ha-dovad
wi
d(uto) jf^wA ^tfynte
pi ijtuilynh
pfthivl-pnvdelo bluivi^yuti
maniiHy-aHurasya/o/irtST/ff mndaiilyah pro,da,}s.&\nl-(karantya)ti ca (s prthi-)
te
Api
Sitlhilfa
yntm
12
12
ugrahuHyaOti
paryavapdesayisyati
vacayisyati
dhftmyi^yati
Tc pfu ibhutd Uiavi*yu v Hti su-paribhuta5 ca bhavisyanti* Yam
1
The reading
Begins at
p.
//
).
1
The d
much
mattei.
is omitted,
fol. 8
just as f in otratifyau/i for 6(tra
[See footnote
R. H.]
The verb is in the singular.
The verb is in the singular. A line of the printed text is omitted after this
99.
IN
iemfn
satvanarh
ydni)
piirva-janmikani
v \eva
kwmdm
dharme
187
krtUny fipdya.-sam(vartanl~
pdrva-janmikftny
a&ubhdni karmdni xx ||xxxxxxxxxxxxxxi|| (Abhfjdud-)
2
Sulhute (a)tlte tlhvany a(samkhyeyaih kalpaiK
(lib) *[m]y (iham
td(ni
drsta)
paril)liii(tataya)
parena caturaslti^
wradhita 5
Yam
ca
udgrahesyanti dhdrayixyanti
i rtcyi ivsyanti
"
vlradhitii
si itr-antam
8
AsyaO
paryavapsyanti
Subhute punya-skandhasy^antikad esa purvakah punya-skandhah satimam api kalam n^6(x 10 ) v tT sahasrimarn api sata-sahasritamam api
koti-^ata-saliaaritamam api 11
samkhyam
api
kala?u api
team
te
ganandm api
kula-putraniiiii
kula-pu-
Folio 12 wanting,
13) m
13
bhavi/jyuHi
1
is
two
Begins at
p.
34,
1,
but thil
The
printed text
has *rdg.
Read probably
te
Buddha Bltayavanta
arddfiitd,
printed text.
sentence of the printed text is omitted after this.
Sic the printed text has sola fat/tint
10
The character is a consonant without any trace of a vowel-mark. It resembles
pa or sa, and must apparently be pa of the preposition vpa. The reading is not
There is room for a small letter after this character,
npaiti as in the printed text.
such as mil if the d is superscript. Perhaps the full reading may be vpamdti, and
iipawd occurs in the next sentence of the printed text.
11
More abbreviated than the printed text.
18
The character does not appear to be pytu.
13
Begins at p. 36, 1. 21, of the printed text.
fl
VAJRACCHEDIKA
188
rhan
iti
efji
aw
rade
H
oig(yaJk-o>)
hilfa
Subhu[fc
}-t(ithat(iyt dd\nva,can&m
Tathnga^ien^
i[
T\\&i&
jamyak-sambodhira abhia(m)buddhah
yas Tathagaten(dn}ttftaram
Subhute
saniyak-sambuddhen*anu||O//ar||a
2
iv
samyak-sarhbodhim abhisaih||OAu||ddhah
Yah Subhute Tathagatena dharmo bhisambuddhah na tatra satyam na
mrsa Tasini! Tathagato v bhasati sarvba-dliar[?n]a jjxxxxxx^ rf/<agr[w]a
sarvba-dharma
xx
iti
Tad
dharraa
Subhute Sarve
Sulhute
ya//i
^Igyf/.s-mii Sublifitir
aha
>
Yo
te
so
Tad ucyante
a *-dharma
vi ruso
bhaved
sarvba-
uj;cta-p/5-yo maha-kayah
Bliagav&m Tathagatena
g^sgi[/A
u]p&(ta-kdyo ma-)
/ii-kayah Ayus[?w]amgxxxxxxx || (Bhagavam) Tathagatena
tipa-k&yo mah a-kaya ||//t a-kuyah *gs Tatha(#a)"tena bha>itaA
Evam etat Subhute Yo bodhiTa[rf] u\c]ya |/e vpvtakayo wagAa-kaya
satvah evam vadc Ahawt satvam parinirva
^payisye Na sa bodhisa-^
O tvo tv/yktavyah Tat kasya hetoh Asti hi Subhfite kasci dharmo yo
(13?>)
bhd.?itah
iT
sat i ?ii/isatva
[Ta-~]
Three
obviously vari
*
omitted after
this.
?s
this
MS.
here.
would exactly
8
Two
The
10
fill
all this
space.
Begins at
p.
p. 38,
1.
184.
SitbAiitir
aha Yo so
IN
189
mam"sa-caksuh
Aha EvaJO jin eva ~B\mgavam samvidyate Tathagatasya prajfiiicaksuh Tat kin manyase Subhute amvidyate Tathavgatasya dharmacaksuh Aha jEra||m eva Bhagavam samvidyate Tathagatasya dharmaTat k J (w ?na)nyase Subhu/e Saifat idyate TathagataT sya buddhacalJjfoM/i
caksuh
caksuh
Tat
^z
(14i)
JBAa 3
Evam
A||Art
eva
Bhagavam
Qn manyase Su^Mw/e
vallka^
^gavam
apt nn J/d
bliasip/
saiiividyate
Tafhtigalasya buddha-cakwh
Tathayatena^jjl sd
Aha
Evam
eva
manyase
Su6Afit||e
bhaveyitjlh
Trttra
bsJiavas td /oka-dhatavo
bhaveyuh
iv
Aha
Yavata Subhute
?o/i a-dluTtusu
sati ii
7i^6)||y;a/a^%a<ep
15a
Jxxxxxxx
i//
Tat kin
This long- gap can be restored with confidence according to the analogy of the
preceding sentences and the printed text.
2
Begins at p. 39, 1. 4, of the printed text.
3
Some of the letters that filled this gap have become impressed on the lower
margin of fol. 15r, and can be discerned there upside down and reversed, namely,
MX x xbhatitdfi. A/tax vamc. The text has been thus restored.
4
See note 3 all these letters can be discerned on the lower margin of fol.
5
This letter looks more like sd than td.
This ends with line 14 on p. 39 of the printed text. For the following blank
letter, see next note.
7
The following words Tat kin manyate agree and begin with 1. 15 on p. 39
of the printed text, but these preceding words and the email gap at the end of
fol. 146 seem to contain either additional matter which comes between H. 14 and 15
of that text but does not appear there, or the words in the latter part of 1. 15,
those words coming first and taf kin manyate being inserted parenthetically after
them. The latter supposition is improbable, because such a construction ocean
;
15<i.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
190
Alia
xxxxxxx
||
duhitii
va
H evam
eva
pra^m e(
Su"^bhute Bahujj^
sa kula-putroOva
tato
jjjSace
(kii)la-
ho punahjj^
rfra!|.stovyah
No
Aha
iti
Na
Bhagai rtih
rupa-kdy&-
(156) ||7o/
f^n
gato drnstavyah
i
?"
-<4ffpi
mvarii bbava
3/crgv/a
!!/!
nowhere
elec in this
discussion.
prece<lin<^
"
Tat kasya
ifi
negatives
it.
Ifi indicates
right,
iT
It occura doubled thus in fol. 8 6
doubled in thu printed text.
3
Two lines of the printed text are omitted after this.
4
Begins at p. 40, 1. 13, of the printed text.
5
Samjiadd is treated as the nomin. singular, see line ii. There are traces of the
m iv
y compare the same sentence in fol. 17a
A line of the printed text is omitted after this.
7
According to the printed text these words should be read lhdsittdlak*ana.
*
Or peihapa aixci, as it should be with sampadd. Compare a-sa/hjn^etd in
.
"
fol.
19a T
A
10
too
line
repeated.
IN
191
T
d[e]sana iti Subhute jjA *a*/i jajj knsci dharmo yo dharma-desaT Jnd xxx
xxx *4 1
Byu9mifa Subhf<jj/i|jr Bhagavani&m etad avocat v Santi Bhaga-
(16)
?/
g ime evarh-
tena bhimta
Tad ucyate
vi
||rM;>a-</Artr/Mdn
Na
Bhagavan aha
te
iti
Sul>hfit[c]
XXXX |J
Subhute
Asa(tvd8
mana gxff
JXXXXXXXXX
tc)
Tathaga-
[s&]rvba-satvd Ji/i
j ibhiite
Api nu ka,sci dharmas Tathagaten^anuttararii s&n\yfik-8ambodhim abhisambuddhah Aijusmiim Subliug/ir aha No iti ]ihar/ajji
kaaci dharnia yah
TathaOgaten^anuttararh samyak-sanilodhim abhisambuddhah Bliagavan aha ^ xxxxxxxxg >yevam eta Subhute anuOr api tatra dharmo
na samvidyate n^opalabhyate
Tad ucyate nuttara samyak-sambo[[
:>
v<m\
samah
sa
dharmah na
Tad
dharmair ablnsnmbuclhyate
Kusa?
iti
Su-
bhrite [A-]
(166)
dharma
rf/ta"t-au
nam
iti
abhisamharitva danarii
c/ftdyful
"
c^a^itah
yas
prajfta-parag/ni/dyd
There is room for six aksnms here, of which the last has the vowel a
apparently*
N&mttipalalhyale of the printed text does not suit.
2
All this is much abbreviated, and it is difficult to offer more
suggestions for
filling up the gaps.
3
/>etoh
\ei there
still
Compare fol. 13 A
The printed t^xt in doubling the phrase of assrnt suggests that we should ri?iid
here Evam etat 8vbAtUe }mt this seems to be one letter too s^ort for tlift spMe.
Cc npare the doubled phraso in fol. 8i \
7
The printed text suggests the reading here should be (vatvena
but this seems to be one letter too much for the space.
1
".
f>
8
9
19
Kor tarvbaih.
Begins at p, 41,
1.
printed text.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
192
xxxx
asya
api gatham uOdgrhya parebhyo desaye
pnnya-skandhasya csa piirvakah punya-fJbAanrfAo^ satatamiiiijj^
n^opeti
wpanif&Om api ria ksamate Tat kin manyase Sulhiltv
"icatnspadlm
Sublifltc
iv kalfi
v
x 2
mayd *aQ tva mocitali Na ho
Api [NW] Tthagatasy*cii||twM bhavati
punah Sublttite evam drastavyam Tat kasya \\etoh Na Subhute l\a\ci
vi
,w]tvo sti yafj* Tathagatena parimocitatij^ Yadi punah Subliutc kascit satvo
bliavet^ yas Tathgatena parimocito 6Avisyat v sa [e]ra Tatha^a/a*?/^
iitnia-yrahn
bhavify(U\M
3
(170)
iti
graha
(a(va)-graho
Subhute agriiha
esa
Tathagatena
Sa
6/ioaitah
irt/rt-pr
Atmaithag-
Evam
eva Bha-
Aha
OSacct
iv
/a/,-.sY(ra-saihjK(day(c7 ls
ro||j^api cakrivart/ 2
bhavi||*yarf
thrigato bhavi9v;^ x Tasimid alaksana-sam}>adayas
xxx
Tathagato drastavyah Ayusmam Sulh/ltir iiha YaQthidhaih
7?Aa||gav
^artham
na
bhasitasy
la&wma-iampadayas Tathagato
ajanami
xxxx
drastary/i ^ll.ha Bhagavawt ^asyarh 1 cQ.laydm imam gathiim
g
>
vato
"
(171)
sit v
1J
\e mam rupena
mithya-praliuna-prasrta na
manyase Subtitle
I>^y
The
So the printed
Ye mam
(ghosena) anvayuln
Tat kin
te (n.)||/*a/i
dra[ksiia](nti)
adraks(i)
mam
Na
lio
d/iarma-pari/dyd<1,
but there
is
room
for
and three
lines of that
alisarns here
abha*i*U,
IN
Na
Subhule
/a^sana-5aw||(pa)
sarhbodhim zbhisambuddhah
(samprasthi)teTi&
sa iv tvena
Na
ho punas
ucchedo va
193
syafc
kasyaci
te
v
8am-7/rtna-samprasthi tena satvena kasyaci dharmasya vinasah prajna
Yah khalu punah Subhute Gamga-n.ar7i-i Ztt/Yiva
ri^occhedam
ptah
samdm
vi
loka-dbaturh
sapta-ratna-paripiirnfim
danarh dadyad
krtva
dh&rmcm
Aha
aha
Bhagavan
la]>ra^
Na ho punah Subhute
Xanu
A-.sdn//m
llhagavarii
/>M
Parigi-ahetavyah Su
(ni/a)-skandhah parigrahetavyo
bhute (n*6grd)\]ietavyah Tad i(cya^te parijj^grahetai tjak Api tu 6 ]Sulhute
kascif? evarh vade
[?/]/*,
TathagaOto gacchati v^agacchati va tisthati
"
va
(ntyldati vd
ajanati
TaOt
a-kvacid gatah
Yah khalu
kasya
pun.-.h
kurya
(186) Ue
km
8
TaMiigata
iti
Subhute kula-putro va
yfiva
sanic&yah Tat
/<etoh
frnsahasra-mahasahasre
wrtsirh
na
loka-dhatau
vi
ev^asarhkhveycna
me
Subhute ca
kvac\d agatah
rharii
samyak-sarhbuddhah
kula-duhita va
yavanti
prthivi-rajarhsi
sa
evam-rttpaifa
pararadnte-
manya[se] Subhu-
Aha
Evam
eva
18
This seems
to
a-gacc/tafi in fol.
".
2
a
4
5
6
tad ucyate always stands in this MS. for tentocyate of the printed text, and iti
omitted as it is often in this MS.
7
The printed text has na, but the letter here resembles ca or da and not na.
8
Begins at p. 44, 1. 15, of the printed text.
is
VAJRACCHEDIKA
194
ma nu-sarhcay^
awp cayah
Yam
iti
No, sa
nabhilapyali
||<SMAwte
^
3
vade
Atma-drstis
pudgala-drj?/;/*
Ta-J
6
"thagatena
Ya
"
Tatba-7rt^eJO;ia|! Wiasitil
kasya beto
(Yrt)tha
])htirm<\,-(8amjna)
Evaih Subbute
jiiiitavya drastavya
na dbarma-samjna pratyupastbahe
fi
adhi|jog(^iyrt)vya
iti
iv
jj.dharma-sa>
njnd
iti
Subhujjjvte
Tat
a-sarhjn^esa
Yab kbalu
Tatbaga(^??) |^A^g(<) Tad ucyate dharma-samjn^eti
Subhute bodhisatvo (mahdsa)^tvo xxxxxx loka-dhatumj^ vi sapta-(m^wa8
9
par) \p(iirnan ) || xxxx J parityaje d yas ca kula-putro va
va (i):^A prijiiu-pdramitaya dharma-parydyd caiuspa-^Wi
n
(196) [rti]m
api ^rttbam
[paryavdpnuyat parebhyad
udgr(/<?/fl)
JrfAaraye
kula-dubita
[de&aye
w](ca)ye
lz
(ca
bahutaram pu,iya-^(sT\a}nd1iam
vistar)^ena
saniprakasayed
at/am
tato
The wo -ds
10
11
18
16 bM
and
fol.
10 a lT
T
.
Begim
Such
fol.
4",
text.
IN
195
te]
j^ca
bMkfu-bhik?uny-vpdsak-^p!if^(8ikd)
sa-deva-
(w)ena
saha
xxxx]
xx
(iS
e)salena
ea/ta
Samcax^o
sa(/ja
x 8arvla-8atv)[aih
The printed
in
fol.
14
!ii
.
-R H.]
o2
A. F. RUDOLF HOERNLK.
Hoernlc, L.
Liiders, P.
Pargitcr, Th.
Thomas.)
1
*a-kufialamula, stock of demerit, Th. 4 6 .
n
a-gacchaii, IK docs not go, P. 18 a
come, H.
4 (1)6
three kinds of fire,
a-gati, evil
agni-traya,
*a-graha, biis"less notion,
Angulimala,
pr.
adhisthana,
H. 4 (2)a vi
P. 17 a 1
18 6V
*a-cintika, unthought
(2) &
lln
of,
.
I
Th. 7 (1)
7
|
P.
a vi
".
106
a,
v.
12
II. 1
4 (1) a
H.
of a robber,
n.
H.
resolve,
5 a ij
time, Th.
adhvan,
5 6 vii
260
invites, L.
lie
6 !i lv .
-
sec attte,
and-
gata.
*adhvabhasit
iv.
a";
6".
7 (2) 6 V .
*an-abhiramya, incapable
a".
*MU
P. 9
aiv.
".
adrakI(t), he
sees, P.
vi.
buddha, Th. 7
(2)
aiii- iv.
3 a vi
P.
13ov
of joy, Th. 6
176.
*a-dvandva, unequalled, H.
a-dharma, baseless dharma,
v.
anukampa,
an-uttara,
11 a x
,
P.
iv
mercy, L. 254 6i ; H. 2 6 .
Th. 4 6 vil ; supreme, Th.
final,
6i-"i;
13a {ii
16
L. 253
a*,
6{
"
259 a^,
6i
a"
marked with an
asterisk.
197
*anudars in,
vi
apratisthita, not relying on. P. 2 i
*a-pramanatara, countless, Th. 10o viii
a-bahirgatona (manascna), without out-
ft
6"
3 bm
perceiving, L.
r
*an-uddista, undeclared, Th. 2 a .
an-uddhara,not-taking-up of robes,
H.3aTi
ward-tuincd
2a
iii
.
HV
anumanyatu, may
it
grant, Th.
6 viii
Anuradha,
pr. n. of
v
;
interference,
obstacle, Th. 2
H.
v
(57) a
10
*abhipravarsi,
H. 12 (3)a
*abhisarayana, visiting,
abhisarhskarot (nbhisamakurot], he per
formed, Th. 1 6*
abhisarhskrta, performi-d, Th. 1 a
-
vi.
abhisamaya,
vii
antarapana, market-place, L. 253 6
antargata (indriyd), inward turned (senses),
H. 1
iH
vi
antardhana, disappearance, Th. 3 a , 6
iv
*antardhani, id., Th. 3 6
antardhasyate, it will be hid, Th. 3
comprehension,
sec
1
.
jfiiina,
(Iharmn.
enlightened, L. 253 6
96 iv 13 --v, 16a"-i, 176U. iii.
abhisambodhi, enlightenment, L. 2536
abhisambuddha,
P.
l>\
251
6"
b".
i!
;
",
fcvii.
iu
bv .
with
v
place, P. 9 b
1 1
a -visthapana, prevent
iv
ing censure, H. 3 n .
antamaSas, even, L. 253 6 ; Th. 2 a*.
v
*antah-pakva, food cooked indoors, H. 3 a
antaraya,
H. 3n
6V
jvii. viii.
sure,
7 (2) a
an asterism, Th. 9 6
T
anuvyafijana, secondary sign, L. 253 6
viii
*ami6arhsa, praise, Th. 2 a
*an-ovada-prasthapana, initiating cen
H.
living as a briihman,
(thotifjhts),
*a-brahmanyata, not
H. 10(5G)y.
P.
26.
*anuparigrhita, received,
H.
rival,
jr/,m,
<].v.
abhuBit (abhuai),
aiii. vi. vii. x ^i. ii.
it
Th.
happened,
11
in fear, L.
vii
3 6*.
*a-paribhava, not-contemptuousness, H. 10
vlii
(57)a.
vi
Apalala, pr. n. of a Niiga, H. 5 6
apavaktr, detractor, H. 12 (3) o*.
r
P.
apaya, place of suffering, Th. 5 6
11 o v
^.
mother,
H. 10(56)6*.
see tr-apAya.
a-muya, having no
illusion,
H. 66 11
*a-mi6ri-krta, undefiled, L. 3 6
f
*ambara-tata-stha, lieaven, Th. 7 (2)6 .
*a-raksaniya, not needing to be guarded, H.
4 (2) a,
a-rak?ita, not guarded, H. 4
.
(2)
vi.
6*.
VOCABULARY TO
198
*Aryasoma,
2
6*.
1 1
9avi
yi .
"
b"-
V";
a-labha,
want
ill-success,
Vsampada,
a*.
of success,
H. 10
v.
(57)
little
understanding,
alpa-buddhi, having
Th. 7 (l)aui *alpa-bhoga, hnving little
H.
means,
10
(57)
a";
*alpa-6akya,
1
power, H. 10 (56) a
Hi
avakranti, ent ranee upon, Th. 8 6
iv
avagunthita, veiled, H. 13 (3) a
having
little
Th. 2
(tro rasya),
of praise, H. 13
as as-raja, Asura
asurendra, Asura over
king,Th. 6 fc"
iv 6 V
with ksaya, Th. 6 &**.
lord, Th. 6 a
a-secanaka, charming, with bhdva, H. 12
Th. 6 b
id.,
a"
(2>*.
it
*a-sya(t),
(!)
monk
7 (l)6 vl
*a-varn-arha, unworthy
",
v.
*a-varsika, a
[i
*asat-pralapa, idle talk, H. 13 (2)b
1
16a j
a-sattva, not a being, P. 96
bhavana,
9 a11 ,
avabhdsa
1 1
186"".
Buddhist monk, H.
jx
ii; P. 18ari.
*a-sarhcaya, not an aggregate, P.
a-samjfia, baseless idea, P. 8 a v, 6
6 U1 19a^.
rt
may
not be, P.
176 Hi
iv .
standing, H. 2 a
he looks
avalokayati,
a vi. vii.
L.
towards,
260
akara, precious, Th. 7 (2) 6 iv
avahita, atten
Th. 7 (2) a.
dropping about (alrasfood),
*a-vikirat, nol
H.
ive,
aksip et,
it
*acakseta,
".
".
a-viksipta,
iv
1 a
&
ui disturbed,
Th.
7(2)o;
H.
ai, ^aiv-v^h.iv.
*a-vitatha-va<lin,
speaking,
P. 9 b*.
5
;
<t
answered,
a.
4(l)6
i
.
(l)a.
upon
set
of
P. 2
b,
8&
a-
addhyastama
Ananda, pr. n.
T.
(?), P. 196
of Buddhist
monk, H. 13
(3)
a-6uru?a(for
H. 10(56)
*a-Bramanyati, not
living as a
Sramana,
9<t
Tii .
an asterism, Th.
1:i
receptive mind, H. 5 o ,
See atlamanas.
*aptamanas, with
7 bv
#".
>f
self,
iv
*adi-sutra, aboriginal sutra, Th. 7 (2)6
adinava, evil, Th. 2 & *.
o"
H. 10(56)0
Ailesa, pr. n.
sense;-),
3a*-*.
a"
L. 3 6 vii
ayu-pram&^a,
la 1
Th. 4
a 11
136
1 -
venerable, Th.
Ac.
a 111
P, 2 a*, 7
8 b
Sec jarwla-pana.
&".
&.
ii!
alarhbana, opportunity, H. 9a
aloka, Ik ht (opp. iamaa), H. 12
6 iv
&,
13 (3) a*,
106
17
up,
196
",
19
a*
H. 3 a*
off,
H.
be
to
*u(d]grahetavya,
udgrhltavya,
H. 1 6 V
18
to be
a";
snake, Th. 2 a
P. 6
udgrhita,
156^,
*udgrhnlta. (fruit) picked
rejected, P.
q.v.
3 a 11
yanti, P.
(1)
he should preserve, P. 10 a 71
iv
u[djgrahesyati, P. 1 1 a
udgrahef
udgrhmyat,
&".
uda-puna,
&"
Th. 2 aix
*.
uddi^oya, Th. 2
aviii.
259 6^-*.
Asadha,
to,
avii,
utpadayi^yanti, P. 8
a iv utpadayitavyam, I 6 a jl 9 a^
utfiahamas, we ex-rt ourselves, L. 260 a lif
-^;
L. 259 6.
ayueman,
199
fcvii
ii
pr. n. of
an asterism, Th.
9a
iv .
46"
*upani66raya,
residing, Th.
(tlie
*upanisa, P. lGtt v
upapatti, existence, see
ed., p. 35),
V
note, P. 1 1 6 ;
H.
desire,
a li
M. M.
4(l)av.
*icch-Apavicara, seduction by
7
12(2 )a.
iv
Indra, pr. n. of a deva, H. 5 a
2&>
falnvtyaiMlli, fukho-
papatti.
.
ij
iv
iryapatha, becoming deportment, H. 1 a ,6
T
*upavicara, seduction, H. 12 (2 )a Ji
.
*upasamanukula,
Th. 8 a
to
disposed
heretical
(1),
Th.
(o//b?;>to)-caksu9a,
cast eyes,
H.
la",
&v
npasampada,
86".
with
down
],<ra{na,
vinaya-
H. 1 6vi vi
See tmrtim.
*upa8thita-smrti, fixed attention, H.
.
6 ii.iv.
upaya,
arising, H. 4 (1)0^, 6
*Utpalavaktra, pr. n. of a king, Th. 5a^,6^.
utpada, source, L. 3 6^.
utpadayati (ciUam), he turns (his thoughts)
utpadyamana,
jfiandbhisa-,
ryakarana
upadaya,
See ehibhikm
v.
traivacitta
will be frightened, P.
*u[tltrasisyanti, they
8 6* u[t]traata, frightened, Th. 6 6 .
;
vii
ft
monkhood),
H. 3 6^
,
initiation (into
maya,
d/iara
calmness,
iv
L. 25
evincing
H.
(feeUng),
6 iv
bi.
VOCABULARY TO
200
6 fr
1
upeta-kaya, taken a body, P. ISa* tf-U.
uiusyanti (ut-tufyanti), they dry up, Th.
,
*k-gunata,
*kam-6papatti,
4&H.
C
urdhvam adhah,
6*
kaya, body, H. 4
1
.
o,
(2)
a- ii,
a"
ftiv
p.
#*-*
1
Th. 2 b*-
3 avi
g ee
Ji. ii.
>
dharma-k&ya, rupa-kaya.
-al
rddhi, supernntu
power, Th.
al-
Th. 8ai-*,fti.
Si"*-*;
kasaya, monk
solid (rock), L.
*eka-ghana,
*ek-ahika, quotidian
i iv
Th.
(fever),
ft
5n
v
aurasa, son, H. 13 (3)
See ausadhi,
ausata (ausudhi], Th. 9 a
ausadhi, medical herb, medicament, with
11
ft"
Th.
of a pagoda, Th.
1 1
1 1
&;
a\
1
ft .
6 iv .
liall
doctrine, regulations,
of a country, Th. 3
jii
ttain, Th. 8 a
Th. 4
see akusalamula.
Keet vara.
*kriyava8tu,raeansofacquiring,H.4(2)a
sot iety,
61 .
7 a v
krtalaya, who has made his abode, H. 5 av
krti, poetic composition, H. 1 3 (3) 6 iv
a"
kama-guna,
*>,
a".
kamksa,
&>.
".
a iji b vi , &c.
ku^agara-6ala,
.
kusaia-mula
utksepaniyb, rudra.
3ft
iv
kalaha, <juarrel Th. 9 a
kala, n fraction jf time, P. 11 b"-*, IGft*^.
Kali, the Kali t.ge, Th. 5
Kalinga, pr. n. of a country, P. 9
kalusa, impurit;-, Th. 5 ft
kalpa, (a) a period of time, Th. 2 ov , 10
H.
Kasmira, pr. n
kasaya, (moral)
(ft)
a person, H.
of
56*".
lift-
n.
pr.
ft".
10a v
god of wealth, H.
f-
P.
of the
Ti
n.
see (,c-kantaka.
pr.
*Kumarabhadra,
1 1 &.
v
actions, P. 11 3
karma, rite ; se
Da".
Kubera,
Au
kantaka
a".
Th.
Th. 5
}, they besprinkled,
111
ollyet (mvfF), he slackens, Th. lOa
O
okirinsu (avnki
i>r.
Th. 2 a
bi-inpp,
a class of mythological
n. of
Kinnara,
ftvi.
kxayn, q.v.
a".
II. 3
iv
see
in
value,
vii .
L.
2546".
|
*ksayat&,
1
k^anti,
patience,
P.
6*- **.
176^; k9 -p&ra-
k8-vadin, upholding
106"
Th. 2
7 (1) avi.
ncut., id., H.
6",
oaksus,
with
(|.v.
201
dhanna,
cakRusman,
lii
4(1)
<i
P.
H o-
buddha, mdinsa,
projfia,
sieing person,
II.
86
*Catuh6ataka,
in
n. of
9# v
a Rishi, Th.
hymn, H.
khandl-krtva,
H. ia v
Khanista, pr.
pr. n. of n
Kh
2r>9n
Gafiga,
pr.
n.
P.
iv
14 v: & H 17 6 V ;
10
sand of G., Th. 7 (2)6 V
{
gandha, smell, Th. 7 (!)& *; P. 2b*, 6 a
9 vi
iv
7& v
"-
G c-rajas,
pr. n. of
being*, Th. 2 a
class of mythological
ft
9 a
6 ix
106 iv
19& iv
P.
Th. 11 &
(yfilJta),
four parts, P. 7
".
catuspadika
6"
Gandharba,
20
of n river, Th.
carana, conduct, L.
cari, moving, Th. 1 1 a
*carima-kala, last time, Th. 26*.
carimika, last time, P. 1 1
u
cavitva, having left, L. 259
m
(4)i
caksusa, comely, II. 12
c
*catu- dvipika (dbai ), four continental.
1G6"
catuspada,
of
(verse) consisting
id., P.
catufpadl,
56
id., P.
v
.
vil1
carya, conduct, with A-w-ya/a, Th. 6
l i{ iv
citta, mind, thoughts, H. 1
106*.
garbhadana, impregnation,
gatha,
a",
Tli.
>
*.
2 t
P. 2
.^.vi.
G o
*Cimba, pr. n.
monk s
H. 12
difficult cattle-path,
v vi
ft
t vi
7 (2)
9 a^, 1 4 t vi
.
Tli.
L. 3 a iv
go-kantaka,
;i
iv
/
oitta-dhara,
flow of thoughts, P. 14
; Cittdtpada,
see
see botlhi
prathama.
cittdtpadika,
Citra, pr. n. of an asterism, Tli. 9aM.
of
the
thinking, Tli. 10 a*.
*cintikata,
way
vi
(3)
civara,
of a person,
robes, II. 3
H. 5
ft"
bv.
with
kal}>a t
a*.
q.v.
of milking cows, H. 9 a iv .
object (of sense or mind), Th. 7 (2)
go-dohana, time
gocara,
a v, 4; gaucara, Th.
11 a*,
*cuti[ka], small, Th.
v
cetas, mind, L. 3 a with vitMtkti, q.v.
1
P.
1
*o-bhuta, P.
;
caitya, shrine,
,
7(1)6^
a"
vi
gaurava, respect, L. 260 6
v
*grantha-bhava, bondage, H. 7 a
ix
graha, planet, Th. 9 &*
ii5
grama-caura,
grama, village, Th. 7 (1 ) 6
66".
*codana-vastu,
cause
caura, thief
grama.
of accusation,
H.
graha,
with
pudijala, sattva, q. v.
Oh
ghora, dreadful, Th. 2 a"- *.
gho?a, sound (of words), P. 17 6V
see
Oh
1
7a-"-
(1)6".
v
;
with grantha-
ohidra,
hole, cavity,
H. 13(1)6*.
VOCABULARY TO
202
jangama
mr-ing
(lit.
13(1)
H.
man,
being),
ii.
|
janapada-pradeta,
1
a\
fc
tira,
i.
turya
12(2
6*.
)
9a iv
Mna,
36iv with
L.
desires, L. 3
in
rata, delighting
H.
of
6".
254
"tj-sahasra, three thousand, L. 2536
P. 16 6 { 18 a v with mahdsdhasrn,
q.v.
teja (tfjat), power, Th. 2 6{i
tejas, tire, in tejo-dhatu, element of fire,
6>
l>"
a".
Jista (Jytftha),
Th.
H. 4(l)av.
tomara,
an asterism, Th.
pr. n. of
9ii*ii.
jihma,
vi
lance, Th. 6 6
viii
(initiation)
refuge),
(of taking
6.
Th. 7(1)6*.
jiva, living being, in *jlva-graha, P. 17 a
*jiva-drsti, P. 192*; "jiva-drstika, P. 10
9 o
jiva-sarhjfm, P. 2 6 \ 8 6
*jestha-putra, eh.est s-on, Th. 26 s
viii
Jh.
G 6
86 , lOav
jfiana, knowledge,
darhsa-masaka, stinging
6";
"
-v.
vi
;
fly,
*daksina-di8a, southern
patha, id., Th. 36 96
Th. 6 a iv
quarter
6".
da-
P.8<j";*jnan-abb.i3amaya,coinprel]ension
v
of true
knowledge, H. 3 b ; *jfian-aloka,
having the light of knowledge, H. 12 (1)6 V
*Jyoti-surya-gaEd:ia-obhasa-8rI,
oi an
Arhat, Th. Sa -^ 6^
pr.
n.
dagd ha,
Tli.
8 a
stuff
and
burnt,
danda-sikya,
;
.
^.
string,
H. 2
6 ji iv
-
a"
q. v.,
Th.
P.
2 6V
vi
,
avii.
P. 2
aiii,
the
womb
lit.
iv.v, (ic
Tathagata-garbha,
Tathagataayupramana-nirde^a, pr. n. of a chapter.
of T.. lh. 3 a
Th. llaii-iv.
,
Sfci";
touched by
*tam-avrta, over-
tome with
v
gloora, Th. 6a .
taratu, may it be effective as
gifts, P.
96".
divya,
ft.
.
>
".
protection,
giving away of
16 61
176^; with
10 a 1 duna-parityaga,
6"
V
pariti/aj, P. 96 ,
Tathagata,
Th. 10
O
durbhiksa, famine, H. 10(57)6*; bhik9a,
Th. 2 6^.
dufkuhaka, apathetic, H. 12 (4)o".
*duf tul-apatti, grave offence, H. 3 a*.
duhitr,
daughter;
see
kula,
ndgaraja;
category, H. 4 (l)a.
(2) body of
dhist principles (disciplinary and
of the aspect
6.
ksaya, loss,Th. 6 6
transl.
P.
&c.,
tyaya, Th.
f>6;
devata, tutelary
4 (2)
the
in
manusya,
pt>
6V
11
/>""
196
a",
Th.
*;
iv
9 6 vii
v vi
2 av
(trrtnsl.);
li
4a;
1
*devati, divinity, Th. 9 a
dohana, milking, H. 9 a iv fee go-doftana.
*dauratmya, misery, H. 13 (3) a
*daurvbarnnika, bad mark, Th. 2
loka.
vl
charm, Th. 1 1 a
dhavati, it makes for, Th. 7 (1) 6 ;
dhavate, Th. 7 (1)6*.
*dhudi (Skr.
dust, Th. 6 a v.
*Dhrtira8tra, pr. n. of a LokapUla, H. 5a iv
dharam,
6"
6 viii
1
vi
ji
12 (4)5", 13(1)
(56)o-ii-v, b\ (57) a
Th. 2 b*,
13(2)av; L. 3 avi, i
vi
56
G b**.
v
Th.
3
b
relic, Th.
dhatu, condition, state,
7(2)ivi element, H. 4(1) a*; Th.
iv
P.
18&
8ee
dharma,
nirvana,
system,
vii
deity, Th. 3 6 .
6-
i!i
tfv,
with
8 ov
sa-deva-
phrase
2GOa
"
dharma,
6 iv v
coira.whccl, ^. 20!)
P. 15 65v ;
yayu,
e&/ana,cxpof<ition,
;
106 ; blulwika,
;
preacher, L. 259
megha, cloud, Th. 3
iv T.
&
vinas
;
a, destruction, P. 17ft
gala, saliva.
a>
P.
a",
vi
sermon, L.
dvara-
6 viii
Bud
doc
trinal), Buddhist Luw, Norm, Rule ; with
V
abhisamayrt, understanding, Th. 11 6
*du-8amjfla,
H.
dusya-yugma,
11
203
<lhuli),
vii
dvitlyaka, fever of every other day,Th. 10 6
dvipika (dbi), continent, Th. 11 #"
H
meditation, Th. 86
~ iv
iv v 6
dhvaja, banner, Th. 8 a
dhvasta, passing away (of the rains), Th, 3
dhyana, mystic
1 1
?>
a^ii.
Dh
dhana, treasure
Dhanistha, pr.
dharma
(in
existence
see snpta-dhana.
n. of an asterism, Th. 9 a vi
person, L. 2 a
86".
*Nandimbala (1),
17^,
(plur.)
P.
13av,
19a iT
dharma
v.
(in
principle,
duty,Th.7(l)oW-^;
P.
9^,10
o ;
(technical term for), H. 4 ( 1)
with avarana, hindrance, Th. 8 o1 ; pada,
6*.
#"
L. 259 a i!
260
*nara-kumjara,
nara, man, Th. 7
eminent man, Th. 3 6 iv
navaka, new moon, H. 8o vi
naga, a class of mythological beings, ser
Th. 2 a
*nagapents, H. 6
;
6"
a"
13eiH-i, I6a-*,
a*
1 1
196 V
ni
vi
with
It ; L. 253 o lu 3 a^
b^, 16 o
;
sarhjiid, notion of phenomenal things, P.
u. of a person, P.
7 (l)a iv .
(l)/>
a v 2 a vi
,
oj>p.
6"
i>r.
and
rupakaya, q. v.),
H. 12 (4)a-i; Th. 7 (2) a
caksus, the
eye to recognize the noumenal, Th. 10
v
P. 14 a ; dhdtu, the noumenal world,
the Absolute, Th. 7 (2) 6 vi ; fabda, word
v
expressive of the noumeual, Th. 2 a
(2) the conditioned, particular, pheno
menal a thing, an object; (sing.) P. 7 a v
of a
n.
ix .
viii
nadinadi-tira, bank of river, Th. 10 6
durga, impassable hole in a river, H.
V;
*nasthika,
H. 3 a*
(fruit)
a*.
VOCABULARY TO
204
*Nigrantha
pr. n. of a sect,
n/m/),
(for
H.
66K
.
a"
sarhjfia, P.
niyama,
6i;
nimitta,onien,si<:n,H.
H.
nim
Th. 3avi;
niyuta, myriad, P. 11
niraya, he ll, Th. 2 0.
nirasrava, unswayed
v
senses, H. 7 a
to
36"
annihila
rerceiving
life,
136 iv nirjivatva,
P.
HittV.
*nirdisamana, beinjreipounded,
nirdista, expounded, Th.
1 1
nirdes a, exposition,
Tli.
bv
10a v
Tli.
".
Th. 3
&v.
H. 4
(1)6.
a",
P.
distributes,
6".
b.
19a vi
to be received, P. 18
a iv
9 bv
\v\i\\
moral
stain,
Th. 8
iii
from doubt, H. 6
niskumksa,
*nispudgala, without individuality, P.I 3 6.
mla gavah, Nilgais, Th. 3 b.
n. o:: a person, P. 19 6 vi .
*Nesala(?j,
nairatma, without s!lf, P. 13 6 vi ; with
free
6".
P. 9 6 U ,
parityayam,
10
q. v.
parinirvapayisye,
cause to attain
parinirvapita, P. 2 IP,
I shall
Nirvana,
136";
Hi
parinirvrta, wholly extinct, L. 200 a
parinispatti, actualucss, existence in
P.
~
15oiv vi
6 vii .
fact,
*parindana, favour,
i ai.
free fron
a",
parityajya and
P.
nisana
*niskasaya,
jii.iii.iv;
6-ii.iii.
iv v
I".
a ii.
18a vi
P.
7
*paravatta, obedience, H. 12 (2 ) a
*parasarhcetana, consciousness of others,
parityajet,
x
radiance, Tli. 11 a .
H.
IA.
>".
*parigrahetavya,
>
6 vii
life,
H. 7v.
tion. L.
paramanu,
p-saihcaya,
nirjiva, without
H. 6
writ),
\>j
nirodh-anudars in,
&*".
see nayuta.
(>
five,
3&vii.
26".
of
*pancama-sarhgha, congregation
a";
a",
P. 2
a iv
*parindita, favoured, P. 2
*paripak-endriya, having matured senses,
Th. 4
*paripacaka, maturing, Th. 4 6 iH
paribhava, contemptuousness, H. 10(56)a ,
a"-
6".
6iii.lv.
i>r.
P.
16a v
Jhamu(,
*naivasika, devouring
,
17
6".
spirit,
H.
go"-
".
paribhuta, overcome, P. 1 1 a v
bhutata, P. 1 1 a,
paribhoga, enjoyment, Th. 4 av
parimocita, emancipated, P. 166 vi
parivarta, chapter, Th. 7 (1) a 7
iv -
psri-
V
(astrological) revolution, Th. 9 6
pakva,
av
(2)
u"
"-^-
P. 11
P. 11 a
vaptum,
6 iv
11
b"\
a iv
paryaparya-
Purva-phalguni,
*Piirva-bhadravati,
Th. 9 a.
~
,
virtues, Th. 9
8 6V
6",
prakrti,
all
kama,
&
bhrimi.
6"
(56)
Th.
ft
6",
*prajfia-vimukti, emancipation
a<".
233 a
pr. n. of a person, L.
^,
234 /A.
of
H. 4 (2) a
merit,
religious
acquiring
;
punya-
6 6i, 13 (1)
drsti, P. 19
P. 2 6^, 8
&>
Funarbasi
tfv
;
with
graha, P. 17 a
samjna,
9 a i!
pranidhana, vow,
],.
260
6 vi
iv v.
-
"
&"
ij
pratipatya
practising, Th. 8 a
pratipadyoya, lie should possess, Th. 2 a vii
pratibaddha, entangled, Th. 11 a x 6
pratibimbayet, one may compare, H.
.
(>"(/y)>
of
an
set in front,
Th.
(^MTian a^w),
n.
pr.
".
purasthapitva, having
26*.
man,
a pond, H. 3
*putimukti,
H. 13 (2) a*.
an asterism,
pr. n. of
*purva-janmika (karma),
a previous existence, P.
in
vl .
Purva-asada (dfM),
bl
2<;i
vi
*Jr?fika, P. 10 b ;
Th. 9 av
prajanitu-
Prajnakuta,
I,-.
*punya-kriya-vastu, way
of intelleet, L. 3
196 V
&i-iii.
a"
H.
Th. 3 a u
prajfia,
foocl,
virile,
H. 12(3)6
a"
with
class,
i.
/>
&i.
paurusa, semen
v*
asterisin,
P. 7 avi,
paramita,
an
Th. 6 ft.
in
pr. n. of
".
vi
astcrism,
19 a
of an
n.
purva-yoga,
9/>
papika
pr.
v.
Th. 9
205
1 1
(of life), L.
b"
4(l)ai.
(acts)
v
-
".
done in
Th. 8 &
pratisena
(?),
with reverence, H.
a"
VOCABULARY TO
200
nanifest
pratyaksa-jQana,
knowledge,
1
*pratyayapratyaya, doctrine, Th. 5 a
Nambhuva, rise of consciousness, Th. 7 (1)
;
H. G iii.
pramuficat, he sheds, P. 8
6*.
v
pratyaSrausit, be listened, P. 2 a
pratyatmam
nirvfrti,
extinguished, L. 3 b
he
is
Th. lOrtv.vi.
.
|
individually
v.
iv
vii
2 a*,
pravartayanta, Th.
viii;
6".
prasadika, agreeable, H.
u
any one, H. 10(56)6 -,
*pratyutpanna-bucl(lha, realized Buddha,
Th. 4a* vi, 7 (2)
*; P. 146".
pratyudgamana, advancing to meet any
iv
H.
10
one,
(56)o
Th.
being in progress,
*pravarta,
6"-
a*.
ix
gladness, Th. 6 6 .
*pramoda,
a"
priya-vadita, affability, H. 4
pr6tsahita, encouraged, Th. 9
&".
Ph
"
Phalguni,
pr. n. of
an asterism, Th. 9 a iv
*pratyupasthahe
he should rely on,
pratyeka-buddha,
Th. 3
(Skr.
1
19a iv
pratyupatistlwt),
"badlSa
sjlf-contained
Buddha,
bisama (vimmn\
a";
to be
respectfully
rircumumbulnted, P. 11
*pradusta-citta, hjning a depraved mind,
Th. 2
&X
*prabhatayam
(fern
),
6.
duration (Df
life),
iv
able, Th. 2 6
Th. 11
a"-*.
i.
H. 7 6*
H. 3 a v
text,
of,
solitude, L. 3 6^.
pravrajita,
who
10a.
bodliisattvaship, Th.
bodhicarya,
46
see
bodhisattva-carya.
6V
vyukarana,
6".
11 6
"
with
praviveka,
P.
Th.
j
of
B.,
!i
bodha,
sthajmna, inhibition
(3)6"
*buddha-
a"
11 ai*.
pr.
13
;
6".
H.
See asat.
pralapa, talk, H. 13 (2)
pravartayinsu, they moved forward, Th.
8 a
(plur.),
vi
b".
Tli.
n.
at daybreak, P. 9
sutra,
iii,
6*.
".
pramana,
pr.
ii
koti-niyuta, myriads of
diverse, particular, P. 16
See sarna.
Buddha,
a".
(of Tathii-
iv .
H. lo (5G)
gata),
a,
Th. 2 6iv.
making images
"bimba-karana,
j
pradsksim-karamya,
Th. 2
to harass,
badhitum,
&v.
V
hook, Th. 8 6 .
(bculita),
See upasariipada.
of
Stotra, H. 13(l)c:.
i
a"
n.
pr.
prasthapana, spreading, H. 3 a iv
pri\fljall-krtva, wit
a"*
praena-
explanation of queries, H.
*Frasada-pratibhAdbhava,
65ii
P.
6, &c. ; bodhisattyacarya, course of a bodhisattva, L. 259
*bodhisattva-yana, id., P. 2o iv , 17 6^,
190"
See iravaka.
Brahma, pr. n. of a god, Th. 2 a iu 106^";
with vihdra, perfect state, Th. 8
with
;
sttiana, rank of Brahma, L. 254 a*.
*brahmanyata, living as a brahman, H. 10
96".
6"
(56) b
207
4 (2)
bhakta-visarjana, de
v
*bhaktaod, H. 1 oiv.
clining of
iv
rule
about
vrtta,
eating food, H. 1 n
in
Mandarava,
Th.
of
sister
H.
manasi-
f<
Th.
contemplation,
bhakta, food
ov
1 &vi. vii.
6 viii .
of celestial coral-tree.
pr. n.
i".
"bhani,
259 vi vii
*Bhadravati,
L.
Th.
5 6 V.
pr. n. of
an asterism, Th. 9a
4 (1) & ; Th. 2 a ix ,
.
6V
maharddhin,
mahakaruna,
1 1
".
Mahaparinirvana,
of
#
-
iv
bee, Th. 3 a
iv
sarhjna, concept of being, P. 8 a
bhuta, proper, Th. 3 6.
bhumi, stage, state; with avaivartika, q.v.;
*paramita-bhumi, stage of the peifect
exercise of virtue, Th. 4 6*1
bhumi, earth, ground with bluiga, a part
Th. 9
"
name
a"
terisni,
*.
bhramara,
great decease,
a Sutra, Th. 3 6
mahapurusa, gi eat personality, P. 7
Bhrscika
L. 3 a
),
of,
12 (2
11.
of a Yaksha, H. 5 o vi
Mahakarna,
mahakaya, with a lai-ge body, P. 13 6
pr. n.
great compassion,
vi .
7A.
".
magic
vi .
18
ink, P.
masi,
".
bhayanaka,
";
253
(juna, L.
!
a"
Mahuvana,
Tli.
6"
".
*mahavarsa, great
*mahavimana,
rain, Th.
6 vi
1 1
Th. 4 6i.
mahusravaka,
Th.
10&K
Scesravaka.
maksika,
6>,
106 V
Mahoraga,
*madhyahnayatQ,
it
acts
as
midday, H.
)&*i.
&.
beings, Th. 2
marhsa
*mahasahasra,
L.
Th. 116*.
12(2
6^.
0^".
(plur.),
,
9 a
mamsa14 o u
of a poet, H. 13 (3) &* .
flesh,
n.
P.
fleshly eye, P.
VOCABULARY TO
208
vi
ranya,
6-
II. 1
sispect, position,
degradation, H. 3
manapya,
ii -
female divinity,
pr. n. of a
vi .
j
16 a^
dirty
H.
a"
iv vii .
259
iv
P. 2 6^,
;
rasa, taste, Th. 6 ftviii, 7 (1) 66
Baksasa, a class of mythological beings,
H. 5 6 iij Th. 2 6*. v
Eajan, king (of Kalinpa), P. 9
(of
Mount Meru), P. 6
166; rajana
.
Tli.
10
/A".
pi.),
pr. n. of a
rasi, mass, collection,
Rajagrha,
.
[
*mukha-darsana, beholding
I" .
2 a*v.
muhurta
mulya,
value, L. l!54
*Mrgasiri,
pr. n.
*".
nn asterism, Th. 9
H
death, deadening influence, H. 7 6
mrtyu,
muitra,
8a iv
friendliness, Th.
rt
Muni,
P.
vi
"rupa-pratisfhita, P. 9 n . 6
having form, P. 2 &
romakupa,
Imir
"
H. 13 (1)6 V
follicle,
(1H,
rupin,
!
H,
v. vi
mfatuntion,
6",
6>
v.
s<.
moha,
a".
1>*.
iv
marge, in the regular way, H. 2&
V
malakara, maker of Airlands, H. 66
Malini,
pr. n. of a person, L.
evil passion,
delectation, Th. 2 &
;
Rasmi-^atasahasra-paripurna-dhvaja,
6,
Th. 6 o v
li
5i
*maya-cchid, destroying illusion, H. 6 6
5 6 V,
Mara, pr. n., the Evil One, Th. 2
vi
dust, P. 7 a
matrika,
6ii
i,
particle,
tlic
6 a*.
!ii
lv v
laksana, mark, P. 7 6
sarhpada, wealth of marks, P.
-
"l
Yaksn,
pr.
n,
of a
beings, Th. 2 a*
yantra, instrument,
Yama,
5
rc
pr.
iv
;
n.
class
lavan&mbhas,
*,
Tli.
of mythological
G 6*.
7(1)6
V.
H.
of pod of netherworld,
iii
nun, L. 259 a\ 6
*yastl-sabda, noie made with a stick, H.
Yasodhara,
pr. n. of a
*yahesta-putra,
yatra, journey, pi grimage, H. 10(56)o
v
yana, vehicle, Th 5a ; with bodhisattva,
".
srestha, q v.
vehicle, cln viot
1
.
H.
salt sea,
1 1
14
ftii.
6 iv
iii.
iv
Jiv. vi
5a
p.
fi
lG6i-ii,
*lokanuvartana
a"
Th. 2
iii
;
7 a vi,
&
ft
11
,
fcii,
I8 av,
176v,
*lokanumanner of the
and
loma-harsana,
l\.
ifi
(2) 6
L.
253
maha,
yama,
see surya.
to
varna,
*raccha (Skr.
b\
6 6 vi
1 1
a*i.
praise,
V
H.66iv; Th. 26
*varna-
6"
H.
H.
isolatun,
V
vi^ada, clearness, Th. 3 6
maksika, poiaonrus
iij
vallka,
Th.
s.ind,
10a
iv
,
valuka,
a,
(l)a
&
a,
II.
10(5G)a
Th. 8 6 iv
namwhlfinn)
(?),
H. 5 a vi
13(3 ) 6
*Vaimaoitri,
*",
<|.
spotless,
Th.
one
If.
0*11.
in cavern,
5 ov
pr, n, of a YaMm, H,
vaihftyasa, lirnmrnt-nt, sky, Th. 11 & *-*,
vyafljana, secondary sign, H, 12 (2 )b^.
vyaya, patsing away (of impressions), L.
.
a*.
pr. n. of a king-, L. 2
arrangement,
136 V
Th.
Vaisravana,
s evil
|
vimukti, emancipation, L.
P.
acts as Vainuteyii,
Th. lo&viil.
viyuha,
it
ir. n, of n king,
alu .
*vimatrata, inequality, H. 13(2)6>.
"vimukta-citta, having an emancipated
mind, L. 3 a iv
"viyubha,
to perceive
1 1
of Maliayat.n
"
u^
6".
Vimaladatta,
pr. n. of a class
vibhavit-apaya, made
state, H. 12(3)6*.
livelihood,
H. 3
vinafia, dostruftioit, with dliarma, P. 17
l\\: v
with aaddharma,
v.
vipacyanti, they mature, Th. 4
*vipalya, who j)ercptves, H. 6 a*,
"vainateyayate,
"vinaya-dhara, versed in
off
iv
)v
disperses, Th. 4 i .
6 li (see
discipline, H. 3
rulf B of discipline,
Vaitulya, vast
6".
n.
mngic, pr.
v
vidy&i knowledge, learning, magic, L. 259 a
viii
Tli. G 6, 10
*vidy&vlra, mighty
*vidhamayati, it
vinaya, rules of
6^*.
false,
a v v
vptty-upaccheda, cutting
H. 10(57)olv
vimala,
II. 1
vrtta, rule,
*vicchandana, contentment,
vitatha,
See
also lirahma.
6, 146 !i 17
P. 7 6 V
11 a*;
14^-".
sand, P. 6
&u
pavicara.
4
6a iv
H.
Th.
7(1)
*visthapana, maintaining, H. 3a lv
iv v
H.
1
a
See bhakta.
visarjana, declining,
of air,
fly,
object, Th.
visaya, sphere,
vayu-dhatu, clement
**.
a".
3a ui
in
of
13(3)6i.
13(2)6"i,
209
3a v
P. 6
Th. 8 6{
a 1 13 6 v
,
vl
;
6"
".
ryaghra,
1
tiger, Th. 2 6 .
111
-*.
P. 13 a*,
VOCABULARY TO
210
aH
9 a1 Ui
Th. 2 &
evil intent
H. 5
us,
apt of prey,
vyada, mischievi
vyada-mrga, b
-
vyapada-samjfia, notion of
P. 9 a jii
a".
V
Sarhsanti, they priise, Th. 2 6
Sakra, epithet of I ndra, H. 6 iv Th. 2 a 1 ;
Sakra-sthana, rank of 6akra, L. 254
a vi *sakrayudhayate, it acts as 6akra s
.
-"
)>
Gvi.
goes to sleep, P. 18
lie
saiyydsana.
vii
,
tin
Sakya
epithet
sacre,
116^;
(note),
of
a"
"h.
rt"*.
firestha-yana,
V
pr. n. of a person, L. 3 6
grama - oaura,
six
thieves
village
iij
(senses), Th. 7 (l)5
|iat-paramita, six perfections,
254 a v
253 a lj
L.
8
(dem. pron., as in fo ham), emphatic, H.
ii{
sarhyama, pelf-restraint, Th. 4 a
*samyojana-bandhana, engrossing ties, H.
.
ji
.
10(56)a"-v,
P. 1
6"-^,
10 (57)
*,
b^-^
1 riv.
6V.
vii.
loss
!<X;r(()-kfiuya,
of
fecundity,
ftvii.
<:
phenomenal^
people),
H.
n,
Th. 7 (l)a
iij -
sunyu- grama,
iv
(void
deserted
;
!>*
*sarhskrta
pr. n. of a Sutra,
v.
firmga^aka, croEsway. H. 1
*6aiyyasana or liayyasana, bedstead, H.
6>.
Th. 4 irU.
*6aurya-dhanusa, prowess
in wielding the
Th. 6 b*.
b"\
P. 19&iU.
&c.), P. 2
Th. 10ai-iii-^,
IKJW,
*^rona,
Th. 2 6
106".
best,
best path, P.
7a
fevii.
iv
see danda.
6ikya, string, H. 2^"6iksoya, lie may learn, Th. 2 a
ai-vi
6restha,
SB,
P.
Sakya-muni,
of
a iv.
ad
6*.
6".
of
6"
sayy&sana., see
"
(.s
*6ayyam kalpayiti,
4 (2)
(56)6^.
iv
firavaka, a disci pie of Buddha, H. 6a
Th. 106"; (later) a monk of the Hinayanist section (as distinguished from the
V
Mahiiyanist bodhisattva, q. v.), Th. 36
106^; L., p. 1 53, n. 2. See maluisravaka.
-
Th. 6
a"
"
4ukla
II.
8a
6raman-6dde6a, a buddhist novice,
H. 2 a v
6ravana, pr. n. of an astorism, Th. 9
j
o^.
iv
*8aklli-karma(0, H. 3a
*sarhkilesa ( A7
samkle^a , moral
a), suffering,
Th. 2
fc
ix .
H. 13(2)a iv
iv
Barhk^epata^i, succinctly, Th. 7 (l)a
*8arhkhyarh gacohanti, they are counted
evil,
211
samadapana, taking
vii g fti.
Th. llav vii.
samapatti, attainment, Th. 8 6 H
fitmn,
Seeklrti.
satkrtya, with
6v
",
P.
b&
a",
viii
7 (1) o",
a*, &c.
1 1
self-concentration, Th.
v-ix, 4
iii.
rt
cijuiil,
jii
ij
*sarhparidipayamana,
illuminating,
Th.
7(2)61.
*sattva-drsti,
*sattva-graha, P. 1 7 n
vi
19 a
*satva-drstika, P. 10i
iv
8 69 a i! v
*sattva-sarhjSa, P. 2 i
6
*sattv-ascarya, P. 7 a 8
iv
*satysatya-vadin, truth-speaking, P. 9&
P.
H. 10(56)u v
self,
H.
care,
v-x
samana,
"
10(o7)ai.
samadhi, religious
2
)~iva,
enterprises on one s
"
sarhprakarhpayisu,
L.
trembled,
they
P.
H.
"
a"
Saddharma-vinafia,
Good Law, Th. 3 a v
Tli.
&
8 6
the
of
destruction
with antardhana
V.
or antardhdni, q.v.
(tho
P.
path).
19rt"
iv
a"
106",
176 iij
iv
,
l>\
sarhbuddha,
15a
P. 1 3
(re
7 I*
a"
amount
of
cooked
tho
>
sama-
Th.
18;
a";
truth,
iij -
a*, 6
a"-",
"
6"
recollection
H. 4 (2)
samyak-
(of duties),
who walks
"samyag-gata,
v
H. G a
samyak-
L.
id.,
perfect
blamelessly,
1 1
samyaktva-niyato
proper amount of
1 6
with dfarma
;
split pulse,
and tambodhi, the same, universal, F. 16
a*-*1 eeebigama.
eupikam, witb
>
a"
H. 4(1)
1 a ^, 6*
P.
sama-citta, steadfast mind, H.
sama-tiktitam, with the proper
condiments, H.
smrti,
".
),
sarhbodhi,
rt i^
166",
sapta-sata (samglti\
700 monks, II. 3 6 is
14
6"
j
,
samyak-
G&i
13
7/,iii,
bodha (fein.
"
P.
am
1
H.4(l)a";
jx-ifectly enlightened,
*8amyak-sanibuddhatva, perfect en
samyak-sarhlightenment, L. 254 a
or sambodha, id. (ma^c.), Th. 4
p.
106";
";
iv
a*.
lv
sarlsrpahi, creeping snake, Th. 6 a
Sarva-ruta-kausalya, pr. n. of a Dbarani,
L. 2 o v (transl.).
Sarva-sattva-priyadarsana, pr. n. of a
.
H.
person, L. 2
sarvavanta,
a".
entire,
r 2
Th.
1 1
106^".
6 viii
212
savacamya,
act of sening a
command, H.
iv .
*Saha(masc.),
-
a"
pr. n of a
v.
iv v.
ocean, Th. 7 (2) 6
Sagara, pr. n. of a Nagarfija, L.
-
2546*
6 iv
253
Vaksha, H. 5
n. of a
jir.
ft
sada, decay.
*8apattI-pratikatTiapatti, offence done
with atonement and subsequent offence,
H. 3ai.
?),
vii.
.
see riveka
;
"sukhdpapatti, blissful
4 (2 6 vi
existence H.
Sugata, AVclcome One, epithet of Buddha,
L. 259 av; H. 6 &
Th. 2
7 a*
P.
.
ai
6v.
ii,
su-pratisthita, \vdl
*Subhuta (Skr.
2
P.
Sumoru,
166"
a",
a";
7 (2)
5
with punya, q.v.
mass, P. 15
a kind of buddhist shrine, Th.
a"
6".
H. 4(2)a*i.
vi
stliana, rank, L. 254 a
astrological place,
Tli. 9 b v
subject, sec sutra,
;
H. 3 a v
inhibition,
sthapana,
see pra~
rnrnnn.
sthapaniya, to be
H. 4(1)6*".
sthiti,
foundation, H.
4 (l)avi.
P. (J a u .
Th. 7 (1) b
ui iv
*sprti-kara, supplier, Th. 5 6
vi
spharati, it pervades, L. 253 6
vi
sphita, prosperous, Th. 6 6
touched by
*sphuta, infested, Th. 6
spars"a,
tactility,
set up,
vi .
Th. 7 (2) 6
of an Arhat,
P.
mountain,
a",
(plur.).
tt
vi
.
et
pastiii:
pr. u. nf a
6"
taina, q.v.
i".
sutra-sthana,
a".
H.
fc
eukha,
7(2)a-^,
(l)a\
stupa,
5 a ^.
Tli.
i.".
Satagiri,
iv
Sutra, Th. 3 6 ; sutrendra, or sutrendra-raja, chief of Sutras, Th. 7 (2) fr,
own
accord,
ov.
14
ft"
*8U-labhatisaya,
6 ji
H. 12 (1)
ei.sy to surpass,
harana, suppressing, H.
".
*8uvarna-bhasdttiima,
Th. 7(2)ai-vi,
su-samvrta,
H. 1 o,
pr. n.
of a Sutra,
,)!.!".
well
6".
*Susnmbhava,
*Hiranyavati,
pr.
n.
6"
of a Dharani, Th.
7(l)ai.
pr.
n.
of a chapter,
Th.
*HImavanta
tain,
7(2)aii.
a>,
of a
(for hinuf), pr. n.
moun
of a Yakshft, H. 5 6.
;
risk of injury, Th. 2 a* 1
H. 5 a*
he^a-bhaya,
PART
II
THE VAJRACCHEDIKA
IN THE
(Plates
EDITED HY STKN
V-XIV)
KONOW
INTRODUCTION
THIS edition cf the Vajracchcdika is based on a complete manuscript which
belongs to the treasures brought back by Sir Anrel Stein from the cave temples at the
Halls of the Thousand Buddhas
first
to the south-east of
brought
to notice
Tunhnang.
by Dr. Hoernle,
who
describes
it
as
2
:
i<lp(lr<~i-*a.<l(l/>am
1
See M. Ansel Stein, Explorations in Central Asia, 1906-8. Reprinted from the
Geographical Join n,l for July and September, 1909, pp. 39 and ff. Also, his Ruins of
Desert Cat bay, Veil, ii, pp. 24 and ff. It appears to have been found separated into two
portions, which wen; placed by Sir Aurel Stein in two bundles, one marked Ch. 00275 and
containing fols. 1-10, 15, 20-38, 40, 42, 44, the other marked Ch. xlvi. 0012 A, and com
The fact that the two bundles contained portions of
prising fol. 11-14, 1G-19, 39, 41, 43.
the same text was recognized by Dr. Hoernle only in the course of a
lengthy examination
of the manuscript*; recovered by Sir Aurel Stein.
When this took place, the contents of
the first bundle had already been reproduced in Plates V-XI.
Consequently the folios of
the second bundh sould not be made to appear in their proper places, but are shown
in Plates
XII-XIV.
own
f.
I have introduced
my
VAJRACCHEDIKA
large
fig-tire
of the seated
IN
Buddha within
The
concentric circles.
first
215
Then, after
colophon harti Vajrrackedaka tlrSayd Prajndpdrdmma xamtixye n
a broad intervening lilank apace, follow the other two linen, which read ttad/lfiam
The manuscript, commences with a long introduction in
ftdt/i, &C.
Vajrracliiilakyi
the "unknown langnage", of which there is no Sanskrit equivalent in Max Miiller l
2
edition.
The text itself of the Vajracchedika begins only with the second line
of the reverse of the third folio, where its beginning is indicated by a circlet followed
by xaflflAam, exactly like that at the commencement of the whole manuscript.
.
Jil>/a
To this description I have only to add that fol. 38 is not in the same hand
writing as the rest, and that the missing leaves, 11-14, 16-19, 39, 41 and 43 have
After my edition of the text and my translation and
subsequently turned up.
vocabulary had been ready in proof for some time, I received from Dr. Hocrnle
eleven manuscript leaves, which had likewise been found in the Tnnhnang cave*,
T)r. Hoornle thought
but not in the same place as the Vajracchedika manuscript.
When examining
that they might belong to another manuscript of the same text.
them, however, I soon realized that they were the missing leaves of the old manu
in a position to publish the first complete text in the
script, and I am accordingly
old Iranian
The beginning of the text was published by Dr. Hocmle shortly after it had
3
The same scholar subsequently published a transcript of the
been discovered.
lH
-33
together with
portion of the text contained in fols. SA^-IO// and 31
11
"
a"
some
notes.
An
Leumann
published by Professor
early in
1912
in
language.
unknown language
when
In the left-hand
mnrgin
ia
two concentric
circles.
1
Anecdota Oxoniensiii.
edited by F.
8
I.e.,
Max
Miiller,
Aryan
Series, Vol.
i,
Part
1.
p. 838.
pp.1284 andff.
Leumann, Zur nordariechen Sprache and Literatiir
bemerkungen und vier Aufsiitze mit Oloeear. Straasburg, 1912.
l.e\,
Prof.
(pp. 75,
77-8 1).
fck-hriften
Vorder \Vi8en-
VAJRACCHEDIKA
216
unknown language V
The
which
he had the pood fcrtune of being able to use translations of the Chinese and Tibetan
versions of works represented among the manuscript fragments, had not been
published when the bulk of the present work was finished.
1
When
Sir
on Dr. Hoernle
Aurd
s
which
many
schema
s.
More
a collabora
do not possess,
is a
necessary condition. I therefore resisted the temptation
nnnuscript till I could interpret the whole of it to my own
satisfaction, and contented myself with the more modest task of editing it with
a list of words and some few remarks. This edition was transmitted to Dr. Hoernle
of keeping
the
in the first
of the
these I have al\va;-s drawn attention; but I have not entered into a discussion
of such details as ID which I am unable to accept Professor Leumann s explanation.
What I have aiir.ed at; is to give an edition of the Vajracchedika manuscript, and
not a detailed stu-dv of the language.
ALPHABET.
signs of the alphabet are now well known, owing to the careful
I shall therefore not discuss
investigations of Dr. Hoernle and his successors.
The various
them,
but,
One
all
See his papers, Dber die einheimischen Sprachen von Obtturkestan im frilhern
in the Zeitechrift der Deutscheii
MorgenlaiuUschen Gesellschaft (ZDMG),
vol. xli, pp. 648 am ff. ; xlii,
pp. 83 and ff.
Mittelalter,
IN
fourth syllable of the
line of fol.
149a
217
sAnciont Khotan.platecxi.
In
It consists of the sign for n with an angular line enclosing it from the left.
our manuscript the w-miitrii has been dropped, and the angular line has been
continued towards the right and joins the bottom of the letter to which it is
Sec e.g. in siifra 1
The whole sign
added, thus producing a lineal triangle.
has therefore become much like the opaque triangle of the ordinary 7f-matra, as
1
i"
in Sultltuta
(fol.
T
)
will be
which
o,
and
my
examined
in
have found
Simla.
for
in
Professor
therefore follow
common word
Lcumann
o,
in
and, or
writing
must, in
added to
this sign
is
is
too limited to
warrant a
final
even
case
Leumann,
and accordingly I transliterate the sign by If, unless where it occurs in Sanskritic
words, and represents Sanskrit nt, as in k*antavddd> for Sanskrit fount ivadin in 2fifl
A full statement of my view I may postpone for another, more appropriate occasion. 4
There are two different signs of r in our texts, one which is the same as the
which
ordinary BrFihmi r-sign, and another which is identical with the sign
1
See Dr. Stunner, Sitzunpsberichte der Koniglich Premsischen Akademie der Wiesen-
schaften, 1904, pp. 1288 and ff.; Prof. Sieg, ibidem, 1907, p. 468.
1
Compare Prof. Sieg, I. c.
8
VAJRACCHEDIKA
218
way,
an in
in
1 //
3
2
lv
41
//
a"
2 b
and 44
3
"
au
ii!
and
3 // 38
"
a"
"
a"-
"
iT
3 u iil
L"
iT
42
".
42
clause, as in
once exceptionally, in 44
1
",
it
{[
.
31
The double
a"
or of a
seems to mark
as in
11
The writing is, in most cases, quite distinct, and there are very few
places
where the reading can be doubtful.
The orthography on the other hand is
inconsistent, and thero are numerous instances where the writer proves to have been
Thus a long passage has been repeated on fols. 7-8 ; words have been
written twice over, 9 ?P 37 a iT &c.
syllables have been left out or, sometimes,
careless.
forth.
Loumann 1 and
recognized
that
classes
1
1
Vorliiufige
Braluni
4
Documet
ZU1LG.,
ts
v:l.
pp. 30
Ixii,
Extra Number
Calcutta, 1902,
Zur
IN
219
Accordingly, he calls it
a specifically Iranian
it as
4
I feel convinced that Baron Stael-IIolstein, whoso opinion has been
Siegling.
endorsed by Mr. Emil Smith, 5 is right in these statements. He argues that fo^ri must
be the language of the Tukhdras, who cannot, according to Chinese tradition, be
located in that part of Central Asia where the so-called Tocharisch must have been
spoken, but who were, from ancient times, settled in the neighbourhood of Khotan,
where the Aryan language of Turkestan also seems to have been spoken.
he reminds us of the fact that the Kusanas were Tukhfiras, and that the
borne by their kings shows that their language was of thetongue here under consideration. Finally, he draws attention to
1
Ibn al Muqaffa that the language of Balkh, which belonged
was
very similar to the Persian court language, which
empire,
sd/ii
make
Moreover,
sahana
title
same kind
as the
the statement by
to the Tukhara,
remark seems
to
it
Aryan
There are also other indications which point in the direction that the people
the language into which the Vajracchcdika was translated, was of the
who spoke
same stock as the Indo-Scythian invaders of India. The word urmai/ziliiin in the
where Max Miillcr s Sanskrit text has surya, is evidently
Vajracchedika 28 a
a rendering of Sanskrit ad tfya, which is often used in parallel passages. It is clearly
,
the same
therefore,
ddiiya.
finally settled
before
more
as yet be
texts
identified.
So
far as
see,
however,
Les Nouvelles langues indo-europeennes trouvees en Asie Centrale, pp. 17, 18.
1
Tocharisch und die Sprache II. Bulletin de TAcad^mie Impiriale des Sciences de
ff.
St.-Pditersbourg, 1908, pp. 1367 ff.; Tocharisch und die Sprache I.; ibidem, 1909, pp. 479
1
Sitzuiigsberichte der Kbniglich Preussischen Akaderaie der WiBBenschaften, 1907,
pp. 958
1
ff.
I.
c.
1.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
220
language itwhat is in
For-M OF THE
The
They
are based,
not, however, PO
is
In the
it.
first
this
place,
at
anything
The
it.
of our language.
represents a later stage in the development
will be sufficient to compare a short passage from the Sarhghutasutra as
To show
OUR MANUSCRIPT.
IN
features
LANGUAGE
it,
it
it
a ({
, with a corre
published in Pla x: CX of Sir Aurol Stein s Ancient Khotan, fol. 8
iv
I give the two texts in parallel lines,
sponding one from the Vajracchedikft, fol. 5 #~
~" {
the Saiiighatusfitra text being printed al>ove in ordinary type and the Vajraechedika
Such
paragraph below in italics, so that the two can be compared word for word.
words as
til- tii
Hi
(prahonu) prahoste
(cirara)
jiraha\;*ti
kamu hiilau
blmmd hdtai
gyasta balysa
gyastd
bay*ci
ustJi hsilsto.
It will
be
wen
vowel
i.
dropped altogether
bftysdin,
of the
buddhas.
Further,
hatfa.
some consonants
are dropped
t^ayta
hdlsto
On
and
sometimes added
the
is
kdltto, hdtfii.
/,
in the
IN
221
It will be seen that the Vnjrncchedikil forms are, on the whole, later and less
1
In such circumstances it would bo unsafe to base a detailed analysis of the
whole phonetic and grammatical system on the forms occurring in the Vajracchedika
It is only possible to discover certain tendencies and lows, and to
manuscript.
original.
sa"
something about the inflexion of nouns and verbs, which may help us to define the
philological position of the language.
PIIONKTICAL SYSTEM.
Vowels.
wo turn
If
we
by gr?at
difficulties,
ailri,
The
short
ayxa, Zd.
a:,->m,
that an old
ft
Aryan
I
is
rtydd*
bird by a
>
is
f?a*?a,
thus
liar,
all,
and
so
on.
The nature of this sound has been discussed by Messrs Lou m (inn 1 and
4
who have shown that it must have come very near to that of
Stiiel-IIolstein,
the
miltrfi.
a short
when
It
/.
it
///>/?,
ni, not,
and
so forth.
final
u.
In the Vjijraechedika, however,
thus yyastd, god, occurs both as a nominative and as an
accusative.
Other changes are apparently due to special causes. Thus the vowel is often
Pers. ask. \Va\I
lengthened by way of compensation for lost sounds. Compare
<i*ki
fuller
buch.
1;
*
VAJRACCHEDIKA
222
pensation.
Con: pare
^session.
The
first
hada,
also
thee, is perhaps
given,
me
Old
by me
with
Irish
selb,
by
compare Zd. maibyd, ntdvaya,
mtihu-jta,
uhu-jsa,
rne
l>ecn
and
it
it.
In some few ca-en a short a has been dropped altogether thus baysana, baysana
and bfiysna, by the lord jtaram, parsa and pdrsa, marvellous gyastu, Zd. yazata,
;
god
forth.
The long a
l/ycita,
<ldfa
lias,
know,
paytCtni, 1
In
Zd. mala.
final
manuscript this
Tlvo short
Zd. vi*pa
baxg- t
in the garden,
Zd. paitizdnenti
syllables
we
cf.
Pers. bay
Compare
syllables.
;
regularly find a
c.
cf.
bitlvrra, family,
German
compare Skr.
the
(fai,
of an old a that
pronunciation
wo
many words
;
d-irsd,
such as
sira, well,
a natural consequence of
sometimes find a, a used instead. Thus
Jiyrr.
It
is
ba&triina, of all
Iran
sider it as a
aiii<i,
noble
It
It
may
are
It
it,
seems to become a
compare
represents an old ai
thus
cl, if,
Sanskrit
ccfl.
Compare
also
denote an
numerous
is difficult
separately.
makes
final
Zd. \widnl.
In some cases
Jit d, Skr. Jela,
to decide
e,
or
We
1
See Sir George Oriereon, The PUaca Languages of North-Western India.
190G, p. 79.
London,
IN
In numerous cases
for him, 5 3 iT
so forth.
it
ttattai ndtna,
That
an old
to
aa, in
which the
is
suffix
223
nun,
and probably
a became
final
a teacher
jiitai,
ffuvfiji,
Avanai,
in a, this
ending
a coalesces with
final
in the adjective
consisting of meat
The
it
or e
final ai is
may
Pehlevi. 2
Thus
Forms such
are
now
represent
Avan/ti,
bifivrrdtaiiid
said
iT
In
aia
lislvrrdxai,
is
of a
striyai,
tT
woman, 21a
and so
tti/e
firayc
forth.
compare Zd.
the diphthong ai
compare Zd.
In verbs such as
easily explained.
spirant
of the word, 22
\S5idnl.
daittd, sees, Zd. dfbditi
gai/la,
seems, Zd.
we
ttabayei/i,
find ai
instead of an old aya, and the case is probably similar in unidentified words such as
cc/tajta, 2tt, and so forth.
praifld, fear; bajaitti, 2 la
;
?/,
u and au
dream,
meat,
I.
is
parallel to that of
and au becomes
({-sounds,
ngfy/i/a
purci,
son,
and
ai.
thus
Zd. puQra
bntd
Aiinti,
Zd. \*afna, Pali wjrina; drritja, lie, Zd. drvjo\ gustaija, consifting of
Phi. yoit gund, qualities, Zd! gaoua, and so forth.
If buli, 27fl n has any
cf.
cf.
The
fact that
bit,
Skr.
bhii,
we must compare
makes
it
certain that the final u in ysdmnu, knee, is not identical with the
in Zd. zdnu, but
is derived from an older ua.
The base would then be zdtiua or zdnuka. I have no
ZDMQ.,
Ixii, p.
109.
See GrundrisB,
I.
i,
pp.
276
ff.
VAJBACCHEDIKA
224
I am
The diphthong- nl in gnticyau, with the sand;-, is derived from an old
inclined to identify the suffix of this word with the PehlevT suffix cak^ leak, and the
The base of the word is probably the
f- of grui- would then find its explanation.
.
same
sound written an
rutlus.
the spoiling an would indicate that the broad pronunciation of it, which we
know from Persian, had already set in in our language. Where the history of the
sound ait can be traced, however, it always turns out to be a secondary product. Its
this
is so,
baysyau-jtc,
eic,
ii
\ cf,
having eyes
the
the
tin
is
Skr.
j)rati*t/ti(-a,
words such as
of a
result of coalescence
Pt has become nd
,<,
in
It
rap.
byd,
wyo,
ryo.
In words such as
cf.
is certain,
final
seven,
Jtandyau,
Zd.
cf.
bis,
IksamautitljQ, consisting in
is
Or. av
however,
cf.
auau, without,
ait
is
Gr. avtv. z
In
It
becomes
bere:(tnl
I l;eforo
to
compare kldna,
all
cases
baytii,
It has
r.
Thus
Skr. krtcna.
cf.
Zd.
."
will
of the further history of Aryan vowels in the Aryan language of Turkestan I shall
In order to do so it would be necessary to compare texts
not attempt in this place.
in the older and
The
n<-l>ase.
late
biota, to Hacrifk
?,
is
much
preferable.
IN
225
Consonants.
we may
to consonants,
Turning
in loanwords.
Another
that
all final
k
pnsiti
peculiarity, of
so
is
suffice to
matter
far as the
is
c j
oui
initials.
caiman
Phi. tar
old c
becomes both
Instead of an
so great
eyes,
old
and
we regularly
an
initial t
tfa,
tidra, darkness,
Zd. faQra,
Zd. puQra.
It will be seen that an
seems to be used before Indo-European e.
II.
In some few cases such as didira,
son,
piira,
The
fe.
latter
find
has become d
than the
-(Ursa, thirty,
rest.
is
as it
is
fifty,
it is
changed to
avdrantta, not attached, but pdrautta ; avdyvd, in the apayas, and so forth.
The
whole state of affairs seems to show that at least t and p between vowels were liable
VAJKACCHEDIKA
226
Iranian language,
sounds as in Bal
ici.
well preserved
{ire
ai- ixtd
as/a,
sits,
compare duskara,
difficult,
striya,
marvellous
woman, Zd.
become
St has
strl.
under the influence of a following t in aStd, is, &c. The forms ta stands;
to the disappearance
xtdna, Afr7, standing, being, on the other hand, owe their
of an old gutlur il cf. Zd. y*td.
${ remains in words such as riff and, Skr. ithdlavya;
t
</
from ri ind A/ vas Iiastd, eighty, Zd. atiditim, and so forth. It becomes
as hlSta sits
baysu*ta,
perhaps under the influence of an i, in words such
The suffix
buddhahood mtt. /ii, destruction
gusta, meat, etc.
yaniyfd, moisture
the same iU which is used in
occurring in the last four of these words is probably
Persian dialects.
If we turn to other compounds we shall find that ks becomes ks in ksird, in the
byusteye,
l,
of affairs seems
to
six.
In other cases
i?on,
Zd. ^saeta.
it
becomes
This state
would
word
It
is
is
It
simple
voiceless
kkaywa-klra, food
to
translate Sxi.
ikhlfa-yxdya
It is then
compared with Zd. ahamyst-a, where we again find a guttural spirant.
with khdysd, food, whether this word is connected
possible that the same is the case
with Skr. khdti, Pert., ^dyldan, or with Skr. ghat.
I have no certain examples of the treatment of an old c in compounds.
Cy becomes
an old
fa
in the base
tsit,
to go,
See Grundriss,
Report,
passage.
p. 38.
I. ii,
cf.
cf.
Zd. paityy*.
p. 182.
Prof.
p. 69,
IN
227
hasLtma
Skr. krlena.
of,
The
of the
compound
(,
Ty becomes \li
and r between vowels; compare drrni,
TV apparently becomes th when initinl and
\soiQnl.
initial,
Compare
tint,
after a nasal,
cf.
ysamlAa, birth,
The disappearance of
Zd. zantn
four,
tcaftaurd,
Zd.
change to d
in others point to the conclusion that, as the first part of a compound, / became
the dental spirant 0, the sound of English M, and that this d became voiced in
words such as drrai, three. Th and th probably only note various modifications of
caOvdrO.
in
its
this 6.
The sign
town,
4a
pr
tfia,
2rt
ii!
is difficult
becomes
th occurs in
iii>iv
thus
So
1
,
far as
we can
see,
latliiigala.
an intervocalic old
It
th
ffd/ia,
Zd. x T V" a
I^i
become
which coalesces with a preceding a to an and with a preceding u to
or n.
It
seems probable that we have here to do with a change from p to./, and a secondary
>
tvpina.
u,
to w, it.
At all events, the forms just cited add strength to
softening of this
the supposition that the dialect possesses spirants of the same kind as those found
in
separated from
in reality any.
naxpftaHu, I
might produce
ptdxdiid,
pharuka and
pliara,
that
many,
should be
is
perhaps
lrruha<l<l,
pach iysda, vajrracheddka, vyachl, ryachdmnci, and others. Most of them are probably
loanwords.
The word biche, lies down, is probably connected with Hindustani
biehnd.
will be seen
Q2
VAJRACCHEDIKA
228
r/a#
da,
f/tf&r,
When
law,
Zd.
between
occurring-
vowels, the soft guttural and dental are apparently dropped, the palatal remains or
becomes *, /, i. e. :, z, and the labial becomes w, written b or v ; thus drruja, lie,
Zd. drijo ; pa, pn, loot. Zd. pdba ; dvdfi, i. e. dvds-si, twelve hundred, cf. Zd. dvddasa ;
bve,
(tyrtfa,
and Pers.
ydrl,
and
so
forth.
The compounds containing- voiced stops do not teach us anything- more about
The words just cited will have shown that the compounds dv and dr
Most of the
Zd remains in nrmayxde, sun, Old Pers. anramazdd.
remain.
the mntter.
text,
is,
as usual, treated as if it
were voiceless.
With regard
y or
influence of a
we may
to nasals
i
note the
palatalization
in the conjunct
of an n under
nft,
old nt
the
thus ana,
anya\ saidii, old saindi, they appear; compare also kttha, in the town,
from kanlha, town.
The letter y vhen initial becomes yy in (jyasta, god, TA.yazata, This gy is, in
1
and there cannot, I think, be much doubt that it was
later texts, written j,
other, Zd.
pronounced as the Indian j, and that we are here face to face with the same tendency
After consonants a y apparently disappears
as in Persian, to change an initial y to j.
after causing various changes in the preceding sounds.
Compare iiaxta, he sat
down;
business,
kirii,
Zd. kairya;
As has
already (p. 217) been remarked, there are two different forms of r, one
probably the Indian r, and another, which I follow Professor Leumann in
We find the latter used as an initial in rri, king rrastii, right
transliterating T.
which
is
between vowel? in pirrii*ka and frequently in compounds after fj, c, d,j, in, v, and
sometimes /; thus brfiya, brru and bru, crrd, drrai, didrrdma, drruja, vajrra, liamrra$(ii,
;
biirrrd and
the ordinary
common
also
ft/sin d,
of this state of
afiairs.
many
p.
ibid., p.
469.
IN
tear
and Phi.
Pers.
/tar,
fan;
all
229
A-atitzrria,
As
cf.
Zd.
vafy/att,
Pers.
&c.
bi/i,
As
becomes
in Lisa,
It
probable that
we
in Persian,
and
all,
is
such cases
I in
pfill
thus
denotes a
reads.
i d(ii,
cf.
loanword.
In the treatment of sibilants our language mainly agrees with Old Iranian.
S becomes * or, before i or y, * thus sa, c, hundred, Zd. satsm ; sve, shoulder,
;
Zd. *npti
jHiti/jxrisan,
with
fifty,
Zd. jiancdtal
cf.
Sirii,
Similarly
Aryan base
#a-
would assume
after
or u.*
has
3
Similar forms occur in many Iranian tongues.
apparently been dropped.
The old Aryan dental remains in compound letters before stops. Numerous
.v
further,
often dropped.
Compare
/tat;
all,
Zd. /ianrva
la{lia,
true,
Zd.
haiQya\
unable to state
is
illustrated
words.
4
above and in the locative plural drrayvd avdyvd, in the three apayas.
The soft palatal sibilants become y, i. e. z, as in Zd. and not./ as in Skr.
Grundriss,
I. ii, p.
thus,
87.
reflexive
pronoun
te
in
Old
i, p. 184.
Persian, Grundriss,
8
Compare Professor Paul Horn, Grundriss der neupersischen Etymologic, No. 440.
4
Three apayas are mentioned in the Lalitavistara, ed. Lefmann, p. 196*.
I.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
230
Vamf/td, birth, Zd
zftntti
The
ygaunt,
Zd. hiizanra.
improbable thai
it
has been
word
antara
may
which
h,
;
is
well
known
in PehlevI
cf.
Skr.
//axtd,
It will
In this connexion
tongues in phonology.
not, 1o
it is also
the
Iranian
all
compound
ft ancl
ysanit
I,
is
l>orrowed
aysa,
hand
for
where them
is
cerebral n
is
a semi-learned orthography.
INFLEXIONAL SYSTEM.
Nouns.
It
has been
final
shortened, and
further that they are, in the Vnjracchedikfi manuscript, to n great extent confounded.
Throigh the dropping of final consonants many vowels have become final, which, at
The distinction between the genders is apparently the same as in Old Iranian.
Thus we have masculines such as yyaxta, god feminines such as md/a, mother, and
neuter nouns sack as tcema, eye.
The feminine is apparently formed, as in Old
;
Iranian,
by
meuni<
noble family
which must
a son of
>
l.
vowok
give
linnl
>>ya*ta
them the
and in
/.
c.,
No. 667.
IN
limited.
231
mala, mother;
1
According to Dr. Salemann,
Old Middle Persian, have been a time when the inflexion of nouns, at
least in the singular, was restricted to two cases, a casus rectus or nominative, and
an oblique case, the old genitive. The state of affairs in our language represents an
there must, in
older
stage
of development.
Professor
Leumann 2
He
of bases ending in a and aa.
bearing on the question about the declension
an accusative ending in
distinguishes a nominative ending in a, ai, respectively
a nominative plural
v, OH, respectively, a locative ending in d, ai, respectively
;
ending in
a, d, respectively,
VAJRACCHEDIKA
232
30a
the Bodhisattvas, 31 a lr
the last
five
T
;
baudfiixatvai/dtiinl,
i.
make such an
and there
not, I think,
is
anything
explanation
The meaning
which look
and
like postpositions.
is
often strengthened
by means of additions
tia,
and b^fiysa, while jsa and na are suffixed only to the last.
jta and na were real suffixes, we should certainly sometimes find forms such as
vagfa-iia bjiysii-na.
Moreover, as has already been remarked, the oblique case alone
is sometimes used
as an instrumental.
I therefore think that
jga and na are
and
intensifying partioles, a kind of postpositions, of the same kind as tin, fa, vl,
other additions vhich we find used with the meaning of a locative
compare
ma
au
und
one place
ltdlai ml, in
so forth.
It
xc xtye-td, at
vl, or,
is due to some
on the language. The state of affairs in the Vajracchedika
makes it impossible to decide to which cases such postpositions were added. It
:?eems as if some ure added to the accusative and others to the
oblique base.
It has already been remarked that the
oblique base is derived from an old
is
The
genitive.
,18
we can
see,
A little different
an egg
It
Forms such
dfiya, in
in
aysmya,
bd*a, in the
garden ; mahdydmnii, in
is, however, allowable
It
IN
cases
233
as a locative,
it,
In such
and accusative
is a,
vvytd, bodhisattvas
ligysuinna
axjrya,
monks.
Of
Zd.
a,
other cases
thus
we
tiara,
find
tilings
an instru
termination can
dialects.
The same
and
is
the case with the genitive plural, which ends in dnu in older texts,
even d in the Vajracchcdikil manuscript; compare gyaitdinna,
in dmtia, din, or
a-bases
Loanwords such
saifiii,
a noble woman,
is
my
an old
i-ba&e.
an
Some of the
The curious
a.
old
<-base.
in e
does not, I think, contain the locative suffix of an -base, corresponding to Old Persian
but stands for byMye and is the ordinary gen. sing, of adjectives. The
dyd, Zd.
aya>
An
With regard
thus baxle,
man,
if this
sins.
word
is
to consonantal bases
we
VAJRACCHEDIKA
2:J4
a man, and
lire,
ow
s!
/,
will,
with
Pronouns.
The nominative singular of the pronoun of the first person is aysa, older aysn,
vhich corresponds to Zd. a:sin. That same form is also the base of the nominative
of this pronoun in 1 he modern languages of the Kurds and Afghans, and in the Pamir
The
mariitna, warn, of me, seem to correspond to Skr. mama.
It seems to have some
used as an accusative ind as an oblique base.
m 44 a
thing to do with Zd. maihyd. An enclitic ma, iai my, occurs in 184"; 41
An
Zd.
enclitic
cf.
Old
Persian
Thou is tint, which corresponds to
tin-am,
Or^m.
The forms
dialects.
firm mn/ni
is
<J
is
ulin,
you, which
is
same way as mihn, me, from a form corresponding to Zd. tattyo. We should
of the first person was made to
only have to suppose that in our dialect the pronoun
has been the case in Zd.
i that of the second, while the
form
wit
in
opposite
agree
;,he
thus,
tta-tla,
sing.
sing.
tii,
II
it,
Ifu,
cf.
ffy<\
Zd.
tarn
Zd. aetahe;
they, Zd. te
loc. sing,
ttina, cf.
and
liana,
Zd. aelanhd.
after the
The
ce, ci,
Middle Persian, used as a relative, and there are no traces of the relative base ya,
which is common in Zd. and Skr.
On the whol we again find a close agreement with Old Iranian.
as in
Verbs.
unsatisfactorily
known, and
it is
only
possible to
Of
the verb substantive the only forms which occur in the Vajracchedika are
IN
axtfi, is
lurid), are,
235
optative forms I and dya, might be, are less perspicuous. / is evidently connected with
Zd. Jiydt, Latin if, while at/a looks like the optative of the base i, to go, preceded by d.
There
forms.
With
active,
is
an
active, a
and
tta, middle i
dri,
singular ; fa, t!, middle fe, in the third person singular ;
in the third person plural.
Other terminations do not occur in the Vajracchedika
manuscript. Those that are in use are easily explained as Iranian.
md<i,
n<1e,
Of
In the
termination
and em
in
is,
The termination
reads
former of these,
in the
i7,
in the latter
?.
Similarly
is
fa or
In bases ending in
appears rajiw/i, sees.
the result of the combination of r and f thus /tif/ti, gives.
;
(faiffd, sees
gaif/a,
we
//
r,
thus
we
viitla,
find
as
they obtain
lyefilila,
in
is
singular
Of
The
hridii,
hvlde, is said
hvandri,
ya as in Old Iranian.
Of the conjunctive, only forms of the second and third persons occur in
The
dijtdti,
in yandmde, 8
tribution
first
Un
is
d.
as a future
passive suffix
he keeps
wilt become,
dijgddi,
33
they keep.
1
a"
is,
as in other old
my
Aryan
is
used
fr.
me
be, occurs in
M.
P. Pelliot s valuable
con
VAJRACCHEDIKA
36
The
characteristic
singular there
is
tifpadayitydiHi.
inns
have been
ftate
The
The
termination
y<i
suffix
The form
fi.
The
in all Iranian
past has been replaced by the past participle, as
In intransitive verbs the participle is apparently used alone, and
so as to agree with the subject in number.
Compare ttaxfd, he sat down
old
languages.
inflected
down.
commonlv form their past tense by adding personal suffixes to the past participle.
The only suffixes which occur in the Vajracchedikil are e in the third person singular
din f/a in the third person plural
tlmsyude, he did pyu^e, he heard naniagyddu,
It is tempting to compare the
tsitdmda, they went.
they did obeisance to
termination c in the third person singular with Wa\I
Sxiynl i, i which
2
derives from the pronominal base ai, Old Persian ai-la, Zd. acla.
Professor Geiger
It is probably
I do not know anything about the origin of the termination dindii.
and
<?/,
a participial suffix.
In the present participle we find both the Old Iranian suffix nt and the Middle
Persian uka. Compare hamjsanulai, going ; vitramda, going into ftu&a, going ; vama;
meaning
middle
A
and
The
understanding.
*<ikd,
suffix
compare pamdka,
suffix
ana
is
also used
thus gfdna,
participle of necessity is
diia;
compare
tcerai,
*(d,
that should be
standing, being.
The
i
suffix
which
is
made;
Jtvdnai,
Professor
GnmdriBs,
ii,
p. 319.
p. 108.
It is curious that the suffixed
IN
older ya.
i.e.
i,
237
Compare
hamberi,
filled.
Of
infinitives I
to write.
plf/e,
tvaka
5 am
is
in
it
fa/Me, to
realize
tee in
Zd.
If
to Zd. ndi.
The
all
language. They only represent the different types which can be inferred from
a study of the Vajracehedikil.
It is not, at the present
stage of my knowledge of the ancient Arvan language
of Turkestan, possible to
lay down rules about the formation of the various bases oj
the present or of secondary verbs, and so forth.
I shall
only mention the cnriom,
we
AN
iia*ph<~tnu,
might produce.
an which formii
suffix
IRANIAN LANOTAGE.
seem
by
/-epenthcsis
Zd.;
the
changed to spirants
old aspirated
voiced stops have lost their aspiration; the soft
palatal sibilants have been kept
as sibilants,
respectively.
become
and
/,
with
that
closely agrees
Considering the
small
language
we
find
See Grundriss,
I.
ii,
p. 305.
*v,
On
VAJRACCHEDIKA
288
Our language is much older than the various modern Iranian dialects with which
been remarked, Dr. Hoernle was of opinion
might be compaied. As has already
that it has its nearest congeners in the so-called Ghalchah dialects of the Pamir,
So far as I can see, this
the Sarlq-qoll, Shlghnl, WakhT, Munjam, Sangllchi/
In addition to the important corre
still remains the most likely one.
i
theory
1
the word Iidmd, is, and Wa\I Aumiiin, to be, attention might be
spondence between
and I*. That is however
tear
to the correspondence in the words for
Indian philology.
j question to be solved by Iranian and not by
crawn
liere
2
that the version of the Vajracchedika
It has been observed by Dr. Hoernle
nnder consideration is not a simple translation of the text as published by
?vfax Miiller.
The correspondence
by Dr. Hoernle.
is
no wonder that
It is therefore
many
points
still
remain unsettled,
do not doubt that they will all, in time, be elucidated. My own experi
and I feel
ence is that almost every day spent on the study brings fresh light
I were to
confident that I should be able to arrive at a fuller understanding if
hough
ilc vote
lot
of this important
my
reasons for
iccessary.
The
transcript
which follows
is,
hope,
present,
give
neglected.
i>een
For convenient use, the prose text of each folio is printed as a separate
with the number of the folio to which is added a for the
paragraph, numbered
and the beginning of each line in the page is
obverse, and b for the reverse
;
ii,
part
T.
is
base
IN
239
pages.
TEXT.
Saddham.
Drrai
nainasuihma
drbadva sadi-jsa tva"ra
baysii
namasyami bhagavatah trikalesu sraddhaya
data
tti-va drrai padya
n i
ttryamnl naniasuihmii
bi-sariiga
triyanikam
namasyami dharmam atha-vai trin prakaran bhiksu-samgham
Ttu
padl riamasummii sutrii prajMpairraiiima
baysarimii
padya
Trln prakariln
"
Tarn prakaram
sutram
namasyami
niiit a
gabhi[2 a ]ra
parasa
uvara
siinta
gambhim
prusudika
udSra
prathama
parama
bi ^iina
Kusta na
Yatra
tta
aliibye
Prajnaparamma tva
tva ttrraSayii [2 &
bisii
karma
karmani
jii
evam
vastii
yavSn
syat
cu
ra
avara"nii
tathft
nabusda
naman
Vajrrachediika
^
^ ajracchcdik^lm
vira
upari
cu tva
saji
dijsati
yah etam udgrhniyat dhamyet
[r>]
nama
basde garkbil
samyak
avaranasya piipani
ttina
tena
Vajrrachediika
nama
Vajracchedika
nama
data
va ttramma bisii
ttina
baysarh
buddhanam dharmah vai
tiivan
sarvah tasmin
ttye Vajrra^chedakyi
tasyah
Vajracchedikayah
[4]
dharmakayam
baysii*
bhagavfrn
sarvajnah
bira^te
cchaisa
parruska
sarvarhna
liambistii
yatha
cu-bura
ttatta
manarndii
vajrah
raysl
etam samkalitavan
tarn tri^atikam
sarvani
oskii
tathii-vai
sada
Prajiiaparamitam
tta-va
liiyau ^scii
na-asti
evam
vasarii
ni-stii
kila
tta
tlia
evam
kama
karii
na
padauysa pirmiittama
caryayah
ddharma
bhagavatam
livaRtii
paramitanum
carye
baysufie
Bodhi-
prnjnuparamitHm
ttina dadiirii
tena
u
athava
etavat
[3a>]
para
uvara n
prasadika
udfirii
vafii
pidii-parl
vScayet
HkhSpayet
[(}]
sutrii
sutre
[7]
VAJRACCHEDIKA
240
husa
elyil
pachiysdit
ndgrhltah pratisthapitah-bhavati
dcatii
bis"!
sarvah-asya dharmah
bista
jsati
yati
ante
[s]
sirii-jsa
sivena
rl
ci
ttana
prajnena
harhjsve
aysii
ahum
ma
baysii
a[3/->
ttina
tena
hvaua m ri
sutrii
siitrani
asa
sutrii
pathyante
sutrena asa
tcairan
(?)
karya
[9]
(?)
sada-jsa vana
dabrrlya
iha
vyuhe dharmaprltya (?) sraddhaya
byiihii
sarhpratisthe
me bhagavantah
samyak
purusena
(?)
iv
ttinai
tena-asya
ka
hvada-na hamrrastha
hajva
tena
yadi
mistil
puna
nu punvani mahanti
yasya
khvai
]ysdii yanaiiide
raksam
kurvanti
(?)
hva
tta
evam bhasitam
stakan
yat.ba-vai-etat
[10]
yanurii klm
karomi yathu titpfulayitavyam
"Saddham
Siddbam
baudhisatvfuh
^e
styc-tii
samaye
vyii
abhut
sarvesum
syat
hrilai-yastii
bodhisattvanam
ekasmin
harbisariinii
Orga
Namah
ioapinuikasya
hamtsa
stlrdham
baysii
bhagavan
mamma
me
pyiistii
iv
Sravasta
baysii
bhagavan Sru vasty lm
i
ksirii
astii
nagare
aslnab
Ana-
samkhyerma
mistii-na
Barhgharame
mahata
nil
stye
samaye
Ana-
sresthinal)
dvasi-parhjsa
u
tathii
*
6c
srutam Ekasmin
haru
sau
dvadasasata-paiicasndbhih
brru-hada navaysye
purvalme
bbagavatam
Evam
gyastii
yajatah
bfiHfi
Jivii
rrispurii
Jetasya rajaputrasya vane
[4( ] tliaj^inili
baysamnii
yajatanfim
Ttatta
disi
gyastanii
yajacanam
gyastiimnii
nvavasta
asiryau-jsa
Ttl
acaryaib
Atba
"pattarii
pfitram
bil-saga-na
bhiksu-samghena
o-yastanii
gyasta
yajatanam
yajatah
nati
clvaram puratah adadau
civara
pana
Sriivasta
Sravastyam
Srilvastlrh
mahSna-
1
To the right of each of the two first lines of fol. 3a we find the syllable jva
written in the margin, of a smaller size, and in an apparently different handwriting.
3
2
Read hantrratfa, as in 44 a u
Superfluous sign of interpunction.
8
4
Read -sainga-na.
Se tfye repeated by mistake.
*
Five syllables tfl pi ta (?) ka sa in cursive writing added interlinearly after tli.
.
IN
mis"tii
mahati
kitha
pinva
nagare
pindaya
kii
baysii
^Tti
Atha
traiiida
pravistah
maSta kitha
jSravastii
bhagavan yada
ku
khaysna-kira
yada bhakta-karyam
yudii
yude
krtam
caka ra
241
2
gyasta
baysii
ttl
yajatah
bhagavan
atha
pinda [4
?>
va tsuta hamyetii
vai
pindaya
gyastii
yajatah
sametah
gatah
"see-tit
kale
paryeta
pratikrantah
hamye
pattara
clvarii
eamctah
piitram
clvaram
pajsiryi
prat}
asamayat
pa
haysnatii
padau
praksillnyat
"
pranavyi
prajnaptasya
pratimukhlm
ttusattetli
javae
vyctii
Tti-ta
eva-sah
bhutab
Atba
byata
sunyatayab smrtim
[5a] pharaka
asirya kiimma halai gyastiinii gyasta
sarhbnbulab acfiryah
disam yajatanam yajatah
yam
vyeta hastii tsuaih^dii ku vara hamya gyastanil gyasta
bhutah
tatra
agacchan
tatra
yada
namasya da
i
pa
ttirii-jsa
sirasa
padau
hvaraiiicaifiii
daksinena
tvanii
fl
baysii
gyastii
yajatam
anamasyan
tsuariidii
agacehan
tatba
vanditurn
baysii
bbngavflr.
baysii
bhag-^vantam
sau
ekam
drrai
tcira
trin
varan
ha iv lai-ml
disam
nasta
nisknnah
Ttye
sce-ra
vatcii
asiri
Subliuta
vara
ttiiia
Tasmin
par?a [5
gamaye
punah
acaryah
Subhutih
tatra
tasyam
parsadi
Sravastlrii
na
?/>]
mahanaganrh pindayu
caritva krta-bhakta-krtyah
pascadbbakta-pindapata-pratikrantah patraclvaram pra-
Cf. pindd,
4 a iT
The three
first
am
Read namafydmda.
Compare tvzmdan&, 29
VAJRACCHEDIKA
242
hnriigri
vyita
eamnipatitah
bhiitah
patata
"San
utthitah
ekftn
&idya
suptim
clvaram
sii
cluskarii
nQnam
duskartitn
[Co
pajsa
ci.-ttira
^miinii,
pujfinUm
bau dhisatvu
i
bodbisattvab
iv
ttamye
[Gt
hirfimnii
artbunam
livaramdai
nyavasayat
tatha
daksinam
halai*
disam
baysa
baysii-na
bbagavata
ttahirau-hvariaka-iia 3
tatbag-atena
4
rra^tii
bisii
lifila
biysadii
ahu-jaa
nrhatJl
fjn
visvilb
disab
buddbena
tvayH
mistil
baysQriifia
mahantab
bodhicu-ttarii
anugrahcna
na
hariidaila
vuysa
sattvuh
yfivat
Imysii-na
bha^avalu
sfinariinii
tvisii
yanakii-na
arlnam(?)
tavisl
bisa-pinruV
visva-paramena
nu
anugrhltab
gyastii
yajatena
ttahara-tsuka-na
karakcna
mista
ve-niasuka-na uhu-jsa baudhisatvii
bodhisattviih mabantah
xxlhakena
tvayfi
nlya-liaudi
aste
tta hve
gyastii
baysii
yajatam bbiigavantam evam avocat
bbagavan
gyastit
yajatena
hariidarii-jsa
pfirlnditab
ilstii
baysii
bbag-avan
gyastii
yajatah
bisa-pirmilttamyc
visva-paramaya
tatbugatena
samna
biBilmna
samena
visvesfim
b<iysumna
vuysa
bodbi-
Battvah
ysmiya-hanrariime-jsa
Tta
partndanaya
Tat
"
ysi
ysiirhnu
janu
asan-na
[klai\Mii(lmn(l
Klcsa:nayanam
yajata
gyastanit
yajatunam
midhvab
asaniit
prahausti
yudai
Subhutih
ayusman
midfimna gyasta
}fivat
1
iy
Subhuta aysaih-na
airi
Ttl
Atha
karhma
yam
ui tti
dastii
ajamlii
anjaleh
tena
civaril*
pratyasthapayat
-
liH^tii
nastii
nisannalj
sve
parau
prtbivyam
u
tathii
khu
katharn
yavad cva talhagaten^arhata samyak-sambuddhena bodhisattva mabusattva anuAscaryarii bbagavan yavad eva tatbagatcn^
parigrhltab jaramen^unugrabena.
arbati eamyak-sambuddbcna bodbisattva mahusattvab parlnditab paramaya parlndanaya. Tat katbaih bhagavan bodbisattva-yana-samprastbitena kulaputrena va kula-
IN
iv va
midarhna gyasta
mldhvah
vai
[7a
yajata
baysuiia
viiysai-na
bodhi-
sattvena
mara rnahiiyarhna
hamjsadai-na
baysit
bhagavan
iha
samprasthitena
aysmil
baysaiiijaiiiiiii
cittara
pragrahltavyam
iiSiri
Subhiiva
Scaryam
Subhiitim
i!i
hve
6irii
avocat
sfidhu
tta
evam
iv
Subhuta
hamdadii
Snbhute
anupari^rhltuh
ukte
gyasta
gyastiinii
vacano
s"irii
birarii
baysii
yajatah bhagavan
ttatta
si
hiirii
Subhute
evam
pati
arthab.
baudhisatva
[liaystirhiu
bodhisattvuh
baHfuinm
gyasta
Subhuva
eadhu
ttabirau-
lil
khvai
ynjatfmam
baysii-na
bhagavata
yajatcna
bodhisattvayane
vistafia
hvaye hvanai
"Ttyc
baudhisatvayfuhfia
mahayfino
Tasmin
243
cu-ttirit
tvl^il
gyasta
baysii-nci,
samna
yanakii-n;i
mistii Imysurhfui,
iv
vQysai- na yslniya-haiulit biHii-pirmattamye ysInlvil-lmunliUmo-jsa
[8 a
8*irii
Subhuta
ttatta ^i hirii
Subhuta haihdfula
biisit-pirmattamii
hamdiirii-jsa
yslni-haudii
gyasta
baysa-na
bau"dhi-
visva-paramena
anugrahena
parindituh
yajatona
bhagavata
bodhi-
satva
bisii-pIrmattaraU ysml-haurfiriiuie-jsa
sattvab
duhitra
parlnclanaya
visvn-]>aramaya
Ta Evam
ttina
Subhuta
tena
Subliutc
cittarii
pyu
srnu
pragrahltavyan:
Evam
mahasattvah paramen^anngrahena
paramaya parlndanaya.
Tena
paiinditiis
hi
kurii,
identification.
repeated on
1
fol.
ui
repetition of 6a
fT.,
enclosed within
square brackets.
2
Read
tta.
Superfluous
R2
ign of interpunction.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
244
iv
vu
manasi
stisthu-oa-etat
kuru
hvanimii
khu
bhase
yatha
Iiadai-na
ysai-na baudhisatvayamna
sattvena
ayse
aham-te
yam
aysmya
subi-jl
sadhu
bodhi-
mara mahayamna
iha
samgacchata
bodhisattvayane
baysuiia
vistaiia
mahayane sthiitavyam
khui
tathii
yatha- asya
[9 a
mara aysmu
ttii
tad
cittam
iba
niijsadii
^"ri
vyakhyatam
acaryah
nasaila
Ttatta
slra
gyasta
Evam
baysa
pragrahltavyam
sadhu
yajata
bhagavan
Subhuta
gyasta
baysa-na
pyuste
Gyasta
Subhutih
yajatat
bha^avatah
asrausit
Yajatah
bays!
tta
hve
bhappavan-asya
evam
avocat
mara
"
iha
Subhuva
baysuiia
vuysai-na
Subhute
bodhi-
eattvcna
baiulhisatvayi.mna
hamjsamdai- na
ttatta
aysmu
bodhisattvayr.ne
sarhg-acchata
evam
cittam
satvam
cu-burii
satva
yavantah
sattviih
jatah
tathil
jarayau
ruvaaa
jatah
anau
vinii
rupena
syame-jsa cu
va
tti
ye
vai
te
samjna}Ti
ku-burii
satvadiita
yilvatl
gattvFxlhatuh
bhasifiye
ham
pattavyam
nasame-jsa
Le
upevamna
ntpadayitavyam
*
ham[9^][A7iz^a
y]saya
samkhyayarii
jatah
tatha
sattvanam sarhgrahcna
ysata
ruvi-na
iv
"cu
uvava
cu hamtsii
eaha
cu
rupena
ye
satva cu ni
eattvah ye
na
ham
jii
tsa
saha
ham iv /sa
saha
iihya
ande
syame-jsa
cu
anau
sarhjnaya
ye
vina
sya[wie]-J5a
eariijnaya
auau syami-jsa
vina
sariijnaya
pranaviifia
prajnapaniya
bhagavatah pral yasrausit. (3.) Bhagaviln asy^aitad avocat, iha Subhute bodhisattvayaDa-sarhprasth ien^alvarh cittam utpadayitavyarh yavantah Subhute sattvah sattva;
a
Eead hamjsaiiidaina.
Superfluous sign of interpunction.
Read aysmu as in fol. 7 a 1 and elsewhere ; see Vocabulary.
The first three defaced aksaras of 9^ legible from reverse impression on 10 a
Cancel the superfluous rvvana.
.
IN
[10a
mata
mata
nirvana
Tta
satva
te
sattvah
na hadi kamujii
?ai
na
api
eva
harii
ci
karhcid
kidna
sarve-visvo anupadhisese
satva
ku
ni
sii
6au satva
ekam sattvam
parinirvaye*
Subhutc
iv /Ktmii
paranirvaye
bodhisattvasya
sariina
hii-[10&
bha-
sarhjnn,
baudhisatva
hvaiiai
Tta
ci
luira
kidna
ni
bodhisattvah
vaktavyah
Evam
kasya
arthasya
krtcna
na
na sah
bhavet
parinirvapitavan
Subhuta baudhisatva
Cl
vet
aharlna
har-bisa
muhu-jsa
maya
avamata
Diidira
pa^ranirvana
(&tt)mati
bhavet
Evam
tti
nirviine
ui
iiapiya
juapyeta
245
s=ah
Subhutc
j vakil
vira
"
vatca
tti
punah atha
sariina
sarhjna
jlvasya upari
Su iv bhuta
Subhute
o
pudgalii vlra
athava pudgalasya upari
ni
na
siimna
hiime
sai
sariijna
bhavet
api
baudhisatva-na atmabhavlnai
vastii
hada
ova
vlra
bodhisattvena
parauttiipratisthite-
na danam datavyam
haurarhna
datavyam
ni
riiva
vlra
uj>ari
parauttil
haurii hauraiiinil
datavyam
nil
na
"^ktjjasa
salidanam
bu^ana
na ysvarhnfim ni skaurnatarii 3 ni dharmam- iv [na ?;i]ra
dharmanam
na
na
rasanam
na gandhanam na
upari
sparsanam
l ][tva] haurii
Ttatta
hauranil
Subhuta
haura
baudliisa[ll
parautta-na
danam
Subhotc
bodhisattvena
pratisthitena danam datavyam Evam
nil
nirvana-dhatau parinirvapayitavyah.
hetoh.
datavyam na rupa-pratisthitena danam datavyam na sabda-gandha-rasa-spraf^vyadharmesu pratisthitena danam datavyam. Evam hi Subhate bodhisattvena mahfisat1
talvatamiia.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
210
haurfuima
dalsvysim
"va
samfia vira hi
kliu ni
gunii
yathi na laksaniinam sariijnam upari api
grnhltfi
atl.a
vii
baudhisatva
cue
avarautta
yali
apratisthitah
iv nai
]>unyamayah
Subhntc
data
gtiina
san
hiril
hve
Subhutil tta
Subhutih cvam
hve
ttatta
cvam
Subhute
sah
hidi
ttye
Subhuta
dunam
dadfiti
tasya
Subhntc
liaiiibisil
na hu-yudii
pamaka
na-ti
Tta
samnhah
na
praraeyah
nu-te
Evam
sukarah
suka-
pamaka na-tuA5i.ri
disJi
halai
a^j
rah udgacchuntyuh disayfih fisayfim akasah
avocat
atha
asti
Subhuta
si
haurii
sarbamdii
[12a ]dii
"nil
r,
baysa
Gyasta
bfiysl
tta
yajata
bhag-avan
Yajatah
bhagavan-asya
cvam
atasa
iv
pama ka
gukurah
akasah
j)ramcyah
ni-tii
A^iri
Acaryah
nu-tc
hve
tta
Baysl
baysft
gyasta
na
avocat
huyudi
Bhagavan-asya cvam
bhagavan
cu
Siubhuta hau-yu-
saittii
kim-tc bhfisate
i
va diinam
puiil
bodhis=attvasya
hauraka
kidna Ci
Evani kasya avthasya krtena Yah
cu
baudhisa^ tva
bodhisuttvah
Tta
va hauril
nasiiku
sii
nQnam
si
hirii
cu
si
baudhisatvii
cvam
satx
arthah
yat
^ah
bodhisattvah
hi(]ii
dadr.ti
ttyc
tnsya puiyamayah
ci
sukarah
diksu
ni gyasta
avocat na yajata
live
si
hilrii
Subhuva
sah
arthah
Subhntc
avarautta
stana
san
yah apratisthitah
na huyiuli
samnhah na
evam
1
evam
avocat
haiiibisii
tta
Subhutih
ttatta [12 1
ttatta
])uiiinai
Subhuta
di.^va
u haura
dunam
ul
pamaka Cu ha dil vatca
prameyah Kali
cva
punah
lijlrii
Subhuta
baudhisatva
haura
hauramiiU
Tta
cue
sai iv ttii
arthah
Subhute
bodhisattvena
dfinam
datavyam
Evam
kim-te
bhasatc
Bhaga v un
aha,
evam
dasc-su diksu su
bha^avan.
pramanam udgrahltum.
Evam
Read Subhuta.
IN
laksanljil pyfdye-jsa
laksapasampadfi
na
gyasta
ynjatah
baysii
dyarhiitt
247
Subhuta
lie
tta
live
bhagavan dras^avyab nu
Kusta-
Ya-
na
ttu
[ISaiJburil Subhupa] lak?:uimii vara-buril drruja
laksanam
Subhute
vat
laksariinii
alak^am^nil
gyastil
laksanam
alaksanam
yajatasya
2
hvanai
baysil
asirl
"
ucfiryah
tat
inrsii
ttivat
bhagavatah
baysii
gyastil
yajatam
vacane
najsadil
vyiikhyfitam
hvaye
Ttye
dyamfiii
Tasmin
drnstiivyam
ukte
Subhuta
tta
live
asta
ni
Subhntih
evam
avocat
asti
nu
iv
satva cu ttyaih didrraihmaiil
baysii kamujii U8ta maJ8l [^a],dil
tesTim
tfidrsanam
uttamam
kccit
kjllatn sattvuh yc
gyasta
bhagavan
yajata
sutrfim
vlra
kura
saihna
samjnam
tta
biiysi
Yajatab bhagoviln-asya
hve
ma
tlm
Subhuva
ttatta
hvana
liamari
ustamajsl
rtvocit
ma
tvam
Subhnte
evam
vada
bbavanti
uttamam
evani
ba"a|
kfila
bfulil
hajva
na
prajnavantah
na
drastavyab.
ha(li tti
eva
te
6au
^lysii
gyasta
ekam yajatam bhagavantam
parsadii
ni
paryupi\sata
na
f5i
ekasya
Ya
vyab.
B*Av*alaksanasampat.
Evam
fa.
at end of line
Superfluous sign of ioterpnnction
VAJKACCHEDIKA
248
iv
yajatasya
baysil
bbaga^ atah
sutririi
vi-
gya.stil
vira
puna
kusalil
mula
piradarhda
upari
punyani
kusalasya
molani
avaropayan
ttyarh
tesam
sntranain upaJ
[14
ra
hamari
ksamnii
vasve
ksanam visuddham
s"au
ekam
ri
baysa-i na
bhavanti yajatenj, bhagavata
gyasta
puiiinai
haiiiblsU-na
punyamaycna
samuhcna
"
na
atmasaiiijna
baysa-na
drstfih
bbavanti
yajatena
bhagavata
hamphva hamari
bhavanti
iv
pravarteta
Subliuta
Subhute
pravarteta
jnatah
avaraata
gyasta
sarhbbotah
Tta
cue
Evam kim-te
Su-
satvasarhna
ni
jlvasamila
ni
atha
na
sattvasamjna
na
jlvasariijna
na
Yajatah
kaulopariimil
kolopamam
hve
saittil
tta]
evam avocat bhasate
feysi
bhag-aNTin-asya
dharmaparyayii
dharmaparyayam
busta
buddhah
bustil
liama
datl
si
hamada
pasarhmi
buddliah
syat
dhavmah-asya
sah
sarvada
prahatavyah
cu
kim
acla ^ta
Khu si hve
cu ttaratcacil kiril khu-bura
adharmah Yatha sah purnsah yada
karma
yavat
imesv
Su-
bhasate
net]
ku-ye
utpaclayisyanti.
aprameyena
saittii
[o
yada-xascit
bhavisyanti ya
paysamda
byehidi
labhante
hamari
cittam
dya
aysmu
"li^Jm^)
syat
nara
va
punah
vai
ttajil
ni ra
na jatu
NT a khalu punas
dharmasnmjna pravarteta
1
sa eva
Read aytmA.
Superfluous sign of interpunction at end of line.
bvtta hama.
IN
tramdil
bhavet
na
hamada
bi-
pravistah
nai-na
[ISa
da
ttatta
vaiiasara
avamrsati
(?)
Ta
Evam
cue
2
gyasta
baysii-na
bhagavata
ku
sattvah
yada
saittii
kim-te
vuysai
bhasate
Su*i(bhuta)
Subhute
hvata
aya
bhasitah
syat
Bi iv (
hva
aya
ttina
cu
aryapudgalii
syat
tena
yat
aryapudgalnh
tta
hve
evam avocat
nj
Sarvaih
bhasitah
bays!
bhagavan-asya
nara
Sira
butti
punah sivakani bodhate
nai-na
hamada
da
vlra
na-anena-na sarvada dharmasya npari
vama^stil
iha-asivakani
yajatena
baysiifia
bodhi-
evam
rati
tcairai
pnse
prajahyat
yarvada bba-
na-et*id-na
kartavyah
249
yat
Subhute
da
si
yi/(i)sti/au
yajataih
nyaparhda
Subhuta
hlyaustyai
cu
asti
jfiapyamanah
en
Imysyau-jsa
bhagavadbhih
[15?; ]
(Gi/astii)
Yajatah
(?)
trisahasrrye
mahasahasrrye
trisahasryiih
mahasahasryah
ramnyan-jsa hamberi
ratnaih
nai
aStii
ni
na
sariipfirya
ajanami
buddhah
pudgalah. (8.) Bhagavan aha, tat kim manyase Snbhiite, yah kascit kulaputro
va kuladuhita va trisahnsra-mahasahasram loka-dhatum
saptaratna-paripurnam krtva
tathagatebhyo rhadbhyah samyak-sambuddhebhyo dUnarh dadyfit api nu sa kula-
VAJRACCHEDIKA
250
Subhuta cu mani
saitta
bhasatc
kim
Snbhute
nu
puna
ysyarhne
^if^bhuti
janayet
Subhutir-asyn
yajata
bihi
live
tta
bislvrriisaina
kuladuhitu
athava
kulaputrah
punyani
gyasta
ova
"bislvrrasai
sj
sah
evam avocat
ysy[flHj]ii[e]
Cu
prasnnuyat
Kali
midariina
mldhvah
^ af][] h[ ( i]
arthnh
cva
piir.nysdil
punah
kliu
yathfi
sil
punlnai
kina gyasta
data
ttye
dhannah tasya krtcna yajatah
hamblsii
Cu
trasa
iv
[7ms)Te]
trisahasryuh
cu Mbarma
vatca iiya
si
liaiimm
dfmam dadati dvitiyah punah syat yah
bi<lii
6au
gabil
nfisati
kam
pplthfim
grlmlyfit
si
Th
sajlya
tena
baysa
yajata
bhag-avan
hvata cu
baysuf5tii
va
avamata
biiysil
bhoj^avfin
live
mahasahasryah lokadhatun
flG^jparyayil tcuraiiipatil
parcbhyah
"
tta
cvam avocat
mabasahasrre lovadata
hariidiryaiii
puna
bodhim
uktah yat
dharmaparyayasya
udgrhnlyat, atha va
gyasta
"
mldhvah
hambisii
puiiinai
baysa
bhagavan punyamayam samuham
[16 a
nan
bahukani
midiiihna
pharaka
bahukam
ati
pharaka
ysyano
catuspadikam
"vistarna
binislya
vistarcna prakasayet
anamkhista
Tta
Evam
punyena apramcyani punyani prasunuyut asamkhyeyani
Subhutir
putro va kuladuhitti vu tato nidanam bahu punya-skandharii ])rasunuyat.
va tato nidanam
aha, Imhu bhagavan bahu sugata sa kulaputro va kuladuhita
punya-skandham
punyaskandhah punyaskandha
SubhQte kulaputro va kuladuhita v^Omarii trisahaHrn-mahusahasrarh lokndhfitum
Kaptaratna-paripnrnaih kftva tatlulgatcbhyo rhadbhya^t Hamyuksarhbuddhebhyo
datiarii dadyat yas c^oto dharmaparySyad antasa catuspadikJlm api gilthttm udgfhya
tato nidanam bahutaram punparebhyo vistarcna desayot saihprakasaycd ayam cva
Tat
kasya hetoh. Ato nirjata
asamkhyeyam.
aprameyam
prasunuyad
yaskandham
IN
cu
hara
kina
kasya
arthasya
krtena
baysuSta
Tta
bodhih
Evam
[17 a
Ttattika
Atah
cue
vanii
pannasya evam
pharrll
byaudil
praptam
phalam
ca
yadi
gyasta
yajata
lv
srrauttavami)il
srotaapannah
sil
hi
srrautta-
sil
srotaii-
nanu
nunam
sa
hilrna
haiiipbve
arthena BaihbliOtah-asti
nnnam
(?)
Ttina
Tcna
hvidii
ruvyau-jsa
haiiiplive
ni
bajasyau
ucyatc
na
rnpaih
sariibhutah-asti
na
sabdaih
[17Z>
ni
na
Ttina sakrttagamil
Tena
sakfdagSml
skvauinajau
hvidii
Cu
ucyate
Kim
Subhntc tatha^atanam
arhatarii
ni
na
na
dliannyan-jsa
haiiiplive
na
dharniaib
saniblmtah-ajiti
sparsaih
muhu-jsa sakrttagama
sakrda^aminam
maya
nnnam
api
Subliu ni ti
tta
live
ni
liaihphye
sambhntah-asti Sublmtih-asya cvarn avocat na
bhagavan alpena
busaiiau-jsa
gandhaih
nil
ttinka
baysa
nu
"1
vai
namasa(?)
rnani
kirn
baysa
baysanii
bhagavan bhagavatfim
mulm-jsa srrautavamna
maya
srotaapannanHm
ni
sii
kfima
da
ttil
na syat nunam katamah dharmah tc:aa
bhavct
tcamna ra va
aryiistahg-amurgikena
midhvah
yajata
Subhnte
aryastagamiirglnai namaysll-na
miclaiiina
gyastil
nirgata
hilme
tta
iv
naraiiiaa
Subhuta cu
saittil
kim-te bhasate
2M
mani
"sai
nu
snkrttagama
aja sakrda^aminah
"
pbarrU
phalam
byaudU
praptam
tta hamii
evam bhavet
tcamna
ra
va
ni
yadi
ca
vai
:na
maya
srotaapattij)halaiii
praptam
iti.
SubhiUir aha, no
h^idaiii bhajjavan.
Na
Bpannal?.
iti,
Bhagavan aha,
tat kirn
manyiwo
miphalam praptam iti. Tat kasya hetoh. Na hi sa kascid dharmo yah sakrdagamitvam apannah. Ten^cyate sakrdagSm^iti. Bhagavan aha, tat kirii manyasc
1
Read
trrautdvana.
line.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
252
i
ay fit
tta
Subhuvi
data ttana
kariima
sil
nnnam katamah dharmah tena Subhutih-asya evam
midilmna gyasta
mldhvah
baysa
bhagavan
na-asti
Ba
nQnam
kiimu-ja
dharma cu
sakrtta-
kascit
sah
dharmah yah
sakrda-
Bhaga-
[18 a
Subhuva cu mani
saittii
tta
cue
hve
tta
ysl
vai-asya evam avocat evam kim-te bhasate
araliamdii
hania
nil
arbatah
bhavet
nu
sana
klesamayiln arm
klai4Jna
sil
muhu-^jsa
nOnam
mayii
ttu?a
yanuma
tavisl
karomi
gyasta
Imysa
nista
si
yajata
bhagavan
na-asti
sah
"iSubliCivi
Subhntih-asya
byauda tcamna
eah
ev a
fitinn^rahah
dharmah yah
bi^il-plrrniittama
visvaparama
bhavet atha
yena
prdptam
tta
hve
ua
midana
evam
avocat
na
mldhvah
hama
hadii uysaiill-nasaraa
nu
kim
Subhate
arahamdaufiii
arhattvam
arhattvam
numa
syat
l
si
hama
araliamda tta
muhu-jsa arahamdau[18 ti]n&
arhattvam
evam bhavet nQnam
arhatah
maya
si
na
si
Ba-
garh Tui
gaml
yaja a
nista
iv ni
hve
avocat
cl
sacet
byauda
praptam
sattvn^rahah
klai^Ina
klesamayanam
sanarh jauni
arlnam hanih
hvata
aysil
arahamjiiam
pahausta
uktfi
aham
arhajjnanam
nyavasi
sj,
sa
pudgala-
mil
a !ii nada
me
ujjvala(?)
iv
brriyai- j&a
ragena
ni
na
ujonnah.
tat
iti.
api
bhagavan, n^arhata evam bhavati, may^arhattvaiii praptam iti. Tat kasya hetoh.
Na hi sa bhagavan kascid dharmo yo rhan nama. Ten^ocyate rhann iti. Saced
bhagavann arhata evam bhaven, may^arhattvam praptam iti sa eva tasy^atmagraho
bhavet eattvagraho jlvagrahah pudgalagraho bhavet. Tat kasya hetoh.
asmi bhagavams tathagaten^arhata samyaksambuddhen^aranaviharinam
Aham
agryo
Na ca me bhagavann evam
asmi bhagavann arhan vltaragah.
Sacen mama bhagavann evam bhaven,
bhavati, arhann asmy aham vltarflga iti.
may*arbattvam pruptam iti, na mam tathfigato vyakoriByad, aranavihfirinam agryaV
nirdistah.
Aham
IN
muhu
mSm
vyirasil
baysa
aranavyiharai
aranavihiirl
yajatnh bhagavfm vyiikarisyat
gyasta
cu
1
[19 a ] rarhna
samahaiia
yah samadhane
rane
klai^Inai jauni
hanim
klesakam
Gyasta
a"spasde
iksatc
Subhuva
asta
nai
Subhute
asti
nu
gi
baysa
Inaka
na
antikat
udgrhltah
bama
na
ni
aycd
hama
syfit
syah
tena
tta
baysa
niSti
kamuja
sj
bhagavan
na-asti
kascit
sah
na
Inaka
aya
antikat udgrhitavan
syah
saihtane
cue
tta
saittii
jii
hu-jsa Dipariikaril
mayil
aya
gyasta
ynjata^ya
Dipariiknrasya
aivdbigama-svabliavi
adhigama-svabhavikah
syat
bhasat<?
da
dharmah
midamua gyasta
nnnam
mldhvah
yajata
da
cu
tbu Dipariigara gyasta
sah dharmah yam tvam
Dlpamkarut yaja.at
"ttana
cu adbigamasubhava 3
data
na
bhavet Subhutih-asya
ndg-rhltah
anyasmin
Subhuvi
bhag-avatah udgrhitavan
saiiittaiia
hve
tta
hve
Subhuvi
SubhQtih-asya evam avocat
kascit
na
na
aya
kamuja
na-asti
bhag-avan
baysa-na
a-
harhdarye
yah
(?)
tta
mu
da
cu
dharmah yah
bhag-avatah
a-
visva-paramah
(?)
sah
ujjvalah
baysa
bi&i-plrmattama
cu
anadai
253
yat
dharmah
adhig-amasvabhavah
hve
sa
jii
da
cu
dharmah yam
thu
tvam
mldhvah
na
DlparhknriU
Subhuva
tta
hum
Yah
Subhote
evam
vadet
yajnta
lm irysa na
Dlptikara
Cu
na
na midariina gyasta
bhaj^avatali
ay.4l
bud-
nnnam aham
bud-
sa
dhaksidhakse-
[20 a
Subhutih kulaputro
na
kvacid
viharati,
ten^ucyate
si
kura
pah vitatham
ranavihary
hvane Ci
vadet
Ye
araniiviliarviti.
Bhagavan aha, tat kim manyase Subhute, asti sa kascid dharmo yas tathag-atena Dlpamkaiasya tathagatasy^arhatah samyaksambuddhasy^antikad udgrhiuh.
Subhutir aha, no h^idam bhagavan n^asti sa kascid dharmo yas tathagatena DipmiBhagavfm
karasya tathagatasy^arhatah Bamyaksambuddhasy^S,ntikad udgrhltah.
aha, yah kascit Subhote bodhisattva ovam vaded, aham ksetravyohan nispadayisylim^
(10.)
Read
hvdfti.
-tvaltuh-ti.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
254
avyulut
avyuhah
biiddhakfiitravyuliii
buddbakfetravyuhfih
"aviskastii
arupimi
gyasta
baysii-na
avyuhitah
arupinah
yajatena
bhagavatfi
hvata
Ttye
kina
Subhuta
uktah
Tasya
krtena
Subhutc
"
baudhisatva
bodhisattvena
avarauttii
aysmu
apratisthitam
cittam
*v
ni bajiisa ni bu&afiarh ni
vlra
ni
rfiva
parauttli
Otpadayitavyam na rupanam upari pratisthitam na sabdanam na g-andhilnam na
wtiika
ysvaiiina
rasunam
Ttrfuiimil
niariinam
Subhuva
ci
jii
hve
aya
cu
didamdii
Evam
upamam
Subhute
sacet
kascit
purnsah
syat
yat
evamrupah
Subhuta
mistii
midamna
mahan
mldhvah
ttaraihda"rii
atmabhavah
mistit
na
kliu
Sumirii
yatha
Sumcruh
ttarariidarii
mahan nn
gyasta
aya
syat
%y
atmabliavah
[2 la
tta
cue
tat
kim-tc
suaittii
gam
Bilii
girih
Ati
abhava
Subhute
bhasate
ttana
evam avocat abhavah sah atinabhuvah tena
^ ta
si
atmabhavii
Sumlrii
nu yatha Sumoruh
atmabhavah
Ixiysa
na khu
i!i
garii
girih
ivnve
si
ttarariidarii
ttasilbhaugl
baysaihnU
bhagtivatam sariibhog-ikah arariidarii
tra abhavah
anau
fikajsikana
bajaitti
vina sariiskaranam (?) lupyate (?)
Gyasta
Yajatah
bays!
bhagavSn-asya
sa vitatham vadct.
Tat kasya hetoh. Ksctra-vyuhah ksctra-vyuha iti Subhute
Tasmat tarhi
vyuhas te tathagatcna bhasitah.
Ten^ocyante ksctra-vyuha iti.
Subhutc bodhisattvena mahasattven^aivam apratisthitam cittam utpadayitavyam
iti
van na kvacit
tadyath<api
nama Sumeruh
parvata-riijah
tat kirn
manyaee Subhute api nu mahan sa atmabhavo bhavet. Subhutir aha, mahan sa bhag-avan mahan sugata sa atmabhavo bhavet. Tat kasya hetoh. Atmabhava atmabhava
iti bliagavann abhavah sa,
tathugatona bhasitah. Ten^ocyata atmabhava iti. Na hi
ea bhavo n^abhavah ten^ocyata atmabhava iti.
(11.) Bhagavan aha, tat
manyase Subhute yavatyo Gangayarh mahanadyam valukas tavatya eva Garigfinadyo bhaveyuh. Tasu ya valuka api nu ta bahvyo bhaveyuh. Subhutir aha, tti eva
bhagavan
kirn
IN
tta
ttatta
live
Garhgii
nyiiya "gruicyau-sye
valukabhih
Gamgftyah nadyiih
kammuja dahii a-va str! ya hautlyau
hamari
bhavanti
kascit
purusah athava
strl
hula
gyastiim
baysamnu
haurii
yajatiinam
bhagavatam
danam dadati
hamari ttye
dahii
o-va
bhavanti tasya purnsasya athava
striyai cu ttye
strlyah yah tasyah
vira
tcurampati
prajnaparamitayah
upari
catuspadikam
liariidaraihnii vistarna
anyesam
pu ^na
kusalii
punyani
kusalasya
da
dharmah
iv l
syat
mulii
mulani
vistarena
hamari
si
pujanlyah
sa
raiiiuyau-jsa harhbirii
ratnaih
sampurya
mulii
sau
ekam
mtilani
Vajrracliedakyi
[21 W]
Viijracchcdikavah
gahii
dijsati
vfialvii
guthum
dhurayct
vucayet
iiysdLslya ttye
pracainai
pliaraka
uddesayet tasya pratynycna-asya bahuni
bhavanti
pajsamaviya
lovadatu
tuvantah lokadhatavuh
*pufia kusalii
punyani kusalaaya
klyanti-asya
[j?rrty/Taj)rt]ra[m]ni[i]
sajl
udg-rhnlyat
didira-
wiptabhih
carhdl
255
1
Kamye
sadyi
piskalii vira
Yasya prthivyfih pradesasya ujiari
u
disji hiimii haiiitsa gyasta
disa bhavet
saha
devasya tntha
si
sah
hvamda
manusya t-ya
ysama-^amdai-na kaprthivl-lokcna
J
[22
ya-
m-fia
disa-na
da
syam
disayam
dharmah
cittye mfuhriamdii
syut caityasya
upama
sa
disa
sa
disTi
gatham udgrhya parebhyo desayet samprakasayed ayara eva tato nidanam bahutarum
punya-skandham prasnnuyad aprameyam asamkhyeyam. (12.) Api til khaln punah
Subhute yasmin prthivl-pradesa ito dharmaparyftyad antasas catuspadikam
api
gatham udgrhya bhayeta va sampraka^yeta va sa prthivl-pradesa^ caityabhiito
bhavet sa-deva-manus-asurasya lokasya kah punar vado ya imam
dharma-paryayam
pakala-samuplrtih dharayisyanti vacayisyanti paryavilpsyanti pnrebhya^ ca vistansna
1
of interpunction.
Superfluous sign
Read mute,
as in
21i 1H
VAJRACCHEDIKA
256
piir.sa
prasa lika
hamil
ttatta
bhavet
evam
maiiariiiiii
ha,
baysa
gyaata
khuai
tatha katham-vai-asya
tta
live
evam
avocat
sastara
ttara
asti
u.
sasta
tatra
aste
tatha
Ttye hvaye
Tasmin
live
"sii
mananlyah nunam
ii
nama
dijsi
nama
dhiiraye
asiri
Subhuta 1
vacane
acaryah
Subhutih
nama gyasta
ci
kah nama
avocat
m hvanai
ukte
yajata
iv
baysa
da
sj
vacane
ukte
na]ma
prajria[22^][parrtmma
baysa
bhagavan
njatah
Sublmva
nama
prajnapriramita
data
dharmah
?i
Subhute
sah
nama
ttattai
"
bhasita
kim-te bhasatc
Tat
hva
baysii-na
bhagavata bhasitah
aya
Subhute
Subhuvi
asti
tta
syat Subhutih-asya
nu
khu
hve
artha bve
ttye
l)tiysa
gyasta
artham bodhe
yaja a bhagavan tasya bhasitasya
hvanai
aysa
aham
yajatena
miclarii iv na
mldhvah
nista
kamuja
si
na-asti
kascit
sah
da
dharmab
cu bisau
yah visvaih
[2.3
hva
gyastyau baysyau-jsa
yajataih
Paramena te Subhuta
snmprakasayisyanti.
Tasmimss ca Subhute prlhivl-pradese sasta
Baysi
aya
tta
hve
prajnaparamit^eti.
yas tathagatena bhasitah.
Read Subhuta.
The first four aharas of fol. 22
stuck to the subjacent fol. 23 a.
8
have peeled
off,
owing
IN
tta
cue
evam kim-te
saittii
Subhuva
bhasate
Subhute
gyasta
baysii
yajatah
bhagavan
gyasta
baysa
yajata
bhagavan
dvaradi"rsau
guna
dvatrirhsat
supurusa-
laksanani
tena
yat
datinai ttaradarii
dharmakayah
hvanari
dvaradirsil
kayah
iena
ucyante
dvatririisat
hudihuna
Gamgii
nyaya
strl
Gan^ayah
nadyah
riifSlf/rt
kasayet
4
rii
asariikhyeyah
jatu
yude
a"
Cu
va
Yat
vai
iii
gruicyau- sye
valukabhih
sutrii iv vira
va aya cu ttye
kayan
anaihkhistye
jil
rfqiakayah
laksjmani
supurnsa-
striya
si
baysii-na
bhagavata
gfum
a-va
hamdaranu
anycbhyah
.vistarna bivisl
arena
jtra-
hame avauiata
puiiinai
bahutarah-asya punya- eamfihah-asya bhavet aprarneyah
"Tti
budari
ml
Atha
ska mi
rhan
athava
tcurapatl
sajiyil
giiha
jati
catuspadikani gathain srnoti udgrhnlyut
gato
alaksanani
dahii
pasti
mTdhvah
na
agfma
purusah
upamitan
cira
iT
anuvyanjanavSn
ttina
maiiariida ttararhdara
na midamna
hve
avpqat
ttararhdara
[24
evarn
hudihuna
bhasitani
iji
tta
dvavaradirsa
cu
Subhute
mahapurusalaksanaih
nai
Subhuti
drastavyah nn Subhutih-asya
ttana
Subhuva
mahapurasalaksanyau-jsa
dviitrirhsadbhih
dyamna
hvata
257
haiiibiaai
Subhuta ddharmaviga-na
ilsiri
acarvah
ustadi
pramfujat
Subhutih
gyasta
dhannavcgena
baysii
yajatam bliagavantnm
samyak-sarhbuddho drastavyah.
tta
aski
r>
nsrunah
live
evam avocat
hi hi
ati
Ten^ocyante
gatena bhasitany alaksanani tani bhagavarhs tathagatena bhasitani.
dvatrirhsan-mahapurusa-laksanan^ifi.
Bhagavan aha, yas ca khalu punah Subhute
stri
jiarityajan
See Vocabulary.
Read Subhvva,
2
Read perhaps kmlikvna.
6
Read anamkhit\a.
Read dharmaviyd-na.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
258
duskara midarhna gya
mldhvah
duskarah
Ni
Na
patata
utthitam
Cu
v s/a
da
si
ftysii
ra
miihu-jsa
didira
jatu
maya
evamrupah
gam[24 ^Jbhlra
gambhlrah
\a
saihiia
Cu
ttu
dil
sadahldii
satiijnri
Ye
tarn
dharmam
sraddadhati
ku-jsa
yatah
dharmah
bhagavan sah
yajata
Na
tea
Na
ca
lia
pira
likhati
mam
bvaiiima
me
jnanam
da
pyustii
dharmah srutah
sa^sam
bayfca
sji
bhagavatam sasanam
yanati
ni-ni
karoti
na-na
fi
sa
ttyaih
tesam
uvsaiiine vi
atmanah
iv
na
vi
saiiina prravarttii ni
eatva vira saihiia ni jvaka
npari samjnfi
pravarttet na sattvasya upari samjufi najlvasya upari
vi
pudgalii
na
sarima
na-na
ttyamnil
ni
tcarlraai
nasakii
saiiijna
na-na
tesam
na
caramah
grfihakah
pudg-ala?ya upari
vira
artliii
arthasya upari
[25
lianasil
astii
Ttye
hvay[at]
hvanai
gruhah
asti
Tasmin
ukte
vacane
gyastii
yajatah
bsiysii
bhagavan
van
yato
paryayah srutapurvah.
tathiif.
Paramona
te
bhagavann
fiscaryena
Na mama
bhng-avann ascaryam
Ye
pi
pascttnuyuih
]>ancasatyam
dharma-paryayam udgrahlsyanti dhiirayisyanti vucayisyanti paryavapsyanti parebhyas ca visturena saiiiprakasa} isyanti te param-uscaryena samanvagata bhavis3 anti.
Api tu khalu j)imar bhagavan na tesam atma-samjna pravartisyate na sattva-samjnil
na jlva-saihjiiana pudgala-samjna pravartisyate, n#a]i tesarii kacit samjna n^asamjna
Tat kasya hetoh. Ya sa bhagavann atma-samjna s^alv^asariijfia ya
pravartate.
;
sattva-samjna
jlva-sarnjiiii
pudgala-samjua
space,
The
syllable
between
read pirdttd
11.
ltd,
2 and
s<alv^asamjna.
Evam
Sarva-
3,
we should probably
read p\rdti.
IN
Subhuta
tta
hve
evam avocat
Subhutim
acaryam
ni
ni
hariysari
na samtrasyanti na
pariiihma tva
paramma
tiim
paramitam
puramitS
"ttatta
bhagavan
yajata
cu
ttye
ye
asya
ana ni
sutrii
hvada
sutrasya bhiisitavantah uslnah na
"
iv
traysii
byehldil
triisam
fipadyante
avamata
gyastii
aparimanah yajatah
Pirmattama duskarii
Para ma-
baysii
me
stye
samaye
atma* 4
agaprattyaiiiga
paste
angapratyaiigam
acchaitslt
iu saihiia
mam
me
na
gulasaihjna
tarn
atmasamjnfi
api
[26
maiii
me
ni
ttu ba iv dii
sai ysurasaiiina
me
vya
babhuva na
atmasariijna
galiisamna na
mam
kalirajah
vya
abhavisyat
eumna
abhfisanta
ba Ma-na
Yasmin
samaye
inaiiinia
me
ttye
tasmin
na
pud-
na jlvasamjna
na
pnd-
vya
babhuva
tatha
mustii-jsa
vyapadcna
hamlya
MI
hvadii*
Kama
na-ni
na-na
Battvasamjna
saiiijna
stimjna abhavisvat
s_a
satvasariiiia ni jlvasariina
saihna
kalam
bhagavantah
duskara
[25 &
Ttana
maihraii
pirmattarna
paramena
baysii
gyastii
ovatn
2
259
ra
jiitu
aysii
Pnijane
aham
etat.
asaihna
na asamjna
C^u
Yadi
haiiiphva
sambhnta
Paysani
ni
smrtim kurve
Param-ascarya-samanviigatas tc
acchaitslt tasmin
samaya atma-samjna va sattva-samjna va jlva-samjna vu pudgalasamjna va n^api me kacit samjna v^asamjnil va babhuva. Tat kasya hetoh. Sacen
me Subhute tasmin samaya atma-samjn^abhavisyad vyapada-samjn^api me tasmin
samaye
bhavisyat.
vyapada-samjn^api
aham Subhute
1
2
8
tite
Sacet
me
Read Subfitta, instead of gyastii bay so,. Also superfluous sign of inter punction.
Head hamdri.
Superfluous sign of interptmction. Note also the misshaped ka.
Superfluous sign of interpunction.
82
VAJRACCHEDIKA
260
nama
Kfantivadl
nama
kama
badarhna
aysii
yesam
kalSnam
aham
pajsa-so
kalanilm
Ksiintavada
ysathii
panca-satini janmani
Mana
ba
padarhjsyarima
purvesam
Ttl
"
vyi
babhuva
rasiyii
rsih
ni satvasarima ni jlvasaih iv na ni
babhuva na eattvasamjiia na jlvasamjna na
vya
kina
Sulihuva
baudhisatva
krt-. na
Subhute
bodhisattvah
pliisanii*
varayitavyah
saiiifiau-jpa
upevariina
utj iidayitavyan
"
biijfisa
ni
na
kusUiijii
na
kasyacit
Avurautta
bigam
pud^alasamjna
Tasya arthasya
baysumna [26^]vu?/sai
eattvah visvabhyah
bodhi-
baysusta
aypmu
visva-paramayarh
bodhau
cittam
parautta
ysvariifiaih
rasanam
lv
ni
aysmu
cittam
skamavam na
na
sparsanarn
upcvariina
utpadayitavyam
ni
na
dliarmaih vira
na dharmanam
prattakarii
vira
parautta
aysmu
pratikarasya
upari
pmtisthitam
cittam
cittt
haurii
danam
vis .vesam
harii
Ttye
upari
upeviiiima
utpadayitavyam
a
-na
na
aysmn
Aj ratisthitcna
[27 a
atmasamjna
pudgalasamiia
na busiinarii
atmasamfia
na
bisii-pirmattamye
vira
ialjdanum na gandlianam na
nil
tatha
ruvaih
ni
mistii
mahiin
me
yaiiijnilljhynh
mamma
At ha
satvana
mi vanam
hauramna khu
datavyam
nii
gunasariina vira ni
paralii
yatha nu laksanasamjuam upari na pratitisthet
^iri
ki"na
sivasya
krtena
sariiila
skaddhva*
Ti
earhjna
skandhcsu
na
na
bidi
bhavati
me n^atma-sarhjna babhuva na sattva-samjna na jlvr a-sarhjna na pudfjalababhuva. Tasmat tarhi Subhute bodhisattvena mahasiittvena sarva-samjna
Na rupavivarjayitv^anuttarayarh samyak-sarhbodhau cittam utpadayitavyam.
Tatr^api
6a:T>jiia
pratisthitam
cittam utpadayitavyam
na sabda-gandha-rasa-sprastavya-dharma-
Read aytmu,
as in
26
/A
IN
Subhuva gyasta
Rra$ta hvaiie
vadet
Rju
Subhute
ni
ana
ttana
cu
na
anynt
tena
yat
hatha
baysa
yajatah bhagavan
prajiiai
prajnah
"
hvafiii
vyaranai
vadet
satyam
261
rra?ta
Sravakayana
rju
sravakayane
Ttahara
i
ra
vyarana ni aiia
Tathilgatanam vyakaranam na anyat Sah jatu
vyakaranam-asya
ha
HhaQ
satyam
mahayarima
Subhuva
mahayane
Subhute
si
sail
dii
cu
dharmah yah
hva
Akaryau-jsa
busta
ni
bnddhah na
bjiysii-na
bhagavatii
artha
bi ^ii
bhusitam artham
Aksaraih
vara hatha
sarvam
tatra
eatyam
pan
lialai
parityajet disnm
ni
tathii
na
gitti
gantum
mamnaihda
Subliuva
khu
hve
ttarii
vitraihda
upamam
Snbhute
yatha
purusah
andlvakure
pruvistah
namuja
kaihcit
(?)
drruja
mrsS
Ttrama
Evam
^mii
bhavet
ni
lia
na
hiirii
vajisdi
ttu
najsadii
paraln-pastii
baudhisatva
arthnm
vicnste
tad
vyikhyatam
pratisthiipitah
bodhisattvah
iT
dyaiiinii
cu
pan
ni
daittii
drastavyah
yah
tyajet
na
pasyati
tcairaauda
hve
byuste-
caksusmiin
purusah
vyustii-
[28 a
3
ye savt
ytlm ksapi
najsadii
vyakhytitam
kliu
yathu
saye
urmaysda??i
bi^una
ruva
daitta
prabhate
ftditye
visvavidhani
rupani
pasyati
baysumna
vu^ysai
bodhi-
sattvah
arthaya.
evam
sarva-sattvas
te
cu[27t>]
yah
Yu
dyafiii
cu
drastavyah yah
c^alsa
ni
namye
hiirii
ttu
tad
vira
Subhute sattva-samjfui
e^aiv^asiiiiijna.
Ya
This syllable
is
Perhaps wrong
for icdmvja,
Read Am.
VAJRACCHEDIKA
262
parautta
stana
haurii
hiida
ni
pratisthitah
san
danam
dadati
na
bislvrasaiiia
kuladuhitarah
ci
ttu
ye
tarn
bislvrasai
ku
o-va
athavii
aputriih
ditta
"
par!
hamari
gyasta
bhavanti
yajatiinam
Avamiita,
d0ha bruhada
purvahne
Subhute
*
[rfa
prajnatah
purusah
Subhuva
iv
dharmam
paysarhda
Aparimitena
Cu
Yat
pasyati
tyajet
baysarh-jsa
bhagavatiim
dya
drstah
]ri
bhavanti
o-va
striya
Atha
athava
strl
ttaraiiidara
saman
viilukiibhih
viicayanti
hama[28
Gaiiigii
Gangayah nadyflh
vasida
dijs]&di
dharayanti
tatha
kayan
koi;im
rial
kalpan
yflvat
prrakaivl
na-etat pratikfipet
[29a
ti^hamtlnah
tasya
avamata
dadfiti
yah[-ca]
tat
gutram
pjiti
If^oti
ha
snda
rfmddhnm
[xxx tfy[e
dftnam
tl
a^naiiikliistii
aprameyam asarhkhyeyam
Cu nara va*
Kim punah
vai
cuai
piridai
likhanti-etat
yadil-kecit
budarit
bahutaram
parebhyas ca vistarena
tathlgatena
buddha-caksas5
buddhas
te
Sarve te Subhute
tathagatena.
sattvil
(15.)
Yas
madhyuhna-kalasamaye Gahganadl-valukrisaman atmabhavan parityajet sayahna-kslasamaye Gangunadl-valuka-saman atmabhavan parityajet anena paryayena bahuni
kalpa-koti-niyuta-sata-sahasrany atma
bhavan parityajet yas c^emnfh dharma-paryuyarh srutva na
eva
pratiksipet
ayam
tato
3
4
5
off.
The
off,
first
five syllables
have peeled
Read Subhuva.
R. H.]
only the
IN
punlnai
harhbisa
ysyane
punya-
samuham
janayet
"
avamata
anakhi^ta
aprameyam
cue
yada-kascit
birasidi
pajsamaviya
prakasayanti
pujanlya
a disa
sa
hama
esiha
manariidii
ttye
disa
yathu
tasyah
disayah
bisi
^vrrasaina
kuladnhitarah
tti
iv
te
ci
vanditum
daksinena
vandanlya
prthivl-lokena
ci
diidrrama
ye
tadrsam
hvarhdii
manusyasya
tsunai
^Cittyft
Caityaaya
caritavya
tcerai
Cu
tti
bisivrraaa
o-va
kartavya
Ye
te
kalaputruh
atha-vfl
pajsarh
piijii
dharmam
tara
gyastii
devasya
va
nara
harh[29 6 ]tsa
bhavet
disa
Cu
asarhkhyeyam
268
sutril
vasidi
dijs.adi
sutram dhiirayanti
vacayanti
paraiiimkli
paryavapnuvanti
parabhutta
hamari
Sirii
bndii
parabhutta
hamari
paribhutfth
bhavanti
sadhn
eva
paribhutah
bhavanti
Tta
Kvam
kidna
littrll
[30 a
Ttyfuhnil
I esilm
patvruiuiii
j)adaii)J8yaTiinU
sattvanilm
yayil
prrabluiva-na
prabhftvena
tti
trisu
karma
tani karmani
ysaiiitliit
sarvani
didrrfunii
jantniiHU
tiUlp*!
ttye sutrii
nilsaniiyo
apuyefii
harbidii*
ysnilitlivil
*
ntUftnllni
iji
jari
htyante
thyau
sigh ram
bi4ii-pirmattama
visvij-pammam
tesarh
samvartanTyani
dj-sta
paurvajanmikany asubhani
Abhijanamy aham Subhute
Read anamkhitta.
Part of the I and the whole e are legible there is room only for two
uytd\$e we must probably insert budar& punlnai, &c., as in 11. 2, 3.
after
syllables
Read/yari.
VAJR.ACCHEDIKA
26i
baysusta bvari*
bcdhim bodbante
Byata
yani
Smrtim
kurve
aiiitihkliistana, kalpariiuii
Su iv bhuva padamjsyamna
Subhute
tcahaura-hasta-kQla-naysa-sa-ysara
gyasta
cj.tur-aslti-koli-niyuta-sata-sahasrani
yajatan
ni
uttamfiyiim
paiiicasai
pancasatyfim
virfidbitah
di
ye
sail
nti [yah-]ca
"cu
vai
tti
Ida
te
santi
tat
Vajracchedikii-sutrarii
alo
pajsama
yam-
pujam
kurva-
ustamata
pujii
antasab
pnjfim
ekam slokam
harbis*ii
ye
sarve
u^ stamajsl bada"
uttamam kalam
paiidi-pldi
dijsadi
bunaspyau-jsai
liklmpayanti dharayanti dhupaih-[?]asya
[31 a
Ye
baysa-
bbag-avatah
Cu va
virahya
aradhitah tatbu na
inaya.
uslamanysye
kalanum
i Jstii baysii
pirmattammii
yajatasya bhagavatah
parena
Dipamkarii gya[30
mv.hu-jsa arahya
badariiuft
atltanam
vas"jdi
vticayanti
pajsam
pujiini
o
tatha
yani
ttye
knryat tasya
bisivrrasai pufii"nai
brru bi sataiiina
hariiblsai
sii
ysaraiiina
kulaputrasyapunyaniayah samuhah-asya purvabapi satatamam nunam sa liasratamam
3
sii
kulUna
sil
hamkhl^^ysa-masa usmamna-masi na-ni kaste :
nuram kotitamam nnnam
sarhkhya-matram
upanisad-matram na ksamate
Tti
va
fisiri
Sul)huta
Atba
vai
acaryah
Subhutih
atite
iv
gya sta
yajatam
tta
hve
khu
baysii
bhag-avantam evam avocat katbam
va
vai
arhatah
saiiiyak-sariibuddhasya
sate.-sahasrany
parena
paratarena
viragituh.
te
san-.aye
ca
>
2
:!
IN
midamna gyasta
mldhvah
baudhisatviiyarhni marii
baysli
bhagavan
yajata
c-ittam
miistii
bodhisattvena
mahata
visve sattviih
bodhi-
ahari^ na
paranirvayarhiia
anupadhisese
parinirvapayitavyah
satva
bisii
iv
paranirvana
banclhisatvii satvasariina
liodhisattvasya
]
Tta
Kvam
liama
l)havet
parinirvapayitavyali
[32 a
ci
cittam
utpiidayitavyam
Ni hadi
Na eva
satva
kascit
sattvah
kina
hiirit
kamujft
Cl
Subliuva
Yadi
Subhute
bhavet
sattvasaiiijnfi
ni
sa
banclhisatvii
hvanai
atmasaiiina
o-va
na
sah
bodhis<attvah
vaktavvab
Athava
atmasathjiia
atha-vii
pudgaliisamna
jlvasamjnfi
atha
pud^alasaiiijua
Tta
hiirti
kina
"hamati
bhavet
Nistii
si
ni
na
dharmii
hamjsedai
aya
saihprasthitah
syat
Astii
Asti
Dipamkarii
si
baudhisatva
hvanai
suh
bodhisattvah
vaktavyuh
kamnjii bandhisatvayariiiui
baysii-na
npeviina
arthasva krtena
kasya
Subhute
iha
ayamu
hamati
jlvasariina
ci
vuysai-na ttatta
sattvena
evam
baysnrhfia
mahayiine
mara Snbhuva
live
evam avocat
Yajatah bhaguvan-asya
pragrahltavyam
baudhisatva
tta
baysl
rmihayaiia
iha
bodhisattvayiinikcna
[31 t
265
kascit
nai
si
Snbhuva
nu
sail
Subhute
gyasta
baysii
iv
dharmah
bnstil
bodhim
buddhah
aya
Ttve
sysit
Tasmin
hvaye hvanai
nkte
en
yah
gyastii
yajatena
inaka biHil-pirmatta[32fc
bodhisattvayane
dharma
vacane
]ma
visva-paramiim
asirl
acaryah
Subhuta gyasta
Subhutih
yajatam
sarve
sattva
sattvan
Jlva-saiiijna
vaktavyah.
gatena Dlpamkarasya tathagatasy^antikad anuttaram eamyak-sariibodhim abhisambuddhah. Evam ukta ayusman Subhutir bhagavantum etad avocat, yath^aharh
1
Read baywmna.
There
The distinguishing
is
VAJRACCHEDIKA
266
bavsa
live
"tta
sii
sab
dharmii cu
dharmah yah
Ttye
Tasmin
si
[33 a
bus til
hilrii
gyasta
biSa-plrmattama
bhagavatfi
visva-paramam
bodhim
bays-na
bhagavatn.
Dlpamkara gyasta
Ci
Snbhuva
"kamujii
Subhute
kascit
bustii
baysuSta
vya ni
bodbim
buddhah bhavet na
uttamam
badii
si
sah
Siikyamuna nama
kalam Sfikyamunih
Na
ra vara hatlia
yat bucchata
sa
bodhih
Na
miimiiamdii Subhiiva
Subhute
ujiamam
cl
live
jii
vyirasa
gya
liv
sta
yajatah
hve
evam
si
midamna
mldhvah
avoi-at sah
gyasta
cue
thu
tvam
bhavisyasi
baysa*
Ttana
bhagavan
Tena
^ ]Ttramniii
Evam
mrsa
na
mistii ttaraiiulara
tta
cu
yah yajatena
na drrumja[33
aya
baysuSta
bodhim
liama
"
vyakarisyat
nama
baysufitii
bhagavatah
dharmii vya
dharmah bhavet
muhu
mam
si
syat Subhntih-asya
hve
tta,
evam avocat
baysa-na
yajata t
Dlparhkarat
Sacet
ti
busta
buddhah
g} asta
SubliQi
Subhuta
aSiri
vacane
cu itusatta
aya
kascit
yajatena
manava ustamajsi
manuvaka
baysU kaiiimuja
bhagavan
baysus ta
yajatena
aya
bhagavatfi
yajata
buddhah syat
bay^a-na
gyasta
midhvah
m
baysa- na
ukte
pah arthah
evar.i
madamna
iv
hvaye hvariai gyasta ba ysa
aya
syat
ttatia
nistii
na-asti
mahun
kayah
gyasta
Imysa
ttaramdarii
yajata
bhagavan
kayah
iijanami n^iisti sa
bhagavan kascid
dharmo
Sabbutim etad avocat, evam etat Subhute evam etat n^usti Subhute sa kaseid
dharmo yas tatha Catena Dljiamkarasya tathligatasy^arhatah samyak-sambuddhasy^
antikad anuttaram samyak-sjimbodhim abhisambuddhah.
Sacet punah Subhute
kascid dharmas tathagaten^abhisambuddho bhavisyat na mam Dlpamkaras tathagaki vyakarisyad, bhavisyasi tvam manav^anagate dhvani Sakyamunir nama
;
tathagato
rhan samyak-sambuddha
iti.
[Max
Mutter, p. 36,
/.
19-;;. 37,
/.
2, are
adhwacanam. Tathagata iti Sabhute dharm^occhedasy^altad adbivacanam. Tathagatii iti Subhute atyant-anutpannasy^aitad adhivacannm.
[Max Mutter, p. 37,
//. 7-1 , not in our
manuscript. ] Yes* ca Subhute tathagatena dbarmo bhisambuddho
)
IN
ln
gyasta ba ysa-na
attaramdarii
akayah
nai
as*tii
yajatena
dharma
si
bhagavata
cu
hvata*
Tta
cue
saittii
Subhuta
bhasitah
Evam
kim-te
bhasate
Subhute
gyasta
iv
bays-na
asti
267
bisa-plrmattama baysus ta
bodhim
visva-paramam
busta aya
SubhutI
tta
ni miclarhna
live
bnddhah syat Subhutih-asya evam avocat na mldhvah
nistU kariimuja si dharina cu baysuriifia
[34 a ] gyasta baysa
kascit
sah dharmah yah
bodhiyajata bhagavan na-asti
vuysai
nama aya
sattvah
nama
syiit
hiira ttu
arthah tad vyfikhyfitam
RJ
na
eah
na
baysuna
l>odhi-
"
adhimucyeta sah
buddhaksetrfinam
hva iv nai
Cu
bisii
hiira
vina
uysfuiine
sattvah
vaktavyah
Yah
visve
arthah
vina
atmanam
vyachl
si
tvaharai
baudhisatva
adhimucyeta
sah
tathiigatena
bodhisattvah
Subhuva
Subhute
hva[iJ4t>]
uktah
byaudi
ni
gyasta
baysii
praptani
nu
yajatasya
bhagavatah
Su bhuvl
ji
tta
vyfiham nispfidayot
vuysai
live
Tta
cue saittii
Tat kim-k bhasate
guntiji
mariisamayani
tcaiinariinii
caksfuhsi
byaudai
gyastii
Kaysii
gustaijii
praptiini-asya
yajatasya
bhagnvatah
mumgamayoni
na satyaih na mrsa.
37, //. 12-14, not hi // man
[jl/,r filiiller,
Tadyath^upi niima Subhute puruso bhaved upctakilyo mahakayah. Ayusmiiu
desi o va tatra
>-
/>.
fc>
.]
iti
bhiisita ujKJtakayo
mahakuya
Bhagavan aha. evam etat Subhute. Yo bodhisattva evam vaded, ahaiii sattvan
Asti
parinirvapayisyam*iti na sa bodhit-attva iti vaktavyah. Tat kasya hetoh.
Subhute sa kascid dharrao yo bodhisattvo nama, Subhutir aha, no h?idaih bluigavan,
n^asti sa kascid dharmo yo bodhisattvo nama.
Bhagavan aha, sattvah sattvu iti
iti.
Subhute asattvas
te
iti.
Tasmut tathagato
vitatham vadet.
te
niratmano dharma niratmano dharma ity adhimucyate sa tathagaten^arhata Bamyaksambuddhena bodhisattvo mahasattva ity akhyatah. (18.) Bhagavan aha, tat kim
VAJRACCHEDIKA
268
tcainiarimii
caksuriisi
byaudi
baysU
gyastii
gyasturh
asjn
Subhuta
acary.ih
Subhutili
iv
iia
tcaimarhnii
Gyasta
caksuriisi
divyani
baysa
Yajatam bhagaVantam
tta
hve
babyaudai
gyastii
evam avocat praptfmi-asya yajatasya bhagaiisiri
[35 a ] ysii gyastumnii tcaimamnii - Tti va gyastii baysii
vatah
caksumsi
Atha vai yajatah bhagavan acuryam
divyani
Subliuta
tta
hve
"byaudai
gyasta
baysii
datljii
Subhutim evam avocat praptani-sya yajatasya bhagavatah
dharmamayani
j
tta
hve
evam avocat
Gyasta
Ida
gyastarii
santi
yajatanam
Subhuta
aYiirl
baysii
baysarii
bhagavatilm
hajvattetljii
prajnfimayani
hve byaude
tta
[35^
tcai<miiiinii
caksuriisi
2
gyasta
baysii
\njatah bhagavan acacyam Subhutim evam avocat prfiptam yajatasya bhagavatah
"hajyattetinai
tcema*
Tti
va
asirl
caksuh
Atha
vai
acaryah
prajfiamayam
tta
!ii
hve
evam avocat
baysii
bha^;avan
Idii
santi
gyasta
baysarh
Subhata gyasta
Subhutih
datljii
yajatam
baysii
bhagavantam
tcemarhna
Gyasta
Yajatah
a iv sirl
Subhuta
tta
hve
Idii
gyastarii
acaryam
Subhutim
evam
baysarii
avocat
santi
yajatanam
bhagavatam
datljii
dharmamayani
tcemarimii*
caksurhsi
Tti
Atha
Subhiitir
Bhagavan
alia,
aha, tat
evam
kim
evam
IN
[36 a
vii
gyasta
vai
yajatah
bhagavan acaryam
baysumna
baysam
gyastam
yajatiinam bhagavatam
asiri
Subhuta
acaryam
Subhiitim
mahasahasryah
tcai
mamfia
iv
tta
ci
pastai
gu?te
amantrayata atha evam avadat-asya yah
si
bislvrrasai
dadati
klyanti
sah
kulaputrah
atha-va
_Asiri
janayet
Acaryah
"
gyasta
yajata
baysa
Subhute
tva
trsahasry;i
tarn
trisahasryiih
haurarh
ratnaih
cariidil
ysyarhfie
bubhuta
acarya
lokadhutum saptabhih
dfinam
sarhpurya
bisivrras^aiuii
kuladuhita
kusalii
kusalasya
mularii
kusalii
puna
punyani
puna
bhagavan punyanain
Ida
santi
liidi
mulani
Ida asirya
santi
caksumsi
bauddhani
lovadatli
mahasahasrya
caksumsi
260
tta
hve
evam avocat
Subhiitim
2
baysam baysurhna tcaiHmamnariirjiana
gyastarh
"mulii
Subhuva
asiri
baysa
haskaraii
kusalasya
midariuul
mldhvah
ysyamnu
Cu
janayet
Kim
mulanam skandliam
tva
hamda iv rai
bislvrrasai cu
ustainiita
Vajrracliedaka-sutrii
antasaK
punah anugrahah-nsya kulaputrasya yah tasmin Vajracchedika-sutre
sau
tcurapati
gaha
ekam catuspadikam gatham
viltca
[37 a
.sjiya
vaslya
buspyau-jsai
dijsati
pajsaiii
vacayet
udgrhmyat dharayet
dhupaih-asya
pujam
yam- ttye bislvrra 4ii saina budaril pufiinai harhblsii hamii Sataiiina
kuladuhituh
bahutarah punya- eamuhah bhavet 6atatamam
kuryat tasyah
ea
nQnam
pirl
likhet
ysarariina
t-ahasratamam
sii
nftnam
"
ubmamna-masi La
npanisad-matram
ii
ni kastii
na ksamate
Tti
gyasta
Atha
yajatah
punya-skandham prasunuyat.
if
Max
Mutter, p. 40,
I.
2-p. 42,
/.
4.]
[There
Yas ca
Read
VAJRACCHEDIKA
270
asiri
aciiryam
saibhasale
KI
Subhuta tta
hve tta live
sii
tta
eve
Snbhutim evam avocat evam avocat nnnam evam kim-te
iv
iMiysii
bhagavfm
ci
hiirii
kidna
awirya Subhuta tta
Snbhute evam kasya arthasya krtena
ficarya
[37 #]
nnnam
sampada
laksanlji
laksana-
baysii
dyamiiii
nai
sariipada
yajatah
bhagavan
drastavyah
jatu
tta
na
live
evam avocat
gyasta
bjiysil
yujatah
bhagavan
gyasta
saihpada
yajatah
na
mam
ksamr.te.
rupcna
cedariima
cintanam
[There
is
deda
yajata
ni
baysa
bhag-avan
laksaniiii
laksana-
"
Ciyii
Sacet
jfttu
vyii
abhavisyat
cakravartinah
rrumda
rfijnah
gyasta
baysa
yajata
bhagavan
rri
sii
raja
sah
iv
ca k rravarfctil
cakravarti
laksana-Iji pyalyelaksana-
sampada
Tti gyasta
livebaysii tta gaha
Atha yajatah bhagavan te
gathe abhasata
muliu ruvane
kuni
aha,
mldhvah
baysii
})hagavan
(26.)
midaiima gyasta
dyamfiSi
drastavyah
mithyfi
Subhute
laksanamayyfv
Ye
Subhuta
gyasta
pyalye-jsa
baywi
si
eah
pyiilye-jsa
Subhutih
pyalve-jsa
Ni
Nanu
laksanija
Subhuta
_Asiri
Acaryah
Cii
cu
pasyanti ye
ttyaiii
tta
tesam
te
ma
mam
Ji
salayau-jsa
manare
glfosaih
manyante
muliu herstaya na
nothing to correspond to
mam
Max
sarvada
deda
na pasyanti
//.
8-16.]
laksara-sampada
tathagato drastavyah.
Bhagavan aha, siidhu sadhu Subhute
evam etad yathii vadasi. Na
laksana-sampada tathagato drasta
vyah. Tat kasya hetoh. Sacet punah Subhiite laksana-sampada tathagato
drastavyo
bhavisyad rfij^api cakravarti tathagato bhavisyat,
Tasman na laksana-sam pada
Subhutir
tathagato drastavyah.
Ayusman
bhagavantam etad
evam
etat Subhfite
avocat, yath^aharii
Ye
the
which
rest.
5
Read
ruva-na.
is
tta
hve.
Read taifta.
Read cakrra-.
in a different hand, has been written with less
care than
IN
271
baysil
dyaihiia diitidavine taraiiidara ttyamna
dharmataya bhagavantah drnstavyah dharmamayah
tesiim
kayah
du 2 iv sa busta darraaha rasta naiye kara tcaraiima bu6teu
Bah buddhah dharmnta
nu-ca
kila
boddhnm
rju
upayena
"
dharmahe-jsa
Tta
eve
setta
Tat kim-te bhasate
auva
Sul>huva
[38
6>]cu
tta hvaillye
vadet
ya evam
Subhute
hiBtii
"an
Cu hada
baute
artham
bodhatc
Kah
eva
vat na
sas-vatam
sameti
dharma mukhau-jsa
snh dharmah
murkhaih
1
[39 a ]
kina
krtena
Cu
baysil
arthah
Subhute
bhagavan
npari
hada
eva
Jadfih
maiii livafiarhme
^i
Subhuva
sthitah
me
bhasitasya
hvide
"
tathiigata
sta
kura
santah mithya
tathiigatah
iv
nasare
ucyate
avyasta
g-rhnanti
udgrhltah
herii
jadau-prahajafiau-jsa Tta ce
Tat kasya arthasya
jada-prthag-janaih
si
Yah sah
u
uysariinai vira dyaih ma
utmanam
j.savc
hera
sta
baysii
artlia
se
nnnam bhagavfin
Subhuta cu
syat,
adyariima
?a
adrstih
sS
dr?tih
tta
yah evam
Subhote
hvafil baysU-na
vadet bhagavatu
ukta
hvata ttina
gyasta luysil-na
ynjatena
hvata
ukta
bhagavatS
tena
[There
is
nothing to correspond to
Max
Miiller, para.
27 and 28,
p. 43,
/.
II
II
44,
10-/>.
/.
6.]
Api tu khalu punah Subhiite yah kascid evarii vadet, tathaguto gucchati
v^iigticchati va tisthati va nisldati va sayyam va kalpayati na me Subhute bhasiTat kasya hetoh. Tathagata iti Sublmta r.cyate na kvacid
tasy^artham ajanati.
(29.)
is
Ten^ocyate tathagato
rhan samyak-sambuddha
Miiller, p. 44,
/.
30
in
iti.
Max
12-p. 45,
avyavaharo
nabhilapyah.
udgrhltah.
(31.)
/.
5.]
Na
(30.)
sa
na samyag vadamano
vadet.
Read
f-a
bhagavann
ddtlnai or davlnai,
a cancelled du.
4
Ya
i 111 ),
Read
but
is
probably
SttbAica.
VAJKACCHEDIKA
272
cu nigtuja
yat naetika
uysamna
"klyamma
atmanam
drs^ih
iv
prahu janau-jsa hvata
dharrna
jadyau
dharmah jadaih
ev;un
dii&ma
ttu
sutra
Yasyam
disayam
tat
siitram
ii
tamma hamastamina
m;ih
Kamamna
uktah
prthagjanaih
ttatta ha
bira6idi
pralifisayanti
^attiimah
asti
aste
tatha
pisai
Ttye
livaye
hva"nai
guruh
Ta^min
ukte
vacane
plrmatpara-
a^iri
Subhuta
acaryah
Subhotih
c .a
dha:
tatha
live
prrajnaparamma
prajnfipiiramita
!
Cu
[40 a
eva
nai
asti
nu
f?i
da
sah
dharmah
ku-jsa
yatah
h"\
mldhvah
Gyastil
atmadrptir
me
ovam
data
[tta]ttai
dharmah evam-asya
si
Tta
cue
Tat kim-te
in
the
nama
saittii
Subhuta
Subhute
patata Dvaradiradirsau
utthitnm
jnftnam
aguna
hve
bhasita
nama
bhasate
gyasta
tta
evam
baysa-na hvata
bhapitfini
bhagavata
ttatta
Subhuta
baudhisatvayarhna
evam
Subhute
bodhisattvayune
adrstih
i*
Sanskrit
iv
Dvatrirhsadbhih
Subhuvi
iysa dyamna
yajatah bhagavan drastavyah Subhutih-asya
corretpowling
tta
bhagavfin-asya
bvilma
"mam
gyasta
tta
tathagatena
iti.
bays!
Yajatah
sah
nktu
atmadrstis
Gyasta
bjiysi
si
sal^
gyastil
sa yajatena
e na
avocat na
iji
ai
aparamita
mahapurnpa-lakKanaih
nothing
Subhutc
aparamma hvata
mahapurasalaksanyau-jsa
Yajatah
ma Subhuta
nama
prajMpnrarnita
bjiysa-na
bhaguvatii
a^til
narii lv
hadi prrajnaparama
Ya
dharaya
dijsi
nama dharaye
katham-vai-asya
avocat
dijsil
sil
nama
khvai
11
mah
live
sa
text.]
tathagatena
rejjttifion
Ten^ocvate
bhasita.
ii
.
hi
Tit f re
19
Subhute
Read
Tat
hetoh.
n^adharma-samjnayam.
kasya
Dharma-sariijna
Subhute asamjn^alsil tath5gatna bhS?it5. Ten6cyate dharma-
kattamft.
at
end of
line,
Read
dvarailirSan,
IN
dharma vyachamfia
bodhi-
sarhgacchata
khu
dharmasamiia
vlra
na
yatha
dharmasamjnayah
upari
na
pa^ralii
pratyupatisthet
cu
vira
1
[41 a ]
sajl
harti[da]ryariinU
halai
udgrhniyat
anyesam
asayam
ham u bistl
sah
eva
tasya
punyamayam
na
gahil
catuspadikam ekam giltham
anta^ah
punmai
manah
budaril
bahutaram
samnham
ii{
Ttatta
liadi
birassjirimii
Evam
eva
prakasayitavyam
adaril
bajaitti
lupyate
adaram
birarhsjirima. u
Ttl
yanari
knn-anti
va gyastU
Khu[41 i]ja
ofia
Yatha-ca
tatra
byu^ta
stara
atha
baysR
turah dr^yante
earba
urmaysdc
samjn^eti.
(32.)
Yas
adityah
ca
khalu
avamata
prasunuyat
apraineyam
sattvanam
samyak
tti
(?)
gaha
rfvtrau
bliasnnto
"bifia
pun ah
ttatta
priiptam
evam
live
gathah avocat
tfih
brrufiari
visvah
hamrrasta
samyak
narabhasa
bamariii
punah-abhtisah
bhavanti
Subhute
bahu-
na
garklmsta
sivi
dyari
nddcssayet
ysyariifie
yatha
iv o
ha
uysdMlyil
cl
Vajracchedikayah
atha
ttye
ni
Vajrrachedakyi
labhet
hadi
asamkhyeyam
ttyo
nas.ati
si
anariikhistil
ratnaih
saptabhih
iv
cu
bodhisattvah
vai
haudyau ranyau-jsa
hvldi
lokadhatun
bislvrrasai
si
Yo
"vadata
da
prajnaparamme
mamna
lo
bodhi-
dharmah adhimoktavyah
Cu va baudhisatva
sarve
273
bodhisattvo
mahasattvo
prajua-paramitaya
dharraa-paryayad
antasas
catuspadikam
api
gatham
udgrhya dharayed desayed vacayet paryavapnuyat parebhyas ca vistarena saiiiprakusayed ayam eva tato nidanam bahutaram pnnyaskandham praennuyad aprameyam
afamkhyeyam.
taraka
tathft prakfiiayet,
ten*6cyate sampraka&ycd
iti.
[But our
I)
to the fact that the tingle vent of the Sanskrit text hat, in our text, been expanded into
a teriet of vertei, each of the topic* brought together in the Samfait ttanta having been
VAJRACCHEDIKA
274
ttu
padl
tarn prakiiram
ci
pana
sacet
puratah
bvamna tcema
indri
indriyam bodhanlyam caksuh
mi bvama
me bodhih
rragta
nijii
hve
cu
iv tcaina
kasa
purnsah
yat
caksusi
kacah
dyari
sujneyah(?)
ruva vajsegde
bteuiia
visvavidhani
na Ida
ttatva
hugvanan
ayari
nijah na pratibhfisante
rjvl
Yadrsam
hara
anityam
prabhrti
na
Crrarhma
ttai-ja
astamna ani^ci*
rupani
pa4yati
hadi
eva
[42 a
kasii
pracaina
kacasya pratyayena
saidii
bisuna
ruva yicitra
jadamna
pad!
prakaram rupani vicitrani visvavidhani pratibhasante jadcbhyah
"vina
aysmu gvana ni Ida snrh aysmu kiirii ha^ nasa
cittam jneyani(?) na santi samam cittam mithya
vinii
grab ah
ttu
tarn
II
Ora marhnamda
Ycna
uysnaura
sadrsam
l
ttu padl
aysmu
lam prakariim
Sarii
kliu
Samam
yatha
tta tta
sattvah
"cittat
dlpa-
(?)
Ina va^iyamna
iv na
vljsyari
pracai
pratyayena
:
[42
ti~\
caranti
bahu
kayah
Sam
khu khaysmula
budbudah
uca
5ii
bana
patati
pa^kauta
bvana
ttaiv va
suhadukha
vara4ama
evam
Samam
svapan
sattvah
asara
asarah
udakasya vatena(?)
ttatta
Sam
11
bodhaniya
11
pitta
prahaglsai riauhya baka buril asta
bahu aste tatha patati
yatha
(?)
dyiimma bvamna
drstih
antikiit
evam
Samam
carau
daltta
upeksan
upeksa
khu va beyse- 4
vai
prabudh-
parophrated, taraka and timira each in four lines, dlpa, mayavasyaya and budbuda
each in two lines, svapna and vidyut each apparently in four lines, while I am unable to
explain the correspondence in the four last lines, which would correspond to abhra.]
fol.38.
IN
275
1
[43 a ]
dye
dhan-asti
nii
nijii
nijasya
ttram"ma
tti
skauja
cu
mara
tadrsam
te
saiiiskarah (?)
yan
iha
samu
ra
samam
ca atha
tti
bhavet
smrtih
sadrsam
maiiaih
tti
kalam
(?)
bada
tarn
kalam
yatha
ha
diysdai
pracai
ttu bada n
tarn kalam
"hama
byata
bada
hauttii
ye
kascit sapati
[43
&>]mi
na
ttatta ustamajsye
evam
uttamasya
bisumna
visvarOpfi
Ttu
?kauja
a vlpakajil bhranUl
samskarasya sarhskarasya ya sa
bhruntih
vipakaja
"tti
atha
ii!
pad!
cu
skauja
nau
pamtsamna
kauja
padya
khu mara na
iha
na
ju?ate
atha visuddhah
samtsira gvamntl
samsare
iv ril8il
vasve
tti
byehii
bhnyah
raja (?)
3
nijiyii
samtsaril si baudhisatvil
samsarasva sah bodhisattvah
ni
ni-
jfieyam(?) nihanyat
[44
tatra
Etavat
gvana
na etat-me jneyam
hve
Ttu-bura
gyasta
avocat yajatah
8
3
nirvana
yariidi
prayaugUna
nirvane
kurute
prayogena
ttatta a^varautta
evam
(?)
baysii
Iiamrrasta
apratisthitam
sirii
hamye
samyak
ii5
a4j
ri
Subhuta
sthavira-Subhutis te ca bhiksu-bhik^uny-upasak-
There
T2
VAJRACCHEDIKA
270
av.^i>tau
avasistah-ca
asirya
a3i
acaryah
bhiksunyah
iivaysa
upasakah
uysye
gyasta-.
upasikah
*deva-
iv
divinana
inanusyanam
VajrracKidakyi
ttadi
hiya
padamjsyarii
badam
atltanam
kalSnam
(?)
9 ta
santah
tta
ihvanari
evam
ucyante
Z>]
Sina
kIra sau lak?a
ekasmin nagare ekam laksam
opftsikas te ca
bodhisnttvah
Pa-deva-manus-asura-gandharvas ca loko bhagavato
bbasitam abh^-anandann iti.
Arya-vajracchedikft bhagavati prajfiaparamita samapta.
TRANSLATION.
2
[Verse 1] In three ways I bow down to the buddhas of the three
ages, with
bow down to the law of three
vehicles, and also, in three ways, to the
order of mendicants.
faith ... I
exalted.
all
yoga
life
(?).
as the
[Verse 4] Where there is no
dliarmakaya.
[Verse 5] This prajnaparamita the omniscient Bnddha put
and
together
when one recites and explains this trisatika* called
Vujracchedika,
[Verse 6] It altogether clears away all particles (?) of karma and avarana eina
as a thunderbolt.
Therefore its name is
Vajracchedika (thunderbolt cutter).
[Verse 7] Whatever the law of the buddhas may be, all that is concentrated
in this sutra, in the
Vajracchedika therefore it is so pleasing and exalted.
;
i.e.
bodhicarya.
300 granthas
IN
277
[Verse 8] Whosoever learns and preserves and reads it, and causes it to ! e written,
Law will be grasped, and, after death, he goes ... in bliss.
He whose
[Verse 9]
man
merit
is
great,
when
prudent
may
be grasped.
Hail
*]
Homage
[3
all
sattvas.
Thus it was heard by me At one time the Venerable Exalted One was staying
town of SriivastJ, in the grove of prince Jeta, in the sarighariima of the mer
:
in the
when he had
and when he had returned, after eating his food, he put away his bowl and cloak,
washed his feet, and sat down on the seat ordered for him, his legs crossed, the body
straight
Then
many monks had come in the direction where the Venerable among Vencrables, the
Exalted One was when they had come there, they saluted the foot of the Venerable
;
among
three times
round the
Venerable Exalted One to the right to greet him, and sat down on one side.
iT
[5 a ] At that time again the monk Subhuti appeared there in that assembly
and
sat
down.
rose
from his
One
seat,
made an
sat,
him
in
One
It is extraordinary,
Merciful Venerable Exalted One, how much the
bodhisattvas, the great beings of exaltedness, have been favoured with the highest
favour by Thee, the Venerable among Venerables, the Exalted, the Ttuharau-preacher,
Exalted
worthy of worship, who is properly awake in all the quarters ; how much the
bodhisattvai, the great beings of exaltedness, have been gratified with the highest
gratification by thee, the Venerable, the Exalted, who wanderest amongst the
Tiilharai,
who
1
conquereet the foes which are the klesa*,
who
properly nnderstandest
all
matters.
as ari-han
VAJRACCHEDIKA
278
the highest favour, the bodhisattvas have been gratified by the Venerable Exalted
the highest gratification.
Therefore, O Subhuti, listen and take it to
One with
[9
to
him
being of exaltedness,
Subhuti,
who wanders
"
born miraculously, those with form and without form, those with intelligence and
without intelligence, and those beings which are not with nor without intelligence,
known,
all
idea about a being, or the idea about a living being, or the idea about a person.
Thus further,
Subhuti, a bodhisattva should not give a gift while he is dependent
on any object of existence, or give a gift relying on any reward not relying on
forms should he give his gift, not on sounds, not on things that can be smelt,
Thus, O Subhuti,
tasted, or touched, not relying on dharmas should he give a gift.
should a gift be given by a bodhisattva, that there is no giver or receiver or gift
under the idea of qualities. And because of what matter ? The bodhisattva,
O Subhuti, who gives a gift without relying on anything, the stock pf merit of
that bodhisattva, O Subhati, cannot easily be measured.
lr
How does it appear to thee, Subhati? Can the space in the direction
[11 i ]
?
The monk Subhuti spoke thus
In
The Venerable Exalted One spoke to him thus
What is then
relying on anything, his stock of merit cannot easily be measured.
the matter, O Subhuti ? a gift should be given by a bodhieattva [in such a way].
IN
How
[12
&
279
Exalted
One
is
to be viewed as no-sign.
[13 a ] Upon the uttering of that utterance the monk Subhdti thus spoke to
Is it the case, O Venerable Exalted One, will there be
the Venerable Exalted One
some beings in the last time who will frame a wrong idea about such sutras?
:
In the
last time, in
all
one Venerable Exalted One only, they will not have sown their meritorious roots of
In these sfitras they will in one moment
bliss on one Venerable Exalted One only.
obtain a pure mind. They are known by the Venerable Exalted One, they are seen
by the Venerable Exalted One. They are endowed with an immeasurable stock of
merit.
How
does
it
appear to thee,
Subhoti
and not the idea of a being, not the idea of a living being, not the idea of
It appears,
The Venerable Exalted One spoke to him thus
a pudgala would exist.
of
self,
if
he has not reached the shore (?), but does not carry it any more after he has arrived,
when he realizes bliss, does not reflect on inauspicious
Therefore,
how
does
appear to thee, Subhuti? Is there any law which might have been preached
It has been preached by all the Venerable
by the Venerable Exalted One ?
it
l
Exalted Ones, because they are known as aryopodgalas.
O Subhuti,
The Venerable Exalted One spoke thus to him
:
{ill
if
somebody would
gems of
treasures!
and give
gifts,
it
the matter, O Venerable Exalted One ? The stock of merit has been preached as
a no-stock by the Venerable Exalted One, because it leads to (?) buddhahood as the
law ; therefore the Venerable Exalted One spoke thus, a stock of merit indeed.
iH
[16 a ] When one gives the lokadhatns of the trisahasrl mahusaham as a gift,
1
and should
The translation is very uncertain, and the text it
probably incomplete
be restored as in 23 a there is not any such law as might hare been preached by all
the Venerable Exalted Ones.
:
VAJRACCHEDIKA
280
if
# T]
[16
in this
How
does
it,
it
appear to thee,
Subhuti
Would
a srotaapanna think
"
way
to the
is
called a srotaapanna.
"the
mins has been realized by me, because if that were not the case, which law would
then be connected therewith ?
Subhuti spoke to him thus
No indeed, O
Merciful Venerable Exalted One, there is no such dharma as a
sakrdagamin.
lT
How does it appear to thee?
[17i ] The Exalted One spoke to him thus:
Would an arhat think in this way
arhatship has been realized
me, since I am
"
"
by
by
"arhatship
self,
me,"
a conception of a being, a
conception of a living
By the Venerable Exalted One the defeat of the
"
who
in
Subhuti
Is there
V]
He,
Subhoti,
Th
"
I will produce a
display of
text has,
apparently by mistake, takrltfyamd.
IN
281
declared
It
is,
if there
Subhuti, as
were a
man
who had
body
is
lokadhatus as the sands in the river Ganges, and that some man or woman
were to fill them with the seven treasures, and give gifts to the Venerable Exalted
manv
Ones,
his
meritorious
roots
of bliss be
Now
man
to a
or
woman who
law were, that country would become worthy of worship by the world of gods
In which country that law might be, that country would become pleasant
and men.
And
the praised Lord stays there, and the best and highest preceptor.
the uttering of that utterance the monk Subhuti thus spoke to
What is the name of this law, O Venerable Exalted
the Venerable Exalted One
like a caitya.
22
a"]
Upon
The Exalted One spoke to him thus: Then how does it appear to thee,
Subhuti, should the Venerable Exalted One be recognized by the thirty-two mahaSubhuti spoke to him thus
No, O
purusalaksanas (signs of a great person) ?
Merciful Venerable Exalted One the thirty-two characteristics of good men have
:
been declared by the Exalted One to be non-characteristics, because the body of the
law is the body rupakaya of the anuvyafyanas (secondary marks) ; therefore they
are called the thirty-two characteristics of good men.
When a man or woman, now,
Subhuti, has sacrificed his bodies, as
and
if
many
who would hear
VAJRACCHEDIKA
282
a stanza of four padas of this sQtra, grasp it and explain it in full to others, the stock
of merit of this (latter one) would be greater, unmeasured and untold.
H
Then the monk Subhuti, moved by the power of the Law, made a
tears.
Having wiped off his tears he thus spoke to the Venerable
Very difficult, O Merciful Venerable Exalted One, is this Law, from
which knowledge has come to me. Never has such a deep Law been heard by me.
[24
CT
shedding of
Exalted One
What
is
a bhutasarhjfui, that
is
indeed an abhotasamjiia.
And
that idea
is
not the
teaching of the Exalted Ones. Those who believe in this Law and he who writes it
or takes it over, they will not be possessed of any idea about self, or about a being,
or about a living being, or about a person
for them there will not be the slightest
;
Upon the uttering of that utterance the Venerable Exalted One spoke
monk Subhuti
So it is, O Venerable Exalted One, 1 those will be in
possession of something very difficult to achieve, who do not get frightened or
alarmed or into trembling at this sutra when they sit reading it. This paramita
[25 ]
thus to the
is
my
destruction.
[26 a
times,
when
from
his
not get tied up with the idea of qualities, for the sake of the weal of all beings.
This notion is not among the skandhas (?). The Venerable Exalted One would speak
what
the
is real,
wise
mahuyana.
man who
The preaching
Should be
of the Tathiigatas
.Subhuti
is
There
is
not otherwise.
IN
283
iT
it
Subhuti, as for the law which has been perceived by the Exalted One,
]
[27
matter which is propounded in letters
does not contain truth nor falsehood.
And,
Subhati, just as a
is
to
Subhuti, as
if
depend on
objects,
he
man who
shining, sees
all
it,
gift.
m
of a clan who preserve this law and read
[28 a ] That noble son and daughter
thev are known and seen by the Venerable Exalted Ones, and they are endowed
And
if
woman
or
man
in the
morning would
sacrifice as
many
bodies
as there are grains of sand in the river Ganges, and would sacrifice as many at noon
and at night, and going on in that way for kotis of kalpas would give gifts, still the
man who
it
but believes in
it,
would
in
consequence
What
Where they
caitya.
Those noble sons or daughters of clan?, who preserve such a sutra, recite
2
and well paribhota indeed. And that on account
it, are paribhuta,
Such acts done by those beings in former existences from which
of which matter ?
3
rebirth in the three apayas would be obtained, all those acts disappear through the
[29
it,
i{
and understand
power of that
hundred
incense
1
(cu
(?),
years,
who
and worship
it
recite
with
Wrong
= yal)
s
it,
VAJRACCHEDIKA
284
[31 fl ] Then the monk Subhuti spoke thus to the Exalted Venerable One
Merciful Venerable Exalted One, how should he who wanders on the bodhisatt-
But not
a single
matter?
If,
objectless
There
is
bodhisattvayfina.
Is there now, O Subhuti,
]
any such dharma, as might have been
by the Venerable Exalted One, from (the month of) the Venerable Exalted
Dlpamkara, with regard to the highest enlightenment?
Upon the uttering of
iji
[32rt
realized
/>
"]
young man,
For
it
hood in
emptiness which
is
is
enlightenment.
There
is
"
Sfikyamuni by name."
no truth and no false
it.
[33 ] It is, O Subhuti, as if there were a man, whose body were great.
Subbuti spoke thus to him
O Merciful Venerable Exalted One, this body has been
:
called a
vyaha
without
self,
without being,
(display) of buddhaksetras.
He
would
IN
[34 #]
One
Then how
eyes of flesh
does
it
285
Then the Venerable Exalted One spoke thus to the monk Subhuti
Does the
One possess divine eyes
The monk Subhuti spoke thus to the
l
Venerable Exalted One
The Exalted Venerable One possesses divine eyes/
Then the Venerable Exalted One spoke thus to the monk Subhuti
Has the
Venerable Exalted One the eyes of the law ?
The monk Subhuti spoke thus
The
Venerable Exalted One has the eyes of the law.
Then the monk Subhuti spoke thus to the Venerable Exalted One:
[35
]
Have the Venerable Exalted Ones the eyes of knowledge ? The Venerable Exalted
One spoke thus to the monk Subhuti
The Venerable Exalted One
the
:
Venerable Exalted
"f
ifi
of knowledge.
Then the
possesses
monk Subhuti
eye
Have the
spoke thus to the Venerable Exalted One
Venerable Exalted Ones the eyes of the law ?
The Venerable Exalted One spoke
thus to the monk Subhuti
The Venerable Exalted Ones have the eyes of the
:
law.
Then the monk Subhuti spoke thus to the Venerable Exalted One
Have the
Venerubto Kxnlted Ones the eyes of exaltednosa ?
mpnk SubhJiti, the Venerable
I l*ltul Ones
Iwvo the eyi* of ejiftltednew*
!
[30
fHubhuti it ml
He who would fill the lokadhatu of this trisahasrT malmsahaprl
spoke to him thus
with the seven treasures and give gifts, how
many happy roots of bliss would that
*<"]
The
text has
One should be
to the
monk Subhuti
VAJRACCHEDIKA
286
Exalted
One
king.
Law
as being the
Law
their
body
consists of
to be understood by
rightly understood as being the Law, and he is not
means of expedients.
iT
He who would say, the
[38 a ] Then how does it appear to thee, Subhuti ?
Exalted One stands, or sits, or he might lie down or walk," does he understand the
meaning of my words? What is the matter, Subhuti ? The Exalted One is called
he
is
"
dharma
matter
is
This
"
as
preached by the Exalted One," then [the answer is that] it has been preached
Therefore it has been said by the
a no-belief, because the belief in self is unreal.
this dharma has been perceived by fools and common people."
The country where they explain this sutra, the praised Lord stays
"
[39rt ]
there and the best and highest preceptor.
Upon the uttering of that utterance the
What is the name of this
monk Subhnti thus spoke to the Venerable Exalted One
:
Law,
I preserve
its
name ?
The Venerable
name of the Law,
Subhuti,
is
is
the
called a non-paramitii
Subhuti,
is
One be viewed from [the possession of] the thirty-two mahiiSubhuti spoke to him thus
Merciful Venerable Exalted
No,
The
One, they have been called non-characteristics by the Venerable Exalted One.
Venerable Exalted One spoke to him thus
Thus, O Subhuti, are all dharmas to
and give gifts, and the noble son or daughter of a clan who would
take even a stanza of four pada within the Law of this VajracchedikS prajfwpiiratreasures
This
is
/A
IN
287
mita, learn it and explain it in the presence of others, the latter would from this
produce a larger stock of merit, unmeasured and untold. And it should be explained
in such a way that the high opinion of the
beings does not disappear and that they
pay respect to it and grasp it entirely. Thus, it is said, should it be explained.
iT
[41 a ] Then the Venerable Exalted One recited these stanzas
:
it
but when
non-refulgent,
so the organs of sense, beginning with the
eye, should be considered as perishable
;
if
however
my
view
right,
my
own.
man
things, but the
things is not such, they appear to him in consequence of his cataract,
thus the forms appear to fools, manifold and of all kinds, without the mind
they
are not perceptible (?), that the mind is right is a false
conception.
Just as a
real state of
Just as
sits
and
falls,
[?].
way
of
at that time.
Kaca
is
And Vagbhata
say?,
288
VAJRACCHEDIKA
Thus
This
the other
this is not
IN
monk
Subhuti,
in
bygone
1.
EDITED BY STEN
(Platea
XIV
XVII.)
KONOW
INTRODUCTION
THE Aparimitayuh Sntra is a Dliaram which has long been known to exist in
Sanskrit manuscripts and in Tibetan, but which has not hitherto attracted much
It has, however, enjoyed great fame in the Buddhist world, and
notice in Europe.
we now know
that
it
of Eastern Turkestan.
complete manuscript of this version was found by Sir Aurel Stein in the
cave temples at the Halls of the Thousand Buddhas, the same place which yielded
A
the valuable manuscript of the Vajracchedikfi, published above pp. 214 fl
.
beginning wa
1
who has subsequently revised this text 2 and also 3
published by Dr. Hoernle,
An edition of Dr.
given an edition of fols. 7 and 8 with facsimile plates.
Hoerile s transcript of the beginning of the text was finally published by Professor
of
description
Iieui iann.
the
manuscript
and a transliteration
of
the
which
(or
13| x 2
1
The obverse of
inches).
ff.
ff.
fol.
mm.
20 have
290
been
left
character
fol.
is
1,
the
the
Before
of
blank.
there
line circlet.
is
the
upper
left-hand
corner
Fols. 7
The alphabet
the reverse.
is
size,
on each
side, fol.
Cursive Gupta.
mm.
(or
12 X 2| inches).
leaves are of a later date than the bulk of the manuscript, and that they have been
It would
substituted for older leaves, of the same kind as the remaining ones.
fols.
leaf,
caves.
Fols. 7
That
fols.
is
from the difference in script and from the appearance of the leaves. It also follows
from the fact that the writer has, in some cases, evidently misread his original.
i.
e.
ait
samudgalta in the
and am.
first
line
Compare
of
fol.
I think that
7.
we have here
to
The bulk
This
one.
is
up vacant space at the end of a folio. This he has done by means of superfluous
dots and lines.
Thus we find a dot at the end of fols. 4, 6, 10, 14, 15, and 18 ; two
dots and a double vertical line at the end of
line at the
end of
fols.
11 and 13
fol.
um] tho sunn- ni%nn followed by a double line and a dot at the end of fols.
In other cases, at the end of fols. 9, 11, and 18, the writer has made the
intervals between the letters unusually wide, in order to fill up the empty space.
of
fol.
17,
9 and 16.
It is evident that the copyist has endeavoured to arrange that each folio of bis
transcript should
He
has
also, in
most
The colour scheme is: vermiliou on upper robe nud nimbus; light green on lower
and aureola; dull yellow on body, and blank area of the circlet; black on
hair and top-knot ; also black outlines of aureola and lotus geat ; a black spot on forehead ;
and two black collars on the breast.
1
les
*
Un fragment du Suvarnaprabhasasutra en iranieii oriental.
documents de la mission Pelliot, Fasc. IV, Paris, 1913, p. 19.
cases, succeeded.
so
many
which
is
291
times that
also
fol.
14.
is
consequently an
overlapping.
Thus we
to careless copying.
bij<~<*nam,
9,
find
may
rrispitrii,
iMysuiia
commonly been
nti/syau in para. 1,
rqplaccd by a short
Compare
It seems probable that the
of the same kind as that occurring in the
and
so
forth.
long and short u had become less marked. In my transcript I have, in such
added the sign of length within brackets and written rrispuril, &c.
Several signs of interpunction occur in the manuscript, and
it
will
cases,
be seen
from the remarks made above that they are often used simply to fill up vacant space.
In addition to. the instances already quoted we may mention the dot at the end
of a line,
fol.
19 ^
7a
a",
A"
i"
Thus
Usually, however, we find such signs used at the end of a sentence or pada.
we find the single dot used in this way in paras. 1, 3, 6, 9, 18, 34, 37, 38, 39 the
double dot in paras. 13, 14, 15, 16, 29, 32, 38, 39 the double line in paras. 7, 8, 9,
;
10, 11, 12, 17, 19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 33, 36, 37,
and 40.
edition of the text has been prepared on the same principles as in the case
of the Vajracchediku.
Following indications in the manuscripts of the Sanskrit
The numbering of these
version I have, however, divided the text into paragraphs.
The
paragraphi!
in
my
own,
of the
interpretation of the text is based, primarily, on a comparison
Sanskrit original and the Tibetan translation. In order to make this comparison
The
have also subdivided these versions into paragraphs, in the same way as the
Khotanese text and with the same numbering-. The Khotanese text has been
will be found
printed on the left-hand pages, and, on the opposite right-hand pages,
easier I
all
u2
292
latter
addition of an A.
Aparimitayuh Satra
is
based on the
following manuscripts
JB, a Nepalcse paper manuscript in the collection of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal, numbered No. B, 08 by Riijendraliila Mitra, The Sanskrit Buddhist Literature
:
p. 41,
where
it is
described as follows:
7x3
inches.
Substance, Nepalese paper of a yellow colour,
on each page, 5. Extent in Slokas, 190. Character, Newari.
Prose.
Folia 22.
Lines
Appearance,
old.
Generally correct.
Oiit
Begins
namah Srlbnddhdya
II.
taniiljifd.
l
,
See
Library, Cambridge.
description
Cambridge 1883,
p. 38,
cent.
Buddha holding
On
letters)
leaf
there
Oih
Paper;
the beginning, in a
series.
Oih
II
II
II
tithau
Revatlnafaatre
II
yathd
karnnamuhurttarc Tfhaspalh-dfare lulyardsigate tavirttari mlnardsigate candramati II
etaddine idam *ri$ri6rlbhagai-atl vatuitidhdrdyd manitroddhdranl taptavdra aparamitddi
tudd/iiyoge
293
Mahdrdjddhirdja-Srl-sri-rdjarujendra-kavindra-jaya PratdII.
Then after various minor particulars
II.
pamanadevaprabhnthdkulasya vijayardjya
mahdvihdrdvasthita I ajrdcdrya
likhiteyam Sauvarnnaprandrimahdnagare Mailnpurc
Jinldeveneti II yudrsyain, puxtakam drxtrd, &c.
tubfta niafngaraiii bhavantu sarvvadd II
yulha II ye dharma hetuprab/tavd, &c. Snlha 2 ddnapatid 2 ga/int/vat 785 raiyaMa.il/itlaI
purnmmdsi
,
100
820
(A. D.
letters
is
leaves, 5 lines,
namdplah.
These four manuscripts have been copied by Dr. Iloernlc, who has been good
enough to place
his transcript at
my
disposal.
They can be divided into two classes, one represented by B and the other by
the Cambridge manuscripts C 1 C 2 and C
They difl er from each other in
:!
numerous places
compare,
e.
g.,
2, 3, 4, 6,
26, &c.
If
we turn
seen that
to the
C and C 2
1
it
will be
of the Apparatus
Criticus with paragraphs 2, 3, 4, 6, 16, 17, 22, 26, 28, 30, 32, &c., will show that they
often agree with each other as against B, C 3 and also that they have, in many cases,
common mistakes. If we compare the readings C 1 Uiuto II paritd dixi, C 2 Uiupan{-
comparison
yan
is
comparison of
based on
C 2 and
-saniJjuddtulya,
C2
It follows from this state of affairs that the reading of B will have to be
adopted in such cases where it agrees with any of the manuscripts of the other
group. In other cases, where the two groups differ from each other, I have consulted
the Tibetan translation, which can be considered as a third group.
I have then
preferred the readings of B if they agree with the Tibetan text, and, on the other
hand, I have followed C if its reading is in accordance with the Tibetan version.
The Sanskrit text has been printed in the form which can be derived from the
materials just described.
make
294
it superfluous in future to
compare the manuscripts of this dull text. The only
various reading s which I have not noticed are evident miswritings, and orthographic
peculiarities such as the consistent writing satva and the common doubling of con
sonants after an
;.
text
208
b,
and 208 -2 15
these two,
is
exists in
it
two slightly
respectively.
My
pp. 200-208.
Rgyud XIV,
differing recensions,
is
contained in
very ]>opular in Eastern Turkestan, and Sir Aurel Stein has brought home several
manuscripts of it.
My edition is based on two such manuscripts.
T paper manuscript from Sir Aurel Stein s collection two sheets, measuring
1
92 x 31 cm.
x 11|
(or
inches).
II
mye<l
<hi
!n>Iiy<ifj
and
du
d]xty
after
nhog
it,
so.
On
is
a whole line
Cursive Gupta. 1
r
P, paper manuscript from Sir Aurel Stein s collection one folio, measuring
142 x 32 cm. (55^ x 12^ inches), and divided into six columns, five of which
contain 19 lines of well-executed writing, while the last column has nine detached
;
lines.
Begins
Rfji/a
<jar
si-ad
du -A pa
mi
fa
>ynr
na
ma ha ya na
gu
1
These lines, very coarsely written, parallel to the narrow side of the sheet, number
about twenty-five on the first, and six on the second sheet.
They are divided into a number
of paragraphs, each beginning a fresh line.
The first and second paragraphs on the first
sheet commence with a date.
The former has many sain sainlya cvainvajdm ma&ta the
latter has mauywm salya kaji matta miy/au ttye taihpam .... Here the sheet is broken
;
The two dates name the year mauysa, and its two months cvdvaja and kaja. Cf.
JRAS., 1910, pp. 469 ff. In addition there are interspersed some lines of large illegible
Kcrawln.
There is also half a column of four very large Chinese ideographs.
off.
II
Bod gkad
Tghe
flu
dpag
flu
es bya
myed pa
bah they
sans
ba
b>/an
chen
they -pa
cub
pohi
sentg
mdo
dpah
rdzocjs
go
II.
Then
follow, in
two
pet
la
295
mycd -pa
/if gal
e*
lines of a later
lo.
bya
hand
&in
T2
dar zux
is
ma
ston
yait
6us
chog
bdun
sum zuso
thus
The
n.
sail
chief peculiarity of
instead of gang.
The two manuscripts agree very closely with each other. Both omit the
Where the two dill er, T l has on the
paragraphs numbered 8-11, 16, 19, and 31.
whole the better reading.
My text is nothing more than a reproduction of the manuscripts. I have
not mentioned such various readings in T as only represent orthographic pecu
the writing into accord with
liarities, nor have I made any attempt at bringing
Standard Tibetan. Paragraphs 8-11, 16, 19, 31 which are missing in the Turkestan
2
My
much
assistance
marked
in
When
necessary they
have been
in the footnotes.
at producing a critically satisfactory text of the
of the Khotanese
only printed as a help for the interpretation
Tibetan scholars will not experience any difficulty on account of the
Central Asian manuscript*.
peculiarities of the
I have not
Tibetan version.
translation.
orthographic
is
296
KHOTANESE VERSION.
[1
/>
dvasse pamjsaSau
aSiryau-jsa u pharakyau
baudbisatvyau mistyau
vu
baysufia
iysyau-jsa hatsa
[1]
Ttinabeda mi gyastil baysii Marhju5ri eys[ariinai] gurste u ttai ptisti
Sa acil 3 ^lariiju^rya iv sarbamdU halai gunaaparamitta samcaya uamma
i
lovadava ra
lovadeva Aparamatta-
ttiiia
Thus
Hail.
it
At one time
king s
merchant Aniithapindika, with twelve hundred and
sattvas, great beings of exaltedness.
At
him
One was
son, in the
sarhgharama of the
monks and many bodhi-
fifty
[1]
One
called prince
thus,
who wanders
rightly,
who
is
K.
Wrong
Uiagavaiu.
C Andtfiapinfjaty-, C 2 Andrt/ia-.
C 3 bhikxusataistirddhaMarddha ruyodatai.
*
B bkagavd.
C 3 -trtyaih.
11
ia
(!
laudfiisatvan.
10
Read
it,
who
and
^;
BC 3
SS>
astii.
$ra Va
*yd>h.
C -data.
MSS. mahdtatvaih.
8 8
C knmala-, C 3 -Ih&tom.
1
-dasabhi,
Mafijufo.
C
C1
conducts
sign of interpunction.
BC
life,
bhiito \\paritddi6i,
C2 -dhdto,, C*
297
SANSKRIT TEXT.
Evam maya
viharati
6rutam.
13
lokadhatus,
tatr^Aparimitayu[r]jnanasuvini5citatejoraja
naraa 15 tatha-
16
17
eva 18 hi tisthati dhriyate 19 yapayati 20
gato rhan samyaksambuddha
21
sattvanam ca dharmarii de&iyati. [2]
TIBETAN VERSION.
Hdi skad bdag gis thos pa. Dus gcig na Bcom Idan hdas
Milan du -yod pa-na Hdzeh tahi l tsal -Mgon myed zas sbyin kirndgo hdun chen po dge slon brgya
dan byan chub gems dpah sems
du mail ba dan thabs gcig du bzugs so. [1]
Idan hdas kyis Hjam dpal gzo nur gyurd pa
Hjam-dpal,- steh gi phyogs na hjig rten khams-
dgahi ra ba na dge
slon
bcu
gi
gsum
4
yon tan dpag du myed pa htshogs pa zes bya ba zig yod de
de na de bzin
pa dgra bcom ba yan dag par rdzogs pahi
sans rgyas Tshe dan ye
dpag du myed pa s*in du rnam par
g>4egs
s"es
gdon myi za bahi [gzi brjid kyi ] rgyal po zes bya ba bzugs
htsho sons te sems chan rnams la chos kyah stond to. [2]
r<
14
EC 2
15
C1
10
tathdgato rhat,
17
-ianiJjuddko vidydcarana
-3
tatr-Apari-,
tatr-Aparamrtayuh-
-tejo,
-tejorajdya.
om. ndma.
tathagatdrhante,
C2
tathagataydrhanta,
3
anuttarali
18
eta,
19
evaik,
80
Cjdjjayati.
T.
T
T
1
1
mdze
tahi.
ht*og -pa,
om.
gyur
dhiyate,
Ca
dtoyate,
C3
dhfyante.
ca.
ba-la.
6
here
This word
is
hat)
a lacuna.
omitted in T.
298
KHOTANESE VERSION.
Pu
jmypga
ttii
vaiia
MajuSrya
ttadlyu
-jslnya
Jaiii"
eysaiima
bisa
bviya
Pharaka
jsina
ssa-sa[l]i
tti
jsarii
si
satva
blhi
cu aka iv la-
cu ttye Apara-
tiviScI
dljsate
yarii ttye
"pajsaih
Ttatta mi Marhju6ryam karhmii se himate cu ttye AparimittayujiianaBuvaniscitarajiigvastii bayBtl lilya nama ssa ha[3 n Jsta juna pvade ttyarii ml sa jsina byehil byeliil uskliaysde cu
iv
TRANSLATION.
Now
listen, prince
shortlived
MariijusrI, the
their lifetime is a
Whoever
by an untimely death.
beings
hundred years.
it
might
who
And
be,
live
those are
their life
Mamjusri,
write or
cause to be written the sntra expounding- the merits belonging- to that Venerable
Exalted One AparimitayujiVinasuviniscitaraja and the treatise connected with this
law, and
who would
and worship
hear
its
name and
read
it,
enter
in a
it
it
all,
with incense
(?),
K.
8.
"
Read Maiujmrya,
2
25
20
87
28
so
r2
C
C
Maiijuirlyaiii.
C
C
C3
1
3
iuidiit, C imam.
1
(C
Ijaliiiny,
-*(i)
iflr&ini,
ba/iundth,
B
C
B
-klrituno,
akcira-,
(C -yu*aS)
B mani*i/akJ, C 3 mauu*ydm.
ca 6/iavi*yafi
C3
29
(C
31
-klrftanaili,
-syaihti).
C3
C ye ca khalupunah.
C 2 3 om. 1ay.
-
;i
Parimi-.
-kirttamaiii.
Aparan>rtdi/n*a/i,
C1
nakdiri niarana.
niflr*(ani.
C2
(C
ba/iuni.
safvd.
ndmad/iyeya-,
iroxyanti
C2
C3
2*
2>3
ManjuSriya
liC 8 Apari- C 1
34
varsuSatriyni
kdlatmantnani,
33
ac
aljjdyitxo
HC a
35
Perhaps uiuysga-.
23
ndmadhyeyaiumantram,
2>8
ttdmadAyaya-.
299
SANSKRIT TEXT.
6rnu Manjus*rlh 22 kumilrabhuta, ime 23 Jambudvlpaka manusyii 24 alpa20
27
28
2
Ye
yuskfi varsasatayusas tesarii bahuny akiilamaranani nirdistani
1
khalu
29
Manjusrih
30
33
varnapariklrtana
namadheyamatram
nama dharmaparyiiyam
35
34
api ^rosyanti
37
dharayisyanti
vacayisyanti
likhapayisyanti
likhisyanti
30
yavat pustakagatarn api krtva grhe
38
3!>
crirna 40-civara-cchattra-dhvaja-ghanta-patakablii8
41
ca samantiit pujabliih 42
4
45
43
pujayisyanti te parikslnayusah punar eva varsas"atayuso bhavisyariti.
Ye khalu punar 46 Manjusrih sattvas 47 tasy 48 *Aparimitayurjnanasuvinisci-
49
TIBETAN VERSION.
nur
gyurd
pa non cig. Hdzain bu glih hdihi
Hjam dpal gzo
[mi rnanis ni tshe thuh ba las tshe lo brgya thub pa aa stag
de dag las kyaii phal cher dus ma via bar hchi bar brjod
ste]
do. Hjam dpal sems clian gah de dag de bzin gwegs pa Tshe
dpag du mycd pa dehi yon tan dan bstsags pa yohs su brjod
2
pa zes bya bahi cbos kyi main grans [yi ger hdriham yi ger]
hdrir hjug gam [min tsam yan nan tarn klog pa nas glegs bam
2
hclian liam 3 klog gam men tog dan bdug
la bris te kliyim na]
4
ma mains kyis mchod
dan
dan
hpbren ba- dan phye
spos
pa
hgyur ba de dag gi tshe yons su zad pa las tslie yan lo
de dag
brgya thub par hgyur ro. Hjam dpal sems clian gah
de bzin gsegs pa Tshe dpag du myed pa sin du rnam par gdon
par
r>
40
42
44
41
C
B -purnna-.
C om. ca samanfaf jiujdUiih.
BC 3 -satdyu*d.
1
4(1
C a ye
48
B
C
49
63
tatvdslatvattatha*.
-2
-rdjaya tathdgatdydrhante
suwyahainljuddhdya (C
tatJtdgatatydrhata gamyahambitflflhaxya.
1
M
-attottarasatamta, C ^itfotefafaw,
81
Ca
47
B
C te*dm api.
BC \arddhayisyanti, C 2
1
-ddkdtya),
3
C
C a 3 dyu.
C om. the
-d*toitarala&,
62
rivarddhayi*yanti
C3
-rajatya
-dttottaratit tafatuMi
yityati.
Ta
T.
terns
chan
rnam
ni
tfJie
tlmh
la
tshe
lo
brgya -pa
4
ze
dag
5
fye.
tike,
T2 yyan.
300
KHOTANESE VERSION.
patcil bista
bislvrra?ai
iv
6cittaragya
ttai hiiva
jastil
anu[3
Namau
Z>
dijsamde
"ttyam
patcil
byeha
m
aylmariima kami u ham j8e
ml
bislvrrai?ainil ttye
Aparamittayujnanasuvini3
baysa hiya ssa hasta junauma pvate u pin parl plde
Ttatta mi Majugryam
ha yanave
nammam
[3]
1
cu buysye
jsiiii
au
]samsa himare
bbagavate
[4]
AparamitayajnanasuviDiscitatejaurajaya
tatba-
gataya
par!
TRANSLATION.
would increase more and more and
again on death, when they have exhausted
their life and preserve his name, their life would
again increase more and more. [3]
life
Marhjusri, the noble son or daughter of a clan who might wish for the
of long life, and who would make an effort and hear the name of the
Thus,
l>osses*ion
and write
accrue.
[4]
Salutation to the Lord, the sovereign of endless life,
knowledge, and unfailing
glory, the tathagata, the arhat, the perfect Buddha; thus, Hail to the possession
of a nature purified by all embellishments,
rising in the sky, the naturally pure,
K.
S.
M
55
>T
Read MamjuSrya.
Read
life,
he will
rt
-raja gyattii.
Read/ana ndma.
Superfluous signs of interpunction at the end of the folio.
om. apy.
IJ
B
B
vivarddhayityanti.
prdrthayitumkdtnd,
58
51
BC
6i
pntro.
1
1
II
kdtnd,
Apart-, C Aparimitdyu*.
3
tfotlaraSatam ndmarh, C tfoltarandmatatatii.
1
w MSS.
C -kdmd.
dlrghdyufkanatk.
:J
prdrlhayityati
9
C duhitd.
om.
taty
1 -8
tasydm.
30}
SANSKRIT TEXT.
vivardhayisyati. [3]
Tasmat tarhi Manjus rlr
66
dirghayuskatvarii
prarthayitukamiir/
58
Om
narao
bhagavate
64
Aparimitayurjnanasuvinis\;itatejorajaya
om punyanmhapunya-
aparimitapunyaaparimitayupunyajnanasambharopacite,
05
oiii
sarvasarh-
Imam
60
muha-
likhapayisyanti pustakagatam
yanti, te
pariksmdyusab
71
7
punar eva varsasatayii^o
bbavisyanti
ita
TIBETAN VEHSIOX.
par]
hdzin
ro. [3]
ger]
Tad
tya tba na
mo ba ga
ta- tba-ga-ta
bi-ni-s c.i-ta-ra-dza-ya
ma
te
ma
ba te
ya om sa-rba-san-ska-
ha na ya pa
ri
ra -pa-
ri
Hjam dpal snags kyi tshig 2 hdi dag gaii la la zig [yi ger]
ham [y iger] hdrir -hjug gam glegs bam la bris te khy im na hchah1
4
[ham -klog par -hgyur ^ba- dehi tshe zad pa- las kyah- lo brgya thubl
hdri
03
04
ic
58
89
71
T.
kyi
B
C
B
B
B
C
70
pugtakalikhitdm.
7Z
parimitdynsah.
has de
biin
gtegt
paid
grfte krtvd,
C3
-salayutd,
om.
punar evdyu
krtva.
i-ivarddhayityanti.
tntthan
brgya
rta
brgyad
po instead of nags
tshig.
8
Ta
de.
down
to
mdo
in para. 7.
302
KHOTANESE VERSION.
!
[4r<
yujiianasuvmiscitarajii
baysa
gyasta
na"ste
buddbaksetra
guna-
[6]
Namau
tatha-
bbagavate Aparamittayujnanasuvini^cittatejaurajaya
sam ^myatsabuddhaya tadyatha aum sarvasamskaraparigaya
guddhadharmate gaganasamudgate svabhavavi^uddbe mabanayaparivare
Ttl va ttina beda nau-vara-nau nayutta gyasta baysa hamye
svaha
hvamdii [7]
aysmu[4 ?/]-na bamye bajasnam ttu Aparamittayusuttrii
Namau bbagavate AparamittJlyujnanasuvinii scitatejaiirajaya tatbagataya rliitc samyatsabuddbaya tadyatba aum sarvasamskarapari"teuddbadbarmate
mabanaya
gaganasamudgatte ^vabbavavisuddhe
rhatte
it
iv
Namau
tathabbagavate Aparamittayujnanasuviniscitatejaurajaya
rhate sammyasambuddbaya tadyatha aum sarvasaskarapariTRANSLATION.
obtain rebirth in the buddhafield of the Venerable Exalted Aparimitaynjnilnasuviof unmeasured Virtues.
F6]
niscitaruja, in the world Collection
[etc.,
as para. 5].
And
mind
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the Aparimitayusutra, with united
and united voice. [H]
Salutation to the Lord
K.
8.
7:J
7>
[etc.,
as para. 5].
And
BC 1 calvd, C 2 3 catrdro.
C upadyante C vpapadyafe.
B om. the words aparimitayuta*
-
74
folio.
-ksatrd,
C1
-kxatra,
C2
-k*atre.
2>3
76
lokad/idian,
and adds
II
II
after
ujMpadyanU
3
apalimrtayvtya and om. c, C^ aparimitdyui ca, C om. aparimitdyutas ca bhavixyanti.
77
C 1 aparimrtayunatawcayo, C 2 saihcaydmydm, C 8 aparimitdyugunatatiicayayam.
78
BC 1 omit the whole para.
303
SANSKRIT TEXT.
cutva 73 Aparimitayusas tathagatasyabuddhaksetre 74 upapadyante, 75 apari70
77
raitayusas ca bhavisyanti Aparimitagunasariieaye lokadhatau. [6]
78
Orh narno bhagavate [etc., as para. 5]. Tena khalu punah samayena
navanavatinam buddhakotmam 79 ekamaten^alkasvarena idam Aparimi80
tayuhsutram
bhasitam. [7]
Om
tayuhsiitram
85
0m
bhasitam. 84 [8]
namo
bliagavate
[etc.,
as para. 5].
TIBETAN VERSION.
hphos nas de bzin gsegs pa Tshe dpag
du myed pahi sans rgyas kyi zih hjig- rten gyi khams yon tan
dpag du myed pa stsogs pa skye bar hgyur ro. [6]
bar hgy urd te
Na mo
-ba
de
nas
si
ga ba te
as para.
[etc.,
5].
Yan
bye ba phrag dgu bcu rtsa dgus dgoiis pa-gcig-dan -dbyans-gcighdi gsuhs so. [7]
gis Tshe dpag du myed pahi mdo
2
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Yah dehi tshe sans rgyas
bye ba phrag brgyad cu rtsa bzis dgons pa gcig dan dbyahs
gcig
Tshe dpag tu med pahi mdo sde hdi gsuha so. [8]
Yah dehi tshe sans
ba ga ba te [etc., as
5],
gis
Na mo
79
80
81
T.
C2
C2
C3
kolinam ekametennaika-,
-
MSS.
84
B
T
:l
-kofindm ekamatemaika-.
AparimitdyitsitraM.
here and in the following kotindinm.
83
82
>a?-a.
ekamatainaikaxvaro,
yakamyatcnaikagvalena,
C2
ekameten-.
Aparimitdyufi iitraM.
adds
8S
T om.
C3
paras. 8-11,
paras.
8-12.
304
KHOTANESE VERSION.
uddhadharmate gaganasamudgaiu te svabhavaviSuddhe mahanayaparavare svaha n Tti va patcil ttina beda hau-para-hauda nayu iv tta gyasta
baysa hamye
hvamdil [9]
ayemu-na
hamye
bijasnarii
ttu
Aparamitayusuttrii
Tti va
"patcil
hamye
Namau
bhagavate Aparamittayujnanasuviniscitatejaurfijaya
ta-
nayaparevare svaha
gyastaih Imysa ha
"mye
hviirhdu [11]
Namau
iv
bliagavate Aparamitta,yu jnanasuviniscitatejaurajaya tatharhete sarnyatsabuddhaya tadyatha aum sarvasaiii[6 ^^skararii-
gatiiya
parisuddliadharmate gaganasamudgate svabhavisuddhe mahaiiayaparivare svaha n Tti va patcil ttiila "beda s-para-tcahausii nayutta gyasta
TRANSLATION.
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the AparimitayusQtra, with united mind
and united
voice.
[9]
[etc.,
as para. 5].
And
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the AparimitayusQtra, with united mind
and united voice. [10]
Salutation to the Lord
[e/c.,
as para. 5],
And
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the AparimitayusQtra, with united mind
and united voice. [11]
Salutation to the Lord \etc^ a
K.
8.
para. 5].
And
nd.
M C rkoti*dmm.
87
B ekanaikatvarem, C 1 ekamyatcnaikaxvalena, C*
**
C 1 Apalimitayutiiiram, C a Aparimitdyftxiitram.
1
ekametenaikasvarena.
305
SANSKRIT TEXT.
yena saptasaptatlnam buddhakotlnam
S8
89
Aparimitayuhsutram bhasitam. [9]
80
ekamaten^aikasvarena
"
idam
Om
paficapafica^atinaih
92
mitayuhsutram bhasitam. [11]
93
TIBKTAN VERSION.
cu rtsa bdun gyis dgoiis pa gcig dan
Tshe
dbyahs gcig gis
dpag tu mod pahi mdo sde hdi gsuhs so. [9]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Yah dehi -tshe- sans- rgyasbye -ba pbrag- drug cu rtsa-lnas dgons pa- gcig- dan dbyans gcig- gisTshe dpag tu med pahi mdo sde hdi gsuns so. [10]
Na-mo ba ga -ba -te[e/c., as para. 5]. Yah dei tshe sahs rgyasbye ba phrag lha bcu rtsa lhas dgohs pa gcig dan dbyans gcig
gis Tshe dpag tu med pahi mdo sde hdi gsuhs so. [11]
Na mo ba ga- ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Yah dehi tshe sahs- rgyas
rgyas bye
89
90
91
91
B
B
ba pbrag bdun
adds
adds
II
II
Bjxtmcapamcasi/itidm, C pamcaxallnani,
B adds n 5 H after the para.
1
& jxttiica*afdnam, C
93
jjathncasatdndta .
306
KHOTANESE VERSION.
baysa hamye
hvftmda [12]
hamye
aysmu-na
bijaa-na
ttu
Aparimita^yusuttra
11
Namau
ir
gatiiya rliite
fl
aysmu-na
hamye
10
bija$na
Namau 13 bhagavatte
mahanlyaparvare
16
raliette
"
ttathagatayil
auma 8arvasaskaripa6umdedarmatte
va^ude
hvariida
[14]
Aparam^^Ittayujnamnanasuvanai^cittattejarii-
14
rajayil
iv
n ttu
12
Aparamittayasuttra
[
[7 1 ]
samyilsabaudhaya
IT
evaha
ttadyetha
TRANSLATION.
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the AparimitayusQtra, with united mind
and united voioo. [12]
[ftira,
13
is
myriads of Venerable Exalted Ones recited the ApurimitayusQtra, with united mind
nd united voice, [14]
Salutation to the Lord
[*tc, t
at para. 5],
And
mny
K.
Fols. 7
10
"
B kaikmyc.
B aparamutdyuutfra
Read
;
bija^d-na.
"
namdin.
307
SANSKRIT TEXT.
pancacatvarimSatmam
94
buddhakotinam
ekamatenoaikasvarena
idam
96
Aparimitayuhsutram bhasitam. [12]
narao bhagavate [etc., as para.
Om
sattrimSatinam
96
Om
08
mitayuhsutram bhasitam. [14]
Om narno bhagavate [etc., as para.
5].
TIBETAN VERSION,
bye ba phrag b&i bcu rtsa Inas dgons pa gcig dan dbyans gcig
gis Tshe dpag du myed pahi mdo bdi gsuns so. [12]
gis -Tsjie
gcig
Na mo
Ijdi
apdramUtut/uiiijiidnatutanaiycaUattcjdyaraJHya.
lfl
adds sign of interpunction
tt-atMgittdya.
siirvaiilskarapasudedarma a gagilnasamdmtla.
15
17
18
Read
pdtcii.Gaiiiga-naya gruicyau*ye-jta
hamye bijdxa-na
8.
94
sammyO-.
II
00
"
11
98
99
I)
II
x2
u.
308
KHOTANESE VERSION.
gritcesye-jsa hiimagi nayutta jasta beysarn
bijasna ttu Aparamlttayasuttra livada [15]
Namarh
bhagavatte
rahetta
ttathagattayii
pas*ude
"dharmatta
Namarii
Aparamittayujnanasuvanai^^cattatejaya
malianiyaparvare
mattaytisuttra
hastva ahaksa
plye
ttu Aparamlttayasuttra
ukha"ysde*
ttye
piri
[16]
ttadyetha
samyasilbaudhayil
Kauma
sa
hilmave
na brrlyva
sa naryajsavcfia
auma
subhavaiv va4ude
gaganasamrnamdagattatta
svaha [Si
!
Aparimittayajnamnasuvanai^cattattejaya
Hi rahette
saskiirapaSudedarmatte
tea
"nil
ttu
Aparana
ttraisuna
nva ra
[9 a*]
cil
paskyata
bhagavatta
ttathagattayu
rajayii
ha"hamye
yaparvare svaha J
[8ai] Kariima sa hamave
3
ja starhna jslna sa -sall
hamye aysmu-jsa
ysaiiithil
byehe nai na
ni
varii
TRANSLATION.
myriads of Exalted Venerable Ones as the sands of the river Ganges recited the
Aparimitayusutra, with united mind and united voice.
[15]
Salutation to the Lord
[efc.,
a* para. 5].
life will,
[etc.,
as para. 5].
Whoever
it
the AparimitayusQtra, he would not take rebirth in the hells, not among the ghosts,
not among animals, not in the eight aksanas, he would not transmigrate anywhere ;
K.
3
a
na trlyasuna
S.
Read ci.
Read *a-*atl.
Read Kama sa himdte cu
;
Read AparamilaymMra.
Read tiskhaysde.
ttu Aparimitayu*iiltra pin
nii tiaryajsdv&iia na
prlyvd
superfluous signs of interpunction after jnye, and at end of line.
10
B daia-Gatkgd-.
103
C
C
104
105
B adds u
10
II
B gatdyvtd
vartdSatdyutd,
vartaxatdyu,
C2
varsayatdyus ca,
C 3 vartasatayusa.
10
buddhakotmam
Ganganadlvaluk6pamanam
idam Aparimitayuhsutram bhasitam. 101 [15]
Om
namo bhagavate
[etc.,
as para.
104
103
sutram
likhapayisyati
likhisyati
ekamaten * aikasvarena
5].
sa
I0ft
106
bhavisyati
punar ev^ayur vivardhayisyati.
namo bhagavate [etc., 09 para. 5].
[16]
Om
Ya idam Aparimitayuh
lot
likhisyati likhapayisyati sa na kadacin narakes^upapadyate
112
111
no na
ca
kadacid api upapatyamaloke na aksanesu
108
sutram
309
na tiryagyonau
TIBETAN VERSION.
bye -ba phrag Gah gahi kluri- gi bye ma sned kyis dgons pa gcig
dan dbyahs gcig gis -Tslie dpag du myed pahi mdo hdi gsuiis so. [1 5]
2
Na mo
gi ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Gan zig Tshe dpag tu
med pai mdo sde hdi yi ger hdri ham y iger hdrir hjug na de
J
l>a
tshe zad pa
1
par hphel
Na mo
myed
tshe
las
hgyur.
ba te
ba- ga
mdo
pahi
hdi
Gah
as para. 5].
ger hdri ham
[etc.,
[yi
io3
C
C1
1
110
T.
-fiiiram bhdxitam.
-yonl,
reads na
>
-rjehi -hjig-
ioc
C,
mam
lo
[1 6]
>ar
C8
cahu
has klun
-yoni.
\
1U Instead of
vhudhayi*yantt,
tupapadyanle,
no,
-2
which
m ak*ane*u,
B na instead of
C2
punar
tHjMpadyate.
omitted in
3
ca, C ca ta.
is
bcui.
Paragraph 16
in para. 18.
Sayepattau.
10
ayu,
is
310
KHOTANESE VERSION.
i{
ustamariijsye tea cibure usta hacll ysyate jasma rii
bi&i byata himare n [17]
Namau
bhagavate
hame
piruyai ysarhtha
Aparamittayujnanasuvini^^citattejaurajaya
Aparamittayujnanasuvini^citatejaurajaya tatha-
gataya
rhete
II
[10 a
yusutra
plri ttye
Namau bhagavate
[20]
Aparamitayujriamnasuvini^cita^tejaurajaya tathaTRANSLATION.
and as many
all
[Para. 19
is
[etc.,
text.]
as para. 5].
Whoever it might be who would write
five acts that bring about endless hells become
[20]
Salutation to the Lord
K.
8.
Superfluous signs to
114
115
116
18
us
[etc.,
fill
up
at para. 5].
II
"
"
II
fiyate
117
jatau
SANSKRIT TEXT.
Yatra yatra janmany 1U upapadyate
jatau jatismaro
Om
sutrarh
118
Om
bhavisyati.
[17]
as para. 5].
[etc.,
hasrani likhapitani
Butrarh
m pratisthapitani
Ya 125 idam
Aparimitayull-
126
catura^itidharmarajikasahasrani
128
bhavisyanti.
[19]
Ya
as para. 5].
129
idam Aparimitayuh13
karmava-
[etc.,
likhapayisyati
ranani pariksayam
Ya
idam AparimitayuhcaturaSitidharmaskandhasa-
bhavisyanti.
[18]
as para. 5].
[etc.,
namo bhagavate
likhisyati
124
123
122
namo bhagavate
karapitani
119
namo bhagavate
121
311
tasya paiic^ananturyani
132
131
gacchanti.
[20]
TIBETAN VERSION.
du nam van
rten
khom
bar
skye
skye bar
bar
rned
mdo
pahi
sde hdi
yi
ger
hdri
am
ger
yi
Na mo
ba
ga ba
te
hdrir
hjug
du
bcug
byed
[etc.,
Na mo
122
124
-
12C
128
13n
ga ba
C 2 te.
B bhavanti
C 3 te.
B bhavanti
13
II
\\
14
B iMthcdnaryani
tarydni.
T.
ba
131
II
[etc.,
as para.
5].
ro.
[20]
Tshe d]
kjapagaw.
T1
zig
3
1 -2
II.
Gan
Jkarmdcaranani,
te
1M
C yah.
patiicdnantaryydni karmani,
adds II 15 II after the para.
C2 patkcdnan-
312
KHOTANESE VERSION.
gataya rhite
dharmate
Kiirii si
liimate cu ttu
iv
Apa rami
ttye
Namau bhagavate
Ide
svaha u
garkhye
bisl vasusldil
[10 l
n
~]
[21]
Aparamittayujnanasuviniscitatejaurajaya tatha-
gataya rhite samyatsariibuddha^ya tadyatha aum sarvasamskaraparisuddliadharmate gaganasamudgate svabhavavisauddhe mahana uiyaparivare svaha u Kfuiima se himate cu ttu Aparamettayusuttra pin
iv
ttye na Marji ni ma rma hina raksaysa-prritta-mahairdyam astariina vaSji
2
11
[22]
Xamau
bhagavate Aparimettayujnanasuvinificitatejaurajaya "tathagataya rhite sammyatsaihbuddhaya tadyatha aum sarvasamskaraparisuddhadharmate garhganasaalu^dgate svabhavavi^uddhe mahanaya3
iv
parivare svaha n Kam si [hijmate cu ttu Aparamittayusuttra pl ri khu
sj
all
get thoroughly purified, even if they are as
great as mount Meru.
[21]
Salutation to the Lord [etc., as para.
5]. Whoever it might be who would write
the AparimitayusQtra, against him neither Mara, nor the
army of Mara, nor the evil
beings such as Raksasas, pretas, and those possessing great magical power will get
to bring about
untimely death (?). [22]
any opportunity
by
support
K.
of interpunction.
^Superfluous sign
8.
being
133
185
36
137
Cyah.
B mar a,
C
C
134
;J
om.
vd,
ta*ya.
and
mdlakdm,
1
nakdramrtitpadravd,
C8
ndkdlamrlyiipadravd.
om
na
mate.
318
SANSKRIT TEXT.
[Para. 21
Om
is
missing
namo bhagavate
[etc.,
as para. 5].
Ya 133
idani AparimitAyuh-
18
Om namo bhagavate [etc., as para. 5]. Yu 139 idam Aparimitayuhsutram likhisyati likhapayisyati, tasya maranakiilasamaye
navanavatayo
buddhakotyah
hastena
142
liastam
143
M1
,
buddhasuhasraih
buddhaksetrad
tasy#dpanamayanti,
144
buddlia-
TIBETAN VERSION.
du-myed pahi mdo hdi- [yi ger- hdri-ham yi ger] hdrir -bcng na-dehi
sdig gi phuh po Ri rab tsam yah yohs su- byah bar hgyur ro. [21]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Gah zig Tshe dpag du
l
hdi
ger
[yi
hdri
ham y i
[bdud dan] bdud kyi ris -kyi lha dan gnod sbyin dan srin
po glags bltas kyah glags rned par myi hgyur ro. [22]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5], Gah zig Tehe dpag du
la
myed
pahi
mdo
hdi
[yi
ger hdri
ham
39
II
-&o(l>H
142
144
T.
"
are omitted in T.
talhdgataik
Ca
fyanti.
hattan.
314
KHOTANESE VERSION.
buddhaksettra Rtamnai adaiia buddhaksettra bay Ida na
vlra sinauhya a asadina tcera iiapamdai ttatta n [23]
ttiiia
"ml
ttye
Kam
fc
cu
,i
[25]
Namau
him the
who
it
where he might
hurt him.
[24]
the Aparimituyusutra, when he quits life, he obtains rebirth in the region Sukhavatl,
in the buddhafield of the Exalted Amitabha.
[25]
Salutation to the Lord
E.
2
3
[etc.,
a* para. 5].
145
HO
147
(31.3
biutdkakwtram,
fyayaja
om. na
gaM(C 9a)krami*yanti
vicikilsd na.
us ci.a
vimaticdda,
Ca
Cl
vicikitd,
vifdnirtvdda.
C 2 tvayam kramityanti.
C 3 cikittd.
m B adds
II
315
SANSKRIT TEXT.
ksetrarh
14G
sarhkramanti
146
147
vimatir
148
149
utpadayitavya.
150
Om
[23]
namo bhagavate
[etc.,
as para.
Ya idam Aparimitayuh-
5].
Om
namo bhagavate
as para.
[etc.,
Ya
5].
ir<
idam Aparimitayuh163
Amita-
Sukhavatyam lokadhatav
"
154
lr>
"
TIBETAN VERSION.
hgyur ro sans rgyas kyi zih-nas-sahs rgyas-kyi-zin-du-hgro-bar-mdzadpar- hgyur te hdi la- the tsom dah-som-ni-daiVyid-gnis-ma-za-Hig. [23]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Gah zig Tshe dpag da
myed pahi mdo hdi [yi ger hdri ham yi ger] hdrir bcug na
1
Na mo
myed
pahi
de bzin
de
ba"-
ga -ba
mdo
hdi
Gah
ham
hdri
ger
[yi
yi
gSegs pahi
khams
zig
ger]
ba
dan
Tshe tlpag du
bcug na
hdrir
rten gyi
ajig
180
162
Cyah.
lokadhdio,
158
T.
C
C
down
18
C8
gupti kariyanti II 18
a
lokadhal, C tokadkatum;
C -hatre.
to lokadhatav upaixidyate
II.
places
a>3
B pratleie, C
Aparimitdyuxiilram ratnardjam,
ta ca,
164
1 -2
adds n 19
3
prfhivipra<le&ya.
tarva.
are omitted in T.
Ide-can-du.
316
KHOTANESE VERSION.
ona ttu Aparamittayusutra piiide
disifia
[13i]
si
diSa
caittya
marimadii hime aurgavlya tti khu sai damvau-mu^ram astamna triyasuiiam gvamiia hlsi tti patcii harbiSii napamdai pirmattama baysusta
bustil hi in mare n [26]
nayaparivare svalia
suttril
pan pide
Namau
si
]>ya"tsa9tii
[27]
bliagavatc
Aparamittayujiianasuviniscittatejaura^yaya
tathagataya rhite samyatsaihbuddhaya tadyatha aum sarvasamskaraiv
parii5uddhadliarina te gaganasamudgate
paravare svalia u Kiirhmil patcii si hi- u
[14 a
svabhavavi^uddhe mahanaya!
then
all
known
ia
[26]
Salutation to the Lord
(?).
at para. 5].
And whoever it might be who would
[etc.,
cause the Aparimituyusutra to bo written, he would never in future obtain an
existence as a woman.
[27].
would make a
K.
[etc.,
And whoever
as para.
5].
it
might be who
hiJiamate.
8.
159
160
C
C
pithipadexya,
C2
pftkivlpradeie,
CJ
prtAivipradesya.
2
2
vandaniyai ca (C here adds bhavityanti) pradak-uniyaS (C -nlyaS) capuja-
ulya* ca btiariiyanti.
81
163
yanli,
C
C
C3
194
lca
tlryyarjyogatdndm.
mrgapafyidratfrindm.
api yculi farnnapufe tarvtd (C Sabdd, C yalra .tarva) nipatautii (C* nipaiifnipatite) tarvva adhovarttikd (C adhevattiko) bliavifyanti anutlardydtk.
BC
1 -3
317
SANSKRIT TEXT.
"
deSah
100
caityabhuto vandaniyas ca bhavisyati.
182
161
karnapute
mrgapaksinam
rayarh samyaksambodhav abhisarhbodhim
183
gatanaih
namo bhagavate
Orii
sutrarh
[etc.,
as para.
likhapayisyati
likhisyati
184
Yesarii
abhisambhotsyante.
[26]
Ya 16C idam
5].
taaya stribhavo
187
188
[27]
bhavisyati.
[etc.,
dharmaparyayam
Ya
as para. 5].
uddisya ekam
17
api
1C9
idam Aparimitayuh-
karsapanam
"
danarh
TIBETAN VERSION.
du hgyur
Na mo
rnam grans
165
tyate
likhi.
B atisaMdtsyante, C
B adds 20 after the
It
II
C2
167
Cl
188
B pratilapsate
tribhdve,
C alhitambhotC yat.
:|
abhitambitddhyate^* alhitambottyate.
loe
para.
3
ttdsrabhdvo, C strlbhdvi.
1<s
likhdp.
tatya
bhavisyanti).
T.
169
yah.
171
kdtdyenam,
are omitted in T.
318
KHOTANESE VERSION.
liaur! ttye bisil ttrrisahasrya mahasa"ha8rye
hartibadfl
[28]
Namau
Aparamitta^ yujfianasuvinificitatejaurajaya
bhagavatte
iv
tathagataya rhite sarhmyatsabuddhaya tadyatha aum sarvasarhskaragaganasamudgate svabhavavi^uddhe mahanayasi himate cu
ttye Aparamittayusuttril
bhiijanibhuta pajsam. yam ttye bisii abarl"na baysarh da pajsamevye
hime : [29]
pariauddbadbarmate
Kammil
parivare[14 ^]svaba
mi
Si
[15 a
ttatta
kbu
Knukasuda
baysii
gyastil
bjvysil
Kas*ava
gyastil Kaysil Kanakamunll "gyastii baysa
3
Sakyamuuil gyasta baysa astaihna gyastam bay^au
haudyam raihnyauJujsa
parhjsa
yarn
ttye
hamada
puiiinai
hnihbisft
TRANSLATION.
him
woul
thus have been given to the extent of filling the world of the
whole trisahasrl mahiisahasrl with the seven treasures. [28]
Salutation to the Lord [etc., as para. 5], Whoever it might be who, having
become a receptacle of the AparimitayusQtra, would do worship, by him the whole
gifts
[etc.,
as pura. 5].
It
is
as if he
[29]
the seven treasures to the Venerable Exalted Ones, the Venerable Exalted Vipasyin,
the Venerable Exalted Sikhin, the Venerable Exalted Visvambhu, the Venerable
K.
8.
Read
m
173
bai/tdiii
haudyau
ratnnyau-jsa pajgai/i.
C l tltuyanti,
B ina!ta*a!iare-, l)C -dhatu C 2 3 .(l/tdlau.
H rafnamayljiaripurnam.
B dadydt, C darttd bhavanti, C 2 dartta lHarafi, C 3
l
174
174
dattaik lhavityanti
-samaptam,
319
SANSKRIT TEXT.
dasyati
nam 174
m
,
tena trisahasramahasahasralokadhatum
Orfi
"
saptaratnaparipur-
"
krtvft
17T
[28]
5],
Ya
"
saddliarmal.1
idam Jharmabhaijakaih
pQjito
bhavati,"
[29]
Orh namo bhagavate [etc., as para. 5]. Yatha VipaSvi-&ikhi-Vi8vabhu 180 - Krakucchanda - Kanaka muni - Ka6yapa - Sakyamuni 181 - prabhrti-
pujah
183
krtva
186
tasya
187
TIBETAN VERSION.
des stoh
gsum gy
stori
l>kah
170
II
II,
lhavi*yj>uti,
187
C3
320
KHOTANESE VERSION.
pamaka hime Cu ttye Aparimsttayasu Htrii hlyai
pamaka ni yudi hime n [30]
puiiinai
harhbisa
iH Ttatta mi khu
Sumira garnam 2 hamaihga ramnlnai
iT
padime u hauri-ye lieda ttye puiii nai hambisa hamada pamaka
hatne u ttye Aparamittayusuttrfi pufiinai hambisa 3
parivare svaha
hariibisft
[1C a
pamaka
Namau
ni yudil
Lame
[31]
rhito saniyatsarabuddhaya
gata"ya
tadyatha aum samrva^amskaraparisuddliadharmate gaganasaniudgate svabha^vaviSuddhe mahana 4 yaparivare svaha ! Ttatta mi khu tcaliaura mahasamudrra
tare uca-jsa
r>
pamaka hame
TRANSLATION.
events bo measured, but the store of merit resulting from the AparimitayusQtra
could not be made measured.
[30]
all
Salutation to the Lord [etc., as para. 5]. Thus if one would lay up a store
of treasures equal to mount Meru and give a gift of it, then his store of merit could
at all events be measured, but the store of merit resulting from the
AparimitayusQtra
could not be
made measured.
[31]
an para. 5].
[etc.,
Thus
if
K.
3
4
full of
[32].
-nixcaitta-.
Head gard-na.
Superfluous sign of interpunction at end of page.
Superfluous sign of interpunction in vacant space in front of string-hole.
Read
8.
89
)0
191
/taiiikhlygii.
C 2 turn, C 3 no.
C Aparimrtdyuxntram, C 1 ParimifdyiigutraM.
RC 3 punyagkandha, and om. pramdnatn Sakyarh, C
B adds 24 n after the para.
m B ama, C 2 samdna.
C itarvvalaraja.
1
tn,
II
193
om. sakyam.
19a
C yetatk
Sumeru.
3
-ran*.
BO
321
SANSKRIT TEXT.
18
punyaskandhasya pramanarh Sakyam ganayituiii, na tv
Aparimitayuh189
19
191
sutrasya
punyaskandhasya
pramanaiii sakyarh ganayitum.
[30]
Om namo bhagavate [etc., as para, 5]. Yatha Sumeroh 192 parva"
193
tarajasya
196
dadyat, tasya
punyasakyarh
ganayitum, na tv Aparimitayuh198
sutrasya punyaskandhasya pramanam ganayitum.
[31]
197
skandhasya pramanaiii
[etc.,
as para.
20
201
Yatha
5].
udakaparipurrmii bhaveyuh,
ganayitum, n a tv Aparirnit ayuhsutrasya
20
ganayitum.
202
sakyaih
20 *
punyaskandhasya
nam
m catvaro maliasam-
tatra ekjukavinduni
205
203
prama
207
[32]
TIBETAN VERSION.
mchod par
-by as
kyis
bgrafi -bar
J
Na mo-ba
ga-ba-te[e#c.,8j;a? a.5]. Hdi-ltti sto-dper-na-rin-pocbehi-pbuiVpo -Hi rab tsam-spuns te sbyin -pa -byin pa dehi bsod nams
kyi phun pohi tshad ni bgrafi bar nus ky Tshe dpag tu med pahi
>
indo-sde-hdihi-bsod-nams-kyi-phun-poi-tshad-ni-bgraivbar-mi-nus-so. [31]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5]. Adi Ita ste rgya mtsho
chen po bzihi chus yohs su gan bahi thigs pa re re uas bgrah bar
nus kyi Tshe dpag du myed pahi mdo hdihi bsod nams kyi- phun
pohi tshcid ni bgrafi bar myi nus so. [32]
196
Cddnam datla*ya^~
"
C ^ om!
1
108
199
200
201
<>m.
II
25
II
atha.
2
202
803
204
206
T.
Paragraph 31
is
omitted in T.
322
KHOTANESE VERSION.
Namau
sviiha
ii
Kariimil
si
piitcil
iv
yam
pir! aysdarhrjai
biSarh
Namau
ssabdarii
karunakasya
buddha
iv
purarii prave^arhte
hvamdamna sarauva
haurlie
avsdadil stamna baysuiiistil bust!
hauvi-isa
J
J
*
haurije hauva
saunii
ttramdye
\)
pvama na vaysnam
bijfisil
tam
kitha.stii vastaiii u
pVisd^i
[34]
buddha
TRANSLATION.
at para. 5].
[33]
as para. 5],
the power of alms the lions amongst men are living
buddhahood
being- hallowed by the power of alms, thou acquiredest
[e(c.,
By
the hearing of the sound of the power of alms one does not hear here,
it is proclaimed to him who has entered into the city of the Merciful One.
K.
[34]
2 8
"
211
212
C yah.
B da*a.
C 2 tarvmlokadhdtau
20!)
214
taskrte,
buddhaa13
yat i.
C2
BC
C3
21
sakrte.
1 -2
-Jk*atre*u,
piijayityanti.
-tathdgatdn darxayati,
21t
C3
adds
-tathdgatdh.
II 27 II after the
para.
32^
SANSKRIT TEXT.
Om
namo bhagavate
as para.
[etc.,
Ya 208
5].
sutram
likhisyati
likhapayisyati
sarhskrtya
da&isu 2n diksu sarvabuddhaksetresu 212
uj-
icjam Aparimitayuh-
209
21
pujayisyati
teiiii
213
sarvatathagat$l
214
Om
namo bhagavate 21 *
[etc.,
as para.
5].
TIBETAN VERSION.
Na mo
ba ga ba te
Gah
zig Tshe
dpag du
gam
byed par bgyur ba
des pbyogs bcuhi sans rgyas kyi tin thams chad du de bzin g^egs
pa thams chad lu phyag -byas pa dan mcliod pa byas pa yin no. [33]
Na mo ba ga ba te [etc., as para. 5].
Sbyin bahi stobs kyis -sans rgyas yan-dag hphags my ihi seri-ges
hcli
as para. 5],
[ctc. t
hdrir
>cug
mcliod pa
rjehi
After svdhd
imam gdthdm
217
218
T.
"
kfialv)
[34]
li/utgatdn ta*ydm
velaydm
ablidxai.
C2
;l
220
sec.
man.,
T2
nin
rjt.
324
KHOTANESE VERSION.
lv
parahlje hauvi-jsa
sauna
hvariindariina sarauva
2
[18
na baysus ta bustl
bljaaii
ttraiiidye starii
buddham
iil
ksiliiintabalasya sruniyati sabda karu nikasya pure
bayaraihda hvamdamna
KHumauttevije hauva-jsa
iv
ksaniauteviji hauvi jsa tiysdariidii
ksamauttevlje hauvi
prave^amte
sarauva
ni vaysnarii pjpi6dU
l
^aitnU ttraiiidye starii ki[186 ]thasta vaata n [30]
bijasil
Viryabalabhirata narasiha
vlryal>alasya
pvamma
aalxlarii
^ru"nlyata
?auna
ttradye
pvamma na
iv starh
vaysnarii puadi
TRANSLATION.
By
By
By
K.
8.
the power of morality the lions amongst men are living, etc.
[35]
the power of forbearance the lions amongst men are living, etc.
[36]
the power of energy the lions amongst men are living, etc.
[37]
Read
Read
m
M5
217
hayaraiiidd.
f>nnvi
MSS.
bijdju.
buddho.
l-
II
II.
325
SANSKRIT TEXT.
6ilabalena samudgata buddhah 223 s"ilabaladhigata 224 naraairhhah
ca 225 6ruyati
&ibdah karunikasya pure pravis ans"ilabalasya
i
22<J
tam
227
\\
[35]
228
Ksantibalena
simhah
231
ksantibalasya
tam 233
23
22
ksantibaladhigata
nara-
ca sruyati
232
[36]
234
Vlryabalena
hah
samudgata buddhah
buddho
samudgata
23<i
viryabaladhigata
narasirh-
23fl
i
237
viryabalasya ca
23S
tam
232
sriiyati
[37]
TIBETAN VERSION.
Tshul -khrims stobs -kyis sans- rgyas-yah-dag-hphags- my ihi -sen-gee
tshul khrims stobs rtog ste
sfiih
tshul
[35]
[36]
Brtson-hgrus stobs-kyis-sahs-rgyas-yaiVdag-hphags-myihi-seh-ges
brtson hgrus stobs rtog ste
sfiih
rjehi
231
233
MSS.
buddho.
*"
BC 2 k*dntivara*ya ca, C 3
234
B
C 3 aidds 3
Qi.a .varadhigata, C 1 -faldltiand.
3
.2
pc^ -varasya ca, C -balak*atra.
1-
T.
sec.
-varatlkigutd,
C3
23a
man.,
*/iin
-varcnan,
836
3S
-valena,
1
C
2
naruiw/n>.
Sruyanti.
-varena.
C 3 naratimko.
C 8 pratitdntam 4
nalaiitiihd,
praviSantdm
2
rjc.
BC
n [37]
-baldlUana
k*<intivalak*af.ra.
II.
23
S37
C*
brUo* lyrm
II
kyi.
II.
326
KHOTANESE VERSION.
l
Dhyarimabalabharata naraslha dhyamnabalea
na
[19 ]
samudgata budha
1
dhyamnabalasya
Dhyariinije
firuniyita subrlaiii
hauva-"jsa
2
dhyamnije hauviba-jsa aysdarhdil starhna baysumsta, bustarh
ii{
dhyamnijc hau va bijasil pvaiiima na variinarii puadii
ttrariidye
?tam
kitba?til
vastam
[38]
iv
Pirajnabalabhirata narasiha pra jnabalena samudgata budha
Sabdaih
prrajnabalasya Sruniyatii
karunakasya pure prravi^amte
[191 ]!
Hajvattetije hauvi-jsa
ttramdye ?ta
Namau
gataya
>
iv
vaysnam pu^di
kitha^til va?tii
[30]
rhete
pari^uddhadharmate ^agana-
TRANSLATION.
By
By
K.
8.
Read
fiauvi-jsa.
239
840
Read found.
C2
-timho
327
SANSKRIT TEXT.
239
Dhyanabalena
hah 241
24
narasim-
242
sruyati
dhyanabalasya ca
tam
843
244
ii
[38]
248
samudgatabuddhah
Prajnabalena
h ah 248
240
247
narasim-
prajnabaladhigata
tam
26
24J
prajnabalasya ca
Sruyati
2S1
pravi&in-
[39]
TIBETAN VERSION.
Bsam-gtan stobs -kyis sans rgyas
bsam gtan stobs rtog ste
sen- ges
bsam gtan
s"es
C
C
243
ci-2 Srtyanli,
245
247
48
249
181
T.
-varenaw,
Sr&yatu.
-ralend.
-valddhigald, C -mrddkigatd,
(M.3 nalagimho, C- nqratimho.
1
BC -varatya ca, C
B praviSantam.
1
sec.
man.,
T2
-valatya ca,
nin
rje.
[30]
B pratifattath, C 3 pravifanta
MSS.
C
C
II
II.
budflho.
-Malitana.
-balakgatra.
M0
**
irnyanti.
328
KHOTANESE VERSION.
[20 ] samudgate svabhavavisumdhe mahamyaparivare svaha n
Khu gyasta baysii ttu livanai hva yurle bi&l gyasta
hvanda aysurarh
{
"u
gandharvfuii iistaihna lovya parsji tta ttu gyasta baysii hivi hvanai thyau
naiiidii nilpamdai vi
hadi stitra samasye
"aysmya yudarhdil Gyasta baysa
H
[40]
TRANSLATION.
Salutation to the Lord
[etc.,
as para. 5].
When
One had
made
Exalted
One
Cadipyaina
8.
a52
284
*
3
B avoca.
C Bhagavann, C- Jlhagavdnn, C 3 Bhagavan.
B lenilt, C atamanfa, O arltamandt, C 3 artta*.
2M MSS. bodkitalvd mahatatva.
C 8 ihiktavo, and om. te ca,
1
329
SANSKRIT TEXT.
"
Orh namo bhagavate [etc., as para. 5], Idam avocad 2 2 Bbagavan 253
attamanas 254 te ca bbik^avas 285 te ca bodbisattva mabasattvah 259 sa ca
,
M8
85
sadevamanu^asuragandbarvas ca loko
Bhagavato
parat
bba^itam abbyanundann iti. [40]
sarvavati
2r>T
TIBETAN VERSION.
Na
ba
rao
ga
ba
te
[etc.,
bkah
as para.
5].
Bcom
Idan
hdas
nur
gyurd pa dan lha dan myi dan lha ma yin dan dri zar licas
pahi hjig rten gyi bkbor de thams cbad bcom Idan bds kyis
l
mnon bar dgabo. [40]
gsuns pa la
887
258
loko.
T.
patya,
to.
Hjam
dpal
gio
C 3 j)a*at.
T* g*uk pa
f
stsald
lot.
en,
9jrlevam<iiw*auragaru(1agan(lharwa
ca
VOCABULARY TO VAJRACCHEDIKA
AND APARIMITAYUH SUTRA
(Quotations from the Aparimitayuh Sutra h:ive been marked A, and refer to the
paragraphs, not to the pages of the original.)
ah, to
fit,
ctsta,
56
to stay
a, conj., or,
cf.o.
236";
a";
41
6 iv
6>>
dsto,
adata,
ganifttvabltavika,
fit
to be acquired,
adhiyamasublidva, 19
19
">;
b".
iv
adrruysa, unidentified, 146
non-marke,
non-characteristics,
400
see guna.
";
ah, to be
a",
6"
36ai-U; 4l6i>; 42
fcfc, A .3;
2nd pers. sing. opt. dyat, 196
dya,
jlil.iv;
;
a";
196>
18av; 19a^; 20
;
6i"
26i";
j
;
15a m
16a*v
23 a 5
17.
32
iv
22
6*- W
33 a*, 61 ^ ; 34
17 a, 6iU
21 6* ; 22 a 1
6^"
a>
ajamla, probably a
sing.),
96
cf.
English
loanword, Skr.
the folded hands, 56 ^.
akalamarana, Skr. loanword, untimely
death
22
gen. sing. nkalninaTam,
abl. plnr.
3.
akdlamaranyau-J8(i,
aksara, loanword, Skr. uksara; iustr. plur.
aksaryau jsa, by means of letters, 27 6 .
alabye, perhaps loanword, Skr. alambe, I
cling
to,
lean upon,
2a
afia,
ana, nothing
186".
see uhu.
effff
resplendent
aharma,
a"*,
36";
3.
#;
16 a
hnmblsii.
cf.
6".
Skr. adhi-
adhigamasvabhavi, loanword,
aguna,
23a iv
subst., a non-collection,
ahambisa,
G"
>.
39 a
a"
a*"
pres.
ahaksanva,
206 iv
abhutasarima, loanword, Skr. abhutasamjha,
not a true idea, 246
cf. bhuttatariiiia.
ada, pron., another; loc. sing, aclafta, A 23.
Skr.
adara, loanword,
adara, respect, care.
ence,
t,
21
A 2
AG
426
iii
anarhkhistii,
else,
27a
anya
rui
iii<iv
perhaps refulgent,
19 a 1 gen. plur. (l)dnada,
part.,
(?),
adj.,
innumerable, Zd.
aham
6"
VOCABULARY
24 a
cf.
hamkhlysa.
anamttanarya,
20
a".
adj.,
causing endless
hells,
6"
&"
anici,
Skr.
loanword,
lasting, transient, 41
not
anitya,
ij
paramma.
;
Aparamattdyujiianasuvinifcittardja, A 2
gen.
AparimittdyujnanasuvanMdtaraja,
;
3
3
AparamittdyvjnanasuvinMcitaraja,
(-nisca(a-)
4 (-ttaragyii)
8;
ace. Aparamittui/usuttra,
9 (-mitai/u-);
10;
11;
Mciijasultra)
12 (Apari1 5 and
mi(d-) 1 4 (Aparamlttai/nsuttrci)
1G (Aparam
17
(-maltd-
ya suttra); 18 (Aparamettdmyusttmtrd)
20
(-matlayumtra); 21 22 (-mettayu-};
23; 24; 25 (Apard-) 26(-m/r); 27;
;
41
(-mitdydstUrd)
svttrii,
tayii-);
28
31
(-sw<ra);
gen. Aparamittayu-
29
30 (Aparimet-
32; 33.
arahamda,
11
pleased, 306 ; cf. virahya.
araifana, loanword, Skr. arana, 18 V*.
aranavyiharai, loanword, 8kr. aranaviharin, ISfc*.
a"
a|an,
adj.,
is
#".
aiiri, subst., a
monk, an elder
o/irl,5avv,fei;9al;12a
32 6 34
24aH; 31
a;
376
366";
36
5 a
4rt f
a"
;
a"
"
14
396";
36 a
a"
ace.
sing.
32 6 iv
35 a ,
34 6
37 a iij voc. sing, aiirya,
iv
nom. plur. dfirya,
dtarya, 37 a
44 a
instr. plur. dtiryau-jga,
dtirl, 7
nom. sing.
13a; 22a
6iv; 35a.i,6;
1 -l
6.
see &ira.
Aparimittayujnanasuvini&jitaraja, nom.
nom.
propr., name of a bodhisattva
A
A
aryastagamargmai,
cf.
ever
&>>.
331
! -
"
"
>;
1.
Wa
plur. dska, 24
aspas, to look forward to
a".
(?),
to reach,
cf.
Zd.
6";
1
.
atmabhava,
existence,
206 iv
VOCABULARY TO
332
attararhdara, a non-body,
see tta-
336";
raihdard.
inf. of verb, to
aysmu, 20 a
aysmu, 14a
aysmuna, A 14; aysmu-na,
26
A 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 2 aysmu1 5
A 40
loc. sing, aysmya, 8 6 !ii
jsa,
aysmu Ina, from in the mind, 42 a v
a
demon
Skr.
aysura, loanword,
asura,
nom. plur. aysura, 44 a iv
gen. plur.
{
ace. sing,
";
instr. sing,
au
6 iv
40.
a"
a"
bada,
33
a"
badam,
drbadva,
<
";
44 a
cf.
pdrautla.
avaya, loanword, Skr. ajulya, evil abode
Inc.
plur. drroyva avdyvd, in the three
;
apnyas, 30 a
aviskasta,
non-displayed, 20
part.,
cf.
a";
avyasta,
part., grasped,
38 6iv
39
aya, to
!<
35
3rd
".
All;
bljama,
20a
266
v
;
17aiv
bajasyau-jsa,
4
;
15; instr.
gen.
plur.
*.
pres. nynri, 41
aylmamma,
6"
perhaps
possession
meaning
;
aysda,
ace.
thee, ayoe, 8 6
.";
iij
aysmu, sometimes
4.
"
the seat, 5 6
subst.,
a"
12
or adj.
the three
to,
l>elonging
A 34
37*; bijawi,
instr. King,
bajasa,
obtaining
loc. plur.
plur.
bajnmii,
tiraen,
446"
or
in,
A8
piskalfi,
30a
avarautta, part., not attached, independent,
20
av ircmtta, 116"
12 6; 26 6 iv
ace.
13 av, fei.ii
2 56i; 306 ;
43aLILUI; 6^/a,43a v instr. sing.
loc. sing, befla, A 1; 2;
bada-na, 256
7; 8; 9; 11; 12; 6Wo, A 10; gen.
badamn/i, 26
plur. badanii, 26 a ;
sing, badfi,
bldii,
146iv.
1 ers.
6y,
36";
bafida,
in the grove,
in the garden.
1.
t>ul)Bt.,
sin
21
6".
instr.
20
a"
sing, baudhisatva,
;
31 61
lla^
baudhisatva-na,
126*";
106
*;
bawlhi-
baysd-na,
iv
satva, 10
22
66";
&i-
32
i"T
ba-ysa-na,
SSa
196
fci
33a
7a",W;
aiv,
14a":
a"
39 a ii.
333
gyasta bays-na,
-",6";
34 6~
19 aui
196"
34 a
19
to translate Skr.
6"
10
baysii, 3
a iv
306
15a iv
A 25
ace. plur.
15;
23 a
240"
*;
366
*;
39
All;
6"
i)
gyastd
A 11; jasta
gyasta baysd,
gyaslyan
Iffiyyyau-jsa,
gyastdm bays&tnnu, 2 la
iv
6* v
36 a
gyastdi n buyxaih, 35 a
A 30 (miswrilten baysau) 33 gyastd
v
6
gyastd baytd/m-jsa, 28 a
bay&di/i, 35
saihnd,
nom. plur.
";
6"
23 yyaxtam baysa,
25 a v jasta btysa,
:
";
336";
a"
9a
18a
gyasta baysd,
";
instr. plur.
bni/sri,
12
beysaih,
6 iv
23a"
;
"
jasta bayad,
baysii,
pro
206"
27 6
baysd-na, 23 a
abl. baysd-na,
8 a v
38 a
suffixed
176 iv
iv
baysa-na,
gen. sing,
with
12a iv
instr. sing,
22
40 a
ba.y*l,
I,
;
",
6"
"
gen.
30 a iv
"
gyasta baynd,
17a"
16a>;
";
a",
40
13a
38a
6"-
376 iv
30
35
19a iv 22a
66"; 12a
31a iv 34 a gyastd bay*a, 166
25
32
gyastd baysd, 8
nom. plur. gyasta baysa, A 7
23.
noun
23 a
39 a*
206
37
iv
pres. bdi/ldti,
a"-
156";
;
32 a iv
12a";
abl.sing.yya#<a6ym-na,
";
gyasta baysa-na, 33 a
A3
iv
a"
a"
a";
a"
6".
(jyaitta
16
9
"
b"
1 ;
86 ; instr. plur. baudhisatvau,
;
gen. plur. baudhisatvdm, 3
baudhisatvayamna, loanword, Skr. bodhi-
iii
36";
";
"
"
gen.
1
6 iv
baysaihna,
A"
";
24
29
One
36
nom.
a"
6 a
5
<jya-
5o
";
sing,
7 a ;
a";
dropped and we
baysa,
56
4a";
346 v; 35 a
41a v 44o
126 v; 16
find
;
:
19a;
";
36 a
376
8a
iji
25a
40
a*;
a"
346";
baynuihna vuysai, a
being connected with exalteducss, a being
of exaltednesf, a bodhisattva, nom. sing.
iv
28a buysuihhd
baysuihna vuysai, 26 a
vuysai, 406 ; bai/siina vuysai, 15
baysuthnd vuysai-na,
39
21 a 1
13 a
fit"
o"
14a>v
40 a^; gyasta
156
baysl, 12
;
;
22a";
32 6
1
;
24ai;
Sla*";
a";
40 a
";
6* T
136^;
356r396*; instr.
8# Ho
6 o^
1
gyattd bayta-na,
39^;
baytsuna
sing,
9a
7 a iv ,
vuysai-na, 6
6"
6* T
baysuihna vuysai-na,,3 1
plur. baysumna vuysa, 6 a
plur. baysuna vuysyau-jsa, A 1.
;
6"
";
",
the
state
instr.
6"
13 61
5
a"
316
gyasta baysa, 5
35 a ; gyasta baysd,
a";
a;
ace. sing,
-";
";
a buddha, 36 a
a";
a"
of enlightenment, 2
baytcainwinnd, the eyes pertaining to
life
suj nnd
a";
gyasta bayri, 9
20
38
"
a"
ii.
of the
Al;
a>;
fci.
commonly
is
giaspcd,
sing, gyaatri
22ai> ;
33
nom.
6"
noin.
instr.
of
bay mi,
baysu^ta,
buddhahood ; nom. sing, baysuttd, 16 6iv ;
ace. fiing. baysuita, 30
33
33
;
;
32 6- * ; 33 a &** bky;
baysuita, 1 6
subst.,
"
a"
a"
a">;
a"
34;
VOCABULARY TO
334
30
38
39
gen.
become a vessel
who
for,
Skr.
43rt
loanword,
condition.
state,
bhrtinli, delusion,
436*.
b idi
is,
(?),
rya
(cf.
a";
a";
376
past 1st pers. sing, vyi,
iv
3rd pers. sing, vye, A 1
vyd, 3 6
r>/ii,
26a
";
256
j "-
bich, to
386
200
v;
5a
vi/ela,
46iv
vyetd,
vyitd,
a",
32
86
a^
186^
266
33 #v. j/fo.p^ 6 6 !ii
-";
jiii.
30a
->v;
!ii
;
nom.
Xsai la;
28
a>
(-vrd-)
sing,
6wrmw<7,,
296ii
31 a
;
bisivrrasai, 156
40 6 ;
4 ; gen.
";
366
6 iv
36
nom. plur.
is bifUvrrasainii, cf.
156"
28 a
"
down,
24ai;
decay
bilsamga,
blhl,
366";
;
pres.
part,
the
order
subst.,
cants, or collection of
6
bi-samrjii,
3.
bijevamdai,
(-wo);
"
monks;
instr.
sing.
])lur. pres.
ace. sing.
bil-8<<ga-na,
>
a"
expounding, propagation, A 3.
bisai, adj., staying, being (I); nom. plur.
bisa, adj.,
all,
biysan,
iv
bcysedyc, 42 6
sing. biM, 26
;
suffixed pronoun
biiii,
276*;
nom.
plur.
I,
lift,
with suffixed
fetVrt,
316";
26
ace. sing.
I,
6o;
ttVi,
34a-v
t,
3;
41^
bill,
brriya,
instr.
21
23
future par-
3aiv
41
bay-
a"
2.
love, affection
law,
186"
(Leumann)
;
loc.
sing.
cf. Old
Pers.
jxtruva, 31 o"; brruhadd, in the earlier
of
the day, in the morning, 4
part
a"
6"
brrun,
(bru-).
to sliine;
3rd
pers.
plur,
pres.
brrufuiri, 41&1.
bud,
inf. butte,
act. butti,
ij
plur.
subst.,
brrlj/d,
28
nom.
to
biysathda,
biysamjdre,
mendi
of
sing, bislvrrdsainn,
136".
ace.
to
lisa,
vya,
206"*;
4a
6 6
56;
nine
lie
";
6 iv
";
6 iv
29.
bhava,
226^; 26
has obtained,
biSau,
btiamna,
ISa
6
gen. plur.
bUaah, 27 a ; A 33 ;
2 a"; harbi&a,
batarima, 76
bisiina,
all and every, 10a
6 H ; 40 6 1 ;
30
26 gen. liarbi&dmnii, 3 6 ; biSa, used as
baysumfta,
sing,
A41.
pers. sing,
bustarh,
33 a
34
276
v
6*<a,336
426
36
39; past
32 #
;
*
38 a iv future
35
busta,
146-";
A 26
-";
38;
37;
bu*ta,
part,
bustl,
6"
bvamfid,
24 a
buddhafield
loc. sing, buddhaksetra,
6
23 (-ksettra) ; 25 (-ksettra) ; gen.
;
33 ; buddhaksitrd,
plur. bnsldluikfettra,
19 6 v
34 a
bwldhaksitravyuha, a dis
;
play of buddhaksetras, 20 a
buhumarhna, loanword, Skr. bahumana,
respect, esteem, 41
bujsa, subst., merit, virtue
gen. plur.
.
a"
fyujsa,
3.
";
35a"-*ii.
to obtain;
bythtdi,
14^;
25a
bijfhl^i,
22
vyufia.
byus, to
brcome
byii.(t<i,
sari,
41 6
when
light
bunaspa,
17;
make
a"
-";
sing,
ace. sing, bydta, 4 6iv ; byata yani, I
recollection, I remember, 26 a ; 30
-";
>\
335
bydta, 43 a
-"
yad; nom.
subst.,
"
jsa,
aiv
266
busana,
buysya, adj., long
";
lla"
;
iv
;
buysyejslni ay tmarhma,
adj.,
2.
byata,
name
propr.,
of a
man,
41.
376
varla,
camda,
iv .
how much,
pron.,
with suffixed
Phi. cand,
366
la .
3rd pers. sing. pres.
2.
The form is not certain.
cidn,
carai, subst., apparently used to translate
I,
cai ndl, 2
cf. Pers. ct
ray; ace.
carau pracaina, with the help of
a lamp, 42 o hi
carya,
life
loanword,
gen.
sing,
Ixxlhicaryii, 2
bvaumai,
Cadipyaina, nom.
cedarhma,
subst.,
ei.
38
C0hai6a, unidentified word see kanna.
oi, interrogative pronoun, Zd. 01, compare
cu ; nom. sing, cf, what 1 22 a 111 gen. sing,
# 2 96* ; 31^;
of, of which! 10
32
37a v ; ce, 386^; relative pro
H
1
28 #
noun, nom. sing, cf, 11 6 ; 12 6
fi".
a",
a";
subst., recollection,
memory,
Pers.
VOCABULARY TO
336
pare CM.
translate
cd,
"
"
31
37
33a
6>;
Skr.mf, 10a iv
cf.
Cl,conj.,if;
s
,
41 6
206
and
"*
a"
if,
6"
Skr.
yavant
nom.
sing,
cu-
iv
bura, 2 6 ; nom. plur. cu-bura, 9 a ; ace.
plur. cu-bura, A24; cu-ttira, how far, how
1
iv
much, 6 a
cu-ttira, 7 6 ; cu-ttara, G a
"
oira,
shedding,
shedding of tears, 24
cittya, loanword, Skr.
sub.-t.,
296" ;
cithjfi,
cf.
cittye,
a".
caitya
22 a
gen. sing.
26.
eaiftya,
"
clrarn,
what kind
crra, pron.,
like as, just as, 42
46
56
ace.
crrd mdihiiamda,
crraihma, as,
>t
a"
11 6
used as
on, interrogative-relative pronoun
tin interrogative, which, what; nom. ting.
en, 396"; cu hard, what matter 1 why
with kina
386"
10 a
126";
(Jxra)
iH
CM mani, a particle
added, 116"; 166
".
of interrogation,
lot
6*
7 6
18 a
""
"
H6
";
a";
! -
";
"
6"
A3;
-"-
cu,
";
";
"
12
20 6*
38
fr"
14 &Ui
23
39
;
a",
a"
15
&i
16
if,
because,
iu
a"
19
&"
33 a**
25 6U 27 a*
with enclitic
4 1 6 Wi ; 43 a
6"
a",
so that,
da,
law,
subst.,
religion,
sing, da, 15 a
21 6 iv ; 22 a iv
17
!i
;
6 iv
39 6
40 a
"
28a iv
246";
24
29
18
a"
a"-
a",
276
29 a iv
6>
;
;
2; 3; gen. sing.
in love of the law, 3 a iv ; da
406 iv ; the fuller
a";
da brrlya,
form data
d&tn,
26
176"i;
ddt t,
is
3 a
";
4 6
a";
a"
6".
23 6 U
6>
21a
cf.
1
darhvau, subst., wik animal, used
dah<i,
late nirya,
A 26
daihvam, gen.
darmaha,
dasa,
to trans
(probably miswritten for
plur.).
see dfiarmaha,
work
subst.,
used to trans
treatise,
paryaya, A 3.
dasau, numeral, ten;
late
darns vd,
dasta,
subst.,
23
das vd,
12
a"
33.
sing, dasta,
loc.
6"
uncertain, dasti, 42
6".
".
",
debisi, unidentified,
deda,
24.
see di.
a con
instr.
a",
6"i;
in the
vlra,
dharmdmnd lira, 11
266
dharmaha, subst., loanword,
;
the
matd,
1
a"
nom.
".
dharmaparyaycl, 146
v
dharmftp(ir>/(iyn, 16 ct
ace.
work;
gen.
connected
to,
3rd pers.
sing, present
276 iv ; 28^; 426 iv ditta, 28
3rd pcrs. plur.
38
3rd pcrs.
v
plur. present middle dydri, 41 6
past
v
28a
future
part. pass, dya, 14 a ;
28
6 iv
12
part. pass, dydwf,
dyumnd,
13
23rt; 276 iv 376*"; 38 a 1
iij
40 a
dyaihna, 38 n
;
"
daitta,
de<1a,
ffl
a";
"
didarhda,
didira, 2
la";
adverb, so
10
kind, 20 6
ace.
much,
so,
iv
dadiirii, 2 6 .
a";
didrrama,
adj.,
dadrrdma,
13
a* v
cf.
296"
22a
436>
A3;
296i;
imper. dijsd,
Dipamkara,
;
396
30^;
dijmmde,
v
;
dijri,
3;
226*.
39 a ^;
12 n
22 a
loc.
A 26
diia,
diiifla,
plur. ditva,
diid,
29
6"
26
12a i!i
33.
ditva,
ditta, see di.
however Old
Irish doe,
i.e.
*dhavio,
"
43ai
drruja,
13 a
nom. drruja,
drrumjii, 33a v.
of accomplishment,
276
duskara,
1
;
adj., difficult
duskara
nom.
du?kara, 24 a
2oa
iv
iv
;
sing. du*karci, 56 ; 25a
instr. sing, duskare-jsa,
;
i.
dvasse,
twelve hundred,
numeral,
drdai, 4 a
(i.e.
dvdradirsd, 236
sau\ 23 a ; 40 a
;
*
(written dvnradiradirsau).
dya,
dyarhma,
39a
Ix lief,
view,
subst.,
eysninnai,
42 6;
opinion,
23.
subst., a prince ;
2 ; voc. eysdrhnd,
ace.
sing.
3.
the
Dlpamgard,
a"
19 6*:
gabhira,
Dlpakara,
gaha,
166i; 216*;
galut,
23 6iv
v
6"
gdOd
366v
ace. sing.
406^; gdha,
sing, gathgd, 2 la
15.
gaga,
loc.
23 6
or
28 6 !i
Garhga,
Buddha Dlpamkara;
30a lv
Dlpamkara, 19
n. pr.,
gen. or abl.
32 a1
diianfi,
rftVa,
337
28a
gen. sing.
sing, dtiaiia,
eysarhnai,
T
6 iji 3rd pers. sing, diysde,
; 39
perhaps miswritten diysedd,
\vith suffixed I, diysdai, 43a iv
conjunc
tive 3rd pers. sing, dijsati, 2 6 iv
216 ;
3rd
dljsdte,
pers. plur. dijsadi,
sing,
6>>;
loc.
29 a iv
ttramma.
diia, 22 a
a"
nom. plur.
iji
plur. didira, 28 6
iv
24
a
didira,
dddird,
many
didira,
nom.
21
Skr. dhar-
law or right
being
20a iv
dharmas,
VOCABULARY TO
338
i!i
ha ni kaita, does
destroyed (?), 41 a
ha mandihila
not come up against, 37a
garii,
gara,
206";
inst r.
206*";
garnath,
garkha,
praiseworthy, 22
sing.
43a
sing.
21.
instr.
grauna, subst., a garland
yraunyau (perhaps yraittyau), A 3.
;
plur.
marks,
,
6"
gen. plur.
heap of un
;
gunaaparamitta samcaya,
measured virtues, name of a world, A 2
gunaaparamittasamcaya, the same, A 6.
gars, to address 3rd pers. sing, past gurte,
A 2 giifife, 36
;
a"
346";
is
made
guttiji, the
of flesh
cf.
same, 346
Phi. goit,
the form
nom. plur.
26.
subst., ear; loc. sing, graihna,
gvfina, perhaps part, of base corresponding
gva,
to Zd. gu,
cf. huyvana.
gvdjhna, 43 l*
gyasta, subst., a venerable one, a god, divine,
Zd. yatata , gen. sing. gyasta, 2$$; gyasta,
2l6
iv
;
40; used as
;
part of compounds, gyatta-, 44
common in the phrase gyattarvi gyasta
bayid, the venerable of venerables (the
god of gods), the exalted, used to denote
the Buddha ; see baytd.
first
a"
H
denoting the direction towards, cf.
Zd. A ; A 23
ha ni bajaitti, is not
lia, adv.,
Ski
eva in
order to add emphasis, 386
hadi,
;
136i; 226 246*; 316" ; 396iv;
10a"i;
41 (ti- ,6 v; 41a, 6 s ;
40 hada, 106"
{i
18 6
126 ; 1 6
hade, 1 G 6
hada,
-"
hada,
subst.,
morning, 4
in
day,
o"
ivahada, at noon,
286";
the
in
brru-hadii,
286".
wise,
adj.,
see hamjsa.
instr.
knowing;
nom.
a"
s-ing.
plur. hajva,
6""
",
a";
Leumann instead of
36
united; Zd. hama\ ohl.
according to
yastii,
hama,
adj.,
same,
7; 8; 9;
hamye,
15 haihmye, A 14.
".
11
10;
12
14;
hamada,
adv.,
in
always, 14
hamiln, 136".
6"-
44
present,
&i.
136"i.
adj.,
effect,
17.
38
hlita,
hajva hvadfi-na, 3
"
hajva,
Zd.
realize,
4.
hadaina, wandering
15.
27o ;
(jaona; nom. plur. grind, 230"
gen. plur. guna, 116 ; ayuna, non-murks,
23a iv ; 40rt
gu6taija,
Ad yan, to
41 a ^; A
ha rvaidd,
characteristics,
fcubst.,
6";
286iv
39aiv
yrltcesye-jsa,
a"
>
iv
246";
perhaps
an adverb, altogether; garkhusla, 41a iv ;
garkhye, A 21.
gitti, apparently inf. of verb
perhaps corre
sponding to Zd. gattc; parl gltti, he might
cause togo[?] 276".
guna,
";
nom.
any way
15
a"
at all
A 30
equal,
31
31
times,
32
written
hambar,
fill,
hampar; gerund ham6m, 156 \hambira, 21a iu 36a iv ham6m, 406iii past part, harhbadd, A 28
Zd.
to
haihbadam,
ham bis,
32.
iv
pers. sing, past hambittd, 2 a .
hambisa, subst., a heap, collection
blsai,
156iv
nom.
sing,
A 30
3rd
blia-na,
29a
14a;
41a<;
286
instr. sing,
ham-
nom. plur.
6
a"
hamdara,
ij
harivlada,
favour
hariularai,
I,
haindara-jaa, 8 6
nom.
366"
G a
hai ndara-jsa,
with
sing,
instr. sing.
hariidara-jsa,
6*
19
King, hiiiidarye,
(laramnd,
216";
166
hrnhdiryaih,
29
haiiutara,
a"
a";
ham-
gen. plur.
4
hamdaryainnii, 4 la
23 6iv
Jiai udaranu,
a"
a"
ftnjtaihdai-na,
40a
hamkhiysa,
a";
v
hadai-tiu, 8 6
4.
nom.
v
enumerated, 9 o ; huihkJuyati inasci,
as much as can be counted, 31
harhphu, to be provided with, together
with; 3rd pers. sing, past hamphre,
ii. iii. iv
1 7 a
ji. p as t p ar t. lutiiiphva, 14 a
v
25
28 b\
iij
hamrrasta, adv., all right, altogether, 3 a
tion,
a".
";
6>
a",
4l6i;"44a.
haiiitsa,
Zd. haca
the
29a iv
hanasa,
hamtsd,
hatsa,
96";
a",
put in
is
iv
2l6
40 61
gen. harbiidmnd, 3
hara, see hara.
hariys, to be frightened, to tremble,
a".
and
26
;
cf.
Pers.
25 a ji *.
haru,
sing, haru, 4
ha?kama,
subst., a
sing, luukamti,
36
cf.
haur
gen.
hatcanuka,
hum,
";
subduing, overpowering,
part.,
2.
33a
Zd. haiOya, 27 a 1
adj., true,
-"
v.
plur.
40
6"
28
haur,
28
to give
seventy-seven,
1 1
hidi,
a";
";
30 (miswritten hawlyarh).
hauparahauda, num.,
6"i
36 6
9.
hiidci,
406"
hidct,
!Ga v 21
286iv;
3rd pers. sing. opt. fuiurl,
A 28; pres. part, luiuraka, 116 past
v
fiaudd, 7 6 ; 8 6 ;
part, lunwli, 06
156";
126";
31
a"i
";
28
lla iv
2()6
27 a
rt
ii.
i.
pass,
6
11 a j
iii.
126";
iv
ii
y.
a"
haurl,
ace.
28
haurii,
sing,
6 iv
a"
306
Kia"-;
156";
Z,
20a iv
21
heap;
ace.
";
a gift
>
126
subst.,
126"
haurand,
participle
JtauraiHHii,
haura,
1 1
fut.
A 28
406"
116
hauram,
with sutHxed
31.
6".
subst., influence,
power, conse
34 ; 35;
quence; instr. sing, hauvi-jsa,
36; 38;
36; 37; 39; hauva-jsa, A 34
39 miswritten hauvila-jsa, A 38 ; gen.
39 ; hauva,
37
36
sing. Iiauvi,
35.
34 38 hauvi-jsa,
hauyuda, that can easily be done, 1 1 6^ ;
;
see huyudd.
subst., excellency
hava-anuJatiutt,
hayaramdai,
1.
collection,
6 !ii
written,
hasta, adv.,
cf. Zd. arxJa.
hava,
a merchant,
A 8;
ha*tvd,
30 6
Zd. hattama;
6"
aitaiti,
hauva,
42
Jiar-bifa, all
;
1.
339
loc.
32 ; loc.
sing, liakhlyaii,
Hing.JunhJchlfa ysaya, produced in enumera
Zd. \sd
cf.
hastama,
Jtedii,
18.
hauda,
561.
hamjse,
A3;
17.
hatha,
cf.
aslamiiu i, 39 6
hamdara,
subst.,
suffixed
7a
hamdad/i,
8a
hamdar
4.
liv
part., reposing, dwelling,
VOCABULARY TO
340
to
haysna,
3rd
wash;
haysnatii, 4
pere.
sing,
past
6".
at
hiimiiin
Wa^I
3rd
Zd. ham-i,
cf.
pers.
present
sing,
"
a"
6>
10a>
a";
10a iT
31
6>*
176
37
hdme,
31
116
a"
196";
106"
32
19a iv
43
22 a
17 a
harniya, 26 a
376
hamye, 46"; 44
pern plur. hamya,
hara, hira, subst.,
nom. sing, hard,
v
126
hira, 8 a
iv
"
6"-
29a iv 43 a*;
;
hama, 18a
17;
-
iv
;
a";
6*
home, 24 a
hama, 186
256
iv
hama, 14
27
2l6
"
hamyeta,
6"
6";
";
^;
27 6iij
hard,
hara
an
41 6iv
object,
o"
iT
&"
31ⅈ
Mna,
subst.,
29.
army,
3rd pers.
hJvi,
adj.,
plur. hiydm,
A 32.
ddhd;
23
hudihuna,
236
hugvana, perhaps,
a1
men,
cf.
hudihuna,
";
realized, 4
hujsada,
"
that
12
western,
adj.,
can
be
easily
see gvdna.
(uncertain,
a"
perhaps nihujsdda).
Pali
subst., a dream, Zd.
j^ o/ha,
supina ; ace. sing, hund, 42 6 1T
bus, to sleep, Zd. ^afs ; pree. part, hutamdd, 42 V*.
husa, unidentified word, 3 a ; perhaps hu,
for .jg, he.
well, and
huynda, that can easily be done, 116" ;
cf. hauyudi.
huyudi, 1 2 a
hvadii, past part, of verb corresponding to
r
Zd. x ar, to eat ; hvada khdysd, after the
food had been eaten, 4 6
huna,
6"*
",
7a iv
sing,
hrv.li, 4
present
v
hvlde, 38 &
hvdna, 27 a
136"
386
8 a
3r<l
ii!
3rd
446
hvdne,20a*
hvdftlye,
236
hvdnl, 39 a
6"
hvuld,
passive
3rd
1st
hrdfilmd, 8
act.
27
";
mis-
2nd
a";
pers.
pers. sing.
a"
12 a
17a"i,6iii;
22a
6
19a
18o<-;
6i; 23 o
326* -^;
ii.iyji.iii.iv;
395ii.iii ; 4o
24
336"-iv
36 a*,
a ui.iv
21o;
25a ;31a
^6";
o;
34 ftii.iii.iv
37 a\ 6
4i a v
44
1
6";
35 a t.
38o
a";
3rd
22.
to good
l>elonging
28
nom. plur.
;
gen. plur. hirdmnd, 6 6 ;
7
aAartna, devoid of objects, used
;
to translate Skr. anupadhiiesa, 10 a ;
vlra, in
hdra, 34 a
adj.,
3rd pers.
a".
hudihuna,
7; 8; 9; 10; 11;
pers. plur. hvdmdd,
12; hvamda, A 14; hvddd, 2 5 a
6;
hvdda, A 15; perf. part. pass, hva, 36 { ;
15 a"; 226i; 23 a*; 276*; 34 a^ ;
",
A40;
22
22
hvata,
6;
40a
23 a*;
iv
;
336i;
gen. hvaye,
a; 326^;
39
7o";
6^;
39o
8aui
20a;
-^;
13aU;
Awayat, 22
ai
fut.
32o
i;
hvanai,
jii
;
A 40
13o;
iy
-";
ace.
words;
subst., saying,
hvanai,
8o
i;
iij
106
hvanai,
part. pass,
34a
sing.
22
a"
6*; 25
a*
a"
32 6-
341
39 6.
the right,
right ; hvarariicaind, to
hvaramcliid, 29 6 ; hvarariidai, adj.,
5 6H .
hraram,
fi
a"
ight,
x hv
.sta,
41^;
17.
bering one s previous births,
jasta, see gyasta.
defeat
;
jauni, subst., overpowering,
ace. jaiini,
186";
jrtimt,
gen. plur.
nom.
pa,
3rd pers.
gen. plur.jarfdwuio,
v.
v
6"
noin.
plur. jatlyau,
I6
hvdxjlta, well established, peaceful,
1
hve, subst., a man; nom. sing, hve, 146" ;
instr.
27 &
20 6
*; 33 ft;
1
jadau, 38
instr.
";
Zd.
probably identical with
adj.,
386
jada,
]>lur.
iv
cf.
an
kamu-jd, kuttaijd, namu-jd; used as
cl jd hve, if
indefinite pronoun, 23 &
336 ; jd-rae, adds em
any man, 206
36.
"
I,
the
pronoun, usually with
meaning of an accus. or gen. of the de
It coalesces with
monstrative pronoun.
a preceding a or e to of and with a to I
aysdamrjai, A
compare Cn/sdai, A 24
14 6
13 6*
12 a- *
33 6oyrf, 9 a
an
enclitic
&"
iv
306Wv
i,n,,n,,-imni
ij
cum, 29 a
dall,
haurl-ye, A
31
146";
7 a*;
AArot, 36*;
"
raysi,
a"
19aiv
4l6iv
23
j
;
a>
pracainai, 21
5M6A^i,
^uftAuvi,
2; 4;
; yari,
34 #;
7 6
40a
aaf, 22
61
fe
17 a
18 o
iil
;
39
a*"
pers.
see ah.
23
Mat,
ft
26 a
1
;
32 a
14oiv
25 1
(-sarhiid).
3aH
9a
iy
60^,6
a";
";
7& Uv
86*-";
25 a, 6 ;
37ti.ii.iii.iv
38ai; A 15; 32; 34;
in
it
is
the instr.
39
38
35 ; 36
put
u 15a*,&"; 17ai\&i ;21
plur. in 4 o
i
{
yudai, 5 6 *.
of verb subst, see ah.
5, 3rd pers. sing. opt.
verb subst.,
plur. present of
Ida, 3rd
fnaf, 3
1.
v
WiMm, 22
8a; 39 W u A 21;
nammai, A 3 ipastaf,
;
iv
Jeta; gen. sing. Jlvd, 3 6
jivasamfia,
&"*;
8 6iv ;
a"
pr.,
hamdarai 36
15^";
226Ui
6";
samkhalunyau-jsai,
^dmnat,
23 a ; 33 #
buna-
iij
maranakdll, A 23 ;
36 a ; plrldai, 29
1
budarl,
37<l
ArAtTt,
A3; 21
35 a-
AT)//7M-iflt. 37 a 1
bu$pyau-jtai,
5f>
n.
Jiva,
A
39 fciii 40 o iv bitl, 3 a
iv
24 o
byaudai, 34
".
3rd
decay, to disappear, Zd. jya; pres.
30 a iij ;
pers. plur. jdri, they disappear,
A 3 16.
past part, jya, A 6 ja,
ji, to
i26iv
jiii.iy;
v>
18 6s
";
a"i;
23a
ii
;
is
276*;
36a
38aii,^;
1; 3; 15; 30;
40a, &iK;
;
iT
with
put in the gen. plur. 28 a ;
39olv
it
2661
VOCABULARY TO
342
-";
a"
a";
a"
76"
6";
conj.
3ai; jsfTre, 3 8
apparently n copulative particle,
Old J ers. ca,
6 jsam, A 3 23.
jsdti,
ft",
jnni,
cf.
4.
43 6 !ii
jsvaka,nnideutifiedparticiple,2a >;cf.5rrana.
juna, Mihst.. turn, time, -fold; ncc. plur.
juna. A 3 4 (miswritten ju) 6 ; should
probably be written juna.
jvaka, subst., life, a living being, cf. Zd.
jra jrdka-rt, about a living being, 246 ;
;
>
jvaka
vira,
l>]nr.
jyajtlnya,
life is
3;
exhausted
nom.
cf.jl.
w jfi,
iv
rt iii.
A 34
35
eing. I ttha,
J,asta t
36
A 32.
Kanakamuni,
loc.
Sl ]ffi xecl
;
kilJtatta,
37
a"
a"
karmaya, loanword,
30 a
n.
Skr. Kasyapa,
pr.,
a buddha,
g,
kaitri,
31ai";
37a"i.
kauloparhma, loanword,
like
ft
146
raft,
";
kama,
a".
Skr.
kolopama,
j
.
khad; hvada
kJidijsa, after
khu,
to the
subst.,
bubble
(?), lit.
belong
nom.
6".
adv.,
66"
of
plur. kliaysmula, 42
name
30.
ing
;
ness, 4 6
256
Skr.
pr.,
38 39.
kara, according to Leumann n. particle;
compare Skr. kila 2
kara, 38 a v
;
karma, loanword, Skr. karma, work, action
nom. plur. karma, 30
in 26 we read
kanna-cchaisa, which I cannot explain.
khaysmulai,
ka, conjunction, when, if, 3a T A 3.
kalarri, subst., Skr. kaliraja, the kalikit
n.
khaysa,
6".
Ka^ava,
subst., a
Kanakamuna,
jsa,
kana,
6 iv
2a
16 a"; 206
42
;
jn
^-"-iv;
subordinate sentences, how, 8 6 iu so that
27 o
406 ; 41ai; 436"i;
36i; 116
with va and ?, khvai, 36* as, so as, 146"
-
";
karhma, pronominal
kammfi, 5 6 Ui ;
28; 29; 33;
written kauma,
17a
256
which, 7A.katan\a;
176"
A3; 6; 22; 27;
kamma, 5 a*; A 16; misadj.,
;
perhaps
";
mamna, 39a
v
;
kamfia,
2l6
sing, kaT
;
*da
26.
226"
146iv
iT;
34 a.
a"
a";
276-iv
43
1
a"
as
when,
A 6;
if,
when]
6".
ki4a
i1
";
39
;
41
116";
20o;
ai.
20.
ace.
klaiiinai,
sing,
fanlja ,376
406
4.
kBamautitija,
ance
36.
n.
Ksantaviidii,
20 a
36 a^
oc
16a iv
lovadeta,
lotadeca, A 2.
lovya, loanword, derived from Skr. loka,
belonging to the world ; the word is nom.
25
44n
sing, fern.,
v
;
40.
36 iv
is loc. sing.,
A sdntiradin,
446
Zd
the form
the same, 4 o
40 a
where, 2
ku<!a,
/[
*/
kustai-ju\
rz
kuburii,
how
wherefrom,
A 24; kutta,
, where,
kusta-burii, wherever,
Jsu-jsa,
29 a iv
126 iv kufla-jd, anywhere, 11
a";
so far as,
96 iv
as far as,
10 a
206"
a>;
do not, 136
25
6 Hi
2G f
mam,
";
38 6
40
gen.
!i
a"
Skr.
Hi
306
ordinal kuliina, the
koti, 286
hundred millionth, 31 a
kura, adj., wrong, false, 1 3 a iv 20 a; 38 a
;
million*,
cf.
6 iu
;
kura, the same, 42 a"; cf. Skr./tara.
ku^ala, loanword, Ski kuiala, bliss ; gen.
6 iU
Sefc -iii; it is
sing, kufala, 2 la"
1
mu
la iv
md.
loanword,
maharddftika,
magical power
g U. plur.
mahairdyaih, A 22.
mahapura^alaksana, loanword, Skr. mahapossessing
pnrnsa;
23
jsa,
marks of
the
rnuhu-
40rt :i
ij
;
mahasaliasri, loanwoid, cf. Puli maliasahasn t, name of a world; gen. sing, mahdsahasrri
10a v mahdfahairi/p, A 28;
,
15
inahastdtasrrye,
30 a iv
mahasaliasrya,
mahasamudra,
cf.
sing.
Skr.
iiTitfalakfana,
".
146
when,
with copulative or emphatic u, ku,
adv.,
24a iv
Zd. ,W0ra
cf.
;
Skr.
pr.,
moment;
far,
156
ace. lovadata,
28;
In-addta,
5 a5
ji
ii!
gods
cf.
ku,
lorada,
class of
lukfanalji,
";
376^.
in
19a;
lakmnlji, 376
343
norn. jilur.
loc. King,
mahdyrimfia,
7 a
mahd-
27 a v mahayamfia,
ydiia, 316
Mamjusri, nom. propr., Skr.
6 iv ;
8a",
name
of a bodlnsattva
voc. Maihjnsrya,
2;
4.
Mamjusryam,
Afafijufrf,
ace.
Maihjuin,
2;
Afajusrya,
Majusryam,
Pers.
mdnand,
marhnarhda, part., like, a.-,
22 a 276 v 336 43a iij mdmnamda,
236
manamdd,
286";
26";
42a*;
29
mdmfiain, 20 6 ; mdtnnadd, A 26.
{
:i
lak^anija,
adj., consisting
12
of marks
6;
instr.
37 6; lak-
>
6"
marhfia,
unidentified,
Zd.
man
6"
meaning
ir .
notion 43
man, to consider
,
perhaps
VOCABULARY TO
344
38
39
fut.
manamnd, 22 a
part. pass,
mamnd.
maQarh,
manavai,
a"
mara,
316
Mara,
43 a
7a;
here,
adj.,
1
#"
6iv
a",
Oo
mara, 31 a
Oue
1
-";
306; muhum-jsa,
loanword, Skr.
murkha, a fool;
38
6"
mula, loanword,
of
afterwards
inaSl.
cf.
Zd.
cf.
.
maranaka.il,
I,
23.
20
31ai; 37
much
as a
utmdmna,
ttl
"
226"
midarimii,
ddmna,
mista,
a,
23 a
merciful
b
336"-
iv
;
156v;
66";
fciii
a",
31a
366" ;
20
v
376";
400"
";
a"
",6
tnd-
iv
iij -
24
iv
6 iv
19
->v
a",
6"
25^",
o iv
-
iv
;
28
306";3l6i; 32 a330^,6^;
37 a iii.iv
4l a
42a";
43a*; 44a
A 17; 22; 27; 30; 31; 35; 36; 39;
32 nai (not it), 28 6iv naiye, and
ne,
iv
iv
not, 38a ; na-na, 246 ; na-ni, 25
31 a
nat -na, 146 iv ;
ni-ni, 246";
15
17.
"
o";
"i;
b"
";
a";
midana,
26
a"
316";
4o iv
sing,
mdild,
plur.
mutt, 3
plur. mistyau,
(2)
20
Ui
6"-
na-ti,
17a; 18a;
now, namely,
J
7a iv 6i
;
na-td, 12
; nti,
particle,
especially in queries
1 1
6"
na, 6
;
27ai; ne,
a"
";
a>
12^
t,
2o";
13a>";
cf.
206-"i
-"
ml, then,
further
326".
sing, mdstd,
38 a
19
24a;
";
adj., great,
mitt*,
a"-
a"
cf.
voc. sing,
midamna, 56 iv
17
a"
1 5a
20
man,
adj.,
";
6"
";
cf.
18 a
1 6 a
6^"
";
pron.,
midana,
a";
>"
ft"i
a";
behind him
~A~24.
mata, probably
:
"
".
44 a
6"-
25
26
v; 23"i; 24 633
34 a
376"; 38o,6";
40 a
6
4l6 iv 43
A 17; 22; 34;
37
38
1 2
26 a !ii
na, 1 1
41 6i 43 a
A 1 7 ;. ni, 9 6i 10 6
iu
11 aii.iii^i; 12>v; 136
14
27
main, so
a"
6>;
utmamna
126"->
";
"
ma,
24 a^;
a";
nom.
Al.
mukha,
see
18a-iv 19
iv
a";
336
A 33
instr.
mitta-na, 4 a 1 ;
miftd,
60^,6";
4a ui ;
loc.
nom.
76^;
inst.
1.
6iv
Zd. maibyd, 18
1
muhu-j#a, by me, 1 a ;
33
a 6s * ;
j
a";
";
"i-
>*
a"-
>,
"
6"
i.
i.
33
39a
(-na);
43a lv
30
37
316-
a";
H, 6
i-
a"
32
38 a (-ne)
v
40ai
-->;
"
a"
\b
38 a*
426";
6>;
44 a
A7; 8; 9; 10; 11 ;
12 14 15 23 31
it is used with the
sense of an abl. in 56
19 6 {ii
na, to take 3rd pers. ping, past nali, 4 a
3rd pers. plur. ndnidii, A 40 past part.
6 ji
ai-v,
Ji.il.lv;
41
sweep away
a";
";
iji
a, &i
39
ndmmam, A
a*.
nama, name
loanword, Skr.
nama, 22
376*; 40
33b"i;
iv
;
nauma,
6>-
<
-"-
";
namasyddti, 5
navdysye, 4 o
nama,
28
naryajsave, loanword,
birth in hell
loc.
Skr>
naryajsavena,
nasphan,
emphatic particle
ye, nasdnti-ye,
30 a
11
23.
cf.
ttu nijsada,
34
a.
;
loc.
sing.
to
34ai.
ni^ta,
is
not
see ah.
cf.
Skr.
a",
nyaparhda,
to be made known
see nap.
nyaya, loanword, Skr. nadl, a
;
sing, nydya,
15.
21a
236*
river; gen.
286";
nyuvijsa,
adj., north,
12
a"
ndyd,
(uncertain).
b"
6"
28 a
";
power ; 3rd
41 o1
38
23;
15;
14;
1 7.
over
pers. sing. conj. ncuati, 16 # ;
3rd pers. plur. pres. middle, ndsdre,
24 6* ;
; pres. part, nataka, 116";
future part. pass, natahd, 8 aM ; 9 a ; with
nas,
12;
narakajdli, re
11;
najsas, to explain,
&">.
10.
276
;
a"
9;
a".
8;
7;
nfiyula,
a".
ace.
nivas, to put on
3rd pers. sing, past,
ndmma,
A4
with
suffixed *, ndmmai, A 3
often used ad
18 a iv ;
verbially, by name, namely, 2
;
;
426
unidentified word,
nauhya,
nauvaranau,
23.
43 6 i!i
num.,
nine,
7
ninety-nine,
cf.
nau,
6"
o>
rt iv.
32a
nama,
";
na,
nasama,
345
o,
coni.,
and, or, 9 6
106-;
32a;
or,
14 o^;
366*;
VOCABULARY TO
15 6
";
32
21a
ji
286
lG6i; 21 a*;
cf.
aw, 38
w, 386
6"
29ai,
o ra,
*;
a m,
way,
41
A2
tints,
2G; 28;
pamaka,
"
loc.
ona, vendor,
years, probably Iwrroweil from Skr. paiicatall; gen. sing. pamcdi;ri, 136"; 306
".
a"
instr. plur.
pacadana,
paryayena,
28&
6".
manner,
\Wf.ji~nla pachlygde,
alyf*
known, 3 a\
pot>.
sing. opt.
padamja,
up, to accumulate;
31.
padlme,
or
ndj.
3rd
perhaps
postposition,
446
padauysa,
ordinal,
(1)
first,
>.
Zd. panti,
noc. sing, ttu padl, that
way, so,
cf.
16
42a iv ; 436"; ace. plur.
416";
drrai party a, in three
way?, threefold,
1 6
nan padya, in nine ways, 436
was
pahausta, part., 18 6i; perhaps
d reeled in
versed in ; cf, prahattfii.
;
";
".
pajsam,
t-.
that
should
viewed
be
in front,
436
(I),
";
cf.
tji
41 6
pana, adv., before, in front, 4
par, to mitke over to another, to abandon,
to
with
the
infinitive
utter;
give away;
of other verbs it forms a kind of eausals
3rd pcrs. plur. pros, jxmf/i pidi, they
give to write, they cause to be written,
306 v 3rd pors. sing. opt. pan, he would
a"
narli/a, 21 6 iv
20
;
honour;
pafrt part,
29a lv
paja-
iv
28
giveaway, 276
pan g~>tti,oi\f
might leave to go(!), 276"; part plde,
he would give to write, A3; 4
G
27
a"
5
parl, 3 a
pld<i
";
"
27 6 !ii
forms
The explanation
some of these
of
uncertain.
is
parabhutta,
loanword,
overcome, 296 lv
Skr.
paribhuta,
xvor^hip, to
fxytamevye,
ting,
1.
";
subst.,
]>aQa
he uttered,
padi,
to build
padam,
4a
pyaihttd.
to bo
pachls,
pamjsdfau,
see par.
pamsti,
bccomo attached;
to
parah,
Infinitive (1)
par/thi pasta, caused to bo attached, 27 6
used to translate Skr. vattupatita ; 3rd
1
",
27a
406
3rd
({
pcrs. sing, past, parautti, 5 6 ; past part.
p draurt,used to translate f&r.praliffhita
nom.
20o iU
t
sing,
266
v
;
p&rauttti,
28a
rautia(1), 44 a
10 61 ; 1 1 a i
raulta,
266iv
parahlnai,
instr. sing,
p&rautld,
parautta,
ava~
a*";
parautta-na,
1 1
ava;
a"
adj.,
obi. pardhije,
param, aged
avdrautta, 20
{i
A 35.
parammldi,
296"".
;n;
indigcixius suffix
26ri
28 a
25 a iv
a"
";
paranirvnyamnn, 316 *.
parasa,
pleasant, prohahly borrowed
from Skr. pratadika; nom. sing. fem.
a<lj.,
parasa, 2 a
parautta,
paraysda,
iv
parsa, 2 6
see pnrah.
unidentified
3rd
22 a
;>rga,
sing.
pcrg.
pdrasa.
.
^uhst., night,
i">.
paekya^a,
kyfitfa,
PJite,
put
off,
chopped
25 6,
/><$/[),
i";
&"
inslr.
pharakyau,
(written pharan-
yau),
pharrii, subst., fruit, result,
17n
6".
should
be brought away
pichasta, adj., manifest, A 23.
pindfi, loanword,
pindaija, in order
phiana,
jwss., that
from, 26 &
fut.
partieij>le
>Skr.
iv .
".
p ulc, A3; 4; 6j
v
3rd pcre.
pWi, 30 6
with nuftixed I,
plur. pres. plridf, A 26
pir, to write;
27
infinitive
41; fuJii, 3 a
plrldai, write
it,
29a
il
;
18.
part.,
arisen,
56<;
24a
<v
40 a.
patca, adv., again, moreover, A3; 8
;
10; 11; 12; 26; 27; 28; 33; patca,
A 14; 15; vateii, 60^; 36 6"; v&tca,
;
2 ai
bitdpirm&Utima, 18
iv
6"
ncc. t-ing.
6a iT.
286
a"
inattmnd,
(Wn.)
86
j
biiii
-";
|v
fi
v
;
plrw&ttainye,
pen. ring,
lf
beyond, 30 &C
risen,
126*11;
plrOyai,
106^;
v.
jw
10.
patata,
Ha
iji
payara,
paiti-
paysani,
part., returned, 4 6
to give up, to kave; 3rd pers. plur.
paryeta,
pa6,
to
to collect alms, 4
pinva, the same, 4
46".
paysan,
a",
pararhma, loanword,
25a
a"
Skr. paramartha,
paramartha, loanword,
347
adj., previous,
preceding) former,
17.
pisai,
896*.
Bubst.,
pifkala,
tion,
subst.,
displny
33
teacher,
master,
placing
npait, distribu
dirision ; gen.
section,
in a section (of
a".
a";
the
20 a1 ;
VOCABULARY TO
348
prabhava, loanword,
43a iv
prrablMva-na, 30
pracai, loanword, Skr. pratyaya; used in
the instrumental, Mjfa pracaina, in con
1
sequence of the cataract, 42 a ; carat*
ui
pracaina, by means of a lamp, 42a ;
a",
6";
tfye
for
in
jtracainai,
him, 216
consequence of that
29
j
.
instr.
plur.
1V
6"
pahaitfita,
adj.,
a"
Skr. prajna,
6>"
44
sing, prajtidpartimma,
6";
gen.
j/arinhmf,,
16"
prajndparammi, 21
406 iv
2o iv
6>;
prajnd-
prattakdrii,
266 iv
ndsdma.
256; 26 aiv; 32 a i.
puja, loanword, Skr. pujd, worship; nom.
ace. sing, pujd, 3 la 1
sing, pujd, A 33
.
pufia, loanword, Skr. punya, lucky, meritorioiiB, merit ; instr. sing. puna~na, 166";
nom.
3 a"; 21a iv 6H ace.
plur. puna,
!ii
jmna, 136 v; 156 ; 166"; 366
gen. plur. puna, 36 6
iH
puninai, adj., consisting of merit,
14 a; 156 iv
16a
24 a
126";
28
29ai-; 31 a ; 37
41ai;A30;
,
".
H6
4 4 a*,
a";
6<;
31.
loc. sing,
reject ;
jmstya,
3.
3.
to fear, to
pvai,
25 a
pies, pvaidd,
"
34;
A 35;
37.
pyala,
pos
126i v ;
pyamtsa,
4 6 IV
with
front;
lidstd
cf.
added,
Zd. paitiank,
in
pya<sa<,
27.
6";
pyu,
-i";
future,
of a
subst., conception
see
186";
derived from
knowing, wise, 2 7
ace.
pudgala,
plur.
prajflai,
pudgalanasama,
to hear
6>;
6"
6"
;
;
pu,
A^l.
A3
17.
a;
(t>).
34o Ji ; pud43 o
A2
17
ra,
24
ct*
rt,
5a *
a.
instr.
treasure;
ramnyau-jsa,
ranyau-jsa,
ramninai,
406"
adj.,
A 28
ramnyau,
plur.
156";
21o iU 36 a
ligion,
436iv.
rsi,
a rishi
",
a"
rrasta,
60";
23 a
sai,
a";
";
A 21;
c f.
166";
south, 12
sat
26;
however,
106
(?),
15^.
amo;
";
i,
see6iIirrd-
adj.,
T
saj, to learn; 3rd pers. sing. opt. soy?, 26 ;
4 la ; wji, 29 a
216
sajlya, 166;
23 6 iv ; 37 a ; past part, sly a, 3
"
(uncertain).
"
(kalarri)
19
sai.
rravyipatani,
;
14a
hamrrafta.
rri, subst., a
18 a
";
cf.
226";
256>T;
a"-"
126"
lib";
";
";
a".
b".
rrispura,
1.
36
rrispura,
Skr. rupakaya, 236*.
Skr.
ruva, loanword,
rupa, form, object ;
instr. sing, ruva-na, ruvi-na, ruva-na,
ruva-ne, 38 a*; nom. plur. ruva,
96";
42 a ace. plur. ruva, 28 a 41 6iv ; instr.
rupakaya, loanword,
176";
plur. pres.,
43a iv
6^
loanword,
pers.
la
samu.
ing. ialo, 3
sain, see
particle
a".
sa.
instr.
3a iT
sing,
1 6
to complete, to compile
446
loc.
3rd pers.
A 40.
2.
loc. sing,
iadya,
cf.
ysama-
famdai.
aromatic powder;
plur. samkhalKnyau-jsai (luli/au 1),
sarakhaluna,
instr.
Skr.
;
a*.
216"
fiing.
sadi-jsa,
samas,
sarhda,
sing, samahana, 19
1
sa, numeral, hundred, Zd. eahm, 30 6 ;
16 ; miswritten td,
16;
ssa, A 3 ; 4 j 6
pajta se, five hundred, 26
sada, 28 6
30.
a.
see
|a, this, that;
a".
8
see
a"
Skr.
a"
a";
of the buddlia, 33
samldpa, word;
instr. plur. salayau-jta, 38
sail, subst., year
ssa-sall, a hundred years,
a century, A 3
6
sJ-sdll, A 16.
Skr.
iloka, a verse; ace.
6alo, loanword,
11
20
ruvam, 266".
;
rvaida, unidentified, perhaps 3rd
name
salava,
v
plur. ruvyau-jsa, 17 a
3rd pers.
sing,
SB,,
virtuous,
tad
166>v;
6";
written
38o
37
faith,
336
346; 40a<; mis37 a v suaitta, 206";
etta,
3rd
;
pers. plur. taida, 42 a ; past
a
28
part, gaye,
1761
?ai, particle, even, also, 10 a
nom.
a,
15
tf;
38 a
136".
46
13 P.
31.
rrasta,
Al.
446";
A30;
349
subst.,
A3.
sarhkhyarma, loanword, Skr. samgMrama,
VOCABULARY TO
350
n
,6"-
6"-
";
abl.
256
non-idea,
v.
"
pen. plur.
18";
idnam,
76";
tdndmnd, 66
186".
u>ed
sing. opt.
sarbii,
It
12
ft
2.
satarhna,
37
a";
sdstdra,
22
a";
cf. sa.
;
1<
";
6"
lOa
10
";
A3;
4
;
a";
316";
glvi,
6>
22;
gen. plur.,
iv
A 2.
satvam, 9o
vdmnd, 30 a
satvadata, loanword, Skr. sattradhdtu, the
iv
world of beings, 9 6 the word is feminine.
;
nom.
se;
376
17;
1
si,
32 a
176
20^,6^; 21
v;
li
(cf
166";
aiv
5 a ii! 6
8 o
7ai;
6""
326 ;
fa, 106
38o^,6 v A3; 16;
106 116"; 126*;
masc.
sing.
sa,
";
however,
65
18ai",
iv
"
6 6 T)
19a",6i-
22av,6i.ii.iv; 24 a
iv
6 v ; 33
1
";
27
b
32 a
;
39 a
34 a i.iii.iv; 366*; 37aiv
386";
v
a
44
43 6
40 a 6
41>;
tiii.ivj
A3; 6; 18; 20; 21; 23; 24; 25; 26;
A
3
22;
25;
27; 28; 29; 30; 33; se,
27; nom. sing. fern, sd, 186"; 22 a
29aiv 39a";
246i;25a iv ; 27
43 6i.
i! -
"
6"-
a"-
",
";
a";
16
22
se,
a*";
17 a
a";
31a
17
38
;i
326";
19 6
">
6-
-",
v
;
37 a
37 a
*
;
buddha,
6";
i!
-"-;
2;
si,
18 a
v
;
4jnauhya,
name
Skr. Sikhin,
of a
30.
subst., doubt,
23;
lit.
second
cf. si.
German heuer
gen.
116
19o iv
396
5 6 iv
j
6*.
mind,
18a
cf.
Skr. &iva,
sing,
butti, realizes
good things, 15 a*; vafidfard vamattd, does reflect about unauspicious things, 15 a (1); often used as
nn exclamation or as an adverb, well,
8 a ; 9 a ; 29 6^ ; iiri,
;
good ; iira, 7
a"*
86*.
lib.
ili
Aau, num., one; nom. /au, 446
416
sa,
a".
satva,
Saukra, A 41.
fauna, subst., the Lord, the Compassionate
One ; gen. sing, sauna, A 34 ; 35 36 ;
38
miswritten sauna, A 37
sdihnd,
A 39. The base is perhaps saun.
or, disciple of
246*.
39 6
iioin. sdstdrii,
16 6
loc. sina,
sdna,
366lv
36"i;
7 6H .
";
31 a
6;
Jii
256
13a iv
14 o
ace. rfau,
nom.
sing, sira,
44 a1
aj.
iv 6
bhuta, 5 a
unidentified,
13
44
cf.
aufj&Vjfl.
haps read anaufkdjstkana,
ekandha, loanword, Skr. skandha] gen.
loc.
A
18
plur. skaddhva,
plur. skandhd,
*
among the skandhas, 27
used
9kauja, unidentified sub&t., perhaps
to translate Skr. samskara; nom. sing.
Hi
6
43
6 ; gen. sing, fkaitja,
skaitja, 43 a
Bkaumata, subst. or adj., things thnt can be
A 32
"
"
";
6";
iv
iv
27
30<
o"-
6 1 iv
-
6- * ;
32 a
";
426
Suhava, loanword,
of bliss,
".
25.
Sumira, loanword,
a mountain, 206
gen.
-"
6"
plur.
ef.
a";
>;
39 a iv
3 a
30
sutra t
A3;
40
25
;
gen. sing, sutra, 236
2 6 ; nom. plur.
iv 6 T
o
13
3
suirdm,
sutra,
;
gen. plur.
Svahada, adv., at noon, 286".
sve, su b&t., shoulder, Zd.supti; the form is
a"
";
";
6"-
a",
(Subhuva)
28a ii ( Su6/mva);
33 a*, 6 ; 316 ; 38 a
a"
27
a"
b"
";
female,
a"
"
26 a
40 a
36
iv
"
gen.
";
$rota<~ipanna;
staina,
346
";
a",
stare,
226
";
6"
16/>
6";
6"
Sulhutl, 156
Subhuvl, 1 7
7 a
6*
31^";
6^
32
39
32
"
376
I),
v,6";
a",
a"
6"
skamavdih, 266
sparaksasta, num., sixty-six, A 10.
sparaparhjsasa, num., fifty-nix, All.
sparatcahausa, num., forty-six, A 12.
spiirabaista, num., twenty-six, A 14.
Sravakayana, loanword, Skr.iravakayana,
the vehicle of a irdvaka; loc. ?iiig. irdcakaydiia, 27
166^
19a
12
24
a"
a"
6";
12o
(with suffixed
33 6
23
srrauttavana,
sing,
srrauttdvamnd, 1 7 a
35a"-",
Subhulit,
"
a"
a"
(Subhuta)
35 a\ 6
;
Subhuta, 25 a
Subhuta, 32
Subhuva, 7
;
;
voc.
3*6
Subhuta, 7 a ;
(Subhuva)
iv
a
11
10 o v, 6 1
8 a v
;
13 a ; 14 6; 15
(Subhuta)^; 126"
iv
36
336
20a*i
;
ti.;
40 a ^; Sulhuva,
37 a * ; 39 a, 6 iv
u
18 a ;
136 ; 14 o
126
9a
7 a
23 a 6 il
22 6
6 v
20 6 ;
19
;
18
3.7
a"
"
ace.
a".
a"
a"
366";
22 a
346"i-;
a"
t<>
perhaps used.
translate Skr. sai nskara, cf. skavja
gen.
We should per
21 a
plur. fkajsikana,
skaJBika,
351
a"
ace. sing.,
syama,
56".
consciousness,
1
iv
;
ycsydme-jsa, 9 6
subst., conception,
96 iT
"-
mi-jsa,
eye, of uncertain
which
strlya.
"
meaning
in grulcyau-syt,
see.
3 6 ;
fitaka, part., that should be produced,
1
used to translate utpddayitavya.
20
;
a"
6>.
36
stye, subst., time; gen. sing, stye,
25 6 ; see, 4 6 ; 5
strlya, subst., a woman, Zd. strl ; nom. sing
iij
a".
ttrlya,
21a;
ttrlyai,
21a lY
Subhfcta,
236";
286
gen. sing
Subhuti
nom. Su-
see Ua.
tathfigata,
n. pr., Skr.
U
ta, thus, 8 6
VOCABULARY TO
352
tea,
24
conjunction, and,
7 ; cf. also cu.
25 61
tea,
6"
"
A 24
-*"
fame,
296
n";
"-
a";
"
a".
6">;
ma,
last, least,
24 6 iv
a"
tha, unidentified, 2
19 61
33 a
thu, pronoun, tliou, 136
thyau, adv., quickly (Professor Leumann),
30 a
A 40.
ta, suffix or postposition, used to form a kind
of locative
it stye ta, at one time, 3 6 iif ;
ttl tn, arid then, 4 t iv
perhaps connected
iv
with ti, la, 1 1 6 iv 12
used
to translate Skr.
tlviscl, unidentified,
.
".
";
3.
iv>
a"
sing, ttramdi/e,
ttradye,
37
34
traysa, loanword,
Skr.
fear;
35
36
38
39
trasa,
25
a"
trembling,
.
A 28
trasahasrre,
16a lii
trsahatrya, 36 o
adj.,
11 6
17 a
tii- iv;
a- iv,
piss,
tttuiiai,
i-
&
12
15 a
ftii-
i,
20 &
24
;
j
a*,
a>
25
>v
IGn
->v
*,
iv
iij -
18
21
6 iif
iv,
-
Hi;
i"
a"
-";
tat,
a; 8 a; 9a;
>v
23 a
iv
,6i;
Skr.
cf.
then,
7
22 a- iv
29 6 iv ;
a>;
iv
33 ftii. iii. iv
31aiv,6i.iT; 32 ii, ftii.
34Ji.ii.iii.iv. 35 a U. iv, Ji. ii. iv
36a
T
37 a
38 a
6 iv ;
39 a
v, Ji
iii
i. iii. iv.
Jii.
40 a
44Jii ;
40
ta,
with I suffixed af, 4l6 v; A 2; 3;
86";
4 ; tta-tta, thus, so, 2 a ii;
3
7 a
8 a^ ; 9 a iv 11
12
1 3
iv, Ji
15 a*; 21 a* 22 a* ; 25a
31 6; 32 6 h ;
v
39 ai ; 4Qa v; 41a-iv 426 iii; 436
44 a
A 1 ; 3 ; 4 23; 30 31 32; with
I suffixed tta-ttai, 226 ;
tta vd,
39 6 lv
and so, likewise, 2 a
3 a i; ; 426 ii!
of
tho
base
demonstrative
(2) tta, oblique
.
i.
"-
b"
6"
a"
ttrisdhasrya,
iv .
a"-
6>;
"
13ai;
6 iv
29a
tva, 2
3;
a,
v
;
a"
366iv
23
aiv
376 iv
256
41 6
a";
25 a^
a"
iJiii
15;
;
6*;
27
ai
;
;
36
86";
236
39
by
196
*;
286"i;
17ai
166";
16;
apparently miswritten
\5a";
iv
a"
Ji
ttina, by that, therefore, 2 6
3o"i;
->,
42ai-
14;
176"
22;
28a
Ji
30 b&
25
276"
";
39a>v;
44
b"
therefore,
20 6*;
1
la";
J";
tva,
that,
246
v; 3
43ai-iii->v,
33a
ritram.
cf.
b\. ii.iii;
}4^iii.
13a,6i; 14o
19
part.
so,
5b-;6ti;
2aiii;3&i;
tram,
thus,
future
i",
G aiv
tta,
-
iv
;
6i;
a"-
i";
";
a";
a",
6";
41 aiv;
ttinka,
o"
>v;
21o
2
236"
&i
5o
23; nom.
29
12;
136
406"
6"-
";
30 a
sing, ttina,
ttt,
plur.
;
loc.
6"
43
6";
a"
ttira,
10a;
A3;
tta,
a"
6";
A3;
32.
unidentified
ttadi,
passage, 4 4
ttadlyu,
ij
;
43
3.
word, perhaps
borrowed
probably
from
Skr.
ttarii,
cu
cu
ttira,
ttira
a;
39
6>
23 6
28 611
#*;
tta.
then, and
26ai; 37a"i; 38
A 26 ;
tti, 106^;
31
34 6 ; 35
;
reference to,
so,
a*;
tti
a*-
4a iLiv
6 iv
43a-\
56
6*-
u
ml, 24 a ; tti ra,
& 36 o jii
*,
6"-
a"l
ttaradard,
ft"
adv.,
6".
27.
286"";
";
-";
23a iv
Itaramdard,
tramma mdmnamda,
mdmnam, 206
iiJ
"
336
{ii
ttrdiiiniti
cu
see CM.
".
22
";
"
hard.
cf.
thni,
sing, ttird-jsa,
and
instr.
3.
sing.)
a"
verse,
6".
head
subst.,
17
insignificant,
tanka).
a".
276 iiiv
3a
cf.
43 o
adj., such, so much, 2 6
ttramd matiinaiiida, such like, just as,
38aii;
small,
adj.,
ttrarhma,
a>
38
ace. plur. tti, 41 a iv ;
a,
;
iv
gen. plur. ttydmna, 24 6 ; 30 a ;
iv
iv
tfi/dmna, 38 a
;
ttyam, 13 a , 6 ; 24
2G
38
10;
16".
(uncertain,
10; 11;
96>;
8; 9;
7;
im,
15;
353
A 28.
a",
ukhaysde,
A a
see uskhayi.
uhu-jsa,
ahu-jta,
VOCABULARY TO
354
upeksa, loan word, Skr. upeksd,
42 6
indifference,
v.
44a
iji
.
vpevand,
266!i
;
-
iv
;
316".
urmaysda,
corresponding
used to translate Skr.
it is
nom.
wrmaysoV,
sing.
gen. urmaysddm, 28 a
uskhays, to rife, to increase
416";
pres.
kfiawysde,
Zd.
to
subst.,
ahuramazddh
sing.
13a
;
iv
3rd pers.
6 ; us-
6.
.
iifmdmna masi,
tndi nna; 3 la
37
sense
a"
";
much
so
f/,
ustama,
136*
least, even, 31
13
30
6>"
436
ustamauysye, 306
ustamdjsye,
uetar, to wipe
ace. plur.
36
6>
40
33 a
gen. sing.
17;
6iv.
self-
o"
sing.
iv
34
nysdmne, 24
uysamnai,
if
39
gen. plur. uysamna, 39a
6"
a"
subst., conception of a
186*; see nasama.
uysdi6, to explain, Zd. uz-daeg; 3rd
ing. opt. uysdlilya, 21 W; uysdltlya,
uysafianasama,
self,
]>ers.
41a;
uytdlie,
29o
A 2.
a"
a"
";
a"
>,
cf.
Zd. ca
276"
3rd
vajsesde,
Vajrrachedaka, loanword, Skr. VajraccJi*dtka, the name of a text; nom. Vajrraflifduka, 26"; ace. Vajrraclirdaka, 446
s
Vajrrachedaka, 2 6
gen. Vajrrachedakyi,
21 a v; 40 6^
;
Vajrrachidakyi,
3G6iv
446";
Vajrrachedakasutrd, 30 6
to
reflect
cf.
Skr. avamrs;
vamas,
upon,
3rd pers. sing. pres. vamaftd, 15 a ; instr.
sing, of pres. part, vamasdkd-na, 6
;
26"
";
76
i
".
a"*.
Skr.
varhnaviya,
loanword,
that should be saluted,
296
vandaniya,
26>i.
28
; va^ja t,
3rd pers. sing. opt. vafi, 3 a 1
plur. vaijdd,
nom. fcing.
gubet,, a being
1
uytnaura, 42 6 *; uom. plur. uymaura,
ilj
42a
gen. plur. vyn\aurana, 41
uyenaura,
a>
42 6 v o va,
and also, or, llfcH.Hi; 15tf; 166^; 21fliv
28 6
29a"i,6ii; 32 a*; ova, A 2; Ita va,
and so, 2
42 fc* tti va, and so,
; 3
ttl va, the same, 31 a
16";
346";
35 a
6- iv 36
41a iv A 7; 8;
9; 10; 11; 12; 14; 15.
;
6"
uysamna,
"
ustamamj*ye,
base tars
off,
past, vftadi, 24 a
6 iv .
adj., last;
iv
jci-vae, 4 6
>";
6>
ustamajsi,
1 7.
sing, ustamye,
a"
as an u$-
Hi
uskyasta,
6"i;
6";
A3;
itskhaysde,
3 ; vkhaysde,
216; 37 O
a*v
29 6i; 30 V*;
;
A3
l.
vasiyarhna, unidentified,
42aK
vatiyit,
22.
106
sing, vastii,
A 22
vax u
phrase LayxHthfia
3rd
vyi,
"-
>
v
236>
a"
vlra,
246iii-iv;
obi. virfije,
266";
a"
20 a
2G6iv
216";
"-"
27
ni
iv,
21
;
28
yan, to do
ynnumt i, 18
st
pers.
a";
v i^&na, 8
A 24
6"
1 st
"
pers.
30a
fii
;
3rd pers.
iji
3rd
yatwri, 41 a
;
6";
A 30
yasta. see
6>;
yudt,
sing, yauga, 2 a
ye, enclitic pronoun,
i{
43a; A
kr. Ft AwMfi,
A a 2
33.
hdstci.
ye,
a".
yam, 8 6
26 a
plur. yandre,
pers. w ng. conj. middle, yanaw, A 4 ;
3rd pers. plur. yandmde,
ynnati, 24
36
instr. sing, of present part, yanakfina, 66; 7
31;
past part, yuda, 4
yuA,i,
37.
cf.
2nd
a";
in full,
a"
236K
&iv
"
"*
armngement, 34 a
vyuhti, and byiifui.
Skr. avaslhdjmya3rd
V
pers. sing, past, vistata, 4 61
future part. pews, viftanti,
vi^ta, to stand
7a
",
compare
n i-
6".
vyti,
39 d; 406i->V; A 23.
virahya, loanword, Skr. viragila, or vlrad/iila, displeased, 30
virSya, adj., connected with energy (Skr.
vlrya)
ryiM, was;
act.
loftii.iii.iv;
15
vifftti,
6>v;
plur. vnysyau-jta,
13rt iT f
nom. plur.
view, grasp,
/>
30.
ruvam
46iii;
instr.
6*
understand
3rd
vyach,
in iv
fut. part.
pors. sing. opt. vync/u, 34 a
pass, ryathathnd, 40
vyarana, loanword, Skr. vyakarana, ex
27o iv
with I
planation, preaching,
suffixed, vyaranai, his preaching, 27
Skr.
vyirasa, loanword,
ryaknrifiyat, he
would have prophesied, 33 a
ra>~,;(?) ;
6"
",
2#v
28 a
1.
to
cf. Zd.
3rd pers. plur. pres. vljsyari, 42 o iv
vina, loanword, Skr. rind, without, used
with a genitive, 34 a iv 42 a
1
in the
a bodhisattva
406
b"
vyuha, loanword,
vijs, to
gen.; pee
31
i;
rilysa,
20 21.
436 ii!
vasve, part., purified, clean, 14 a
perhaps borrowed from Skr. nxnddha.
vatca, sec paica.
vaysflam, adv., here, A 34 35 36 37
39 cf. vnfia.
vi, postposition, added to the genitive in
v
order to form a kind of locative, 24 6
A 40 cf. vlra.
of a buddha,
9a
14
Sft
past,
commonly
i-iiysai,
;
dffjlSl, evil-
purified, cleansed
sing,
vasus, to become
per*,
tram.
cf.
b";
subst., a being,
vuysai,
286".
3rd
enter;
27
vitrariidti,
va6u,
to
vitram,
gen.
355
loc.
31.
enclitic particle,
injfirw-e 4 6
38aiv.
,
v
;
VOCABULARY
356
cf.
tit
ysa, to be born,
in
tfi-tii,
cf.
6K
Zd. can
A 17
present ysatt,
9 6 ; ysata, 9 6
A 17; ysatfui,
ysamtha,
25; nora. plur. yiamtltf, A 17;
26 a
loc. plur. ytamthvn,
sing,
A 6;
ace. plur.
?/a</wi,
in
of hour,
hauraihma,
gift
66
37
a";
occurs
ynnlya-haudd,
;
yslnlya-haudi,
iiJ
jsa, with a gratification, 6 6
yslnlyaiv
liauramme-jsa, 7 6 ; ytiinl-hauramme-wa,
;
86".
ysura,
self;
25
subst.,
6iv.
ysvamSa, loanword,
ysydmne,
41
366-i;
a".
thus
76 iv
1
ysinlhauda, 86 ysiniya-hauramme-
a"*
favoured, gratified,
yuda,
see yan.
a";
156
16ai;
y^y^^, 16 jiii
l
29
a;
2 9a.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
EDITED BY SYLVAIN
From Sahib
Ali
situated in
the hills
report
appears that Jigdalik
that the manuscript fragments were dug out by
s
it
483.
near Jigdalik.
lies
call a xluj)a,or
The name
shrine
M.
is
applied
by the natives of
Ancient
Khotan,
vol.
i,
p.
1.
Jigdalik, as
Pelliot
PRATIMOKSA
2.)
Stijet.
A
(intine
la suite
du texte koutcheen
et de la
j ai
[Sv.P.]
Le
i-wou-tch a
Ce fragment a
paru dans le Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, January, 1918,
109-20; on a introduit ici quelques correctioni qu il est inutile de signaler en detail.
la
On a remplace
transcription dh, antcrieuretnent adoptee, par un t dans lea mots
koutcheMiB par symetrie avec les transcriptions k, m, n, etc.
on a toutefois maintenu
LOR signes du t et du dh, qui differaient sans doute 4 originc,
le dh dans les mots Banecrits.
1
de"ji
pp.
ecrit are
de Koutcha.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
358
4
5
tel
ft
Kumarajlva, vers
qn
il
pali.
70
su mil wasariipaiii
2 samfuri ksalyi
72
watkasstuii
tak[m]
se
samane
73
payti
sail
stwer
mentea
wa x t
amanettse
postafme^s
3 nalle
yamasA-ati
4 preku se suta\r winai abhidha x rm aiykemane takarii payti 75 se
siimane Silnantaih (w)egxxxg samanem\ts klausa pilsi kaltr payti
7G
sc
samane
Verso.
gaiikattse
tsenketa x r payti 77
wilttare
pelaiyknes.se
f|*e
wiltko
payti 78 se sagnmne
2
mo x t mala
3 sa postaih
sitmalyne sa sa x nk miyigsaiii payti 81 se
5
sa
lante
yasi
kercyen ne yarn parna tuyknesa sarraa
Ituse samaiie
samane yaka
mem
payti 82
Erreur haplographique
corr. naksalyi.
;
Corr. warpanalle.
Le tcribe a omis 1 aksara rpa en passant a la ligne.
Sic MS.
Lire samane.
La Kyllabe ne
La
est restituee
d apres un fragment de
la collection Pelliot.
syllabe yn, d abord oraise, a ete retablie aptes coup au-detsous de la ligne.
PRATIMOK$A
4
mo x k
359
ma
po aiim sa
sucika x r yamasta x r
yarm
TRADUCTION
Lc bhiksu qui fait route par entente nvcc des voleurs, des brigands, ptiyti.
Le bhiksu qui fait 1 upasampad d une personnc qui a moins de vingt
il est
les bhiksus sont a blamer.
Celle-ci n est pas upasarhpanna
payti.
73. Le bhiksu qui de sa propre main creuse la terro on qni la fait creuser,
71.
72.
ans,
payti.
sait le Sntra, le
Vinaya,
Abhidharma,
payti.
76.
Le bhiksu qui
78.
(?
79.
80.
village, payti.
81.
Le bhiksu
qui,
en
8.3.
84.
85.
se levant d
samgha, payti.
82. Le bhiksu qui, en mend ant,
d un motif conforme, pftyti.
la
nuit,
va dans
le
palais
du
roi,
au
en dehora
LES PARALLfcLES
71.
SV.P.
qu
il
va jusqu a un
village,
il
est po-ye-t
fait
i.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
360
Yo pana bhikkfiu jduatn t/teyyasatthena xaddhim iainzidhdija ekapaftpajjeyya antamato gdmantaraiit pi pdcittiyam.
bhiksu, en connaissance de cause, se met en route apr&s entente prealable
PAC. 66.
i(lhdnamagg<iiii.
Si un
Si
les
Defenses,
il
est po-ye-t
sent a blanier.
no
Cet
i.
tteyagdrthagamanam.}
homme
du
n a pas recu
donne integralement
cas.
73.
Sv.P.
Si
si
les
en
un bhiksu, de sa
main
proi>re
indi(juant de la
il
les
Tel est
dit
PAC. 10.
Si
(Cf.
khananam.)
74.
ft to Us
Si
% SI
IK
mois, et qu
il
il
* SI; Kt
pleine-liberte
estpo-yg-t
2S il
(=
pravdrana)
sauf invitation de pleipe-Uberte
re*pete*e,
^iksapadaj: pravdriiarthdtitevd.)
.,
PRATIMOKSA
SV.P.
75.
Jfc-
# a m -ft * **
tt
* IS in ft W A
?
Ift
ft
361
1ST
J*
Jfi ffi
ffi
& g? # fa 1
aw-un
Si
Moi, je n apprends
bhiksu, au moment de dire une Defense, parle ainsi
je veux d abord intorroger les bhiksus qui recitent le
pas encore cette Defense
Si nn bhiksu desire oj)tenir
Sntra, le Vinaya, 1 Abhidharma; il eat po-ye-fi.
:
de la Loi,
le profit
il
Bhadantas
=
no,
le
Telle est la
PAC. 71.
Idvdhat/i
(fi
r^le du
ttfo ctaxtnitit
aikkhiipmlo nikkfiixufiini
ydra
tin
/t.
erai n vail
yya
UiikktiKiii Lyo.ttaAi
bhikkhave bhikkbitna
iikk/taindnena
aniia/
cas.
ciifid-
questionne un
6 bhiksus qui
la la norme.
!
(Cf.
bhiksu
s instruit
Un bhiksu,
eclaire, porteur du
Vinaya!
pacittiya.
C est
doit apprendre, doit questionner, doit se demander.
siksfipada]
&tksopagai <iJira}>rafikxcpafi.}
une cachet te en
me
je veux
le
PAC.
rappeler,
78.
il
est po-i/e-fi.
Yo pana
bhikkhu
Un
tombent en disaccord,
1
entendrai
MVY. 261. 79
77.
Sv.P.
et part,
[75"
bhanflaitajatanath
bhanisxanti
tarn
kalahajatanam
nottdunti
elad
evd
a por^ee d
ftksapada]
vpaSratagatam.)
^J:kj-ftHfB$iR^^*-jffiSti-
un bhiksu, quand
il
les
itne
(Cf.
Si
se tient
bhikkhunatii
yam
est po-ye-t
i.
]e
affaire,
en gardant
le silence se leve
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
362
=
adalid
To pana Ihikkhu
PAC. 80.
gat/ighe
pakkameyya pdciftiyarii.
Le bhiksu qai, alors qu nnc affaire a decider
/t((//(iyti9fiH((
MVY.
78.
SV.P.
pre"alable,
261. 81 [77
siksapada]
en cours devant
le samgha, sans
en va, pacittiya.
tii*nli
,iviprakraianam.)
% & & -a t, *t
un bhiksu manque de
Si
est
a ti-
jft
un autre bhiksu,
respect a
il
est po-ye-Ci.
79.
Sv.P.
J;fe
Si un bhiksu boit de
PAC. 51.
J^
1
tfe
alcool,
JS
il
anatlararrtfam.)
ti
jft
estjw-ye-t
i.
fjtrditierayapdne pdcittiyain.
SV.P
so.
un
un bon bhiksu,
il
est po-ye-1
PAC. 85.
lo pana
bhikkftit
Le
affsiire
akdlacaryd.}
SV.P.
si-
le
repas ou apres
le repas,
va en tournee
pdeittiyam
totthdyafn
tamayo
cii-araddnatamayo
clvarakdratamayo
ayaiu
tattlia
tatiiayo.
Le bhiksu
un bon
tion) a
tournee
un
repas, sans
demander
(Tautorisa-
363
PRATIMOK$A
c est le
temps
temps ou on donne
(Cf.
ne
la veture, le
temps
oil
on
C est
fait la veture.
ia
le
legal.
tin
Si un bhiksu, chez un roi ksatriya qni a re 911 1 pnction du t-acre, quand la nuit
le seuil de
pas encore, quaiid on n a pas encore serre les joyaux, depasse
s eclaircit
la porte,
il
Yo pana bhikkhu
PAC. 83.
raiiiio kliaffii/axga
iinif1<lhCira*ltta*va
anikkhanhtnl-
lc
roi
quand les joyaux [le comm. expli((ue la reine] ne sont pas eortif,
sans s etre annonce au prealable, depasse le seuil, pacittiya.
Mais nous possedona
rvjakularalricarya.
siksSpada]
(Cf. MVY. 261. 86 [82
ici le texte meme de la prescription du Mnla-Sarvastivada
inaya, conserv^e avec
son commentaire dans le Makandika du DivyuvadSna, p. 543 sq.
n
"\
vd rajiiah
anirgatdi/tii ii
kxafrii/ast/u
rahiexit
rafn<i-
SV.P.
m-m
iJc
^*
-"
&.
Sf
raja/ti, la nuit.)
D.
if
a /& m %$ a*
H * a* ^ jfi-7 ft
Si un bhiksu, an
moment de
C est
la
pendant qu on
sie*ge
r^citait les
maint^nant
le
Livre den
Les bhiksns
Defenses
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
364
obtenir d etre excuse.
Toi, bhadanto, toi
tit
loi
present,
tti
es pas
faut
le trailer
bien; quand on
il
consequent, po-yc-fi.
PAC. 73.
To pana lliikkltn amadflhamdxam pdlimokkhe uddissamdne evatu
V ini yya iddn eva klto a/tain
jdndnii ayaik pi kira dhannno suttdgato sntfapariydpanno
anvadd/iamdtam
pubbain
u<1<l.
sam
dgacc/iattti
fail ce
Le
ainsi
le
si
bliiksti qui,
jidciffiyaM.
la lecture
du Prfitimoksa tons
les
C est
maintenant seulcmcnt que je sais que telle est la Loi qui se trouve dans
Sntra, qui est rccueillie dans le Sntra, qui revient en recitation tous les demi-mois :
les autres bhiksus savent
que ce bhiksu a deja sie^e deux fois, trois fois, a plus
:
pendant
la recitation
il
du Prfitimoksa tu ne
te
recucilles
profit
pour
toi,
pas bien, tu ne
appliques pas.
C est
la
le
84.
thdpadailraryatdvyavacdrali.}
os,
aft/iiinayaih
suciglinraiii
Le bhiksu qui
os,
ou en
ivoire,
ou en corne,
pacittiya d infraction.
(Cf.
85.
Sv.P.
Si
it
H>
un bhiksu veat
se faire
estpo-yt-t
i.
siksfipada]
&
lea
un siege ou un
PRATIMOK$A
=
PAC. 87.
navaiii
bhikkhund
pana
365
mancani
vii
jn^ham
vd
kdrayamdnena
lam afikkd-
lit
PRAYASCITTIKA ET PRATIDESANlYA
2.
Ilocrnle
et 149*.
(Plate
XIX, Nos.
2, 3.)
Les deux
feuillets
les chiffres
mm.
Us portent a
de pagination 108 et 109, et en effet
la
ils
se font suite.
nombre
101
sqq.)
je
me
formellement tons
Lc
feuillot
les
108
un second episode
la
89"
prescription;
ce nouvel
du 89
i.
la deraiero ligne
II suffira
dans
le
Sv. V.
Po-ye-t i 89. (a) Le Bouddha est a Vai&ll. En ce temps-la les
bhiksus souillent leur lit de leur semence.
Le matin, au i-^veil, ils lavent la toche
et laissent la literie s^cher i la porte de leur logis.
sa veture, prend son vase, entre dans la ville pour
la literie souille
le
la
Apreg
II leur dit ce
le repas,
qu
il
a vu
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
366
dans sa tournce en
ville et
II
enonce
les
cinq
Le Bouddha
(//)
midi
sa
passe
nourriture.
Apres manger,
an et
son
ni-c/ri-t
ecart de Bhag-avat,
Or
s asseoit.
et
terre
ses
il
L fiyusnoat
s asseoit.
non
loin,
le
e tofFe.
faire
Commc
Et
reunit
il
heurc du repas,
j ai
II
ma
un ni-rhi-Pan
alors
Bhagavat
mis
il
long-
de sa meditation; pour
dit aux bhiksus
Aujourd hui,
se leva
pris
mon
d un empan de Bouddha
veture,
ville
Bouddha
Bouddha avant
se
il
ce temps-la le
ftyusmat avait
En
veture, prend
moment
m assis.
il fit
Kia-lou-fo-yi apres
cette reflexion
En
quel
pratique-t-il en cc
la voie ?
je
touchaient
Et
lo sol.
il
fit
ce souhait
permettra-t-il
de
faire
La
mesure,
demie
est
la lieiere,
TEXTE KOUTCHEEN.
Feuillet 108.
1
Redo.
~ sesuwer
* ce x u wUttare
(/,-)akauwa
postarii panUkte sun kraupate
naksate * xn kikraktsi sa ?ara[a]nettee ^ enatketse ma 1
ceppille
*
2 ra&
prastrarh yatka yamtfli ^ 11 pauivkte Sravasti no maawsaggallo
*
kitr ~ tsoiikai x k patrai waatsi kamate ^ravaati ne
pirhtwat yopsa
1
Lc
Byllobea
mu
et
lie
le
PRAYASCITTIKA ET PRATIDESANlYA
367
4 mpostarii
raksane
nisularii
Kalodaye rano alyeka kca stam nor oppilarh* su no orotse kektsen tsa *
5 ttsa nisidarii raksane
lyaraa
annapi keni sa
kerii teksa * tumerh wefiawa ~ watka-ssi
pi panilkte nisidarii
6 fire 2 merh kalymi raso tsamtsi ~ n lamalle 3 sa samiinettsa
yamaskemane
lyama
sa ^ yarmaihssu yamasalle ^
omne
se yarmil
parkariie
Verso.
1
*
2 stu ne maskitr ^
ile x rn ^ krul san ne
x r Nande
pahaktettse
yapi
^
sklokacci samani ywarcil maskiyentr
panilkte wat yopsa
}>roce
Nande
mpa
wa x t
kisai
sa v
Stwara
meiii
Nandettse ineiimenkisai * panilktcttse wastsi
^
yamassitr panilkte kfyausa sah kraupate ^ ce
\vilaksanilncil
r<
panilkte
~ wastsi
5 wastsittse
Feuillet 109.
1
saulassoncil
llcdo.
fmmka
^ ra
^ om ne fia x w ^ makte
o passencana jielaiknenta
o
cai nogsWffJJssoncil
*t\v[a]ra wrattsai aksasggxxx
n
nau{N) ii
2 laiknenta artsa
ecce katrnaskerh
* n
pa(nct)/,-/e
pi sutarttse ak.salne
^rava^ti ne maskitr *
3 statse jirekesai ^
Uppalavarna x nil asiyattse ^ yarke peti j*aka
*
ttitr * maka wwatsanma
kalpowi tu aarl
1
MS.
Lire nande.
kenltu
a.
>
fireih
V/-.
Sic M8.
ne
omne kg?
lamnlyn
por-
V/.
Lire ^(w
J ai deija publi6 l 6pi|ode de Nanda
(109^-^) nvoo une traduction ct lea texteu
10
dans
Journal Aaiatique, 1912, 1. 101-116. J ni pu rectifier ici quolcjue*
parall6le
orreurs quo j avftis commiees.
.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
368
ma
alasmo enenka os ne
mem ^ .sa\iiii ar sa trasxa-
pirii-
Verso.
1
Ive
encltr
ce x u
tsalnalye
* ma
ayato asalye sa fiaulassoncl kekntkau nesau
2 ksassalye * cew ike aksaskau * se pelaikne wrattsai
~
aksasjalle
^
ksa
samane
maskltr
Sravasti
tanapate
panakte
3 nem asiyana pa ^watsis kakate ~ tumem Sthulananda ce\u tanapateiii
\\
sarsilssi
samp araiiiie ste cwim nauga pete
4 cairn no agamadhari skente ^ sam no abhidharmike ste ~ sam winasare ~
tusa, tanapate krnsiyate ~ xwa pitkawe (w)a
5 mlama v
paiiakte klyausa naksate n samani no masar ostuwaiwenta
*
*>
ne kakakas takau di^atsi^co omne krui asiya ar(s)e6 manefma stmausa tako x ya ~ tane klu pete ~ tane smanne pete ^ tane
k pete ~ sawaxx samane x ts mantraA A tiiko(ya) jxg
(.s-)pa v
TBADUCTION. 1
1.1] ... apres manger, le Bouddha reunit Ie samgha ;
d un bhiksu ... [1. 2] il ne faut pas
le fait de
occupe de faire ^talage au grand air (prasfarana).
bl&mc cctte
afTaire
Le Bouddha
;.
est
tf,
par
a Sravasti.
il
fut apres le
nisidan
le
Bouddha.
il
coudee a partir de
1
La
Andha pour s
Le Bouddha
[1. 4]
sous
il
il
entra dans
prend un nisldan
L ayusmat Kalodaye
un arbre quelconque etendant lo
s ussit.
Alors
le sol.
il
3] Apres lo repas
asseoir en meditation.
[1.
s assit.
nisldan
Le matin
dit:
Puisse le
la frange.
Bouddha
Le bhiksu
autoriscr
d une
fid^lite litt^rnle,
r^sum<i
le recit
PRAYA^CITTIKA ET PRATIDESANIYA
mesure.
la
ft
869
en coudees du Bouddha
fait
etc., est
PdytiW.
a un frere
passenca
1084,"l-
[Fol.
(=
piiyantika).
L C Bouddha
1]
est a Kapilavastu.
[1.
Lo Bouddha
2]
nomme Nanda.
confus
est-ce
sont partages en deux
Nanda ? Nanda a deux laksana de moins qne le Bouddha il a quatre doigtn
II se (hit faire [1. 4] une
de taille en moins qne le Bonddha.
pnreille il la
:
rol>e
fj,
du demi-mois, dans
Prafidcxamya
ft
reciter
du Prdfiwokxa-xu/ar,
109 a, 1. 2] Le Bouddha
[Fol.
[I.
i\
la fin
alors
c est
2]
elles arrivent.
la recitation
1.
publiquement;
est
ft
SravastT
la vit
aussitot, se retournant,
il
appela sa femme.
elle
la
Le
relive tant bicn que mal, la conduit dans sa maison, lui prepare A manger.
Bouddha [1. 6] 1 aynnt entendu blame Tout moine qui sans etre malade va mendier
:
sa nourriture dans une maison, et qui d une nonnc e trangere recoit dans sa propre
main [Fol. 109 b, 1. 1] & croquer on ft a valor, ce moine doit en faire la declaration
aux moines:
n
2]
il
declarer publiquement.
Pratid. 2. [Fol. 109
pati) invite les
des ordres
[1.
ft
4]
celui-la
ft
moines
il
[I.
ce tandpate:
ceux-ci
s
ce
la
vieje
suis affecte
Ce
faut le declarer.
point, jo le declare.
b, 1.
Cehii-ci est
sont
des
emploie au culte.
un Aranyaka
agamadhari
Le
ft
1
;
lui la
ft
celui-lft
c est
premiere portion.
un abhidharmika
Bavarde, ne
[I.
5]
36"
"B
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
370
m embrouille
invit4 a
condiments
les
moines ainsi
[le
texte
arrete
ici.]
LES PARALLELES.
Le Vinaya
En
Pacittiya 89.
ce temps-la
le
jardin d Anuthapindika.
nisldana aux moines.
Les moines de
Bouddha Bhagavat
Or en
est
89"
de
la
se"rie,
a Savatthi dans
un
le
Bhagavat a permis un
la Sixaine, disant
que Bhagavat a autorise
le nisldana,
ils
portent des nisldanas demesures
pendent en avant et en arriere des
banes et des supports.
Les moines qui ont peu de desirs grognent, protestent,
Jetavana,
le
ce temps-la
indignent
Et
Comment
les
moines de
la
alors ces
moines de
C est
vrai,
la
Sixaine
Bhagavat
Le Bouddha
les
il
interrogea les
Et
cotipure (chedanaka).
par Bhagavat.
Or en ce temps-la
c est ainsi
le corps grand.
En presence de Bhagavat,
tout recroqueville.
Et alors Bhagavat dit a I ayasma
Udayi: Pourquoi done, Udayi, es-tu tout recroqueville sur ton nisldana? C est
Et alors Bhagavat
que Bhagavat a permis aux moines un nisldana tris petit.
e*talant le nisldana,
il
uyasma Udayi a
s asscoit
a cette occasion, sur cette question, fit un entretien sur la Loi, et, s adressant aux
Je permets, 6 moines, une frange d une coudee au nisldana. Et maintenant,
moines
6 moines, voici
faire
un nisldana,
il
Qui de passe
Pour
cela,
Si
un moine
se fait
lea proscriptions
Tordre suivant
t
il
reciter la prescription
d abord
erme de comparaison,
le
le pali.
puiB,
comme
PRAYA^CITTIKA ET PRATIDE^ANlYA
371
En
un v6tement de
meme mesure
la
Nan-Co
venir,
ils
se levaient tons
Une
fois
que
Bouddha
rennit
affaire
interrogea Nan-t o:
C est
vrai,
le
signifie
de Nan-t
il
faut
Et
o.
je
si
et lui firent
qnclque
il
il
Le Bouddha
lui,
sortes de
mume
mesure que
faut raccourcir ton vetement
il
Bhiksus
comme
fait
le
un vetement de
se fait
arroscr d eau.
homme
fait cette
ai faite.
etaler et
samgha
qu un bhiksu
vetement du Bouddha
ce kasaya,
As-tu veritablement
Bhagavat
Que
raisons:
le
lui
Les
apercevaient que ce n etait pas lui.
II est notrc inferieur: pourquoi done nous
J ai done fait
Nan-Co tout confus pcnsait
ils s
les sthaviras se
pour cette
au-devant de
aller
pour
rapproches,
la
etalez et arroscz le
vetement
Et
je
meme
un vetement de
la
Jetavana,
soeur de la
arrival t
ayant vu
Arrives a proximite,
Comment done ?
Bhagavat arrive
ils le
reconnaissent
ils
grognent,
ils
ils s indignent
mesure que la robe
:
protestent,
la
meme
du Sugata?
robe du Sugata
augmenter
un
Voila qui n est pas fait pour donner la foi aux incredules, ni pour
Ainsi done, 6 Religieux, recit ez cette prescription Si
meme
mesure que
Bb2
la robe
du Sugata, ou plus
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
372
6 coudees.
du Sugata.
La formule qui conclut les 90 pdyli et celle qui introduit les 4 peches suivants
nc se trouvent pas dans la version chinoise du Sarvastivadi-vinaya
elles sont
donnees dans le Prfitimoksa de cette ecole traduit par Kumarajiva
[Sv. P.].
;
Le Sutta-vibhanga a
com me
Hommes
Sv. PR.
le
de grande vertn
On
P.
a ononcc, 6 ayasmas
les
lois pacitttya.
quatre-vingt-douze
Lit je
demande anx ayasmas: Est-ce qu en cela vous etes purs? Tine seconde fois
Et une troisieme foisjc demande:
jc demande: Est-ce qu en cela vous etes purs?
Est-ce qu en cela vous etes purs?
C est
taiscnt.
ainsi
que je
le tiens.
Or
Sv. V.
Le Bouddha est a Che-vei (SravastT). C etait une
PratideSanlya 1.
La bhiksunl Hoa-c/ie (Couleur de flour
periode de famine et de parcimonie.
Utpalavarna), en raison de son me rite, a beaacoup de connaissances, beaucoup de
relations
elle
dans
le
moitie, elle
la
il
De mome
aux bhiksns.
elle avait
le s-econd
Comme
elle
le
donnant
ne prenait
Un
pas de nourriture, dans la rue elle perdit connaissance et tomba par terre.
1 avait vne
appela sa femme et lui dit La bhiksunl Hoa-c/ic est tombe e
par terre dans la rue. Va la relever et am^ne-la. Elle alia la relever et la conduisit
marchand qui
Vite on lui fit nne bouillie qu on lui donna, et alors elle reprit ses
demanda: De quoi souffrez-vous ? Qnelle maladie voua tourmente
tombe e par terre dans la rue ? La bhiksuni dit Je n ai ni maladie ni
dans sa nmison.
sens.
On
lui
PRAYASCJTTIKA ET PJlATIDESANlYA
373
Quand je
Che-wei sans en obtenir, j en ai souHert et je n etais point heureuse.
le vase dee bhiksus il en manquait un pen, je leur en donnais un
il
y manquait la moitie, je donnais la moitie s il manquait tout, je donnais
Et de meme le second jour et le troisieme jour. Comme je no prenais pas de
Les
nourriture, j ai perdu connaissance et je suis tombee par terrc dans la rue.
pen
tout.
maitres de maison ayant entendu cette aflairc ne furent pas heurcux dans leur cceur
Et ils blamerent ainsi Ces cha-ien (sramana) fils de Che (sakya) ils ne counaissent
!
Si celui qui donne ne sait pas la mcsure, il faut que cclui qui
ni temps ni mesure.
Cette bhiksuni Jloa-cfte a failli mourir faute de nourriture.
re9oit sache la mesure.
La-dessus
t
il
ils
allercnt vers le
Que
bhiksus:
suffit,
pratiquant les
et lui firent
Bouddha
sacbant ce qui
desirs,
afl aire
celui qui
mesure.
Cette bhiksuni
la
lloa-c/ie
prescription
}>our
dans une
loi
Cette
reprehensible et deplacee.
ma
loi
faute.
Maintenant
est regrettable.
est ce
qu on
une
apj)elle
je
loi
i-c/ie-ni,
d aumones, et
elle
II
ne
sa tournee
resta sans
Ainsi
manger.
le
deuxieme jour
He"
moment de
le
troisieme
en retourner
manger.
Un
Or,
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
374
maison,
tomber.
fit
que je
raconta
afFaire
au
se^b,
Excuse-moi,
ce
madame
m as
moi qui
c est
fait
tomber
t ai fait
mais
c est
Comment done
les
maison, qui
Comment done
etc.
Les
indignait.
mcmes
un moine recevra
C est
s indignent
de la main d une religieuse .
nonrriture de la main d une reli.
la nourriture
gieuse?
vrai,
Bhagavat!
Etrangere, Bhagavat.
pns, 6 fou,
pour donner
la foi
et
qu il
dans une
pali,
Si
un moine, de
etc.
Et
main d une
la
reprehensible, di shonnete
loi
la
religieuse
e"trangere
main a croquer on a
recit
mais
voici
entree dans
Le
qui est
avaler,
je le confesse.
Utpalavarna.
Sv. V.
Pratiil. 2.
Le Bouddha est a Wang-che (Rajagrha). En ce temps-la
y a un maitre de maison qui invite le Bouddha et te clerge des deux sexes pour le
lendemain a dejeuner.
Le Bouddha accepte par le silence. Le maitre de maison
sait que le Bouddha a accepte" par son silence
il salue de la tete les
pieds du
il
le
Bouddha que
le
moment
se retire.
il
Rentre chez
est venu,
que
le
il
lui,
prepare
un messager
Le Bouddha
clerge"
datta),
(danapati)
da
riz
la Sixaine, se
donne
& ce
bhiksu de
celui-ci est
la soupe.
un maitre de
la
Loi
celni-ci
donne a ce bhiksu
savons pas qni est premier sthavira, qui est second sthavira, qui tient
Nous ne
les regies,
qui
PRAYACITTJKA ET PRATIDE^ANIYA
375
Qn
a tous.
confus
arreterons.
la
il
entendit
les
1
Sixaine: Que signifie, quand les bhiksus mangent, qu une bhiksuni ordonne de
donner a manger ? Ayant blame pour toutes sortes de raisons, il dit aux bhiksus
Pour dix avantages, je donne aux bhiksus une prescription. A partir d aujonrd hui,
S il arrive, o bhiksus, qu un maitro de maison
il faut reciter ainsi cette prescription
:
invite a
manger chez
Donne a
ce bhiksu
du
ct
lui,
riz
de manger.
Si
Attends un peu que
an
les bhiksus aient fini de manger, alors tous ces bhiksus doivent s adre
nous sommes tombes dans unc loi
Vene"rables
reste des bhiksus et leur dire
parmi
bhiksus
il
fini
<ser
reprehensible et de placee.
Cette
ment que
je regrette
loi est
ma faute. C est
En ce temps-la
regrettable.
ce
Les moines de
bouillie.
la
religieuses qui
les
etc.
religieuses qui
que vous ne
C est
vrai,
les families et
mander
disant:
declarer
nous
Reste a
^cart
venerables, nous
.,
les
ces
moine d
moines mangent,
loi
e"carter
com
moines doivent
que
les
moines
cette religieuse en
alors ces
moines doivent
reprehensible, deshonnetc
le confessons.
que a
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
376
tandis que
le
Le koutcheen
En somme,
le
les cas
une redaction
originale,
3.
PRATIDESANIYA.
Un
et
Eedo.
s^xente sa v sa ma lipitar ne eg
2 lleka ksa
karyorttau lyakate ista\k
3 marine ce x u ostassi naksante
ne|j
1
4 se saraane
()lamo enehka
Verso.
1
xQ>a]nakte
sama
3 tanapate
kraiyate ot
wena
te x 8|
additionnelle.
Pendant que ce texte ^tait en coure d impression, le texte
du Pratimoksa des Sarvastivudins a i\& publi^ par M. Finot dans le Journal
Asiatique, 1913, II. 465-557.
Sanscrit
feminine de
abhidharm,
transcription
abhidharma.
Fr.
Sanscrit
<lu
v.
emprunte
abhidharmika,
tenant do
au Sanscrit
ubhidharma.
Fr. 2, 109& iv
agamadhari, iiomin.
possede
les
plur. de agamadhare,
Sanscrit dgamadhara, qui
Fr. 2, 109 6 iv
agamas.
aissi,
de
moyen de
partic.
Fr.
savoir.
a iv
1,
at,
ay,
ais,
aik,
".
n devant
kndn,
(jnik
kn, et de kna-
(g)ndgco, etc.
lat.
kndnmdm
149.]
precede de la
de
an-,
plak, de-
Fr.
Cf.
,
cf. v. b. a.
sur
sarvuvidvdn
A. knanv. SS.
),
annapi, tous
108 v
deux
(=
ubhaya).
Fr. 2,
aranfie (= aranyaka).
etFr. 3,6".
Fr. 2,
les
MSL.
[v.
arurhuo
xvii.
28G.]
et
1096i
a&ya,
et les
109
a"
ad-agium
mots apparent^, notammeut arm.
je dis, ar-ac
niaxinie
1"
pers.
enoncer
(=
<isei,
de6).
de oka,
Fr. 2, 109 611
pres.
<
id.
id.
alasmo, mnlode
Fr. 3,
(=
mm
),
a la
*.
= bhikfunl),
Fr. 2,
09 b v
a"i(Us).
Fr. 2, 109 vi
aSiyai, forme obli(iue.
ajiyana, cas regime plur. Fr. 2,
ayasse, d oa (= atthimaya), adj. derive, au
e, du mot ayd(), OB.
rnoyeu de 1 uffixe
.
ayato, convenable
agreable
1096
1096".
109a;
religieuse (
1090
Fr. l.&iv.
aksawalye,
Fr. 2,
fin de.
1096"".
.]
sing.
[v. aksalne.~\
akaafalU,
pali
".
931.]
aksaskau,
(=
plaJci
[v.pldki.]
reciter,
ii.
participe,
n3gative
couvenir.
particule
mander,
autre (anya).
3,0"),
v.
[v.
aknatsamg,
son
108a
anfipucclia).
aiykemane,
([a]llfka t Fr.
Fr. 2,
109 a vi
amplakante,
emprunte au
[v. alyeka.
alyeka
abhidharmike,
Fr. 2,
alecce.
Fr. 2, 1096
Fr. 2, 109 6 U
(=
Sanscrit
(=
pali
aj>]>aya)
ou
Fr. 2,
sanipreya).
(=
oK
pali
Fr. 2,
gilana).
109 a
Journ.
[Cf. alaskemant etant raalade
As., 1911,ii. 121, et MSL.xviii. 18.]
,
oaim,
[v.
de
ce,
Fr. 2,
cenx-ci.
!
.
id.
de
ce,
MSL.
deniongtr&tif.
duM
xviii.
M.
Fr. 2,
09
6 iv
414.]
Meillet.
Fr.
frtguient.
378
VOCABULARY TO
demonstr.
lj.
celui-ci.
Fr. 2, 108
b"
[cf. scr.
T(=//)..T
r6gime du der
C<
7\
nomm.
Fr.
"
^;.
-W-
I08.
2,
,ng.
///.,/
w&rttf<ma).
tya-1]
Fr. 2,
7, \
Fr. 2,
SSfkl^nJiSfe^^f^
I
enSmte
tratif r*
Fr 3
fl%
,.ar,),
(<*
Fr. 3
109fti;
fl iu
1
2>
a"
pi/cul
1096ii
109aT i
I *
[Cf. lat. statiml]
1096".
^v^^^rst
ka
cd
kakate, 3^
pere. sinrr
--
,.o.,
(k)akauwa.
ecce,
annees, plur. de
Fr. 1, a i.
p^.
Fr. 2,
Fr. 2,
de
de
nvite ^
1096i.
I08i.
advorbc,
on
efiatke,
tse.
lat.
Fr. 2,
30 perp.
sing. pr 6 8
efioitr,
enenka,
(
excopte.
ad,]
108 a
ratigrh*).
nibj. de die,
Fr. 2, 109fc
V,
v.
etc.;
au 8anecrit
2,
5^fS?h^^S^^SM*-*w &
ensanta.
present
Fr. 2
de
109 aiv
enkdskau
v
Jcamat e
Pc
xvn
j ai
.
2,
108
TI.
29<i
-J
pers.
sing.
!
5?r^^"
^""4u,.
2r^,s!$~
p.im Sc.r^^""-
affamee;
-,
,-
I.
eht, de
.v.
,
v.
...
MSL. rttt
24.]
Jf
^,
Cr
^^
partie.
"Mt.,
paM , do
,
gr.
etc.]
kauo,enhul.
Jr.
2,
tWrirt de
iaiim, jour.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
kca
(cf.
Jcsa),
kca=anyatama).
419.]
[v.MSL.
kekatkau, nomin. sing. masc. du
part.
Fr. 2, 108
Fr.
(= prthivl),
B irriter.
Fr. 2,
l,a";
kraupate,
krui,
de corne
kemesjie,
au
derive
= visanamaya).
moycn de
W,
aff.
av.
lat.
k
knihpas, courL6
ken!, Rcnou
du mot
ksa
Fr. 2,
Fr.
palais.
1,
(n
"
ni6ine
v.
kikratsi,
stantif.
infinitif
Fr. 2,
commc
[repandre
klausa,
sub-
?].
doit
Fr.
o iv
v,
cf,
klu,
108a
109 6*.
riz
(=
odarta).
Fr.
2,
s
".
[v.
pi-rs.
109a v
Fr. 2,
a".
lyama,
pers.
i.
462
et sunr.]
wr,(?)
sing.
Fr, 3, 108 a iv
i sBeeoir.
de
/aw,
lykft,
plur.
1,
de
voleur (sscaura).
lyatc,
M
ma,
de
Fr. 2,
iij
e
lipitar, 3 pers. sing. prts. de Up, oindre.
Fr. 3, a.
guliii, gulti, Be
bouillie
v. inf.
etmausa.]
lamatsi, infinitif de lam, s upseoir.
Fr.
glayati.]
+ m;
cf. 8. v.
lit.
en ly
cst a analyser
[Lam
kaklau,
460; ou plutot
qui
(a). Var.
lamalye.
asseoir
lam,
Fr. 2, 108 a v
s usseoir.
lante, roi(=raja).
leswi.
Fr. 2,109 aK
[v. Myaufam,]
klautka, absolut. de klaut-k, tourner, retourner.
Fr, 2, lOOo*.
i.
460.]
[v, kaklau, Jonrn, A., 1011,
klaya, 3 pers. sing, aor. de W, tourner,
o v
Fr.
109
le
trouver
mal,
2,
tournoyer,
scr. cdrati, bom. irptrcAAo/icvo et
[Cf,
7rtptTrX<J/ivw,
dc
verbal
lamalle,
Fr. 1,6
^rw<i,^rofa),
you,
wi.
li/ama et
manger?]
employ^
Fr. 2, 108 a
ossete
r6gion,
s.v,
durbhiksa).
nt, loc.).
(=
419.]
grftma),
gain,
got.
[Cf.
ngo, arm.
08 a v (*a).
;
(=
loc.).
etc, 1]
xviii,
kwasfti, village
MSL.
[v.
kamara-, ceinture,
camurus, cameras
gr. Kd/iirno
Fr. 2,
kca},
(cf.
Fr. 2,
krnlnc ta
[Cf. gr. voVv, etc. Vnr.
forme au duel e ieeu de o.l
kercye,
si,
Adj.
(= finu),
reunir.
Fr. l,6 tv
kerne, corne.
cf.
krasiyato,
terre
et
113;
i.
klauta,]
108av.
[Cf.
(ntsa).
kem,
Fr. l,6
Journ. As., 1912,
[v.
knya).
.]
iv
entendre.
(=
appuierait
kektse[fi], corps
de klyau(s), entendre.
klyavsa,
Fr. 2, 1086 iv 109avi6v.
klyausam, 3 e pers. sing. pr^s. de klyau(),
tomber dans
?,
<jlus
hypotbese que
ceci
absol.
xviii.
(=apad).
lat.
[Cf.
1
379
et
negation
Fr. 2, 108
(= no, an *).
109 6
1,
a-
Fr. 3,
a*.
Fr.
a",
lil
6 *
en indo-euro[Generalisation, unique
VOCABULARY TO
380
md,
gr.
arm.
fir),
tni.]
maka, beaucoup (=
[Cf. gr.
maksu,
109
bahu).
".
jron. et
tnlamam
de
imper.
pers.
s. v.
lamulle), embrouiller
Fr. 2, 1096 V .
mot, alcool (= madhu). Fr. 1,
1).
6".
indefmi, quiconque
Fr. 2, 108 6 iv
ailj.
noni.
ka$cit),
(>/ak
109 a
Fr. 2,
mlamam (2 e
(ml + ml cf,
sing.
mpa,
mddhu,
scr.
[Cf.
gr.
h. a.
v.
0v,
/t
metu, etc.]
du
postpos.
Fr.
(=
sociatif
sardfiam).
et qui
makte, commc (=
Fr.
mala(/).
pd,
fiiv,
(=
adverbe, ainsi
(tnant),
Fr. l.a*.
evam).
.-auscrit
inaneaka,
109
mantraka, aiusi (= evatn).
masa, 3 e pers. sing, aor., probablement
memc racine quc le verbema( = v7ir ).
iv
Fr. 2, 108a
iij
108
naasklyentr,
Fr. 2,
108
109
iv
6",
3e
a"-
pers.
Fr. 2,
pit
a"
fc
1
;
plur.
s,
(=
109 6 V
du verbe
.
l",
Naudo
[Cf.
jrr.
Fr.
ablatif.
mole
^i<,
\n-es. (?)
1,
a jii
Fr. 2,
(=
ia*a).
Fr. 1, a
ji
iMi,
adj.,
anterieur, premier.
Fr. 2,
b *.
Fr. 3,
MSL.
fiem, noni
nesau,
etc.]
(cf. nw/i),
a* 1 (ytttwea).
moi*
(=
Fr. 2,
nw7w).
oi -o/Ki,
Fr.
6*".
[Cf. v. h. a.
illusion, etc.]
10
Fr. 2,
>.
etc.]
ning.
pcrs.
= a).
403.]
Fr. 2, 108 &
ndina),
prcx,
1096
de
etro
.,
frauder, nuire.
xviii.
(=
noni.
ntfin,
Fr. 2,
6";
[Cf. yr.
109
1086.i.
Fr. 2,
(tiatula).
6"
de
(cf. meiifi),
menu
455.]
[v.
mefl
i.
"
6i.
affixe
a.
1,
bli imcr.
du
6".
Fr.
mem,
109
2,
naksate,
viharati).
Fr. 3, 6
1 artic.
iustrum.).
Fr. 2,
Fr. 2,
Fr.
Fr. l,6 iv .
l>aii(|\iette.
(,
mancak, emprunte nu
ii<it
1,6".
marht
sing,
Fr. 2, 109 a
yatlia).
fia,
108a
v
6i>
[Cf. v.
lOSa
si.
(stdmn
).
v.
nu, etc.]
an-dessous
fior,
-iv.viJiv.
(=
Fr. 2,
adfuut).
Postposition
lOSa^.
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
flre,
Q
(
(=
frange
fil,
mem); 1086*
Yr. 2,
data).
108
a"
et nnan,
[Cf. v. h. a. snww, lien, cordon,
coudre, gr. ve w, VTj/za, lat. nfo, irl. snlim,
scr.
fil,
snathe,
tnHyati, il
j entrelace,
flu,
109 a
[v.
Dcriv6 de
Fr. 3, 6 iv
(<f).
2,
xvii.
289
et
"
>v.
Fr. 3,
ft
Fr.
iii.
fti.
v,
iv.
1,
v.
vi
Fr. 2,
ft*;
.
9 av ,
a"
(=
Outre.
nl(aram).
Fr.
1,
lo
etc.]
(=
cela
om,
vi
108
tat).
fev. vi,
nt
109 a
"
6V
lat.
Fr.
tatrn.
Cf.
alius,
2,
omposlam.
wnftahkonne, fnhsap.
Jonrn. As., 1912, 115.]
[v.
ompalskofiSe, extnse
108
(=
Fr. 2,
dhijana).
ompostarh,
Postposition (jxtniikte
npics.
108 a iv
Fr. 2,
omwap, en surplus
Fr. 2, 1086*.
orhssap, c f. (niwap, on surplus
Fr. 2,
onolme,
cf.
1086 V
(=
atirtka).
(=
afiVeia).
(=
Fr.
piulgala).
1,
lat.
animal
ground de
ct tout lo
oppllamntsa.
cf.
le
Iftt.
ani mtw,
ft
ontma
Fr. 2,
JM<
Fr. 2, 109
108^
et
d une
de
categorie
pali pacittiya).
faute
Fr.
pwi,
Fr. 2,
suffixe
1096
(=
de
ogt,
maison.
a\
**e,
i.
114.]
au moyen du
du mot ptlaiyknc, ptlaikne,
adj.
dfiarma).
derive,
Fr.
1,
6".
1096"
[v.
pelaiyknesse,
loi
a".
[v.
Fr. 2, 109
a".
v.
out.
08
nom
= pai/antika;
V.
oskai, a
(=
payti,
v. (i^w, souffle.]
mot
parra, en silence
Fr. 2,
creature
Fr.
la~"
o).
ft"
"
orhsap,
Fr. 2,
le
6V
(ra*>).
Rouddhn.
le
"
ft"-
olya, adverbo
nt).
108
291.]
Fr. 2, 109 6 r
maison.
ojrf,
(nfa
Fr. 3, 6 iv
Ot, alors.
pafiakte,
MSL.
381
vi
Fr.
Fr. 2, 109 a
3,6".
peti,
Fr. 2,
nom. plur.
{
".
Cas
s-njet
(=
fada).
a".
VOCABULARY TO
382
v.
Smith,
MSL.
Tocharisch,
xvii.
et
13.
p.
auss
pudgalyik, emprunt^ au
285.]
pikul, annee
nd iv id u el.
Fr.
1,
Sanscrit pudgalika.
a".
Ikam
Cf.
plur. pikwala.
pikicahtihne.
plur. de pikul, annee.
pikwala,
pilsi,
(;i
portee de
= upa
pimtwat, emprunte au
tournee d uuraones.
Fr.
?).
Ikam1,
ov.
Sanscrit pindapata^
Fr. 2, 108
pimt-
a"!
Fr. 2, 109a vi
Sanscrit pltha, escabeaa.
wdta-icn, datif.
pir, eniprunte" au
Fr. 1,6 v.
bavanl.
pitkawe,
Cf.
Fr.
1096
2,
Cf.
*.
pitmaiicalne
praldpa, dans Journ. As.
1911, ii. 128 et 130.
pkante, larpeur (=
(a); 108
6"
Fr. 2, 108 6
tiryak).
(id.).
de ^Za&.
Fr. 1, a
Convention
(Cf.
ampld-
a>
le
repas).
[Cf. lat. post, etc. ; v. MSL. xviii. 7.J
pos tafifies, datif de postanfie
apr&s
Le mot
moyen de
affixe
des abstraits, de
prastram,
Fr. 2,
1086"*.
etalape.
Emprunt6
Fr. 2, 108a ij
prastarana.
pratimoksa,
au Sanscrit
transcription
prdtimokfa.
Fr.
iij
,
fciv
1,
raso (cf.
a vi &
a".
rso),
coudee
(sa)
reki, parole (=
[A. rake; v.
et
du
Sanscrit
(prdtimoks).
a",
reo, forme
wirsoncd.
procer, frere
[v.
air
(=
1,
imper.
de prek,
si.
Fr. 2, 108
bhrdtar).
i.
08
933
S
sa, postpos. de 1 instrumental.
Sakso P Fr. 1,
111.]
Fr. 1,
6.
U.
b".
i.
113.]
iy
Fr. 2,
&
iv
a",
1096^; Fr.
Formes obliques
1086",
3,
Fr. 2,
6*.
samanettsa, sing.
samdnettse, sing.
(?a/?an^).
samp,
v. rso.
1086".
samdnem,
",
sing,
P.
preku,
Fr.
Fr. 2,
".
rMuite
samdnemts, plur.
pers.
= vitasti).
suiv.]
samane,
demander.
rap,
=pravdrand).
(=an<juh).
pour
[v.
rapanam,
po,
Fr. 1, 6 iij Fr.
postarh, apres (= pafcdt).
teiuwer postam,
2, 108
(postposition
l,a".
Fr. 2, 108a"-.
[Cf. gr. ope yw, got. -rakjan, etc.;
la formation, v. MSL. xviii.
18.]
rano, aussi. Fr. 2, 108a iy .
Fr.
.
kante.)
Fr.
ra
,
particule d affirmation, indiquant la
suppression d une formule deja enoncee
(= ityadt,peyyala). Fr. 2, 108 6, 109 a.
[Journ. As., 1912, i. 1UJJ
raksane, participe de rak^s, itenHre.
pikwalamne.
plur.
autre
celui-ci
Fr. 2,1096*.
Fr. 2, 109
Cf. la
6".
de sam, sama,
note 1 de la page 13.
notation
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
Emprunte nu Sanscrit
Cf. aussi la
108a 6 iv
Forme oblique: ean ne.
communaute.
sail,
Fr. 2,
la 3
possessif de
Fr.
lat,
[Cf.
etc.
suos,
sank,
109 a
Fr. 2,
pour
i.
le
1,6"
Fr. l,6i.
108
Fr. 2,
6K
113.]
[Journ. As., 1912,
sap, plua; dans othsap, q.v.
main
109<z
(=
Fr.
(=
sat).
xvii.
MSL.
1,
6 iij
Fr.
(-a,
1,
T.
instrum.),
108
Fr. 2,
6 vi
287.]
Jiasta}.
MSL.
[v.
etre.
xviii. 28.]
con
tklok>
OH
1,
Fr. 2,
vi .
sujet
pi.).
?arma, cause
= pratyaya).
3C
^arsassi,
sarsemanonfia,
(=
1,
femin.
vyavatds
).
sing,
Fr.
6le, avcc
6"
tars,
opt. de
Fr. 2, 1096"
).
partic.
ordonner
Fr.
sing.
pcrg.
ordoimer (= vyavasas
Cf. Sarsemanefina.
gars,
qui
Hna, dispute,
i.
sar,
BAD-
infraction,
skas, six
"[v.
sanmya,
il
filndnta,
uu mot
kalaha, vivada).
Fr.
sitmalyfie.
samgha.
(=
querelle
suffixe,
464.]
Empruntd au
peut-etre
scrait le pluriel d
zlvq
(pres.
Fr. 2, 108 6 iv .
scrit iiksapada.
silnantam, lire
sva).
l,o".
(=
pers.
uj<?},
macbe.]
sikaapat, prescription.
1086".
pronom
safi,
zlvali,
v. b. a.
et
variaute sank.
si.
rapprocher
Fr. 2,
tamgha.
383
macber
de
2,
109 av
MSL.
[v.
Fr. 2, 1096
copule euclitiquc.
Journ. As., 1911, i. 46,0.]
[v.
spak, assaisonuement. Fr. 2, 109W.
sjpa, et;
".
109
B8/U,
6V
Cf. Sarsdssi.
sujet femin.
Fr. 2, 109 a v
cas
celle-ci,
demonstr. tu.
[v.
mm
sing,
du
Fr.
2,109
61
cf.
gr. ftj, etc., T.
[Sur iaul, vie
Smith, Tocharisch p. 16.]
cas sujet
(iaulassu, vivant (= ayusmat)
;
sing.
108a".
Fr. 2, 108 a vi
se, ce (= idam}.
Fr. 2, 109
(pelaikne).
se, pron.
Fr. 3, ai
(=
yah).
(yarma).
1,
Fr, 2, 108
MSL.
de
km,
stamn,
[Si
Fr. 2,
v. h. a.
Bte, 3
&*
repose
vie,
sur
A.
gutturale,
iol,
on
cf.
108 o iv
stam, et
irl.
[v.
*,
etre.
comme
eat tent^ de
Fr. 2,
6".
skente. ]
religieuse;
2,
se tenit
108ai-i.
i
[Cf.
stmausa,
xviii. 3.]
(= bhakta); infinitif
a redoublement de */ sn, iuw, sw, manger.
dang saida,
etc.
vrksa).
v. sax.
a",
stam, arbrc (=
5 -"
sport,
divereifie
109
Fr.
d<
".
tamon, tronc.]
6"
relatif
prts.
Fr. 2,
pers. sing.
Fr. 2, 109 a
fournir.
lat sa-psa.]
eporttitr,
cf. v.
[I
participe
(=
sthd).
femin.
sing,
Fr. 2, 109
de
st-m,
b".
v. sup. a.v.
lamalle, et katmaskem, ils arrivent, a cot^
de kekatkau, vu ci-dessus on peut done
tion,
rapprocberle groupe du
lat. stare.]
VOCABULARY TO
384
fitwara
108
(cf. ftiver),
#,
[v.
(=
Fr. 2,
fntuh).
(=
MSL.
Fr.
catuh).
287.J
su, pronom demonstratif (
l,a".
Fr. 1,
Fr. 2,
neutre
v. le
jwi,
]
sucflcar, emprunte au Sanscrit mciyrha,
etui a aiguilles.
Fr. 1, &i v
.
Hwatsi,
[v.
p. 17.
Bwatsi,
Fr.
2,
[v.
takam,
109& v
Fr. 2,
109 6
".
v. isl. stinga,
un
fles
t-tre.
prcs.
de tak,
C-tre.
fetre.
(s)th-,
dcbout, se tenir.]
matin
genitif.
108.
tat)
Fr. 2, 109
tu.
tit-mem.
Fr.
v
109a>v.
(= pratar).
Fr.
neutre
demonstratif
(=
en tout cas
1,
1
,
(cf.
ai
Fr.
2,
etc.
cela
su),
(accus.).
1,
a ii!
Fr.
2,
108 a v
ft
jiii.
Fr. 2.
1096 iv
de tak,
pers.
slengtis, s efforcer;
v.
le
sing.
109i v .
1096 vi
Sanscrit
t*.
bienfaiteur.
Fr.
ilnnapati.
au
Emprunt6
109 6
2,
ir
;
Fr. 2,
1096"
du demonstratif
in.
</>,
lit.
tu-sa.
pres.
tanupate,
Fr. 3
fitre
infinitif.
takoya, 3 e
Fr. 2,
[Cf.
Cas obliques
1
Cf. peut-etre
(<W.
tu,
Fr. 2,
uttltd
lever"(=
du
emphatique de
}
pers. sing.
Fr. l.fli.iv If-.
takau,
1,
tsenketar,
ttse, affixe
srsuv<tr.~\
l re
Fr.
tsonkaik,
manger.
vi .
tsoiiknik, le matin),
3e
bhakta).
iuw,
infinitif.
108a
tsankafie.
Fr. 3, 6 iv .
xwatfisco, datif
2,
(=
Smith,
rapproche saul. ]
iufinitif de stcn,
109a iv
a",
Tocharisch/
(su-atsanma, plur.).
1
109 a iv
le
"
sfsxwer
iuxUgii, datif de
Fr.
aliment
nourriture,
Fr. 2, 109
Fr. 2,
trtlya).
= saK).
[Cf. scr.
(=
xvii.
286.]
de dependance.
Fr. 1,
a
tsalnalye, manger (
bhojaniya). Partic.
futur passif de tool.
Fr. 2, 109 6 1
infinitif
de
tsamtsi,
tsam,
ajouter.
tsa, aftixe
xvii.
Fr. 2, 108
trite, troisieme
[MSL.
xvii. 287.]
stwer, quatre
[v.
quatre
109 n\
MSL.
1086
(yar7na).
warpanalle,
accepter,
au .
gouter
(=
warp,
Fr.
ddiy).
pali
1,
ttk,
toucher
warpatar,
ii.
147.]
tra(sa)lye, ii croquer (
Mtadanlya), partic.
futur passif de trot t
Fr. 2, 109
trikelye. Fr. l,6U[*at].
a".
yeyya).
1,
Le present
fait
(=
moyen
pali tadi-
wiirpnatr
Fr.
oi.
[Cf.
142.]
Revue
celtique,
1913
(vol. xxxiv),
KUCHEAN FRAGMENTS
warserh,
oblique
plur.
Fr.
(=gt<ma).
wartto,
bois,
1,
worse, brigand
wrattsai,
(n4
saihpad, ordination.
wastsi
Fr. 2, 108
wastsi
108
ft*,
yi
1,
prati [de-
de
lat. uerto,
uersus.~\
upa-
liabiter
(=
Fr. 2,
vastavya).
108
a".
(=
civara).
(=
civara).
etc.]
vetement
wastsi),
(cf.
Fr. 2,
stilt,
l,o
(=
109 a 6.
Fr.
la famille
[De
du
v v.
ab"i-
[Cf. lat.
Fr.
upa-
Sanscrit
vetement
wastsi),
(cf.
Fr.
Sanscrit
affixe
respcctivement
mnlya]).
wasarhparh, emprunte au
sampanna, ordonn6 moine.
wasarhpat, emprunte au
1086
Fr. 2,
possessif.
108
Fr. 2,
vana).
385
(=
pare
<le
(*,)
ib.
(mem).
wat
ou (= w).
(cf. wat),
{paiiakte wat yopsa).
Fr. 2, 1 08
wat, ou (
va).
108 & v
Fr. 2,
6 Hi
6"
Fr. 1, &
dicr.
Fr. 2, 109a iv .
Cf. tuyknesa.
(rwnde wat),
de yn,
pres.
aller.
i.
457.]
watkassarh,
ordonner de
aya
de wat-k,
Fr.
causatif).
SS. p. 926.]
;
[Cf. gr.
yamasalle, partic. futur pussif (= karaFr. 1 6 Ti
Fr. 2,
riiya) de yam, faire.
108 a v
lit. einii,
ci/xi,
a",
etc.
watkassi, 3 e
yamaska,
Fr.
faiie.
watkassam.
1,
yamaskau,
wattareT" affaire
Fr.
faire.
6>
de yam,
v.
pers.
l,a>.
yamaskemane,
wayate,
weSa,
Fr. 3, &
108
dire.
wen,
dire (vac
yam,
Fr. 2,
a*,
weskemane,
(= mc,
dire.
partic.
pers.
Fr.
moyen de wen,
Fr.
vad).
3
we|?am,
dire
l,ai.
du pres. de wen,
1,
a"
Fr. 2,
Cf. wirsoncd.
[MSL.
xvii.
Sanscrit
possessif).
winai,
emprunte
au
ft
suffixe
Fr. 2,
abondance.
yarke,
yarm.]
yarra (cf. yarma), mesure
suffisance,
entrer
Fr. 2,
109
a"
[v.
Fr.
vinaya.
1, oiv.
1,6^; Fr.
[v.
Fr. 2
108^.
(wi,
",
Sanscrit
= pravii).
nca,
faire.
a".
laksana
Fr. 2, 108
yam,
108#.
285.]
deux
yamtr,
wewefiuwa, plur.
part, a redoublement
de wen, dire (= tiddista). Fr. 2, 108 6 vi
wi, deux.
Pr. 2, 1086*.
3 e pers. sing. subj. de
sing,
du
Fr.
yamassarh, 3 e pers.
faiivT Fr. l,a*6i.
faire (sa).
yarma
CC
Fr. 2,
(wa*<
(cf.
yarm),
108 a
r
(= pramana).
3, 108&*(<a).
i.
raesure
(M yarma)
yarma).
114.]
(= pramana).
Fr. 2, 108 6V
386
yarmamssu,
manika).
yasi, nuit
ayant
Fr. 2,
(=
mesure
la
(= pra-
108o.
instrum.).
yatka, absolutif de yat, yat,
(= bhdvay*). Fr. 2, 108
1,6^
clair.
Fr.
1,
aiu
[MSL.
(-*,
yokam,
b
occuper
ii
Fr.
ywarca
Fr. 1, &*,
ynari, eubst. tire de yn, cliemin ( marga).
Fr. I,a.
Fr. 2,
ydt-m, entrer
(femin.); 109
xviii. 19 et 26.]
(= pravif).
= pravii
de yit-m,
yitma?|am, 3
a*
a"
aller.
(masc.).
de yok, boire.
1,6".
yopsa, 3
a".
yesan,
partic.
Fr. 2, 109
Fr.
ratri).
ynemane,
ywarca
(cf.
ytcdrcd),
de yap, entrer
a"
6".
demi
(=
ardha).
raoitie
(=
ardha),
109oii(mna).
(cf.
ywarca),
Fr. 2, 108^".
(Plate
XXII.)
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
BY
THE two
A. F.
RUDOLF HOERNLE.
consignments, Part
me from Simla, in
letter
it
two
parts,
when
dotted lines.
Part
by the
pieces
brittle paper,
p.
The
CC
A BILINGUAL FRAGMENT
388
it
ideograms in a column.
On
seems to suggest
small portion of a roll which originally must have been of very considerable size
to accommodate the extensive text of the Satasahasrika Prajnaparamitfi.
In its
present condition the fragment does not permit of being bent or rolled ; but its
brittleness
this is
due to
which caused
its
it
to be scorched.
to indicate that
bears on
two
Whether the
scripts
it
Chinese on
sides are in
obviously are
been determined by
Whether the
work,
it
may
turn out to be another portion of its text, which may have been
Khotanese, or (what is more probable, see below) in Sanskrit
still
either wholly in
may
also
be a portion of
it was submitted by me to
examining the Chinese text. His reading
of it, and partial translation by Professor S. Levi, were first communicated to me on
February 3, 1904 but no identification of the text was at that date attainable. The
whom the Chinese text was next submitted, concurred (Feb. 13,
1904) with Professor Chavannes reading, and at the same time pointed out that in
col. 199, there was
Bunyiu Nanjio s Catalogue of the Buddhist Tripitaka
enumerated a Sutra, No. 874, which comprised in its title four of the ideograms
of our Chinese text, viz. col. i, nos. 14-17 col. v, nos. 13-16 col. ix, nos. 11-14.
late
Dr. Bushell, to
Chavannes and
Levi were rewarded by the discovery of the source of the Chinese text in the
Sanskrit Original of the Satasahasrika Prajnapuramita, as explained by the former
in the remarks introducing his edition of the text.
Their joint discovery was
Professors
The Khotanese text, on the reverse of our fragment, on which I had been
working myself, was communicated by me in September 1908 to Professor Leumann,
IN CHINESE-KHOTANESE
who had been
ment of the
already, with
still
almost
389
(see
my
The
identification
condition,
offers
intelligible in it
in
his
Zur
probability.
of the
(L.).
its
very fragmentary
similarity of
with certain passages of the text published by Professor
peculiar
nordarischen
That text
is
difficulties.
Nevertheless,
what
is
Lcumann
That religious work may very well have been the Satasahasrika Prajfiiiparamita
and in that case we should have here a fragment of a more strictly bilingual roll.
Some of the Rolls of the Stein Collection, which have been examined by me, are
;
inscribed on their reverse side with Khotanese texts, cither Sutras or Dhuranla.
The
latter,
description.
is
A BILINGUAL FRAGMENT
890
Obvers:
UN FRAGMENT EN
CIIINOIS DE LA SATASAIIASRIKA
PRA.TNAPARAMITA
M. Hoernle
Lvi
deux
f|uc haute,
quo ee texte n etait pas divine par pages, mais etait ecrit sur un rouleau continu qui
H? dcvcloppait dc lout en bout; I lisage dc CCH rouleaux ayant disparu presquo
auabitot npres la difT usion de rimprimerie au dixieme siecle de notre ere, notre
nianuscrit ne eaurait descendre a une ejKX|ue plus basse.
autre pnrt nous avons reconnti qie le textc reproduit litt^ralement la version
publiee en
naitre
les
le
il
multiples recensions de
etc* difficile
^fe
$Q
la Prajiia pilramita.
d en recon-
qtii
figure au
Meme
avec ce
mtme
prolixe.
texte Sanscrit rigoureusement equivalent; cependant de part et d autre la ressemblance est assez complete pour que presque tous les termes chinois s expliquent
directement en Sanscrit.
On relfcvera une singularity sans importance dans la colonne 20 de notre planche oil
texte de Hiuan-ttang ne fournit que 16 caracteres au lieu de 17;
peut-etre le scribe
avait-il repeU par erreur un des mots qui devaient figurer dans la lacune.
1
le
IN
CHINESE-KHOTANESE
391
A BILINGUAL FEAGMENT
392
Subhuti!
Subfiufe
est purifie
le fruit
xrotadpannaphala
est purifiee.
raiSdradya vixuddJiyd
Pourquoi cela
la
abhinnam
advaidhlkdram
vaiidradyaviSnddhyd
arhatphalaviSuddhih
la
qualite
les fruits
de
science
acchinnam
d omniscient
est
purifiee.
Pourquoi cela
vixuddhir
II
de sakrdiigamin, d anagamin
andgdmy\sakrdagdmy
xartdkdrajnald
les
c ect
purifiee,
garvakdrajnatdviSuddhis
qu il n y a la ni
C sddvayam etad
purifies,
de
srotadpan-
qualite
nophalaviyitddhis ca
et
si le fruit
vaiJsdradyavisuddhit ca
si
purifie,
sarvdkdrajnaldvisuddhir
hi
iti
*rotaapanna est
de science d omniscient
la qualite
si
les
Hi
Si
hi
de sakrdugamin, d anagamin et
sakrddgdmy
andgdmy
fruits
-{j/J
connaif-Eance de
g*
^"
pour mettic
fin
^ffi fijfr
a pas
lieu
de craindre.
^,
ts
ang fa chou
justifie
cette equivalence par un passage du Ta tche ton louen oil le Bouddha enumere les
quatre
vaisaradyas et ajoute a propos de chacun d eax : C est pourquoi j ai obtenu la tranquillite,
j ai obteuu de n avoir pas lieu de craindre.
IN CH1NESE-KHOTANESE
d
ny a
il
qu
ctddvayam efad
arhatphala viSuddhis
lit
393
alhinnam
advaidhikdram
ni coupure.
acchinnam
II
Subhotil
les
Subhute
buddhas
est purifiee
viSuddhih
la
pratyekabuddhabodhipurifiee, la qualite
e"tant
jtratyekabuddhabodhi viSuddhyd
la
vaiSiiradynviSuddhis ca
hi
la
si
Pourquoi cell?
Hi
est
purifiee,
si
prafyekabuddhabodhi viSuddhiit ca
d omniscient est
purifiee, c est
qu
il
ny a
1&
de
sarvdkdrajnatJ-
ni
dualite",
ctadvayam ctad
la qualite de science
tarrdkarajiiafavixuddhiS
ni division en deux, ni
advaidhikaram
separation, ni coupure.
acchinnam
aoAinnam
Subhotil
\\
les
quatre
Subhute
Bodhisattvas Mahasattvas
mahdtattvacarydviisuddhih
est
les
la
qualite
de
purifiee,
c est
qu
il
ny
les
d omniscient
science
Bodhisattvas
si
p.
ni
la
dualite",
etad
ctddvayam
la
est
])iiritiee.
viSuddhir
hi
tons
samikdrajnald
garvabodhisatttamahasattvacarydviSiiddkis ca
est
de
conduite
la
narvabodhiftatfra
etant purifiee,
mahdsaltva carydvixuddhyd
iti
Mahasattvas
Pourquoi cela
purifiee
tous les
qualite
si
la
conduite de tous
de science d omniscient
tarvdkdrajhatdvituddhis
ni division en deux, ni separation,
abhiunnw
adraidhiktiratti
ni coupure.
acchinnam
II
Subhoti
Subhute
de tous les
vi&uddhih
les
Buddhas
purifies!,
garvabuddhdnuttaragan>yakatiibodh i-
sarvabuddhdnuttaratamy \ktaiiibodhivisuddhyd
pnrifie"e.
Pourquoi cela
Si
i-aisdradyaviSuddhiS
A BILINGUAL FRAGMENT
394
Buddhtfs est purifiee,
si la
qualite
<le
sari dkdrajnatdviSuddhiS
qu
ny
il
ctddvayam
Derechef, 6 Subhuti!
Punar aparam Snbhute
purifiee
forme etant
la
les
purifiee, la qualite*
rupaviSuddhyd
Pourquoi cela?
hi
Hi
In
si
qualit.6
pnrifie*e,
c est
tari dkdrajnatdviStiddhis
qu
formo est
la
si
purifiee,
c&
rupuviSuddhii
ny a
il
la ni
dualite*,
etad
ctddvayam
abhinnam
advaidhlkdram
acchinnam
etant
II
purifiees,
la
sensation,
composants,
la
xamgkclra
la
vedand
pratitamvidviiuddhyd
les
designation,
sariijnd
3 e partie,
visuddhis ca ?arvakarajnatavisuddhis
acchinnam
vaisaradyavisuddhya
c^advayam
etad
samjmivisuddhih
advaidhlkaram abhinnam
samjnfivisuddhya
sarvakura-
jnatavisuddhir iti hi vaisaradyavisnddhis ca samjnavisnddhis ca sarvakarajnatavisnddhis c^advayam etad advaidhlkaram abhinnam acchinnam vaisaradyavisuddhyS
I
samskaravisuddhih
karam
abhinnam
acchinnam
vaisaradyavisuddhya
visuddhya sarvukarajnatavisuddhir
ca sarvakarajnatavisuddhis
les
c^advayam
memes
iti
pour re pe ter indefiniment la meme formule. Elle est reproduite encore, mutatis
avec rupa, Sabda,
mutandis, avec les termes caktuh, rotra, ghrdna, jihvd, manah
;
Pour
renvoyer a
IfH
IN CHINESE-KHOTANESE
395
gandha, rasa, sparsa, dharma\ avec cakxuri ijndna, srotravijiidna, ghrdnavijndna,jihvdavec cakxuhsaintparxa, Urofraxativtparsa, ghrdnavijndna, kdyavijndna, manovijndna
;
samsparsa, jihvdsamsparSa,
kdyasamsparta, manahsanixparsa
avec caksuhxaiitAparSa-
La rm me
vailsdradya, a
kdyatamsparsapratyayavedand,
commencer par
avec
manahsamsparxapratyayai-e-
lo terrae prafixamvifl
substitue an terme
hi
praiisarhvidvisuddhis
etad advaidhlkaram
abhinnam acchinnara
8
dcveloppemont fait partio du xxvi pnrivarta dc la Satnsahasrika, qui
occupe 258 pages du manuscrit de la Hibliothfeque Nationale, et quo Astasahasriku
resume en deux pages (185-187 de I e d. de la Bibl. Indiea, jusqu sl
atha khalv
Tout
ce
ayusman
Sfiriputro
gambhlra bbagavan
Prajfiiipuramita).
Astasahasrika
(viii
186-87)
ya Subhute rupavisuddhifr sa pbalavisuddhib ya phalavisuddhih sa rupavisuddhir iti hi Subhute rupavisuddhis ca phalavisuddhis c^advayam etad advaidhikaram abhinnam acchinnam iti hi Subhute phalavisuddhito rQpavisuddhl rupavisuddhitnh phalavisuddhih
evam vedanfisamjnasarhskfirah ya Subhute vijfianavi^uddhih sa phalavisuddhih etc.
ut sup.
parivarta, pp.
jnatavisuddhih ea rQpavisuddhir
Reverse:
BY A.
F.
RUDOLF HOERNLE.
The Khotanese text of the fragment is written in the cursive type (p. xiv)
of the Gupta script. There are, however, some peculiarities in the present case
which deserve notice: (1) Ornate forms of vowels, or other marks, occasionally
Thus we have three times an ornate form of
alternate with the ordinary forms.
a in hva
1.
4,
of d in dmna
pvd
e
1.
1.
1.
17,
6, Se
6,
me
1.
ysdm
1.
1.
tvdm
8,
9,
4,
11.
1.
5,
hvd
dtam
1.
18, 19,
8,
1.
hd and
yam
1.
yam
1.
10,
md and yarn
1.
15, pv
1.
16, ha t
ydm
21.
A BILINGUAL FRAGMENT
396
Jxai and mai (corr. wl)
1.
vyaw
6, Jtau
7,
1.
With
never occurs.
}.
an in au
17, as well as of
and fy?/
n<rw
1.
10, naw
1.
1.
2,
With
16.
with a tailed
d,
far
is
term in Zur nordarischen Sprache und Literatur, pp. 1, 58) appears here, not in the
form of an inverted arc, which is used, e. g. in the calligraphic script of the
kg
16,
1.
pva
11.
But
16, 17.
in ?M 2 a
kd 2 a
ij
,
1.
8,
it
&c.),
e.g. in la
11,
1
It may be added that the long u is made
practically duplicates the ordinary form.
but a second
in two ways: the ordinary form is seen, e.g. in yttu and mu 11. 4, 11
form occurs in pyu 1. 12, and this form is seen exaggeratedly in ttu 11. 4, 9.
;
The well-known
for
rrta
11.
and n
1.
7,
Ua
is
1.
8.
But
it is
sufficiently noticeable
even in
tfa
1.
14, tr
1.
15,
and Uye
17, 21.
marked
vertical bars, as in
11.
1, 3, 7,
in
8, 10,
two ways
14
or
\\ ith
regard to the language of our fragment, the alternations in the manner
of spelling two words also deserve notice.
have the alternatives, bafyxa 11. 2
(twice) and 9, and bayga 11. 2, 4, 18 (thrice), 19.
Similarly there arc the alter
We
11. 16,
Professor Lcumann, in his Notes,
18, and ayscimu 11. 4, 11.
points out that these alternative spellings point to two stages in the develop
ment of the literary language of Khotan, an older represented by balyga and aysmu,
natives aysmti
M.
Pelliot in
pp. 22
3
Un
The
elision of /
is
fully discussed
by
ff.
<
IN CHINESE-KHOTANESE
397
form of the word balysa is marked by the subscription of the apostrophe or arc,
below the syllable ba. For a fuller treatment of this subject by Professor Leumann,
his dissertation Zur nordarischen Spracho und Literatur (Strassburg, 1912),
,
apostrophe
Khotanese
text.
t>al,
wrongly omitted under the syllable prd of pvdiia, which should be written
same line. In this connexion, also, the
p^&na, as compared with pvara in the
merely graphic variation of bisa 1. 3, and !ta-fa 11. 5, 13, 16 may be noticed. Also the
it
is
With
rr,
may
be noticed in varrfdmmii
1.
7.
For
it
may
be noticed
occasionally imperfect, when the ink did not take sufficient grip of the
rough surface of the paper, or when it became blotted before it had fully dried.
Thus in 1. 1 the downstroke of r in the aksara ru of the first aruva is interrupted,
as compared with the same ru in the second druva.
Similarly the upper portion of
that
it is
1.
hand, in
two
1.
1,
the visarga
mark
In
1.
7, varrtdihmii,
the
Similarly, in
1.
11, the
first
yd
1.
and thereupon
TRANSCRIPT.
1 aruva-jsa
mana
da aruva-jsa (mana)
xx
[25]
vara^U baysum(n()gay*mii
[20]
indicates the
number
3
Supplied from
1.
18.
A BILINGUAL FRAGMENT
398
3 (cZ)amdii ide
...."...
4 (hvd)na.
"
has[<]am
x...."
(tarn)
..............
n biSi/au
miixau .........
.-.[26]
riisii
padya
(6a)||sdtta drai
khw x ...........
...... ^. ____ [23] ba9 IvsarhnJi dam pveme kena ttu parahi nax ....................
"
10 sam
11 aysiimu pana
taha xx
12
sa b(ud)[y]au na
lam
.............................
................................
[32]
[29] x
bijx
13
15
...............
10
[15] Avd;7||iya
uia)
cu vafia va^ta u sa
namau
n da
So
6
This supplement is based on a MS. of the Avalokitesvara Dharam (5 Til =
16 ) of the Petrovski Collection. The sense of the whole context could be surmised
with the help of Mahavyutpatti, No. 91 [L.]. See also Professor Leumann s Zur
lli
IN CHINESE-KHOTANESE
16
[16] (sa)rh
nauhll na
aysmuna
17
bil&l
[15]
ana mara
12
jsaimi
18
upevar^
19
pvfirji I
tay$dw||(</)ma/iiiyarh
hada
pyarii pra
[7]
[20] rx
.
lo
*f|au
prarh
vasvemna sam||/anaa
utamnii saka
railhii i
20
.
399
13
hada samba
[15]
[21] ni yarimii ttyc-ttil drx
21
[15]
The
text
is
blja, b\Sa
But
see
drai, hattainma,
tta, vatve.
18
Or mat. The original has both vowel marks, at as well as
apparently correcting the former.
13
Only the superscript r of a ligature survives.
the latter
a.
(Plato
XVII, No.
2.)
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
BY
A. F.
RUDOLF HOERNLE.
from Khotan
On
certainly
far
practically complete,
<if>iiiH-"
torn out
which
ftlonjf
it
ha*
the
left,
unknown
size, is lost.
The surviving
portion
hulf
r>f
Neither damage
ftllbcts
the Tibetan
Obverse
A KHOTANESE DOCUMENT
A TIBETAN MEMORANDUM
401
well-known double dot (see p. 221) takes in our document. It is never made
form of a distinct pair of dots, but, cursively running into one, it occasionally
of a simple arc (as in bmana, 1. 4), but more commonly
times) takes the shape
twenty-six times) of an arc indented in the middle and sweeping downwards
in the
(seven
(about
to the
1.
In both shapes it may be seen side by side
5).
right of its consonant (as \njsdra,
in sfdmmdnfi, 1. 3. Written in this way, it is not uncommonly found in cursively
mo
x
Asiatic Society of Bengal, vols. Ixvi and Ixx (Extra Number), of 1897 and 1901.
1.
It may be added that the shapes of the subscript
in
dtjrl,
apostrophe (as
2),
the consonant / (us in bail, 1. 3), and the interpunctional vertical double dot (at the
(p.
395).
1.
1), are
There
is also
These faded
letters
marked by
are
well preserved.
In a few
the intended writing is
underlines in the transcript.
an
fmtport
IB
not
yflt intelligible,
first line
and
it
But
afill
its
penerol
unknown, und,
some eitwn even the (Iclimitntinn of tv word lining ntu*crt!iin< ItPiw, far
the present, no more than a provisional transcript Can be nd cml.
A ihf ns possible,
1
however, the words with their ascertained or suggested meanings have been included
in foot, In
TRANSCRIPT.
1
^til
duyam
I
.
k^i a
asjri Sureriidra
hviigtyau-puri pa-
In these early publications it was confounded witli thu mark of the vowel o, to
which it is not unlike. Its identity was first recognised by Prof. Sten Konow, and
pointed
out in JRAS., 1914, p. 341. The medial vowel o, in fact, is of comparatively very roro
D d
A TIBETAN MEMORANDUM
402
drama aha
si
sti
hvas.fyam
hiya
inijle
hiyau
khu-va binurhdara
sti
8 jarhpha prava
ms"aiia-ye
9 paderhdil
arii-
.sr
to
nate pidakil
si
cu-va praca
Sudatta
asiri
puril nafara
ksii
mau
vinau
liyastyampura
uai
ttagu
sirye
drai
ksasta
cyil
?nau
"kusa
Reverse:
A TIBETAN MEMORANDUM.
The
text of the
Memorandum, written
Orii
died
bag tsas
)>rava
po
blon rgyal
follows
bzan
in fairly
iiam noh sa
gyi
mdzad pahi
gflis
gyi
gla
fidence
"
jxs
still
*
Perhaps cvam.
probably in both lines either
of sta, all the letters are too indistinct to be read with any con
10
Perhaps
td is a
mere conjecture.
k*i or ksl.
the sentence.
A TIBETAN MEMORANDUM
2 pan
de
died
po
3
myiri smral
3 Ian Ina par
ban
4 ban
de
5 nog
6ur
bad
su
li
no
su
la
phab
pahi
gehdra
sig
de
pan
no
gehdra
fill
bol
chi
dvaji
tshe
ya
6 sa tsadzugo
sdud sna
7 nog
rgyal
403
mtsan gi tehan
phul
na se
ban no
galo
bah
mog
nog
jfe
kofi
stagyi
nas
ban
pah
gutsag
pan de
ber 2a 4 bsdu
go,
de
li
no
de
ban
nog
rgyu
bad
..
mar
6i
yi
6a
de
gehdradra
ban
[hole] de
suhe
li
ban
chi
sur
dad bog
.
ma
rgyan
li
man bod
-
ste
bul
TRANSLATION. 5
As a
[due] from fear of acting culpably against the mind of the excellent
High Bltm rgyal, the [following] names, having been
clearly set forth, were entered
at the office of the Bande the
and gifts made -five kine
High sTag gi rgyal
were bestowed upon Bandes
severally, viz. Par mog no gehdra ,ig, Bande no
gehdra SU
coats and caps,
having been collected, were presented in various collections to Bandes
viz.
Bande
severally,
galo na Sc chi, Bande nog rgyu bad, Mar Si kon
fej, Ban no ga chi
Bamh nog Sur <kaji, Bande no
gehradra, Bande yi Sa bad, T,h ya ~pak t
tuke,
taazugo, Li gut fag, Li tur dad, Bog ma
rgyan, Li man bod.
fee
Man,
&
NOTES.
The circumstances of
may
this distribution of
gifts are not clear.
be either officials of state or ecclesiastical
functionaries.
The
recipients
*%
2
,
The
iveau
sur.
Dd2
A TIBETAN MEMORANDUM
404
Line
1.
c/ie
adjective
ft of ched
is
Noii sa
C/ied
La
On bag (sas see Jaschke, Dictionary, p. 364. yfjit apparently refers to the two
components of the compound word bag fsas (A. H. F.).
L. 2. spiral is either for tntrax, or for pral, the causative of hphral la spralchat is
used in the sense of distinct enunciation (A. H. F.). Possibly smral is a contamina
tion of the two words xmra and spraL
A like difficulty arises in line 3, bol, which
;
forms part of a name) must have the same sense as bid in line 7 the
it is a mere vulgarism,
suggests contamination of hbul ba with hbogs
Perhaps both smral and bol are instances of purely graphic abbreviation of
it
(unless
vowel
jxt.
o,
unless
as smra spral and Hogs hbnl. Myin, the modern min, showTrtbe-BftHW
that appears consistently before i and e in the fragments and inscriptions
of Endere found by Sir Aurel Stein.
compounds such
archaic
tna
it
possible that it is
igllog**!
L. 5.
an abbreviation
it is
obscure.
of
for chot.
li
where
it
occurs here
is
Minor
and bande.
1, 2),
7),
KHOTANESE VOCABULARY
BY
ami
B refer
RUDOLF HOERNLE.
A. F.
Chinese- Khotanese
p.
.
Prof.
Vocabulary, ante,
P.
M. Pelliof s
Voc.
= Prof.
Konow s
<
publications.)
balysa,
aha, B 4, uncertain.
ana, sitting, abiding, A 17; in the phrase
ana mara mu/ui I hada pvara, staying
here from me on this day they hear also
B 3, 6 amnai, B 7
spelled dmnn, A 4
K. Voc.; L. 105"; but ana, K.*; P. 116
:
translates
aingi
yl,
i);
balysfifia,
2,
or later baysana,
18, 19,
always preceding
or baysun ta A 14, 19;
f>]
aysa with
banelmna
See hastamma.
balysusta (erroneously l>alysautta),
or balysuna.
cf.
one
2,
balysusla,
unless it be a clerical error
atfc,
end.
8ai>i\n(
later
2, or
later baysusta,
18, 19, or baysCahsta,
18, der. of balysa or bai/sa, grandness,
See Iiastamma.
speech (cf. Skr. vaccu), instr. sing.
A
7.
See
drat.
basana,
bati, B 3, uncertain.
basft,
bjysufia,
ham-
10
badna, fully (Skr. sambhrtena, L. 48 ).
bija, second
second,
(cf.
14.
KHOTANESE VOCABULARY
40G
another way.
binumdara, B 5, 6, uncertain.
bisa, all, B 7; gen. plur. bisdmnd,
Buddha.
3;
bisdmnd (A
sati
(i.
dmnd
human
of all
e.)
or baidmnti,
5) sarvauysnaurdmnd of all beings,
3,
bista, twenty,
beings.
bista,
10.
the same as
comparative budara, K.
Voc.,
padya
No. 91.
K. 1 28.
drachme
drama,
bura,
busldd,
cu,
4,
si,
j
;
uncertain.
5, 7
K. Voc.,
K.
gavarh,
gistai,
crrarh,
Skr. gatnbhlra,
gambhira,
sing,
15.
uncertain,
9,
uncertain
K. Voc. gltti.
8, uncertain
perhaps a past
also in Rep. 37,
rel.
pron.
cf.
gvaeci,
K. Voc.
doc. 5,
1.
9, uncertain
3.
B 5,
K.= 27.
cu,
uncertain.
3,
gvara,
ci, conj.,
B4,
profound, nom.
See namau.
part., cf.
Cham, B
si),
q.v.
apparently a 3.
mm, p. 274,
42a
reduplicated
much, many,
pronouns khu,
;
13,
aftixed to
4,
119
distributively.
estyai (with
busana, B
(?),
P. 35, L.
19.
Buddha, Buddha, A
K. Voc.,
Cf. dirai,
religion,
plur. of gvava,
uncertain.
pronoun, who,
15; cu-bura, quantitative
relative-interrogative
which;
cu,
ha,
hada,
/ta,
day,
10
cmph. or expl.
particle.
See ana.
17, 20.
hajsaudai, B 6, uncertain.
11
hasta, elephant, B 3 K. 1135.
;
hastarhma
da, law, religion (Skr. dharma)
da,
1,
15, 17; perhaps
see lalysa.
dadana,
or
da,
nom. sing.
dam, A 9:
di,
cf.
M
K.Voc., L. 105", 119
darhda, A 3, uncertain perhaps incomplete
.
xdamda.
dasta, hand,
B 7.
in
with
95* 96 s,
(d for vardttd.
1
K.M135, K. 30
hastammina
See L.
cf.
94"
instr.
(kurina), P. 9.
sing.
18
fera.
KHOTANESE VOCABULARY
B
1 1
apparently the
10,
11;
given,
past part.,
hduryadd, B 9 cf. K. Voc. hour.
himi, 3. sing. pre?. of subst. verb himii or
hdmd, is, B 5 himye, 3. sing, past, was,
B 3 perhaps also hima, A 1 4 also
hauda,
hiri, thing
1,
(?),
hiya, belonging
K. Voc. hlvl.
hvan,
10.
1.
10,
to,
B6
54",
4,
14,
8,
jiurd,
dexter,
hvastyarh,
nom.
kira, work,
ksa
(or
11
hvattyau,
pr. n.
perhaps
K. 31.
hvdstd, K.
cf.
5;
with
135,
K Vo-
perhaps
1
>"
7.
>Ste
3.
diia.
3. plur. pres.,
they
fire,
See K. Voc.,
3.
P. 98, 101.
ksasta, sixty,
ksira, land,
BG;
cf.
L.
kusa, drum,
cf.
B6
L. 114
jarhpha,
8,
ji,
kin,
1 1
113;
1?
ju
(in
ji-e),
484.
gen. plur.
K. 2 33.
9 (W),
1 1
cf. S.
kflrdritna,
483, P. 105.
obi.
14,
plur.
mahdydmHau,
10 (tor mahdydmnyau)
also apoco
see bdlyia.
pated mahdyarii, A 17
A
1
mana, emphatic particle,
(bis), 5, 10,
11.
Cf. mam K. Voc.
maiiarh, A G, unccitain K. Voc.
mara, adv., here, A 17, B G cf. Rep. 38,
doc. S, 1.2, K/33. See ana.
;
9, 11 (bin), uncertain.
obi.
form of
1.
pers.
K.
spelled ma, L. G5
mijle, B G, 7, uncertain.
pron.(J),
6;
lr>
1,
jgdrh,
K. Voc.
jsaimi, A 17, uncertain,
jsara, 3. pi. pres. of jsd, they go (?), B 5,
11
also in Rep. 37, doc. 1, 1. 5
cf. K.
Voc..,; a; L. 133".
jsvena, A 6, uncertain cf. jsvaka, K. Voc.
jumna, time, fold (with drat), B 3: cf.
;
Vo<
14
na, emph. particle, even,
perhaps B 4.
Sec vatve.
namau, loanword from Bansk. namo, hail !,
A 15; in the phruse namau gambhtrd
paramdrthii tryamnl dd, hail to the pro
found highest truth, to the law of the three
sing. perf. of na,
.3.
B8;
cf.
L.
116",
nauha, moment
for the sake of,
cf.
kina, kidna,
Vehicles.
nate,
52".
kena,
S.
cf.
doc. 1, 1. 10.
jsa, obi. post- position,
L.
23; K.
K. Voc.
mi,
R.
mau, B
J
ja, encl.,
71";
1136/bcii.
doctrine), instr.-abl.
pers. or dem. pron. aa,
PS loc. eg., in this,
17, 20,
nf
<>
4, (8 ?).
L.
cf.
six,
ksi),
K.
maha,
7.
11;
4,
khubwa,
Fg.
B4.
hvaram,
W>31
cf.
2. sing.
imp. hvana,
always with rasa;
3. sing. opt. hvdnlya, he may declare!,
A15;
12
see L. 134
fut. pass. part, hvaifai, to
be said,
see
14;
blja.
Perhaps con
nected with it, hva, B 9
hvai, B 3 hre,
K. Voc., L. 134" ff
the vocalic changes, cf. L. 117
,
K. Voc., ttiitdna, ttutina, ttdtena.
B
5
khu-lnira
khu, as, how,
;
fchu-vd, B 6
(Skr. kiyat, ydvnt), how many, aa many,
32.
P. 13, 14.
cf.
hlyau, B 6
L.
cf.
to say, declare
say!,
On
407
navhd,
he has obtained,
120".
KHOTANESE VOCABULARY
408
95 2
as in L.
89 7 93 15
cf. ib.
pvemo
moment,
See
94".
rasve.
nitdtai,
apparently
niid, uncertain
B7; K. Voc.; R.
or
14, see
7, see drai.
jxiJc i,
padai, B 2, uncertain.
padarhja, perhaps relating
with,
obi.
time;
sing.
connected
K. 1136(L.
52"),
cf.
uncertain;
9,
to
in
Skr. para-
See namau.
15.
pidaka,
scrip,
document, B 8 ; also in
1 ; from pldd. written,
praca,
9,
8,
with pana
un-
certain.
pura,
eon,
4, ^,
10
2.
(bit); puri,
part. fut. pass, of the
3. plur. pres.
pva/rd,
1 7,
see balyta
they hear,
^arnpura,
samtana, loanword
from
See usarhpurd.
Skr. samtdna,
all,
always
bi&a.
6na,
16, 17,
see
10.
8,
16,
uncertain
pvara,
K. Voc.,
or prava,
saia, year, B 4
salt, B 5.
4 ; cf. K. Voc.
sara, with busUa,
uncertain.
20,
sariaba,
-M.ASB.
cf.
P. 114.
the
i.
paraha, virtue, piety (syn. Skr. slla), obi.
Sec L. 6 24 122 1D ; K.
sing, parahi, A 9.
B 9;
randm,
sa,
pi.,
102 21
L.
padinde.
pajsu, B 3, uncertain.
parhteai, in front, B 8, with I encl. ; cf.
K. Voc.
pana, fragment of a word meaning giving
rise
gen.
K. Voc. rarkna,
K. 2 34.
pademdi, B
jewel,
50*>,
figure ;
P. 117.
17, in
connected
Rep.
plur. pcudya,
to,
also in
24.
obi.
blja;
noun, hearing,
pvena, P. 98, and
Cf.
cf.
L.
foot,
abstr.
?),
fut.
rana,
pa,
(corr. pveme
see babjsa.
pvama, K. Voc.
pyamtsa-sta, in future, B 5 ;
36.doc. 1,1.3; cf. K. Voc.
B 5, (with Art) B 4,
or perhaps
(with ha) B 10; nai, B 11
emph. or interrog. cf. K. Voc.
nd pant part, of
pvana.
that much, B 3.
after a verbal form
P. 117.
Airye, good
(?),
P. 101 iirye.
10;
(1),
cf.
4,
5,
K. Voc.
cf.
fird.
KHOTANESE VOCABULARY
B
Bll
sta,
sti,
stadd,
stdmdd,
"
Btarhmafla,
Skr.
(?
biiila
A
!
tcahau, numeral
haura.
four,
Cf. K. 25.
thauna, garment, B
7,
See
1 1
(bis); cf.
L.
L.
1),
with
encl. tvl,
masc.
sing.
ttu,
nora.-acc. sing. neut. tta,
also adverbially, thus
(bis),
bayxunana
14;
gcn.-loc.
ace. plur. tta,
10,
sing,
A 21;
ttye,
pres of an
15.
G, uncertain.
17, 21,
instr. plur.
ttyau.
5.
gen. plur. ttam,
5,
sing.
vava, B 7, unceituin.
velaka, B 3, perhaps pr. n. of locality.
vinau, Vinaya or without (I), Bll; cf.
L. GC
K. 1139wnai.
43";
vimya-bhata, loanword from Skr. vaineyabhrti, maintenance of one who may become
a convert, of an
B 8, 10 cf.
enquirer
khuburd
1.
7.
instr.
aysdmuna
is
vasta,
(Skr. evam) ;
4, in the phrase
B7
what
cf
dem.
B 5, cf. L. G4 W
3
ttu, A 4, 9
1
K. Voc.
Hep. 37, doc. 1
5, 1
cf.
1, 2.
uncertain verb,
107"-".
ttcina
uymavramnd,
varrtarhma, apparently
cf.
15
B7;
obi.
paslnnlna}.
BG,
plur.
attained, attainment;
rariuta,
From the verb
2, 19.
vnraS, to attain, K. Voc.
See hnstamma.
134";
;
ace.
11.
varasta,
pron. sa
vafla, here,
doc. 5,
gen. plur.
See Ufa.
vara, there,
ilrai.
R. 23, 30
see Rep. 38, doc. 5, 1. 2
jHimmlna thauna, woollen cloth (Pers.
tl, eniph.,
notn.
being,
13 (constructed with
sing.
uysiiaura)
3, 5.
8,
human
proper name.
2,
3, uncertain.
nynnaura,
tthili).
Suremdra, B
uysnaura, a
11, uncertain.
Sudatta, B
19.
uvaysi,
of stdma, stand
loc. sing,
ing, condition
See hastamma.
starh, q.v.
stura,
409
Y
u, and, B3, 7, 8, 9, 10.
upau, A 4, uncertain perhaps separately
U JMU.
upevara, 3. plur. pres. of verb upev, they
yanim,
18; L.
108".
tamma.
ugampura (?)
see
fampura.
See hat-
sing.
yanama,
pres. of
\.
plur. pres.,
1.
yamna,
\
21.
cf.
K. Voc.
LIST OF
ADDENDA
1.
see also Dlgha Nikaya, Text, vol. i, p. 37, Translation
8, Add
of the JivnMa), pp. 50 fl
Blameless One for (white) elephant
Also
P. 34, 1. 27, in stanza 5, read
cancel footnote 9, and substitute as follows
9
Its etymology, as a compound of na and tigas, is explained
Niiga, blameless.
in the Suttn Nipata (PTS. cd.,p. 96), where verse 518 asks ndgo fi kathatii pavuccati,
why is he [Buddha] called ndga and verse 522 replies dgnm na karoti kind loke,
ndgo ftif/i pavuccate taihatta, he commits nothing blameable, for that reason such
a one is called ndga
The form ndga, for ndgas, is analogous to, e. g., Mrgaxira,
a by-form of Mrgaliras, &c. and the form tigum, in verse 522, is analogous to, e. g.,
In
Pali tffjytt for Sanskrit tadyut, &c. (see Professor Miiller s Pali Grammar, p. 6).
early Buddhist writings the word is not infrequently used as an epithet of Buddha
and his bhiksus. Thus it occurs five times in the Sutta Nipata, in verses 421, 518,
In the
522, 573, 1058, and in the Patimokka xiii (as quoted in P. Dy., p. 255), &c.
latter place, Childers translates
chief ; so also Fausboll in verse 421 (see SBE. x.
I [the King who
68), but there the correct translation is,
speaks], adorning the
army-house, will [there] give [thee, i. e. Buddha] at the head of the congregation of
The
(ndga-xaingfia-purakk/iato).
[thy] Blameless Ones (i. e. the bhiksus) wealth
is used as an
other word naga, elephant
but, in
epithet in the sense of eminent
that case, always at the end of a compound see Amarakosa, kh. iii, si. 59, nttarapade Krcxt/idrfJia-gocara/i HO also the Sabdakalpadruma, quoting the Medinlkosa. In
the Buddhist acceptation, the word ndgn does not appear to be noticed in anv Sanskrit
kosa or dictionary.
P. 35, footnote 12, add the reference Sutta Nipata (PTS. new cd.), verses 518
and 521.
P. 203, between the entries ndga and mdo insert
Naga, Blameless One, an
epithet of Buddha, II. 6
P. 23,
a"
(Mdo.,vol.q (X),
foil.
Pratyutpanna-buddha-sariimukha-avasthita-samridhi-niima-mahaynna-sutra, though
the colophons, all except the last, present the title Bhadrapfila-pariprccha-samadhi.
The passage occurs on fols. 65 ^"-68 r/ iv in chapter (/?//) 14, entitled Dharmabhanaka there is also a division into bam jw s of which No. 4 contains the passage.
The first part of the text is much fuller in the Tibetan, so that it is not practicable
to cite all the divergences.
The following points of reading may be noted
,
Obv.
1.
67;
prai
(sic): nmos kyah cl dgot,
like taking one from the
8, probably read ckd for euu, and translate
1
sands of the Ganges
Coriih fa ghorah, him thieves injure not .
ua
nard
Jtetlicnti
in place of na sukaro.
9,
pra<h<*ta-citlu
W,j)rdvarfta bhavet is rendered jyug byed, set on foot
5 Yahdh
1, vi/Mttf-eu te fatya aranye galtuya mhdyaldih gevdih ca kurvanti,
11.
kali
<l<lo
1.
1.
Rev.
1.
I.
II.
2,
3, 4, yatyatta, &c., as in
1.
2,
bhaved vipannam.
Na
karnarogo na
LIST OF
Rev.
1.
11.
ADDENDA
Asuras,
protect him ;
4-5, 5-6, 6-7, who,
MM
1/7,
for atlia.
knowing by
In his mind
is
1.
1.
10, vitluratidru
Mahoragas
1.
411
^
.
?).
ydvad
Rev
l.
6, anlardkduatya
l .
]]
3_4 fad
iildnlm
ayam
Mnk.
1.
3, vatpulya.
the obtaining
6, prabl,uta*ya,
large
1.
7,
<lerat<<}-pujd-[nmMam.
Puriivrtte,
(Viarat),
1.
add
mdyacarana-iampannak
mgatah
lokacid
tattva-damya-taratkih
is implied by
anultarak deva-nara-deiikak \bnddko bkagavdM, which
Pancakewya kale (litiff+maJtewa****).
the ydva ot the fragment.
1.
Rev.
1.
1.
1.
1.
mdrana-jard-jdti-Soka-jetr.
kdni
tri*i\adkydiayena aa<lrKa-\(h^klia
1 7
ctfurna] Mti itaUvah bkarati]
presents in the
Pp 108-116. Of the Suvarnaprabhasa the Tibetan Bkah-hgyur
of which the first is from the
Berlin copy (see Dr. Beckh s catalogue) three versions,
in %yd. vol. ^ (XII),
Chinese. The two first recur in the India Office copy, namely
;
Chinese is naturally
1-208 and 208-385 respectively. The rendering from the
but it u ty BO means
of less value than the other for textual comparison j
at the
91 "-92
is to be found on fols. 288a" -298" (
(1) This passage
of chapter IX (bunyataend of chapter VIII (Hmmyavatl-parivarta) and beginning
The following points of reading may be noted
parivarta).
Then the Bhagavat having uttered that
Obv. 1.2, Both renderings begin
Mahisattvas
Dharam, again for the benefit of those Bodhisattvas,
in order to show the nature ot
round
VMM
fols
<)
him,
&c., assembled
these verses
the excellent, true Sunvata, at that time uttered
1. 6, taingrama (not so the Chinese).
Rev.l. 2, tpartyufy, (reg-pa-dag-la) ; analikruntdk
1. 3, samgrama (not so the Chinese).
Devas men,
412
LIST OF
Rev.
1.
4,
1.
5,
I.
6,
ADDENDA
negative)
nifoitta
axra/j/uiva
aU/iit<t
Chinese,
parikal}>a-g<tmit-
[dtj/tara.
ii
(2) This passage oceurs in fols. 354 a -354// (= 167^-168^"), being the
end of chapter XXI (Susambhava Chinese Rnja-Susambhava), and the
beginning
iii
of chapter XXII
(Deva-yaksa-pariraksana-ksetra-dhuranI).
may be noted
Obv.
1,
II.
1.
Rev.
taddfiarma
2-3, om. atha
1.
1.
1.
liiiaiitraydttidm
5, parijunitu.
1.
11.
LIST OF EPJIATA
3 from bottom, read jiratifiii ,i~ for
/trafi/aM
P. 62, footnote 10, read /tnnl,-i/a//, p. 39.
P. 90, 11. 1, 2, probably read
ua
ua *,itrtn,i.
JV/-7
/V>/w a]yui(i
P. 90, 1. 4, in place of the crosses, read te tui/a
te\Jena] as confirmed by the Tibetan.
P. 90, 1. 7, in place of the
ulha iftikim-raksnxtl fc taxi/u trio
crosses, read
from the Tibetan.
P. 95, footnote 14. und der for des
P. 99, footnote 17, add
f//v/A-/W, &c., with a single /, however, are regular Pali
P. 103, 11. 16 and 20, insert I before
say
fs^ellin.^
P. 106, 1. 3, read stluiiua-t,a/
intH^
P. 113, I. 14, read /- for nl
P. 120, 1. 10 from bottom, read banner for
Hag
P. 19, left col.,
1.
knrut<>
<jrlniul<,
///>?
<
P. 120,
P. 124,
P. 125,
1.
17,
1.
4, read
comma
after
renunciation
*d a.
for
C<*a,la
1.
Uishis for Ilislus
4, read
P. 127, 1.2, read Dr- for <drP. 128, right col., 1. 7, read
lJn//ia- for Ji/inl/ia.
P. 129, footnote 27, add
also allowed
the Tibetan
<
11.
2, 3, read
d\>/ai
u,
by
and [faituiid
P. 214,
P. 289,
1.
3, read
1.
4, read
for *attaxt/i-
whole
comma
before SitUiutl
[world
of
Pl.ATK
4f^r*. -
*/* I -HV*,
/<f
W^k
-%W*itfc.,
^W J-^N^^^i*^ -S^f-l
"ft-^^V^^J
& V^B^SJ A
*$*&*&
]-
^.<n
HOKUM.
i.
i:
MS., No.
140;;.
\ JN.\V.\
2.
3.
149^,.
TI;\T,
For..
ATANAMV.V SC TK\.
AU
SUTUA.
90.
ki.vi K^I
RI.\KK>I
OiiVKRsK
.v,.
/,
;,/, t,
...
Hoi.KNi.i
fftff
e*^^gel^.$6
I.ATF.
II
PKAVAKANA Srru\,
l-
.n..
132.
RI:VKK>K
f *&&&-ti&p%p tpr$ %P
.v( y/-
>
"*lfrt<#*
j3#1&TP^*4f^^?^^
^
loKKM.l
MS., No.
l.|(/,
Sl KA SOlKA,
OI..
56.
Kl.\l.l<^
*.
150"
MAIIAI
K\IVAN<;IKA
DHARANI.
l-\.i..
6.
OIAIKM
.v..,/,
1*1.
ATK
III
vi
S-5
it
*
ft
*
y
fc
% &f y$
<5w
S 5
^^....
<
JC,v
* Jr.
5*
*
i.M
ivj
18"*. J
ft
i r
-1
*i
it$
*
Tu^
vr
*
ff
Pi.
UK
IV
>r
tfr
WW*
ic
IT*
r:
<
o*
&
4*
.<c
vv
fl
*
to
*^
^
v?
&
>
j-*
5>
^C
;i|*
&
*
ir-
T*
9W*
*"
|>
>
"S
P>*
.&
V *1*
M
/>I^
1
=**
w
?
?
rfc
/.
PLATE
T
W
1
^
|V
iv
fc
^
^
lr
^V
fe)
**
77
S
fe
?(?*
c^
*^^
5
*?tt^
^_
t
ttf
^
fcS
I
f^
JS^tfc
A&\$ A
f^-,
ft
r
h
P
pr
"PH*
-
wy
^
K
^% ^ir^r
*^
far
If
"
Hlt^ ,,
s
ifw
"!
^?.
^^pli
^WJT^-M %
HUL
i\PA
-*
PLATE VI
^..
*
rj;tfjft r.f
rp -iV-fti?
9*
"5
^i
*V
f^
at
t*:^
4
IT
>
ft
r
&
LI
-V
!b
Vfe
"
I.ATI:
VII
.fr
fc-
W*
4^
*
tS
I
fr<
*r
JT
*1*
?i
^ ^*
fc
i|:
Pl.A-IK
* *&*
VIII
9-
Jir
tw
wf
I*:
.
C-f
,*.
t?
fttf
*t
5?
^^
5tf
r
*"
^w
>
^^
*c,
>
^
*s
J?
<?
>
ft
fc
9
/
TV
&
>/
f;/.,}
!>
*
fc
P
*
fjsr
J -ff
^
:
v^
."
j LJ
?*
.?
J-
^
IL *i
4
Sr^
S ^?^. i ? T
^*5>^4Jt;-^?>i
^ i
A ^
^
3r v
^
tf>&
?r
*s* ti
*fc>i
-?^^
>
>
>
>
K)
?*
4D
K^rsr
^ r g
^ Ls ^ -^?i^
fr
j^
^t^bi*^^l
H^^
^
5
If!
!
.rf
,t -^
r :?
?>
-14-s
>-
>
4 f *f.
9
a
fI i *
;.
^f ;
K;
-Jt".-,
r r/4i
>-
!|
>*f
\fafy
^9 *7>teri.
V*ffa
ft?
&
jr^?
LATE
!5T
>/
f *9
Vn
>.
%VB?
,:r
jr
trf**
450
$ &
lie
tf
* ***
)#
^El
*^
t2?
:
Vrr,
<?
*T
Iff?
*r-*^
**,
^
V
r
<
PLATE XI
*
>
T*
v
*
!
V -^Y^
-%//,
- *#
li
1-1*
:
//
vX:H\
<
s ;
*X/
cb
c^
S
*
>
^>
*^
*.
^y
I
&Cl
Jf *
1H&
4w
f
f.
^
^w
(C
:f*
3r
vv>N
^T?^.
i& *.^
t.
<
UTK
XII
IF"
*,<
*.;*{
[*
f
.<h
11
"
r
J*r
fc
vtifi
-i*ii;
if
fl
to
IS
_4
w ^ to
HW tfw
w
"*
U^V
"
<^
**
*
J**^
r 5
ft
i^
SeS
*;
i*
PLATE XIII
fT
tsr
4i, &Vs
* ?r {? /T*r-, ^i/sr
%*t
JTfbr^
^?
fe
>
**
**
^fr
*Hr
2%^
l?lf
te
>r
/^ ?rc^K
^
^
^
o>
>7
)
;
f-%
i
f
i
.*
&
*1
|r,
-^
C*
<f
>
IP
>>
r
Pr
9?
<*.
**i
? t**r
fcr
6r
Pr
>***
^ft*
it
>
4
*
t f
*
*
Jr
j?
*att
r.
V>
#.-IJ f
8S
;
*n
<p
?r^> fr
t?S
1 ?1
to
t.
In?
6W
$*t
|%|
Ii
jif
4n
fe
A*
fr
f4>
Pr
^ & &**
^fr
4{f
Aj?
^ ^ ^^
*
fc
r
flr
^^^ ^
|rif
JL&
^
LL*t^
?^J
1"
to
-<
Hm
>
**
**
/:
fe
?t ^ ^|
^ i ^^
STaP^r c&
* m
e&LL Vfe
*
^T l
^
fr *
>
|1
r*
"
fftt^p.
^^
^^1
ctIt,"
-V4-T
l?
?.
FLATK XIV
rsu
**
si*
*H
*7
*L
?*
frjV
U
fc
J
>l
,i
j^
w
**
*-M
"*
i^t
*u
*ty
5
5
"
"
9
ifc
v* ,*k
"
-*k
"
-ijj^^T
tw
r;
<*
2r
?k
J>
i*
r L C b
IM.LT
K?i.
^
.L!
fc
to
i
Vi
^?v
5 ^*
TIT
<t
>
r
^k^r
*
?>
if
M?
^k
:-r$*
.! /
tA
"**""
>
?
I
hv
^?t.Vis
*o
"
4.
"?*>*
!**
!P
*r
{
lil
*.-&
:>
k
.
V?C
^
^
IHJ
?H
??f*.
??*.r
."*
.tr.>.
tH?ti
*
^
t
KtH
ni^^
^Y
f
J>
^^
jT^i
kr*
VrH*
6?^
ft
^^4
*
*-*is
H]^
Jt?lj
fl*?j
>
**
!l
k.
fc
"
^ ;.v
l%r
*} ?
^c>i
?t
irt
^;i7^
r*]
PLATE
XV
***
at Is
~
k
*>?
"
*.
*io
fr<
""
f^.
L*
-4
^
fj^""
"
w*
"
.<***<*
^^^
U?*
ll h
>
i^t
".
tt
kZ; r
K<k.Ar
i A.
r
<*
it *d
T
^k!^
^Tfc*
^kk>
Eih
t:^t
Ju
<V
27?1
^iHlL
.."
Trc;
To,
<r
""o*
<*<yH*
V*
:*
k*>
?t
:*/*$>
%
.*
|V|
>
/>
>
.}f
^ w
|Hj
**
i.
<M
kf
fW :?
*
>
,{,
"J
k
-
>
KH
f}*:
fc^^tf
^;5
C/3
*.
.1
v
f
h>
t k^
70
7j
**^
V*;
"
"
ii
It
H>
V
>
~
_>
"ooc
"So
"cO
u.
u,
u.-
li
U.
^
fr
>th^;^
"
<b
,?
i?r;
fei|
*^
r
|fK
L*^
?
t?
; f
i ?^
r
i
<S
SJ
* u
fr
<?
*#$
Ul*
:
**
"
v^it^
rl
?li
Q
V
!?
-j-
J* $
*
k
y
I
>
liil
{!*
M *
M
fr
"
>c
2\
;
*
*
-i
>
>
J?P
*
fr
j>
t
.
tr
1^1*2
4
*i
ft
^ ^*
>
*>
>
^
L
1
PLATE XVI
mi
**
*Ut
1
^*
* .
f
^V
r
r r
*<*!
m
m
r
* *
l
***
Slif
1
fc
-5
L,
t7i>
Uf
Sr-
*.
l*
+
<*
7.
*>
t*;
wy
1*
>
?lll
>
>.
Ka
*
V
r
i
V***
(,->
lf
il
PLATE XVII
b.
*jz ;-***?
04*
{>?
;>
^"^SKi**?^
2;:
>
*t*
>
i
*>
i
>
>.*
5
r
fi-
*^
Wi
w
*)
T!
-..,!
V^A^^^;^--J^Jv\.^^,_
PLATE XVIII
*L
* jr
V
<*
I
>
rtt
1
""J
H}^
t-ifrWrji
r
ft
* s ^
Vfi
te eJ
?w n ttt
i
* T ^
$il*
.?
*jj
fc
**
u
tffc
fe^-T
PLATE XIX
i.
2.
149].
149*.
i.
CA.TUHS.ATAKA STOTKA
KAYASCTJ IJVA,
KATIDKSANlYA,
\)l
Io8
oi..
lOy
s -ate
t
.V,.</(
&jl<
ettut ^
,//v///
about
I.ATK
XX
ft !
ft
rTPPVlV!-,
Ml fUlfii
11
if2h*u.hk*
ffllfl
"
"o
J*li5*
**? *
|fr
*
,
tT
"
"
O*
f
i
ff
f
*
fe&C^i
=
2
re *v ,K
SL%
.*
^
sll
PLATE XXI
,&
c
.
"
I*
w
.
.,
y*-
"
***,
.,
l
>^
"(
{
**.
S*
to
, ,
* *^
^
.^1
T.V
-c
>
^"
7<^
j}
Vf}^;
5
*
>
* .?
>.
^llf
"
"
-""
to
I
=
*
.
5515
t*
* 2
.*
PLATE XXII
8
C 5
SU
<
Pi
-,
2
?;
f^
y
*?
?.-.}
J
*
rV;
xxiii
xxii
xxi
x<
xix
xv^i.lxvii
xvi
xv
xiv-
xin
(/:<
j.so
.M
142,
1.3
DOCUMKNI
ClllNKsK-Knor.\NI.SK
10 x
"
"""-1
<
,|,
OllVKKSK.
CIIINKSK TKXT.
:
I
PART
12
f^
^ti-t
11
$>
5.
xPt
jfr
|X
-:
*"
7L>i
9:
M-^^
\KT
3L
1415
H6
19l6a
v.l
PLEASE
CARDS OR
DO NOT REMOVE
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
LIBRARY